Proportional Relief Valves—R Series 1

www.swagelok.com

Propor tional Relief Valve s

R SERIES
RELIEF
R Se r ie s
■ Liquid or gas service

■ Set pressures from 10 to 6000 psig (0.7 to 413 bar)

■ 1/4 and 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm end connections

 2 Check Valves and Relief Valves

Cap
provides easy external
Spring set pressure adjustment
adjusts to provide
desired set pressure Label
identifies set
pressure range

Lock nut
maintains cap position, Lock wire capability
ensuring set pressure adjustment secures cap to maintain
set pressure adjustment

Quad seal
eliminates leakage
around stem during
relief mode

O-ring
provides elastomer-to-metal End connections
seal for positive shutoff at seat. include gaugeable Swagelok® tube
(Other series use bonded fittings and NPT or ISO pipe threads
disc. See Materials of
Construction)
R3A series valve shown.
R SERIES
RELIEF

Features Applications
High-Pressure Valves R series relief valves are proportional relief valves that
open gradually as the pressure increases. Consequently,
■ Service up to 6000 psig (413 bar)
they do not have a capacity rating at a given pressure rise
■ Multiple springs for a selection of set pressure ranges (accumulation), and they are not certified to ASME or any
■ Valves available factory-set to a specified set pressure other codes.
■ 1/4 in. and 6 and 8 mm end connections—R3A series • Some system applications require relief valves to
■ 1/2 in. and 12 mm end connections—R4 series meet specific safety codes. The system designer and
user must determine when such codes apply and
Low-Pressure Valves whether these relief valves conform to them.
■ Service up to 300 psig (20.6 bar) • Swagelok proportional relief valves should never
■ One spring for the full set pressure range be used as ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code
■ Valves available factory-set to a specified set pressure safety relief devices.
■ 1/4 in. and 6 and 8 mm end connections—RL3 series • Swagelok proportional relief valves are not “Safety
■ 1/2 in. and 12 mm end connections—RL4 series Accessories” as defined in the Pressure Equipment
Directive 2014/68/EU.

Operation
R series relief valves OPEN when system pressure reaches
the set pressure and CLOSE when system pressure falls
below the set pressure.
■ High-pressure R3A and R4 series—select and install the
spring that covers the required set pressure; apply the
matching label to the cap.
■ Low-pressure RL3 and RL4 series—the spring is already
installed.
• For valves not actuated for a period of time, initial
relief pressure may be higher than the set pressure.
 Proportional Relief Valves—R Series 3

Technical Data
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Series R3A R4 RL3 and RL4
Inlet Working 6000 psig (413 bar);
6000 psig (413 bar) 300 psig (20.6 bar)
Pressure➀ up to 8000 psig (551 bar) during relief
Outlet Working 1500 psig (103 bar) 2500 psig (172 bar) 225 psig (15.5 bar)
Pressure➀
Set Pressure 50 to 6000 psig (3.4 to 413 bar) 50 to 1500 psig (3.4 to 103 bar) 10 to 225 psig (0.7 to 15.5 bar)
Fluoro- Ethylene Perfluoro- Fluoro- Ethylene Fluoro- Ethylene
carbon Neo- pro- carbon carbon Neo- pro- carbon Neo- pro-
Seal Material FKM Buna N prene pylene FFKM FKM Buna N prene pylene FKM Buna N prene pylene
Temperature, °F (°C) Maximum Set Pressure, psig (bar)
–40 (–40) —
— —
–30 (–34) —
—
–10 (–23) — —
— —
0 (–17)
10 (–12) — — —
25 (–4)
6000
6000 (413) 2500
30 (–1)
(413) (172)
6000
40 (4) (413) 6000
(413) 225
6000 225
50 (10) 225 (15.5)
(413) (15.5)
70 (20) 225 (15.5)
(15.5)
5580 5580 5580 5580 3000 1500
150 (65) (103) 1500 1500
(384) (384) (384) (384) (207)
(103) (103)
5160 5160 5160 5160 1500 1500
200 (93)
(355) (355) (355) (355) (103) (103)
4910 4910 4910 4910
250 (121)
(338) (338) (338) (338)

R SERIES
RELIEF
—
275 (135) 4660
— — — — —
300 (148) (321) —
➀ Outlet pressure should not exceed inlet pressure.

Set Pressure and Resealing Pressure Back Pressure

■ Set pressure is the upstream pressure at which the first High-Pressure Valves (R3A and R4 Series)
indication of flow occurs. Set pressure of each valve after
The effect of system back pressure is minimized by the
initial relief is repeatable within
design of these high-pressure valves.
■ ± 3.0 psig (0.20 bar) or ± 5 % (whichever is greater) of the
initial set pressure at 60 to 80°F (15 to 26°C) Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 and RL4 Series)
■ ± 6.0 psig (0.40 bar) or ± 20 % (whichever is greater) of System back pressure increases the set pressure of the
the initial set pressure below 60°F (15°C) and above 80°F valve. To compensate, multiply the back pressure by 0.8 and
(26°C). subtract the result from the desired set pressure. Use the
result to pre-set the valve while back pressure is equal to
■ Resealing pressure is the upstream pressure at which there
atmospheric pressure.
is no indication of flow. Resealing pressure is always lower
than set pressure. Example:
Desired set pressure is 120 psig. System back pressure is
Testing 40 psig.
Every R series proportional relief valve is tested for set and Step 1. M
 ultiply back pressure by 0.8.
resealing performance. 40 psig × 0.8 = 32 psig.
Step 2. Subtract result from desired set pressure.
Minimum Resealing 120 psig – 32 psig = 88 psig.
Test Set Pressure Pressure as a Percentage Step 3. Pre-set proportional relief valve to 88 psig.
Series psig (bar) of Set Pressure, %
10 to 20 (0.7 to 1.3) 50
RL3, RL4
175 to 225 (12.0 to 15.5) 91 Cleaning and Packaging
100 to 200 (6.8 to 13.7) 50 All Swagelok R series relief valves are cleaned and packaged in
R3A, R4 accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging
850 to 1000 (58.5 to 68.9) 84
(SC-10) (MS‑06‑62) .
 4 Check Valves and Relief Valves

Materials of Construction

RL3 and R3A RL4 and R4 Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification

1 Plug 302 SS/ASTM 240
1 1 2 Cap 316 SS/A479
2
2 3 Label Polyester
3 RL3, R3A—powdered metal 300 series SS/B783;
4 Lock nut
RL4, R4—316 SS/A276
3
4 5 Spring S17700 SS/AMS 5678
6 Sleeve 304 SS/A240
RL3 5 7 Spring RL3, R3A—powdered metal 300 series SS/B783;
only 4 support RL4, R4—316 SS/A276
8 Bonnet 316 SS/A479
6
9 O-ring Fluorocarbon FKM
7 5 10 Quad seal PTFE-coated fluorocarbon FKM
RL4 RL3, R3A—316 SS/A666;
8 only 11 Retainer
RL4, R4—316 SS/A479
12 Stem 316 SS/A479
6 12a Bonded stem Fluorocarbon FKM-bonded➀
9 7 13 Bonded disc 316 SS/A479
10 R3A 14 Seat 316 SS/A479
11 only
15 Gasket PTFE-coated 316 SS/A240

12 12 16 Seat retainer 316 SS/A479

8
17 O-ring Fluorocarbon FKM
18 Insert 316 SS/A479
13
16 19 Body 316 SS/A182
14
17 Lubricants
Molybdenum disulfide-based dry film
9 and paste; silicone-based
15 18
R SERIES
RELIEF

Wetted components listed in italics.

10
19 R4 ➀ Material Safety Data Sheet for bonding agents available on request.
11 only
12
12a

13
19

RL3 R3A RL4 R4

 Proportional Relief Valves—R Series 5

Flow Data at 70°F (20°C)

Air Water
RL3 and RL4 Series RL3 RL3 and RL4 Series RL3
Air Flow, std L/min RL4 Water Flow, L/min RL4

Set Pressure
225 psig (15.5 bar) Set Pressure
225 psig (15.5 bar)
Inlet Pressure, psig

Pressure Drop, bar

Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar
150 psig (10.3 bar) 150 psig (10.3 bar)

100 psig (6.8 bar) 100 psig (6.8 bar)

50 psig (3.4 bar) 50 psig (3.4 bar)

Air Flow, std ft3/min Water Flow, U.S. gal/min

R3A and R4 Series R3A R3A and R4 Series R3A

Air Flow, std L/min Water Flow, L/min

Set Pressure
5500 psig (378 bar) Set Pressure
Inlet Pressure, psig

5500 psig (378 bar)

Inlet Pressure, bar

Pressure Drop, bar

Pressure Drop, psi

4500 psig (310 bar)

4500 psig (310 bar)

R SERIES
3500 psig (241 bar)

RELIEF
Air Flow, std ft3/min

Water Flow, U.S. gal/min

R3A R3A
Air Flow, std L/min R4 Water Flow, L/min R4

Set Pressure
3500 psig (241 bar)
Inlet Pressure, psig

Inlet Pressure, bar

Pressure Drop, bar

Pressure Drop, psi

Set Pressure
2600 psig (179 bar)
2600 psig (179 bar)

2000 psig (137 bar)

2000 psig (137 bar)

1000 psig (68.9 bar)

1000 psig (68.9 bar)

Air Flow, std ft3/min

Water Flow, U.S. gal/min
R3A R3A
Air Flow, std L/min R4 Water Flow, L/min R4
Inlet Pressure, psig

Pressure Drop, bar

Pressure Drop, psi
Inlet Pressure, bar

Set Pressure
550 psig (37.8 bar) Set Pressure
550 psig (37.8 bar)

350 psig (24.1 bar)

350 psig (24.1 bar)

200 psig (13.7 bar)

200 psig (13.7 bar)

Air Flow, std ft3/min Water Flow, U.S. gal/min

 6 Check Valves and Relief Valves

Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 and RL4 Series)
are subject to change.
End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Ordering
Inlet/Outlet Size Number A B C D E H
RL3 series: 0.19 in. (4.8 mm) fully open orifice
1/4 in. SS-RL3S4
0.06 in.
Swagelok 1.44 1.60 4.14
(1.5 mm) 6 mm SS-RL3S6MM
lock wire tube fittings (36.6) (40.6) (105)
hole 8 mm SS-RL3S8MM
A Male NPT/
max 2.70 1.19 1.60 0.43 3.89 4.09
Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-RL3M4-S4
0.09 in. (68.6) (30.2) (40.6) (10.9) (98.8) (104)
tube fitting
(2.2 mm)
E
lock wire max Male NPT/ 1.19 1.17 3.89
hole 1/4 in. SS-RL3M4-F4
female NPT (30.2) (29.7) (98.8)
Male ISO/ 1.19 1.17 3.89
1/4 in. SS-RL3M4F4-RT
female ISO➀ (30.2) (29.7) (98.8)
RL4 series: 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) fully open orifice
Swagelok 1/2 in. SS-RL4S8 5.92
1.83 (46.5)
Outlet tube fittings 12 mm SS-RL4S12MM (150)
B
Male NPT/ 4.09 0.50 5.37
Inlet 1.43 1.83 5.52
Swagelok 1/2 in. SS-RL4M8S8 (104) (12.7) (136)
(36.3) (46.5) (140)
tube fitting
D C Male NPT/ 1.43 1.43 5.52
1/2 in. SS-RL4M8F8
female NPT (36.3) (36.3) (140)

High-Pressure Valves (R3A and R4 Series)

End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Ordering
Inlet/Outlet Size Number A B C D E H
R SERIES
RELIEF

R3A series: 0.14 in. (3.6 mm) fully open orifice

H
max 1/4 in. SS-4R3A
0.06 in. Swagelok 1.44 1.60 4.14
6 mm SS-6R3A-MM
(1.5 mm) tube fittings (36.6) (40.6) (105)
lock wire 8 mm SS-8R3A-MM
hole
Male NPT/
2.70 1.19 1.60 0.43 3.89 4.09
Swagelok 1/4 in. SS-4R3A1
(68.6) (30.2) (40.6) (10.9) (98.8) (104)
tube fitting
0.09 in.
(2.2 mm) Male NPT/ 1.19 1.17 3.89
1/4 in. SS-4R3A5
lock wire female NPT (30.2) (29.7) (98.8)
hole
Male ISO/ 1.19 1.17 3.89
1/4 in. SS-4R3A5-RT
female ISO➀ (30.2) (29.7) (98.8)
R4 series: 0.25 in. (6.4 mm) fully open orifice
Swagelok 1/2 in. SS-R4S8 5.92
1.83 (46.5)
tube fittings 12 mm SS-R4S12MM (150)
Outlet Male NPT/ 4.09 1.43 1.83 0.50 5.52 5.37
Swagelok 1/2 in. SS-R4M8S8 (104) (12.7) (136)
Inlet (36.3) (46.5) (140)
tube fitting
Male NPT/ 1.43 1.43 5.52
1/2 in. SS-R4M8F8
Valve with Manual female NPT (36.3) (36.3) (140)
Override Handle Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.
➀ See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, and JIS B0203.
 Proportional Relief Valves—R Series 7

Ordering Information Options and Accessories

Low-Pressure Valves (RL3 and RL4 Series) Seal Materials
Valve contains spring; set pressure must be adjusted. Select Fluorocarbon FKM is the
Designator
a valve ordering number. standard seal material.
Buna N, ethylene Seal Material Valves Seal Kits
Factory-Set Valves propylene, and neoprene Buna N -BU BN➀
RL3 and RL4 series valves are available with springs factory-set and perfluorocarbon Ethylene
-EP EP
to a specified set pressure. Valves are set, tested, locked, and FFKM are available. propylene
tagged with the set pressure; certificates of test are included. Quad seal elastomers Neoprene -NE NE
To order, add -SET to the valve ordering number and specify are PTFE-coated. Perfluorocarbon
-KZ KZ
To order a valve with an FFKM➁
the desired set pressure.
optional seal material, Fluorocarbon
Example: SS-RL3S4-SET — VI
FKM
add a valve seal material
➀ Use BU for R3A series seal kits.
Replacement Spring Kits designator to the valve
➁ Only available for R3A series.
ordering number.
Spring kits include spring and installation instructions. Select
a spring kit ordering number. Examples: SS-4R3A-BU
SS-RL3S4-BU
Spring Kit Set Pressure Range To order a replacement seal kit, insert a seal kit material
Series Ordering Number psig (bar) designator as a prefix (R3A series) or suffix (all others) to the
RL3 177-13K-RL3 seal kit basic ordering number.
10 to 225 (0.7 to 15.5)
RL4 177-13K-RL4 Examples: B
 U-R3A-K2
SS-3K-RL3-BN
High-Pressure Valves (R3A and R4 Series)
RL3 Series R3A Series RL4 Series R4 Series
Valve does not contain spring. Select a valve ordering number
and a spring kit ordering number. Seal kit basic ordering number
SS-3K-RL3- -R3A-K2 SS-3K-RL4- SS-3K-R4-
Spring Kits
Seal kit contents
Spring kits include spring, label, 302 SS lock wire with seal, O-ring, O-ring,
spring support, and installation instructions. O-rings (2), O-ring,
quad seal, quad seal,
quad seal, quad seal,

R SERIES
RELIEF
Select a spring kit basic ordering number and add the spring bonded disc, bonded disc,
retainer, bonded stem,
retainer, retainer,
designator for the desired set pressure range. instructions
instructions
instructions
instructions
Examples: 1
 77-R3A-K1-F
177-13K-R4-C
Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)
Set Pressure Range Spring Spring To order R series relief valves processed in accordance
psig (bar) Designator Color with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)
R3A series spring kit: basic ordering number 177-R3A-K1- (MS‑06‑63) to ensure compliance with product cleanliness
requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C, add -SC11 to the
50 to 350 (3.4 to 24.1) A Blue
valve ordering number.
350 to 750 (24.1 to 51.7) B Yellow
Example: SS-RL3S4-SC11
750 to 1500 (51.7 to 103) C Purple
1500 to 2250 (103 to 155) D Orange
2250 to 3000 (155 to 206) E Brown
Oxygen Service Hazards
For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-
3000 to 4000 (206 to 275) F White
enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety
4000 to 5000 (275 to 344) G Red
technical report (MS‑06‑13).
5000 to 6000 (344 to 413) H Green
R4 series spring kit: basic ordering number 177-13K-R4-
50 to 350 (3.4 to 24.1) A Blue
350 to 750 (24.1 to 51.7) B Yellow
750 to 1500 (51.7 to 103) C Purple

Factory-Set Valves
R3A and R4 series valves are available with springs factory-set
to a specified set pressure. Valves are set, tested, locked, and
tagged with the set pressure; certificates of test are included.
To order, add -SET and a spring designator whose range
includes the desired set pressure to the valve ordering
number; specify the desired set pressure.
Example: SS-4R3A-SETB
 8 Check Valves and Relief Valves

Options and Accessories Proportional Safety

Manual Override Relief Valves
Handles Swagelok PRV series proportional
Phenolic safety relief valves are certified
A manual override handle
handle to PED 2014/68/EU. For more
opens the valve without
information, see the Swagelok
changing the set pressure. 316 SS
Proportional Safety Relief Valves
For use with: pull rod
catalog, MS-02-432.
■ RL3 and RL4 series—
standard spring
■ R3A series—A, B, and C
springs only 316 SS spring
■ R4 series—A spring only. support
Handle diameter is 1.50 in.
(38.1 mm). Maximum overall
height of valve with handle
in closed position:
■ 5.16 in. (131 mm) for R3A
and RL3 series
■ 6.78 in. (172 mm) for R4
and RL4 series.
To order, add -MO to the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-RL3S4-MO
Manual Override
Handle Kits Manual Override Kit
Series Ordering Number
Kits contain handle, pull
rod, spring support, and RL3, R3A SS-R3A-K5
instructions. To order, select RL4, R4 SS-R4-K5
R SERIES
RELIEF

the desired kit ordering

number.

Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers.
MS-01-141, RevR, October 2017
 About this document
Thank you for downloading this electronic catalog, which is part of General Product
catalog Swagelok published in print. This type of electronic catalog is updated as new
information arises or revisions, which may be more current than the printed version.
Swagelok Company is a major developer and provider of fluid system solutions,
including products, integration solutions and services for industry research,
instrumentation, pharmaceutical, oil and gas, power, petrochemical, alternative fuels,
and semiconductor. Our manufacturing facilities, research, service and distribution
facilities support a global network of more than 200 authorized sales and service
centers in 57 countries.
Visit www.swagelok.com to locate your Swagelok representative and obtain any
information on features, technical information and product references, or to learn about
the variety of services available only through authorized sales centers and service
Swagelok.

Safe Product Selection

Warranty Information
When selecting a product, the total system design must be Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited
considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Function, Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit your Swagelok Web site or
material compatibility, adequate ratings, proper installation, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
operation, and maintenance are the responsibilities of the system
designer and user.

Swagelok, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Colleting, IGC, Kenmac,

Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO, VCR, Ultra-
Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co. Ltd.
AL-6XN—TM Allegheny Ludlum Corporation
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
Kalrez, Krytox—TM DuPont
Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
MAC—TM MAC Valves Inc.
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
Nitronic—TM AK Steel Corporation
picofast—TM HansTurck KG
Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Rapid Tap—TM Relton Corporation
15-7 PH, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
Sandvik—TM SandvikAB
Silconert—TM Silcotek Corporation
Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
© 2017 Swagelok Company
 Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves—O, 1, 18, 20, and 26 Series 1
www.swagelok.com

Inte gral-Bonnet
Ne edle Valve s

20 / 26 SERIES
O / 1 / 18 /
NEEDLE

O, 1, 18, 20, a nd 26 Se r ie s
■ Live-loaded packing system

■ Compact design

■ Working pressures up to 6000 psig (413 bar)

■ Temperatures up to 600°F (315°C)

 2 Needle and Metering Valves

Features
Stem Designs Live-Loaded Packing System
■ Vee—all series Low Emissions certification per API 624 available
■ Soft-seat—all series
Packing nut
■ Regulating—O, 1, and 18 series enables easy
Orifice Sizes external 2-piece chevron packing
■ From 0.080 to 0.375 in.
adjustments with disc springs
(2.0 to 9.5 mm) ■ improves seal
■ reduces friction wear
Flow Coefficients (Cv) ■ compensates for wear
■ From 0.09 to 1.80 Fully supported ■ reduces operating
packing torque
Flow Patterns
reduces need
■ Straight, angle, and cross patterns for adjustment
Panel Mounting
■ O, 1, and 18 series

O, 1, and 18 Series 20K Series 20V and 26 Series

Round handle Knob Bar handle

shown; bar handle shown; round
handle available handle available

Vee stem
Vee stem shown; shown; soft-
regulating stem and seat stem
soft-seat stem with with PCTFE
PCTFE tip available tip available

Soft-seat
stem with
PCTFE tip
20 / 26 SERIES
O / 1 / 18 /

NEEDLE

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are limited to:
■ 200°F (93°C) max with soft-seat stem with PCTFE stem tip.
■ 250°F (121°C) max with UHMWPE packing.
■ 450°F (232°C) max with PFA packing.
■ 600°F (315°C) max with PEEK packing.
To order a valve with soft-seat stem and PCTFE stem tip, see Ordering Information and Dimensions, page 4 and 6.
To order a valve with UHMWPE or PEEK packing, see Options and Accessories, page 7.

O, 1, and 18 Series 20 and 26 Series

ASME Class 2080 N/A 1500 ASME Class 2500
Material Group 2.2 N/A 3.4 Material Group 2.2
Material Name 316 SS Brass Steel Alloy 400 Material Name 316 SS
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) Temperature Working Pressure
–65 (–53) to –20 (–28) 5000 (344) 3000 (206) — 3000
(206)
°F (°C) psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 5000 (344) 3000 (206) 3000 (206) 3000
(206) –65 (–53) to 100 (37) 6000 (413)
200 (93) 4295 (295) 2350 (161) 2730 (188) 2640
(181) 200 (93) 5160 (355)
250 (121) 4085 (281) 2200 (151) 2695 (185) 2555
(176) 250 (121) 4910 (338)
300 (148) 3875 (266) 2050 (141) 2660 (183) 2470
(170) 300 (148) 4660 (321)
350 (176) 3715 (255) 1470 (101) 2615 (180) 2430
(167)
350 (176) 4470 (307)
400 (204) 3560 (245) 390 (26) — 2390
(164) 400
(204) 4280
(294)
450 (232) 3435 (236) — — 2380
(163) 450
(232) 4130
(284)
500 (260) 3310 (228) — — 2375
(163) 500
(260) 3980
(274)
600 (315) 3130 (215) — — — 600
(315) 3760
(259)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107.
 Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves—O, 1, 18, 20, and 26 Series 3

Materials of Construction
Valve Body Materials
1a Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Component Series 316 SS Brass Steel Alloy 400
1a Bar handle Anodized aluminum 2024/B221 or A209
1b Handle pin 18 Steel/A108
Set screw Nickel cadmium-plated steel
1b Round handle O Phenolic with brass insert
Set screw and 1 Nickel cadmium-plated steel
Anodized aluminum
1c Knob handle
1c 7129/B221
20K —
Nickel cadmium-
Set screw
plated steel
1d Bar handle 316 SS/A276
1d 20V
Handle pin, —
and 26 S17400/A564
set screw
Brass 360/ 12L14/ Alloy 400/
2 Packing nut All 316 SS/A276
B16 A108 B164
2
O, 1,➀
3 Gland 304 SS/A240, A167
9a 9b 9c and 20
3 4 Packing springs All➁ S17700/A693

4 5 Packing gland All 316 SS/A240, A276, B783

6 Upper packing
5 All PFA/D3307
7 Lower packing
6 Alloy 400/
8 Lower gland All 316 SS/A240
7 B127
8 9a Regulating stem
O, 1,
and 18 Chrome-plated➂ Alloy 400/
316 SS/A276
9b Vee stem All 316 SS/A276 B164
10 9c Soft-seat stem
All
Stem tip PCTFE/D1430
11a O, 1, Brass 360/
10 Panel nut 316 SS 316 SS
and 18 B16

20 / 26 SERIES
O / 1 / 18 /
Cadmium-

NEEDLE
O, 1, Brass 377/ plated Alloy 400/
11a Body 316 SS/A182
and 18 B283 11L17/ B564
A108
20 and
11b Body 316 SS/A479 —
11b 26
Lubricant All Tungsten disulfide- and fluorocarbon-based
Wetted components listed in italics.
Valve series listed with standard handles. For handle options, see Handles, page 8.
➀ 1 series valves with orifice of 0.172 in. (4.4 mm).
➁ O, 20 and 1 series with orifice of 0.172 (4.4 mm)—2 springs;
18, 26, and 1 series with orifice of 0.250 (6.4 mm)—3 springs.
➂ Regulating and vee stem tip and threads; soft-seat stem threads.

Testing Low Fugitive Emissions

Every integral-bonnet needle valve is factory tested with The American Petroleum Institute’s API 624 tests for fugitive
nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum emissions to atmosphere for rising stem valves. The tests are
allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is conducted at a third party lab and certify that at no point in
performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a the test did the valve leak in excess of 100 ppm of methane.
liquid leak detector. Certificates stating that the valve is certified for Low Emissions
service are available for valves with PFA and PEEK packing.
Cleaning and Packaging For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok sales
All integral-bonnet needle valves are cleaned and packaged and service representative.
in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
Packaging (SC-10) catalog, MS-06-62. Cleaning and
packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning
and Packaging (SC-11) catalog, MS-06-63, to ensure
compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in
ASTM G93 Level C are available as an option.
 4 Needle and Metering Valves

Flow Data at 100°F (37°C) Ordering Information and Dimensions

Flow Coefficient at Turns Open O, 1, and 18 Series
O and 1 Series Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and
are subject to change.
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem Regulating Stem
F
Straight
Orifice Orifice pattern
0.250 in. 0.250 in.
Flow Coefficient (Cv)

(6.4 mm) Panel

(6.4 mm)
mount
H thickness
0.172 in. open 1/8 to 1/4
(4.4 mm) (3.2 to 6.4)
0.172 in. G
(4.4 mm) panel
hole

D
0.080 in. 0.080 in.
(2.0 mm) (2.0 mm)
E

B1
A
Number of Turns Open
D
B2 H
18 Series Angle open
pattern
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem Regulating Stem G
panel
B1 hole
C
Orifice
0.375 in.
Flow Coefficient (Cv)

(9.5 mm) F
E

Panel
Orifice mount
0.375 in. thickness
(9.5 mm) 1/8 to 1/4
(3.2 to 6.4)

Stainless Steel Valves with Regulating Stems

Select an ordering number.
20 / 26 SERIES

Alloy 400, Brass, and Steel

O / 1 / 18 /

NEEDLE

Number of Turns Open Material Designator

Valves with Regulating Stems
Alloy 400 M
Replace SS in the ordering number
20 and 26 Series Brass B
with a material designator.
Steel S
Vee and Soft-Seat Stem Vee Stem Example: M-ORS2
Soft-Seat Stem
Vee and Soft-Seat Stems
Replace R in the ordering number with V for a vee stem or K
for a soft-seat stem with PCTFE stem tip.
Flow Coefficient (Cv)

Orifice
0.250 in. Examples: SS-OVS2
(6.4 mm) SS-OKS2

Orifice Angle-Pattern Valves

0.125 in.
(3.2 mm) Add -A to the ordering number.
Example: SS-ORS2-A
0.080 in.
(2.0 mm)
Cross-Pattern Valves
Certain 1 series valves are available with
Number of Turns Open cross-pattern bodies, which provide
continuous flow between the side ports and
on-off or regulating flow through the bottom
port. Shown at right: SS-1RS4-X
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales
and service representative for more
information and additional ordering
numbers.
 Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves—O, 1, 18, 20, and 26 Series 5

Ordering Information and Dimensions

End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Orifice Ordering
Inlet/Outlet Size Cv in. (mm) Number A B1 B2 C D E F G H
0.080 1.94 1.29 0.31 1.00 0.47 2.28
1/8 in. 0.09 SS-ORS2 0.98
(24.9)
(2.0) (49.3) (32.8) 0.44 (7.9) (25.4) (11.9) (57.9)
0.172 2.27 1.51 (11.2) 0.38 1.38 0.53 2.50
1/4 in. 0.37 SS-1RS4 1.13
(28.7)
(4.4) (57.6) (38.4) (9.7) (35.1) (13.5) (63.5)
Fractional 2.58 1.79
Swagelok 3/8 in. SS-1RS6 1.29
(32.8)
0.250 (65.5) (45.5) 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
tube fittings 0.73
(6.4) 2.80 1.90 (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
1/2 in. SS-1RS8 1.40
(35.6)
(71.1) (48.3)
1/2 in. 0.375 SS-18RS8 3.80 2.65 3.00 1.03 3.91
1.80 1.90
(48.3) 0.75
(19.1)
3/4 in. (9.5) SS-18RS12 (96.5) (67.3) (76.2) (26.2) (99.3)

0.080 1.94 1.29 0.31 1.00 0.48 2.28

3 mm 0.09 SS-ORS3MM 0.98
(24.9)
(2.0) (49.3) (32.8) (7.9) (25.4) (12.2) (57.9)
2.27 1.51 0.44
6 mm SS-1RS6MM 1.13
(28.7)
0.172 (57.6) (38.4) (11.2) 0.38 1.38 0.53 2.50
0.37
(4.4) 2.34 1.54 (9.7) (35.1) (13.5) (63.5)
8 mm SS-1RS8MM 1.17
(29.7)
Metric (59.4) (39.1)
Swagelok 2.60 1.80
tube fittings 10 mm SS-1RS10MM 1.30
(33.0)
0.250 (66.0) (45.7) 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
0.73
(6.4) 2.80 1.90 (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
12 mm SS-1RS12MM 1.40
(35.6)
(71.1) (48.3)
12 mm 0.375 SS-18RS12MM 3.80 2.65 3.00 1.03 3.91
1.80 1.90
(48.3) 0.75
(19.1)
18 mm (9.5) SS-18RS18MM (96.5) (67.3) (76.2) (26.2) (99.3)

0.080 1.88 1.25 0.31 1.00 0.47 2.28

1/8 in. 0.09 SS-ORF2 0.94
(23.9)
(2.0) (47.8) (31.8) 0.44 (7.9) (25.4) (11.9) (57.9)
0.172 1.62 1.19 (11.2) 0.38 1.38 0.53 2.50
1/8 in. 0.37 SS-1RF2 0.81
(20.6)
(4.4) (41.1) (30.2) (9.7) (35.1) (13.5) (63.5)
Female
NPT 0.250 2.12 1.56 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
1/4 in. 0.73 SS-1RF4 1.06
(26.9)
(6.4) (53.8) (39.6) (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
3/8 in. 0.375 SS-18RF6 3.00 2.25 3.00 1.03 3.88
1.80 1.50
(38.1) 0.75
(19.1)
1/2 in. (9.5) SS-18RF8 (76.2) (57.2) (76.2) (26.2) (98.6)

0.080 1.50 1.06 0.31 1.00 0.47 2.28

1/8 in. 0.09 SS-ORM2 0.75
(19.1)
(2.0) (38.1) (26.9) (7.9) (25.4) (11.9) (57.9)

20 / 26 SERIES
O / 1 / 18 /
NEEDLE
1.62 1.19 0.44
1/8 in. SS-1RM2 0.81
(20.6)
0.172 (41.1) (30.2) (11.2) 0.38 1.38 0.53 2.50
0.37
Male (4.4) 1.97 1.36 (9.7) (35.1) (13.5) (63.5)
1/4 in. SS-1RM4 0.98 (24.9)
NPT (50.0) (34.5)
0.250 2.25 1.62 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
3/8 in. 0.73 SS-1RM6 1.12
(28.4)
(6.4) (62.5) (41.1) (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
0.375 3.00 2.25 3.00 1.03 3.88
1/2 in. 1.80 SS-18RM8 1.50
(38.1) 0.75
(19.1)
(9.5) (76.2) (57.2) (76.2) (26.2) (98.6)
0.080 1.73 0.98 0.75 1.29 0.31 1.00 0.47 2.28
1/8 in. 0.09 SS-ORM2-S2
(2.0) (43.9) (24.9) (19.1) (32.8) 0.44 (7.9) (25.4) (11.9) (57.9)
0.172 1.95 1.13 0.98 1.51 (11.2) 0.38 1.38 0.53 2.50
1/4 in. 0.37 SS-1RM4-S4
(4.4) (49.5) (28.7) (24.9) (38.4) (9.7) (35.1) (13.5) (63.5)
Male NPT/
Swagelok 1/4/
SS-1RM4-S6 2.42 1.29 1.79
tube fitting 3/8 in.
0.250 (61.5) (32.8) 1.12 (45.5) 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
3/8 in. 0.73 SS-1RM6-S6
(6.4) (28.4) (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
3/8/ 2.52 1.40 1.90
SS-1RM6-S8
1/2 in. (64.0) (35.6) (48.3)
0.250 2.19 1.06 1.12 1.56 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
1/4 in. 0.73 SS-1RM4-F4
Male/ (6.4) (55.6) (26.9) (28.4) (39.6) (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
female NPT 0.375 3.00 2.25 3.00 1.03 3.88
1/2 in. 1.80 SS-18RM8-F8 1.50
(38.1) 0.75
(19.1)
(9.5) (76.2) (57.2) (76.2) (26.2) (98.6)
0.250 2.12 1.56 0.55 0.50 1.88 0.78 2.97
1/4 in. 0.73 SS-1RF4RT 1.06
(26.9)
(6.4) (53.8) (39.6) (14.0) (12.7) (47.8) (19.8) (75.4)
Female
ISO➀ 3/8 in. 0.375 SS-18RF6RT 3.00 2.25 3.00 1.03 3.88
1.80 1.50
(38.1) 0.75
(19.1)
1/2 in. (9.5) SS-18RF8RT (76.2) (57.2) (76.2) (26.2) (98.6)

Dimensions determined using valves with regulating stems and standard handles. Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight.
➀ See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
 6 Needle and Metering Valves

Ordering Information and Dimensions

20 and 26 Series Straight pattern Angle pattern
Dimensions are for reference only and F F
are subject to change.
Select an ordering number.
For soft-seat stems and PCTFE
H H
stem‑tips in valves that are standard open open
with vee stems, replace V with K.
Example: SS-20KS4

Angle-Pattern Valves E
Angle-pattern bodies are available for
B1 B3
valves with C dimensions listed. To
A
order, add -A to the ordering number.
Example: SS-20KM4-F4-A
B2
C

End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)

Orifice Ordering
Inlet/Outlet Size Cv in. (mm) Number A B1 B2 B3 C E F H
20 series with soft-seat stem and PCTFE stem tip
Female 1.88 0.94
1/4 in. SS-20KF4
NPT (47.8) (23.9)
— — —
Male 0.080 1.94 0.97 0.42 1.12 1.66
1/4 in. 0.09 SS-20KM4
NPT (2.0) (49.3) (24.6) (10.7) (28.4) (42.2)
Male/ 1.91 0.94 1.00 1.03 1.44
1/4 in. SS-20KM4-F4
female NPT (48.5) (23.9) (25.4) (26.2) (36.6)
20 and 26 series with vee stem
0.125 2.46 1.23 1.13 1.16 1.57 0.42 1.75 1.66
1/4 in. 0.21 SS-20VS4
(3.2) (62.5) (31.2) (28.7) (29.5) (39.9) (10.7) (44.4) (42.2)
Swagelok 3.08 1.54
3/8 in. SS-26VS6
tube fittings 0.250 (78.2) (39.1) 0.66 2.50 2.31
0.73 — — —
(6.4) 3.30 1.65 (16.8) (63.5) (58.7)
1/2 in. SS-26VS8
20 / 26 SERIES

(83.8) (41.9)
O / 1 / 18 /

NEEDLE

0.125 1.88 0.94 1.44 0.42 1.75 1.66

1/4 in. 0.21 SS-20VF4 1.00 (25.4)
(3.2) (47.8) (23.9) (36.6) (10.7) (44.4) (42.2)
Female
3/8 in. SS-26VF6 — — —
NPT 0.250 2.50 1.25 0.66 2.50 2.31
0.73 2.06
1/2 in. (6.4) SS-26VF8 (63.5) (31.8) 1.41 (35.8) (16.8) (63.5) (58.7)
(52.3)
Male 1.94 0.97 0.42
1/4 in. SS-20VM4 — — —
NPT (49.3) (24.6) (10.7)
1.75
Male NPT/ (44.4)
0.125 1.13 1.00 1.57 1.66
Swagelok 1/4 in. 0.21 SS-20VM4-S4 — — —
(3.2) (28.7) (25.4) (39.9) (42.2)
tube fittings
1.91 0.94 1.00 1.03 1.44 0.42 1.75
1/4 in. SS-20VM4-F4
(48.5) (23.9) (25.4) (26.2) (36.6) (10.7) (44.4)
2.50 1.25 1.41 1.22
3/8 in. SS-26VM6-F6
Male/ (63.5) (31.8) (35.8) (31.0) 2.06
female NPT 0.250 2.55 1.25 (52.3) 0.66 2.50 2.31
1/2 in. 0.73 SS-26VM8-F8 1.41 (35.8)
(6.4) (64.8) (31.8) (16.8) (63.5) (58.7)
3/4 to 2.50 1.25
SS-26VM12-F8 — — —
1/2 in. (63.5) (31.8)
0.125 1.88 0.94 0.42 1.75 1.66
1/4 in. 0.21 SS-20VF4RT — — —
Female (3.2) (47.8) (23.9) (10.7) (44.4) (42.2)
ISO➀ 0.250 2.50 1.25 0.66 2.50 2.31
1/2 in. 0.73 SS-26VF8RT — — —
(6.4) (63.5) (31.8) (16.8) (63.5) (58.7)
Dimensions are shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight.
➀ See specifications ISO 7/1, BS EN 10226-1, DIN-2999, JIS B0203.
 Integral-Bonnet Needle Valves—O, 1, 18, 20, and 26 Series 7

Options and Accessories

Stem Packing Materials Stem Packing Material, Kit Ordering Number
Valve Orifice
Two-piece chevron-style PFA packing is standard. For an Series in. (mm) PFA UHMWPE PEEK
optional stem packing, add -P for UHMWPE or -PK for PEEK
O All PFA-91K-O PE-91K-O PK-91K-O
to the ordering number. See Pressure-Temperature Ratings,
page 2, for ratings of valves with optional stem packings. 0.172 (4.4) PFA-91K-14 PE-91K-14 PK-91K-14
1
See the table at right for lubricants used with optional stem 0.250 (6.4) PFA-91K-16 PE-91K-16 PK-91K-16
packing materials. 18 All PFA-91K-18 PE-91K-18 PK-91K-18
Examples: SS-ORS2-P 20 All PFA-91K-20 PE-91K-20 PK-91K-20
SS-20KF4-PK 26 All PFA-91K-16 PE-91K-16 PK-91K-16
Molybdenum
Stem Packing Kits Tungsten Molybdenum disulfide,
PFA, UHMWPE, and PEEK packing kits are available. Kits disulfide and disulfide and tungsten
Lubricant
contain stem packings, springs, lubricant, and instructions. fluorocarbon hydrocarbon disulfide, and
based based fluorocarbon
based

O-Ring Stem Seals

O-Ring Temperature Rating O-Ring Kit Kit Basic
Gland Material °F (°C) Designator Designator Ordering Number
Buna C –65 to 250 (–53 to 121) -BC BC70 -9K-O
(O and 20 series)
Backup Buna N -B BN70
-9K-14
ring Ethylene –20 to 250 (–28 to 121) (1 series,
-E EP70
propylene 0.172 in. orifice)
Fluorocarbon -9K-16
O-ring –20 to 450 (–28 to 232) -V VA70 (1 series,
FKM
0.250 in. orifice)
Kalrez® 10 to 350 (–12 to 176) -KZ KZ00
-9K-18
Silicone –20 to 250 (–28 to 121) -SI SI70 (18 series)
O-ring stem seals include:
■ 316 SS/ASTM A276 gland for
316 SS, steel, and alloy 400 valves, Valves with O-Ring Stem Seals O-Ring Maintenance Kits
or brass 360 gland for brass valves Add an O-ring designator to the Maintenance kits contain O-ring,

20 / 26 SERIES
O / 1 / 18 /
ordering number. backup ring, lubricant, and instructions.

NEEDLE
■ PTFE/ASTM D1710 backup ring
and silicone-based lubricant for all Examples: SS-ORS2-BC To order, add a kit designator to a kit
O-rings except ethylene propylene, SS-20KF4-B basic ordering number.
which requires a polyethylene/ASTM Example: BC70-9K-O
D4020 backup ring, and molybdenum
disulfide with hydrocarbon-based
lubricant
■ O-ring.
 8 Needle and Metering Valves

Options and Accessories

Handles
■ O and 1 series valves—black phenolic round handles are ■ 20K series valves—anodized black aluminum knob handles
standard; colored phenolic, 316 SS bar, and anodized black are standard; phenolic round, 316 SS bar, and anodized
aluminum bar handles are optional. black aluminum bar handles are optional.
■ 18 series valves—anodized black aluminum bar handles ■ 20V and 26 series valves—316 SS bar handles are standard;
are standard; phenolic round and 316 SS bar handles are phenolic round and anodized black aluminum bar handles
optional. are optional.

Valves with Optional Handles Handle Kits

Add a handle designator to the ordering number. Handle kits contain handle and instructions. Select a handle kit
ordering number.
Designator Designator
(O and 1 (18, 20, and Kit Color
For colored phenolic handles, replace BK in the ordering
Handle Series) 26 Series) Designator number with a kit color designator.
Black phenolic -BK -BKP -BK
Handle Kit Ordering Numbers
Blue phenolic -BL -BLP -BL
Valve Orifice Black Black 316 SS
Green phenolic -GR -GRP -GR Series in. (mm) Phenolic Aluminum Bar Bar
Orange phenolic -OG -OGP -OG O All PH-5K-OK-BK
A-5K-14B-BK SS-5K-14B
Red phenolic -RD -RDP -RD 0.172 (4.4) PH-5K-14K-BK
1
Yellow phenolic -YW -YWP -YW 0.250 (6.4) PH-5K-4K-BK A-5K-6NB-BK SS-5K-6NB
316 SS bar -SH -SH — 18 All PH-5K-7K-BK A-5K-18B-BK SS-5K-7B
Anodized black 20 All PH-5K-14K-BK A-5K-14B-BK SS-5K-14B
-BKB -BKB —
aluminum bar
26 All PH-5K-4K-BK A-5K-6NB-BK SS-5K-6NB
Examples:
SS-ORS2-BL Example: PH-5K-OK-BL
SS-20KF4-SH To order an anodized black aluminum knob handle kit for the
20K series valve, use ordering number A-5K-20K-BK.
Sour Gas Service
Integral-bonnet needle valves with female NPT, female ISO, Oxygen Service Hazards
and male NPT end connections are available for sour gas
For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-
service. Stem and lower gland are alloy 400. Materials are
enriched systems, refer to Oxygen System Safety technical
selected in accordance with NACE MR0175/ISO 15156. See
20 / 26 SERIES

report, MS-06-13.
O / 1 / 18 /

NEEDLE

the NACE specification for information on stainless steel tube

fitting requirements.
To order, add -SG to the ordering number.
Example: SS-ORF2-SG • A packing adjustment may be required periodically
to increase service life and to prevent leakage.
Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)
• Valves that have not been cycled for a period of time
To order integral-bonnet needle valves cleaned and
may have a higher initial actuation torque.
packaged in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and
Packaging (SC-11) catalog, MS-06-63, to ensure compliance • To increase service life, ensure proper valve
with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 performance, and prevent leakage, apply only as
Level C, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. much torque as is required to achieve positive
Example: SS-ORS2-SC11 shutoff.

Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers.
MS-01-164, RevN, November 2019
 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.

Swagelok, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting, IGC, Kenmac,

Warranty Information Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO, VCR, Ultra-Torr,
Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
your authorized Swagelok representative. AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
Safe Product Selection FM —TM FM Global
Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
When selecting a product, the total system design must Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, NACE—TM NACE International
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
responsibilities of the system designer and user. Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
other manufacturers. © 2019 Swagelok Company
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 1
www.swagelok.com

Ball Valve s
G e ne ral Pur pose
a nd Spe cial A pplic ation

60 SERIES
BALL
6 0 Se r ie s
■ 1/8 to 2 in. and 6 to 25 mm sizes

■ Stainless steel, carbon steel, brass, and special alloy materials

■ On-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) valves

■ Compensating seat design

■ Live-loaded, two-piece stem packing

 Features
Contents
■ Quarter-turn actuation
Important Information About ■ Stainless steel, carbon steel, brass, and special alloys
Swagelok Process Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
■ Wide selection of seat materials
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 ■ Variety of end connections in 1/8 to 2 in. and 6 to 25 mm sizes
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 ■ Pneumatic and electric actuators

Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 ■ Optional vent porting

■ Low Emissions certification per API 641 available
Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Low Fugitive Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Flexing seat design ensures leak-tight seal in both low-
Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 and high-pressure systems
Ordering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Under low pressure, seals are created by the coned-disc
Dimensions spring-loaded seats pushing against the ball. Pressure is
not required to create a seal.
  Swagelok® Tube Fitting End Connections . . . . . . . . . 9
   Female Pipe Thread End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . 10
   Tube and Pipe Socket Weld Connections . . . . . . . . . 11
   Pipe Butt Weld Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
   Tube Extension End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
  VCO® and VCR® Face Seal Fitting
End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
   Sanitary Fitting End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 Flow
   Mixed End Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Special Application Valves
  Steam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
  Thermal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
  Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
  Chlorine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
  All Welded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Under high pressure, the ball is forced downstream, flexing
  Low Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 the downstream seat and creating a seal. The upstream seat
also flexes with the ball movement and maintains a seal.
  Rapid-Cycle Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Valve Handle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . 32
Options for Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Flow

Important Information About

Swagelok Process Ball Valves
• Swagelok ball valves are designed to be operated in
a fully open or fully closed position.
• A packing adjustment may be required periodically
to increase service life and to prevent leakage.
Features
Directional stem flats
On-Off (2-Way) Valve show open or closed position

Stem springs
compensate for
changes in pressure and
temperature, and wear

Grounding spring
grounds stem to provide
continuity for antistatic
protection

Live-loaded, 2-piece
chevron stem packing
■ requires less operating torque
■ improves performance
■c  ompensates for stem wear

High-strength stem bearings

■p rovide smooth actuation
■e liminate galling between
valve stem and body
■ resist wear

Bottom-loaded stem
■ prevents stem blowout
■e  nhances system safety

Unique coned-disc
spring-loaded seat
■ compensates for seat
Ball
wear, pressure, and
temperature changes
■ reduces seat wear Seat
from pressure surges
■ seals regardless of
flow direction

Coned-disc spring

Flange seal
provides leak-tight Support ring
seal between flange contains the seat and Switching (3-Way) Valve
and center body­ protects against seat
bulge, premature wear, All stainless steel switching ball valves incorporate many of
and deformation the features of the on-off (2-way) design. The one-piece
center body uses no welding and allows 180° actuation. The
switching design allows the user to:
■ divert flow from a common inlet to one of two outlets
■ block flow from one inlet port and bleed out the opposite port.
 4 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Materials of Construction
Valve Body Materials➀
Stainless Steel Carbon Steel Brass
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
1 Stem nut 316 SS Low-alloy steel grade 7/A194
2 Stem spring➁ Strain-hardened 316 SS/A240
3 Stop plate➁
304 SS/A240 or 316 SS/A240
4 Handle
5 Handle sleeve Vinyl
6 Grounding spring 302 SS/A313
7 Stem nut➂ 316 SS Low-alloy steel grade 7/A194
8 Stem springs (2) Strain-hardened 316 SS/A240
9 Gland PTFE-coated 316 SS/B783 PTFE-coated brass CDA 360/B16
10 Packing support Polyetheretherketone (PEEK)
11 Top packing
Reinforced PTFE ➃
12 Bottom packing
316 SS/A479 or CF3M/A351
13 Body WCB ➄/A216 Brass CDA 356 or 360/B16
W60—316L SS/A479
60 SERIES

14 Stem bearing(s) ➅ Alloy X-750/AMS 5542 PEEK

BALL

15 Stem 316 SS/A276 or A479

62 series—316 SS/A276;
16 Ball 316 SS/A276 or A479
63, 65 series—brass CDA 360/B16
17 Support rings (2) 316 SS/A240, A276, or A479
18 Seats (2) Reinforced PTFE ➃
19 Coned-disc springs (2) Strain-hardened 316 SS/A240 or A666
20 Flange seals (2) Fluorocarbon FKM ➆
21 Flanges (2) 316L SS/A479 or CF3M/A351 WCB ➄/A216 Brass CDA 360/B16
22 Body fasteners (4) 316 SS gr B8M cl 2/A193 Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/SAE J429➇
23 Body hex nuts (8 or 4) 316 SS gr 8M str hd/A194 Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/SAE J995➈
Lubricants Silicone-based and PTFE-based; other lubricants available
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ S pecial alloy materials available include alloy 400, alloy C-276, alloy 600, and titanium. Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
➁ 62 series—no upper stem spring and stop plate integral with handle.
➂ Valves assembled with pneumatic actuators contain a lock tab (not shown) to secure the nut to the stem.
➃ Additional materials available; see Additional Seat Materials, below.
➄ Coated with hydrocarbon rust-preventive compound.
➅ Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder. Alloy X-750—2 bearings; PEEK—1 bearing.
➆ Additional materials available; see Additional Flange Seal Materials, page 8.
➇ 62 series—material specification is ASTM A574.
➈ 62 series—nuts are grade 4130 or 4140/ASTM A322 or A331.

Additional Seat Materials

Valves with Seats of... Also Contain... And These Lubricants
Silicone-based, fluorinated
S17400 SS ball➀
Alloy X-750➀ tungsten disulfide-based,
and 316 SS back seats
and PTFE-based
Carbon/glass PTFE Same as valves with PTFE seats
PEEK stem bearing➀
PEEK➀➁ PTFE-based
and packing➀
UHMWPE packing,
PEEK stem bearing,➀ Hydrocarbon-based
UHMWPE
ethylene propylene O-rings, and and silicone-based
uncoated packing gland
Virgin PTFE Virgin PTFE packing Silicone-based and PTFE-based
➀ Molybdenum disulfide coated.
➁ 62 and 65 series—Grafoil ®-lined coned-disc springs; 67 and 68 series—PEEK-lined coned-disc springs.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 5

Materials of Construction
1

2
3
5

10

11

60 SERIES
BALL
12
13
21
20 19 18 17 16

14
22

23
15

Testing Special-Application Valves

Certain valves may have different testing requirements, as
Plastic-Seated Valves
described in Special-Application Valves.
Every 60 series ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000
psig (69 bar) or its maximum working pressure if less than 1000 Cleaning and Packaging
psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak rate of Every 60 series ball valve is cleaned in accordance with
0.1 std cm3/min, lower than allowable in FCI 70-2 Specification Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10) catalog,
Class VI. MS-06-62. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with
Shell testing with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or the maximum Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC‑11) catalog,
rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) is performed to a MS‑06‑63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness
requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C is available. Contact
Shell testing at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is your authorized Swagelok representative.
performed on CE-marked 67 and 68 series valves.
Low Fugitive Emissions
Metal-Seated Valves and 3-Way PEEK-Seated The American Petroleum Institute’s API 641 tests for fugitive
Valves emissions to atmosphere for quarter turn ball valves. The tests
Every 60 series ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 50 are conducted at a third party lab and certify that at no point
psig (3.4 bar) for leak-tight integrity of the seats as specified in the test did the valve leak in excess of 100 ppm of methane.
by FCI 70-2 Specification Class VI. Certificates stating that the valve is certified for Low Emissions
service are available for the following 60 series valves: 60T,
Shell testing with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar) or the maximum 60C, 60M, W60C, W60V, 60P, W60P, A60T, R60T, 60E and
rated pressure if less than 1000 psig (69 bar) is performed to a L60. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok
requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector. sales and service representative.
Shell testing at 1.5 times the maximum working pressure is
performed on CE-marked, stainless steel 67 and 68 series
valves.
 6 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Pressure-temperature ratings are based on standard example, 2-way, stainless steel 67 and 68 series valves
materials of construction, as listed on page 4 and in with reinforced PTFE seats are rated at 2200 psig at 100°F
the table notes below. Ratings for valves with alternative (151 bar at 37°C) when assembled with optional cadmium-
materials of construction may not match those shown. For plated carbon steel grade 8 fasteners.

Reinforced PTFE Seats (60T Series)

Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way) Switching (3-Way)
62, 63, 65, 62, 63, 65,
Series W63, W65 67, 68 67, 68 62 63, 65 62, 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel Brass Stainless Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 2200 (151) 1500 (103) 2200 (151) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
150 (65) 1850 (127) 1210 (83.3) 1850 (127) 1680 (115) 1260 (86.8) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 1500 (103) 930 (64.0) 1500 (103) 1360 (93.7) 1030 (70.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
250 (121) 1150 (79.2) 880 (60.6) 1150 (79.2) 1050 (72.3) 800 (55.1) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
300
(148) 800 (55.1) 780 (53.7) 800 (55.1) 780 (53.7) 560 (38.5) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4)
350
(176) 560 (38.5) 560 (38.5) 560 (38.5) 410 (28.2) 330 (22.7) 560 (38.5) 500 (34.4)
400
(204) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7)
450
(232) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) — — 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8)
60 SERIES
BALL

Ratings based on reinforced PTFE seats and packings and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel, PEEK stem bearings
on brass, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.

Alloy X-750 Seats (60M Series)

Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way)
Series 63, 65 67, 68 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 350 (176) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
400 (204) 970 (66.8) 500 (34.4) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
450 (232) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4)
Ratings based on alloy X-750 seats and stem bearings, reinforced PTFE
packings, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8
on steel valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.

Carbon/Glass PTFE Seats (60C Series)

Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way) Switching (3-Way)
Series 62 W63, W65 63, 65 67, 68 62, 63, 65 67, 68 62 63, 65 62, 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel Brass Stainless Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 2500 (172) 2200 (151) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
150 (65) 2430 (167) 2500 (172) 2030 (139) 1210 (83.3) 2250 (155) 1960 (135) 1680 (115) 1260 (86.8) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 1870 (128) 2000 (137) 1560 (107) 930 (64.0) 2000 (137) 1760 (121) 1360 (93.7) 1030 (70.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
250 (121) 1620 (111) 1620 (111) 1480 (101) 880 (60.6) 1620 (111) 1570 (108) 1050 (72.3) 800 (55.1) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
300
(148) 1240 (85.4) 1240 (85.4) 1240 (85.4) 780 (53.7) 1240 (85.4) 1240 (85.4) 730 (50.2) 560 (38.5) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
350
(176) 860 (59.2) 860 (59.2) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 860 (59.2) 860 (59.2) 410 (28.2) 330 (22.7) 860 (59.2) 500 (34.4)
400
(204) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 480 (33.0) 480 (33.0)
450
(232) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) — — 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8)
Ratings based on carbon/glass PTFE seats, reinforced PTFE packings, and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel; PEEK stem bearings on brass;
and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 7

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
PEEK Seats (60P Series)
Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way) Switching (3-Way)
Series 62 63, 65 67, 68 62 63, 65 67, 68 62 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel Stainless Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 2200 (151) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
150 (65) 2420 (166) 2030 (139) 1210 (83.3) 2250 (155) 2250 (155) 1960 (135) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 1870 (128) 1560 (107) 930 (64.0) 2010 (138) 2010 (138) 1760 (121) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
250 (121) 1770 (121) 1480 (101) 880 (60.6) 1770 (121) 1770 (121) 1570 (108) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
300
(148) 1600 (110) 1310 (90.2) 780 (53.7) 1520 (104) 1520 (104) 1370 (94.3) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
350
(176) 1430 (98.5) 1140 (78.5) 690 (47.5) 1280 (88.1) 1280 (88.1) 1180 (81.3) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
400
(204) 1260 (86.8) 970 (66.8) 590 (40.6) 1040 (71.6) 1040 (71.6) 990 (68.2) 1000 (68.9) 970 (66.8) 500 (34.4)
450
(232) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4)
Ratings based on PEEK seats, packings, and stem bearings, and fluorocarbon FKM quad-seal flange seals.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.

Polyethylene Seats (60E Series)

60 SERIES
BALL
Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way) Switching (3-Way)
62, W63,
Series W65 63, 65 67, 68 62 63, 65 67, 68 62 63, 65 62, 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel Brass Stainless Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 2200 (151) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
150 (65) 2080 (143) 2030 (139) 1210 (83.3) 2080 (143) 2030 (139) 1960 (135) 1680 (115) 1260 (86.8) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 1160 (79.9) 1160 (79.9) 930 (64.0) 1160 (79.9) 1160 (79.9) 1160 (79.9) 1160 (79.9) 1030 (70.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
250 (121) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2) 250 (17.2)
Ratings based on UHMWPE seats and packings, PEEK stem bearings, and ethylene propylene O-rings.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.

Virgin PTFE Seats (60V Series)

Flow Pattern On-Off (2-Way) Switching (3-Way)
62, 63, 65, 62, 63, 65,
Series W63, W65 67, 68 67, 68 62 63, 65 62, 63, 65 67, 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel Brass Stainless Steel
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
150 (65) 1500 (103) 1210 (83.3) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1260 (86.8) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 1500 (103) 930 (64.0) 1500 (103) 1360 (93.7) 1030 (70.9) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
250 (121) 1150 (79.2) 880 (60.6) 1150 (79.2) 1050 (72.3) 800 (55.1) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4)
300
(148) 800 (55.1) 780 (53.7) 800 (55.1) 730 (50.2) 560 (38.5) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4)
350
(176) 560 (38.5) 560 (38.5) 560 (38.5) 410 (28.2) 330 (22.7) 560 (38.5) 500 (34.4)
400
(204) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 330 (22.7) 330 (22.7)
450
(232) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8) — — 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8)
Ratings based on virgin PTFE seats and packings and alloy X-750 stem bearings on stainless steel or steel, PEEK stem bearings on
brass, and fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
Fastener materials: 316 SS on stainless steel valves and carbon steel grade 8 on steel or brass valves.
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.
 8 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Ordering Information
On-Off (2-Way) Valves
Valve Body Material Designator Availability
Select an ordering number from the 316 SS SS Not available in chlorine series
Dimensions tables starting on page 9.
2-way 62, 63, 65 series only;
See the table at right for availability of not available in steam, thermal, fire,
Brass B
other valve body materials. To order, chlorine, all-welded, PEEK-seated,
replace SS with B or S. or rapid-cycle service valves
2-way only;
Examples: B
 -62TS4 Carbon steel S
required in chlorine series
S-62TS4

Additional Seat Materials Additional Flange Seal Materials

Most valve ordering numbers specify reinforced PTFE seat Fluorocarbon FKM is standard. For other materials, add a
material. For other seat materials, replace T with the desired flange seal material designator to the valve ordering number.
designator. Not all seat material and flange seal combinations Not all flange seal and seat material combinations are
are available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative. available. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
Examples: SS-62PS4 Examples: SS-62TS4-B
S-62ES4 S-62ES4-IN

Seat Material Designator Availability Flange Seal Temperature Range

Material Designator °F (°C)
60 SERIES

Not available in steam, thermal,

BALL

Reinforced PTFE T
or chlorine series Alloy X-750,
IN –65 to 450 (–53 to 232)
Not available in steam, fire, PTFE coated➀
Alloy X-750 M chlorine, or all-welded series; Buna N B –20 to 250 (–28 to 121)
required in thermal series
Buna C➀ BC –65 to 250 (–53 to 121)
Not available in steam, thermal,
Carbon/glass PTFE C Ethylene propylene E –20 to 250 (–28 to 121)
or chlorine series
Not available in fire, thermal, Neoprene N –20 to 250 (–28 to 121)
chlorine, brass, or all-welded PTFE T 50 to 150 (10 to 65)
PEEK P
series; carbon filled PEEK
standard in steam series ➀ 62, 63, and 65 series valves only.

Not available in steam, fire,

UHMWPE E thermal, chlorine, or all-welded
series
Not available in steam, fire, or
Virgin PTFE V thermal series; required in
chlorine series

Switching (3-Way) Valves

Switching (3-way) valves are available with:
■ stainless steel valve body material
■ standard or low-temperature service
■ all seat materials except alloy X-750 L

■ bottom end connections shown below at right.

To order a switching (3-way) valve with three of the same end
connections, insert X into the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-62XTF4
To order a switching (3-way) valve with a different bottom Valve Bottom L
end connection, insert X into the valve ordering number and Series End Connection Designator in. (mm)
add a bottom end connection designator. 1/4 in. female NPT -F4 3.12 (79.2)
62 1/4 in. female ISO tapered -F4RT 3.12 (79.2)
Example: SS-62XTF4-S4
1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting -S4 3.35 (85.1)
To order three different end connections, contact your 3/8 in. Swagelok tube fitting -S6 4.37 (111)
authorized Swagelok representative. 1/2 in. female NPT -F8 4.19 (106)
63
To order a switching (3-way) valve with an L flow pattern, 1/2 in. female ISO tapered -F8RT 4.19 (106)
1/2 in. Swagelok tube fitting -S8 4.48 (114)
contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
3/4 in. female NPT -F12
Cross-Port Mixing of Fluids 65
3/4 in. female ISO tapered -F12RT
5.45 (138)
1 in. female NPT -F16
A spherical ball is available in valves with UHMWPE or 1 in. female ISO tapered -F16RT
PEEK seats to prevent cross-port mixing of fluids. To order,
67 1 1/2 in. female NPT -F24 6.86 (174)
insert O into the ordering number.
68 2 in. female NPT -F32 7.21 (183)
Example: SS-62XOPF4
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 9

Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.

Swagelok Tube Fitting End Connections

Dimensions shown with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. See Ordering Information, page 8.

E
F

J➀
G

D
C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv C D E F G H J➀

60 SERIES
1/4 in. SS-62TS4 0.188 (4.8) 1.2 3.17 (80.5) 1.59 (40.4) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)

BALL
3/8 in. SS-62TS6 0.281 (7.1) 3.8 3.17 (80.5) 1.59 (40.4) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
1/2 in. SS-63TS8 0.406 (10.3) 7.5 4.04 (103) 2.02 (51.3) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
3/4 in. SS-63TS12 0.516 (13.1) 13.6 4.04 (103) 2.02 (51.3) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
1 in. SS-65TS16 0.875 (22.2) 40 5.36 (136) 2.68 (68.1) 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
1 1/2 in. SS-67TS24 1.250 (31.8) 100 7.59 (193) 3.79 (96.3) 4.03 (102) 3.14 (79.8) 1.53 (38.9) 9.14 (232) 3.06 (77.7)
2 in. SS-68TS32 1.500 (38.1) 130 9.95 (253) 4.97 (126) 4.16 (106) 3.36 (85.3) 1.74 (44.2) 9.14 (232) 3.47 (88.1)
6 mm SS-62TS6MM 0.188 (4.8) 1.2 3.17 (80.5) 1.59 (40.4) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
8 mm SS-62TS8MM 0.250 (6.4) 2.5 3.17 (80.5) 1.59 (40.4) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
10 mm SS-62TS10MM 0.281 (7.1) 3.8 3.20 (81.3) 1.60 (40.6) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
12 mm SS-63TS12MM 0.375 (9.5) 7.5 4.04 (103) 2.02 (51.3) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
18 mm SS-63TS18MM 0.516 (13.1) 13.6 4.04 (103) 2.02 (51.3) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
25 mm SS-65TS25MM 0.875 (22.2) 40 5.36 (136) 2.68 (68.1) 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
All 67 and 68 stainless steel steam and thermal series valves and 67 and 68 series valves with UHMWPE seats are assembled with silver-plated front ferrules. All
other 67 and 68 series stainless steel valves are assembled with PFA-coated front ferrules.
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

Swagelok Hydraulic
Swaging Unit
When installing a Swagelok
60 series ball valve with tube
fittings larger than 1 in., the
Swagelok MHSU hydraulic
swaging unit is needed. The
unit swages the ferrules onto
the tubing without applying
stress to fitting body threads.
Refer to Gaugeable Tube
Fittings and Adapter Fittings
catalog, MS‑01‑140, for
additional information.
 10 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Dimensions
Female Pipe Thread End Connections
Female NPT pipe thread dimensions conform to ASME B1.20.1. ISO tapered thread dimensions conform to
ISO 7/1, EN 10226-1, DIN 2999, and JIS B0203. See Ordering Information, page 8.

H H

E E
F F

J➀ J➀
G G

D D1 D
C C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv C D D1 E F G H J➀
Female NPT
1/8 in. SS-62TF2 0.281 (7.1) 3.8 2.16 (54.9) 1.08 (27.4) — 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
60 SERIES
BALL

1/4 in. SS-62TF4 0.281 (7.1) 3.8 2.16 (54.9) 1.08 (27.4) — 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
3/8 in. SS-63TF6 0.516 (13.1) 12 2.70 (68.6) 1.35 (34.3) — 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
1/2 in. SS-63TF8 0.516 (13.1) 12 2.70 (68.6) 1.35 (34.3) — 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
3/4 in. SS-65TF12 0.875 (22.2) 31 3.59 (91.2) 1.80 (45.7) — 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
1 in. SS-65TF16 0.875 (22.2) 38 3.59 (91.2) 1.80 (45.7) — 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
1 1/4 in. SS-67TF20 1.250 (31.8) 90 4.39 (112) 2.19 (55.6) — 4.03 (102) 3.14 (79.8) 1.53 (38.9) 9.14 (232) 3.06 (77.7)
1 1/2 in. SS-67TF24 1.250 (31.8) 100 4.39 (112) 2.19 (55.6) — 4.03 (102) 3.14 (79.8) 1.53 (38.9) 9.14 (232) 3.06 (77.7)
2 in. SS-68TF32 1.500 (38.1) 130 4.94 (125) 2.47 (62.7) — 4.16 (106) 3.36 (85.3) 1.74 (44.2) 9.14 (232) 3.47 (88.1)
Female ISO Tapered
1/4 in. SS-62TF4RT 0.281 (7.1) 3.8 2.16 (54.9) 1.08 (27.4) — 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
1/2 in. SS-63TF8RT 0.516 (13.1) 12 2.70 (68.6) 1.35 (34.3) — 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
3/4 in. SS-65TF12RT 0.875 (22.2) 31 3.59 (91.2) 1.80 (45.7) — 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
1 in. SS-65TF16RT 0.875 (22.2) 38 4.45 (113) 2.23 (56.6) — 2.94 (74.7) 2.52 (64.0) 1.25 (31.8) 6.00 (152) 2.50 (63.5)
1 1/2 in. SS-67TF24RT 1.250 (31.8) 100 5.45 (138) 2.72 (69.1) — 4.03 (102) 3.14 (79.8) 1.53 (38.9) 9.14 (232) 3.06 (77.7)
2 in. SS-68TF32RT 1.500 (38.1) 130 7.00 (178) 3.50 (88.9) — 4.29 (109) 3.36 (85.3) 1.74 (44.2) 9.14 (232) 3.47 (88.1)
Male Lagging Extension to Female NPT with Gauge Ports
1/2 to
SS-63TM8L-GF8 0.411 (10.4) 7.5 5.44 (138) 2.34 (59.4) 3.09 (78.5) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
1/2 in.
3/4 to
SS-63TM12L-GF8 0.500 (12.7) 11.3 5.44 (138) 2.34 (59.4) 3.09 (78.5) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
1/2 in.
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

Steam Trap Test Assembly

Designed for use with saturated
steam systems, the Swagelok TVA
series integrated test valve assembly
consists of two 63 series ball valves
and a universal mount for use with a
customer-supplied steam trap. The test
assembly offers fast visual monitoring
of condensate removal with a simple
quarter turn of the test valve.
Refer to Steam Trap Test Station with
Universal Mount catalog, MS-02-221,
for additional information.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 11

Dimensions
Tube and Pipe Socket Weld End Connections
Pipe socket diameter and depth conform to ASME B16.11. See Ordering Information, page 8.

E K K
F

J➀ A B A B
G

D Tube Socket Weld Pipe Socket Weld

C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv A B C D E F G H J➀ K
Tube Socket Weld
0.257 0.540 2.16 1.08 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35 0.28

60 SERIES
1/4 in. SS-62TSW4T 0.188 (4.8) 1.2

BALL
(6.5) (13.7) (54.9) (27.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3) (7.1)
0.382 0.675 2.16 1.08 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35 0.31
3/8 in. SS-62TSW6T 0.281 (7.1) 3.8
(9.7) (17.1) (54.9) (27.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3) (7.9)
0.507 0.840 2.70 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78 0.38
1/2 in. SS-63TSW8T 0.411 (10.4) 7.5
(12.9) (21.3) (68.6) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2) (9.7)
0.757 1.050 2.70 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78 0.44
3/4 in. SS-63TSW12T 0.516 (13.1) 13.6
(19.2) (26.7) (68.6) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2) (11.2)
1.009 1.315 3.59 1.80 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50 0.62
1 in. SS-65TSW16T 0.875 (22.2) 40
(25.6) (33.4) (91.2) (45.7) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5) (15.7)
1.259 1.660 4.39 2.19 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06 0.62
1 1/4 in. SS-67TSW20T 1.125 (28.6) 80
(32.0) (42.2) (112) (55.6) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7) (15.7)
1.509 2.450 4.39 2.19 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06 0.75
1 1/2 in. SS-67TSW24T 1.250 (31.8) 100
(38.3) (62.2) (112) (55.6) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7) (19.1)
2.012 2.760 4.94 2.47 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47 0.75
2 in. SS-68TSW32T 1.500 (38.1) 130
(51.1) (70.1) (125) (62.7) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1) (19.1)
Pipe Socket Weld
0.860 1.165 2.70 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78 0.38
1/2 in. SS-63TSW8P 0.516 (13.1) 15
(21.8) (29.6) (68.6) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2) (9.7)
1.070 1.660 3.59 1.80 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50 0.50
3/4 in. SS-65TSW12P 0.875 (22.2) 36
(27.2) (42.2) (91.2) (45.7) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5) (12.7)
1.335 1.700 3.59 1.80 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50 0.50
1 in. SS-65TSW16P 0.875 (22.2) 42
(33.9) (43.2) (91.2) (45.7) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5) (12.7)
1.680 2.450 4.51 2.25 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06 0.50
1 1/4 in. SS-67TSW20P 1.250 (31.8) 90
(42.7) (62.2) (115) (57.2) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7) (12.7)
1.920 2.350 4.57 2.29 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06 0.50
1 1/2 in. SS-67TSW24P 1.250 (31.8) 100
(48.8) (59.7) (116) (58.2) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7) (12.7)
2.411 2.957 4.94 2.47 4.16 3.36 1.70 9.14 3.41 0.63
2 in. SS-68TSW32P 1.500 (38.1) 130
(61.2) (75.1) (125) (62.7) (106) (85.3) (43.2) (232) (86.6) (16.0)
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

Swagelok Welding System

The Swagelok welding system offers consistent,
repeatable orbital gas tungsten arc welds (GTAW). It
can be used to weld a variety of weld end connections
available on Swagelok 60 series ball valves.
Refer to Welding System M200 Power Supply catalog,
MS‑02‑342, for additional information.
 12 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Dimensions
Pipe Butt Weld End Connections
Pipe butt weld end connections conform to ASME B16.25. See Ordering Information, page 8.

E
F

J➀ A B
G

D
C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv A B C D E F G H J➀
Schedule 10
0.410 0.540 2.08 1.04 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
60 SERIES

1/4 in. SS-62TW4P10 0.188 (4.8) 1.2

BALL

(10.4) (13.7) (52.8) (26.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)

0.674 0.840 2.69 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. SS-63TW8P10 0.516 (13.1) 15
(17.1) (21.3) (68.3) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.884 1.050 3.59 1.80 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
3/4 in. SS-65TW12P10 0.875 (22.2) 36
(22.5) (26.7) (91.2) (45.7) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.097 1.315 3.46 1.73 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. SS-65TW16P10 0.875 (22.2) 40
(27.9) (33.4) (87.9) (43.9) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.682 1.900 4.47 2.23 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. SS-67TW24P10 1.250 (31.8) 100
(42.7) (48.3) (114) (56.6) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
2.157 2.375 4.78 2.39 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. SS-68TW32P10 1.500 (38.1) 130
(54.8) (60.3) (121) (60.7) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
Schedule 40
0.364 0.540 2.08 1.04 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
1/4 in. SS-62TW4P40 0.188 (4.8) 1.2
(9.2) (13.7) (52.8) (26.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)
0.622 0.840 2.69 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. SS-63TW8P40 0.516 (13.1) 15
(15.8) (21.3) (68.3) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.824 1.050 3.59 1.80 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
3/4 in. SS-65TW12P40 0.824 (20.9) 36
(20.9) (26.7) (91.2) (45.7) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.049 1.315 3.46 1.73 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. SS-65TW16P40 0.875 (22.2) 90
(26.6) (33.4) (87.9) (43.9) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.610 1.900 4.47 2.23 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. SS-67TW24P40 1.250 (31.8) 100
(40.9) (48.3) (114) (56.6) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
2.067 2.375 4.86 2.43 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. SS-68TW32P40 1.500 (38.1) 130
(52.5) (60.3) (123) (61.7) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
Schedule 80
0.302 0.540 2.08 1.04 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
1/4 in. SS-62TW4P80 0.188 (4.8) 1.2
(7.7) (13.7) (52.8) (26.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)
0.423 0.675 2.08 1.04 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
3/8 in. SS-62TW6P80 0.281 (7.1) 3.8
(10.7) (17.1) (52.8) (26.4) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)
0.546 0.840 2.69 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. SS-63TW8P80 0.516 (13.1) 6.8
(13.9) (21.3) (68.3) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.742 1.050 2.69 1.34 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
3/4 in. SS-63TW12P80 0.516 (13.1) 13.6
(18.8) (26.7) (68.3) (34.0) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.942 1.315 3.46 1.73 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. SS-65TW16P80 0.875 (22.2) 40
(23.9) (33.4) (87.9) (43.9) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.281 1.660 4.57 2.28 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/4 in. SS-67TW20P80 1.125 (28.6) 80
(32.5) (42.2) (116) (57.9) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
1.500 1.900 4.57 2.28 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. SS-67TW24P80 1.250 (31.8) 100
(38.1) (48.3) (116) (57.9) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
1.939 2.375 5.09 2.55 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. SS-68TW32P80 1.500 (38.1) 130
(49.3) (60.3) (129) (64.8) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 13

Dimensions
Tube Extension End Connections
Tube extensions are available on stainless steel valves only. Tube extension material
is 316L SS. See Ordering Information, page 8.
H

E
F

J➀ B
G

D
C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Wall Ordering Orifice
Size Thickness Number in. (mm) Cv B C D E F G H J➀
0.180 0.250 8.12 4.05 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
1/4 in. 0.035 in. SS-62TW4T35-3 1.1
(4.6) (6.4) (206) (103) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)
0.281 0.375 8.12 4.05 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
3/8 in. 0.035 in. SS-62TW6T35-3 3.8

60 SERIES
(7.1) (9.5) (206) (103) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)

BALL
0.402 0.500 8.51 4.26 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. 0.049 in. SS-63TW8T49-3 7.2
(10.2) (12.7) (216) (108) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.370 0.500 8.51 4.26 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. 0.065 in. SS-63TW8T65-3 6.1
(9.4) (12.7) (216) (108) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.620 0.750 9.53 4.77 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
3/4 in. 0.065 in. SS-65TW12T65-3 18
(15.7) (19.1) (242) (121) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
0.870 1.000 9.53 4.77 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. 0.065 in. SS-65TW16T65-3 36
(22.1) (25.4) (242) (121) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.250 1.500 10.5 5.27 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. 0.065 in. SS-67TW24T65-3 100
(31.8) (38.1) (267) (134) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
1.500 2.000 11.3 5.65 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. 0.065 in. SS-68TW32T65-3 130
(38.1) (50.8) (287) (144) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

VCO O-Ring Face Seal and VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting End Connections
Face seal fitting end connections require minimal axial clearance for ease of installation and service.
VCO fitting contains fluorocarbon FKM O-ring. See Ordering Information, page 8.

E
F

J➀
G VCO VCR
Fitting Fitting
D
C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv C D E F G H J➀
VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fitting
1/4 in. SS-62TVCO4 0.188 (4.8) 1.2 2.60 (66.0) 1.30 (33.0) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.35 (34.3)
1/2 in. SS-63TVCO8 0.406 (10.3) 7.5 3.25 (82.6) 1.62 (41.1) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.78 (45.2)
VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting
1/4 in. SS-62TVCR4 0.188 (4.8) 1.2 2.47 (62.7) 1.23 (31.2) 1.66 (42.2) 1.26 (32.0) 0.68 (17.3) 2.37 (60.2) 1.32 (33.5)
1/2 in. SS-63TVCR8 0.406 (10.3) 7.5 3.63 (92.2) 1.81 (46.0) 2.35 (59.7) 1.79 (45.5) 0.89 (22.6) 4.50 (114) 1.75 (44.5)
Ratings of valves with VCR or VCO fitting end connections are affected by the ratings of the mating fitting; refer to VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fittings catalog,
MS-01-24 and Swagelok VCO O-Ring Face Seal Fittings catalog, MS-01-28.
➀ Height and width of 63 series flange. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.
 14 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Dimensions
Sanitary Fitting End Connections
Valves with Swagelok TS and SC sanitary fitting end connections are available in
stainless steel only. The maximum pressure rating is 300 psig (20.6 bar); working
pressure and temperature ratings of these valves may be limited by the gasket
material and clamp used.
H
TS sanitary fitting end connections have
a machined surface finish roughness
average (Ra) of 20 µin. (0.51 µm).
E
Refer to Biopharm Fittings—TS Series F
catalog, MS-03-13, for additional
information. J➀ B A
SC sanitary clamp end connections G
1 in. and larger are compatible with D
ISO 2852 geometrical requirements. C

See Ordering Information, page 8.

To order a valve with a ball inside diameter surface roughness average (Ra) of
15 µin. (0.38 µm), add -RB to the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-63TTS8-RB
60 SERIES
BALL

TS Sanitary Fittings

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv A B C D E F G H J➀
0.99 0.37 3.50 1.75 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
1/2 in. SS-63TTS8 0.370 (9.4) 7.5
(25.1) (9.4) (88.9) (44.4) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
0.99 0.62 3.50 1.75 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
3/4 in. SS-63TTS12 0.516 (13.1) 15
(25.1) (15.7) (88.9) (44.4) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
1.99 0.87 4.50 2.25 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. SS-65TTS16 0.873 (22.2) 42
(50.5) (22.1) (114) (57.2) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.99 1.37 5.50 2.75 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. SS-67TTS24 1.250 (31.8) 100
(50.5) (34.8) (140) (69.9) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
2.52 1.87 6.25 3.12 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. SS-68TTS32 1.500 (38.1) 130
(64.0) (47.5) (159) (79.2) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

SC Sanitary Clamp Fittings

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv A B C D E F G H J➀
0.99 0.37 3.56 1.78 1.66 1.26 0.68 2.37 1.35
1/2 in. SS-62TSC8 0.281 (7.1) 7.1
(25.1) (9.4) (90.4) (45.2) (42.2) (32.0) (17.3) (60.2) (34.3)
0.99 0.62 4.06 2.03 2.35 1.79 0.89 4.50 1.78
3/4 in. SS-63TSC12 0.516 (13.1) 13.2
(25.1) (15.7) (103) (51.5) (59.7) (45.5) (22.6) (114) (45.2)
1.99 0.87 4.50 2.25 2.94 2.52 1.25 6.00 2.50
1 in. SS-65TSC16 0.872 (22.1) 42
(50.5) (22.1) (114) (57.2) (74.7) (64.0) (31.8) (152) (63.5)
1.98 1.37 5.50 2.75 4.03 3.14 1.53 9.14 3.06
1 1/2 in. SS-67TSC24 1.250 (31.8) 100
(50.3) (34.8) (140) (69.9) (102) (79.8) (38.9) (232) (77.7)
2.52 1.87 6.25 3.12 4.16 3.36 1.74 9.14 3.47
2 in. SS-68TSC32 1.500 (38.1) 130
(64.0) (47.5) (159) (79.2) (106) (85.3) (44.2) (232) (88.1)
➀ Height and width of 63 through 68 series flanges. Height of 62 series flange is 1.59 in. (40.4 mm); width is J dimension.

Mixed End Connections

60 series valves can be ordered with two different end connections. Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for
ordering information.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 15

Special-Application Valves
Grafoil flange seals
Steam Service maintain leak-tight
integrity at high
(S60P Series) temperatures Encased 8-bolt
construction
Steam service ball valves can reduce lost energy, downtime, resists differential
and safety hazards associated with leaking valves in a steam thermal expansion
system. Unlike conventional sealing methods, the patented of body
designs of the seats and stem packing in the steam series components during
ball valves resist the erosive nature of steam, thus improving rapid temperature
cycling.
performance and enhancing safety.

Features
■ Stainless steel or carbon steel materials.
■ PEEK (polyetheretherketone) seats and stem seals
■ resist absorption of water
■ resist erosive damage of steam.

Materials of Construction
Valve Body Material

60 SERIES
Stainless Steel Steel

BALL
The Steam 60 Series Ball Valves have a smaller orifice than the
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
standard valves for improved seat sealing performance after thermal
Packings, stem bearing Molybdenum disulfide-coated PEEK cycling. The maximum Cv of the Steam 60 Series valves is shown
Seats (2) Carbon filled PEEK in the table below. User should compare this to the Cv in the end
connection tables above, to see if the maximum Cv is reduced.
S62P, S65P, S67P, S68P series—Grafoil;
Back sheets (2)
S63P series—N/A
Orifice Maximum
Flange seals (2) Grafoil Valve Series in. (mm) Cv
Grade B8M class 2/ Zinc phosphate- S62P 0.245 (6.2) 2.3
Body fasteners (8)
A193 coated grade
S63P 0.472 (12.0) 11.6
Lubricant PTFE-based
S65P 0.84 (21.3) 40
Wetted components listed in italics.
S67P 1.20 (30.5) 84.7
All other components same as shown on page 4.
S68P 1.45 (36.8) 125

Pressure-Temperature Ratings Saturated Steam Ratings

Valve Series 62 63, 65 67, 68 62, 63, 65 67, 68 Stainless Steel Valves
Material Stainless Steel Steel 1050 psig at 550°F (72.3 bar at 287°C)
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) Carbon Steel Valves
–20 (–28) to 100 (37) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 2000 (137) 2500 (172) 2000 (137)
680 psig at 500°F (46.8 bar at 260°C)
150 (65) 2420 (166) 2320 (159) 1920 (132) 2250 (155) 1820 (125)
200 (93) 2350 (161) 2150 (148) 1830 (126) 2010 (138) 1650 (113)
250 (121) 2280 (157) 1980 (136) 1750 (120) 1770 (121) 1480 (101)
300
(148) 2200 (151) 1910 (131) 1670 (115) 1520 (104) 1310 (90.2)
350
(176) 2120 (146) 1840 (126) 1600 (110) 1280 (88.1) 1140 (78.5)
400
(204) 2050 (141) 1770 (121) 1530 (105) 1040 (71.6) 970 (66.8)
450
(232) 1980 (136) 1700 (117) 1460 (100) 800 (55.1) 800 (55.1)
500
(260) 1910 (131) 1660 (114) 1410 (97.1) 710 (48.9) 710 (48.9)
550
(287) 1100 (75.7) 1100 (75.7) 1100 (75.7) 620 (42.7) 620 (42.7)
600
(315) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7)
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.

Ordering Information Seal Kits

Valve Kit Ordering
To order, insert S before the series Seal kits contain stem springs, gland, packing Series Number
designator and replace T with P. support, packings, stem bearing, seats, seat S62P SS-91K-S62P
Example: SS-S62PS4 springs, back sheets, flange seals, lubricant and S63P SS-91K-S63P
To order steel valve body material, instructions.
S65P SS-91K-S65P
replace SS with S. Kit components are the same materials and grades
S67P SS-91K-S67P
Example: S-S62PS4 listed in Materials of Construction.
S68P SS-91K-S68P
Select a kit ordering number.
 16 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Special-Application Valves
Thermal Service Smooth, quarter-
turn rotary operation
(T60M Series)
■ resists outside
The Swagelok thermal service ball valve, with its unique, contaminants
spring-like metal seat, is designed to maintain a seal with a ■ provides reliable
minimum seat load against the ball. containment of
thermal liquids
Features
■ 316 SS or carbon steel material with Grafoil packing and
alloy X-750 seats
■ Resists contamination of the thermal liquid.
■ Intended for use with high-viscosity thermal fluids. Hot
gases or low-viscosity fluids may remove the factory-
applied lubricant and result in premature wear to the seats.
■ Exceeds performance requirements of Fire Test Standard
API 607, 6th edition.

Materials of Construction
60 SERIES

Valve Body Material

BALL

Stainless Steel Steel Unique, spring-loaded Encased 8-bolt

Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification metal seats construction
■ provide positive leak-tight resists differential thermal
Packing bearing Alloy X-750➀/AMS 5542
sealing at temperatures up expansion of body
Packing supports (2), to 850°F (454°C) components during rapid
316 SS/A276
back seats (2) ■ work equally well in low- temperature cycling
Packing,➁ and high-pressure systems.
Grafoil with 316 SS
flange seals (2)➂
Ball S17400 SS➀/A564
Seats Alloy X-750➀/AMS 5542 Testing
Maximum
Grade B8M class 2/ Zinc phosphate- All thermal service ball valves Allowable Seat
Body fasteners (8)
A193 coated grade B7/A193 are tested with pure nitrogen at Valve Leak Rate
Lubricant Fluorinated tungsten disulfide 50 psig (3.4 bar) for leak-tight Series std cm3/min
Wetted components listed in italics. integrity of the ball seats as T63M, T65M 0.15
All other components same as shown on page 4. specified by FCI 70-2 Class VI. T67M 0.30
➀ Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder. Stem packing and body T68M 0.45
➁ Impregnated with fluorocarbon-based lubricant. seals are tested for no visible
➂ Impregnated with anaerobic adhesive. T63M and T65M series—RTV
silicone sealant.
leakage using a liquid leak detector.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ordering Information
Series 63, 65 67, 68 63, 65 67, 68 Thermal service ball valves are available in 63, 65, 67, and 68
Material Stainless Steel Steel series sizes. To order, insert T before the series designator
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
and replace the second T with M.
–65 (–53) to 400 (204) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) Example: SS-T63MS8
450 (232) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 800 (55.1) 500 (34.4) To order steel valve body material, replace SS with S.
500 (260) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 710 (48.9) 500 (34.4)
550 (287) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 620 (42.7) 500 (34.4) Example: S-T63MS8
600 (315) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 540 (37.2) 500 (34.4)

650
(343) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 450 (31.0) 450 (31.0)
700
(371) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 370 (25.4) 370 (25.4) Seal Kits
Valve Kit Ordering
750
(398) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 280 (19.2) 280 (19.2) Seal kits contain ball, seats, Series Number
800
(426) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7) packing, flange seals, stem
850
(454) 1000 (68.9) 500 (34.4) — — T63M SS-91K-T63M
bearings, back seats, packing T65M SS-91K-T65M
Steel valve ratings limited to –20°F (–28°C). supports, stem springs,
Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max. T67M SS-91K-T67M
lubricant, sealant, and
instructions. T68M SS-91K-T68M

Kit components are the same materials and grades listed in

Materials of Construction.
Select a kit ordering number.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 17

Special-Application Valves Compensating

seat design
Fire Series (A60T Series) live loads the seat to
compensate for wear and
changes in temperature
or pressure during normal
conditions and reduces
distortion of seats from
pressure surges

Live-loaded Grafoil
stem packing
provides a reliable
stem seal during
normal conditions
and maintains a seal Grafoil weir ring
in the event of fire provides seat
High-strength metal seal against the
stem bearings ball during fire
provide smooth conditions,
actuation, resist wear even if only a
and extrusion, and portion of the seat is
maintain packing load destroyed
in the event of fire

60 SERIES
BALL
Encased 8-bolt construction
Grafoil flange seals Vented ball maintains body integrity and body
provide leak-tight containment under allows pressure to equalize between valve body seals during rapid temperature
normal and fire conditions, eliminating and upstream port, preventing overpressurization changes resulting from fire exposure
the need for a secondary flange seal and potential seal blowout under fire conditions and water quenching

Materials of Construction Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Valve Body Material Series 63, 65 67, 68

Stainless Steel Steel Material Name Stainless Steel, Steel
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification Temperature °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
Packing supports (2) Polyimide –40 (–40) to 100 (37) 2200 (151) 2000 (137)
Packing, 150 (65) 1600 (110) 1600 (110)
Grafoil with 316 SS wire 200 (93) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9)
flange seals (2)➀
250 (121) 400 (27.5) 400 (27.5)
Seats with integral Glass-filled reinforced PTFE;
weir rings (2) Grafoil with 316 SS wire 300
(148) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6)
350
(176) 200 (13.7) 200 (13.7)
Coned-disc springs (2) Grafoil-lined 316 SS/A167 400
(204) 100 (6.8) 100 (6.8)
Grade B8M class 2/ Zinc phosphate- Steel valve ratings limited to –20°F (–28°C).
Body fasteners (8)
A193 coated grade B7/A193 Steel valves with Swagelok tube fitting end connections: 375°F (190°C) max.
Fluorinated tungsten disulfide;
Lubricants molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder; Ordering Information
nickel antiseize in hydrocarbon carrier
Wetted components listed in italics.
Fire series ball valves are available in 63, 65, 67, and 68 series
All other components same as shown on page 4. sizes. To order, insert A into the ordering number.
➀ RTV silicone sealant on flange seals. Example: SS-A63TS8
To order steel valve body material, replace SS with S.
Testing Example: S-A63TS8
In addition to the requirements given in Testing, page 5,
fire series ball valves meet those of API Standard 607, 6th Seal Kits
Valve Kit Ordering
edition, and Swagelok fire test specification SEI-00334. Refer Seal kits contain stem springs, Series Number
to Fire Series Ball Valves—A60T Series catalog, MS‑02-47, for gland, packing, packing supports, A63T SS-91K-A63T
additional information. stem bearings, seats with integral A65T SS-91K-A65T
weir rings, seat springs, flange
A67T SS-91K-A67T
seals, and instructions.
A68T SS-91K-A68T
Select a kit ordering number.
 18 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Special-Application Valves
Chlorine Series (C60V Series)
Features
■ Materials include carbon steel valve body with virgin PTFE
seats and packing, in accordance with the guidelines of the
Chlorine Institute Pamphlet 6, Piping Systems for Dry Chlorine.
■ Upstream ball vent prevents overpressurization in ball and
body when valve is closed.

Materials of Construction Pressure-Temperature Ratings

300 psig at –20 to 250°F (20.6 bar at –28 to 121°C).
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Lower stem nut Alloy 400 Cleaning and Packaging
Packing support ECTFE C60V series valve bodies and flanges are cleaned in mineral
60 SERIES

Stem bearing ECTFE spirits followed by an aqueous cleaning solution containing

BALL

Packing Virgin PTFE/ASTM D1710 a surfactant. All other wetted components are cleaned in
Vented ball Alloy 400/B164 accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging
62, 63 series—alloy 400/B127
(SC-11) catalog, MS-06-63.
Support rings (2)
65, 67, 68 series—316 SS/A167 C60V series ball valves are capped and sealed individually in
Seats (2) Virgin PTFE desiccant packaging and are tagged for chlorine service.
Coned-disc springs (2) Alloy X-750/AMS 5542
Testing
Flanges (2) WCB/A216
Every chlorine series valve is factory seat and shell tested
Cadmium-plated carbon steel grade 8/
Body fasteners (4) with nitrogen at 300 psig (20.6 bar). Seats have a maximum
SAE J429
allowable leak rate of 0.04 std cm3/min.
Lubricant Fluorinated-based with PTFE
Wetted components listed in italics. Ordering Information
All other components same as shown on page 4.
Select an ordering number from the Dimensions tables for
Swagelok tube fitting, female NPT, or tube and pipe socket
weld end connections. Insert C before the series designator.
Replace SS and T with S and V, respectively.
Example: S-C62VS4

Seal Kits
Valve Kit Ordering
Seal kits contain stem springs, Series Number
gland, packing support, C62V S-91K-C62V
packings, stem bearing, seat C63V S-91K-C63V
subassemblies, flange seals,
C65V S-91K-C65V
lubricant, and instructions.
C67V S-91K-C67V
Select a kit ordering number.
C68V S-91K-C68V
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 19

Special-Application Valves
All-Welded Valves
(W60T Series)
Features
All-welded ball valves incorporate
the proven design features of the
on-off (2-way) ball valve, all-welded Full penetration weld
body construction, and live-loaded provides one-piece body
packing to ensure total system fluid construction for leak-
containment. tight fluid containment

Testing
In addition to the requirements given in
Testing, page 5, a hydrostatic shell
test is performed with pure water at
1.5 times the working pressure.

Dimensions and Ordering Information

60 SERIES
Dimensions, in inches and (millimeters), H

BALL
are for reference only and are subject to
change.
Select an ordering number from the
E
table below. F
To order other seat materials, replace
T with C for carbon/glass PTFE or V for
J
virgin PTFE.
G
Example: SS-W63CF8
D
C

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Ordering Orifice
Size Number in. (mm) Cv C D E F G H J
Female NPT End Connections
1/2 in. SS-W63TF8 0.516 (13.1) 12 2.69 (68.3) 1.34 (34.0) 2.32 (58.9) 1.79 (45.5) 0.96 (24.4) 4.50 (114) 1.60 (40.6)
1 in. SS-W65TF16 0.875 (22.2) 38 3.59 (91.2) 1.79 (45.5) 2.93 (74.4) 2.52 (64.0) 1.26 (32.0) 6.00 (152) 2.24 (56.9)
 20 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Special-Application Valve
Valves for Low-Temperature Service (L60 Series)
Features
■ Temperature rating –65 to 250°F (–53 to 121°C).
■ Available in on-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) 62, 63,
and 65 series sizes in stainless steel and in on-off (2-way)
62, 63, and 65 series sizes in brass.
■ Available with seat materials shown in the Pressure-
Temperature Ratings table below.

Materials of Construction
Valve Body Material
Stainless Steel Brass
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Stem nut 316 SS
Stem bearing Molybdenum disulfide-coated PEEK
Flange seals Buna C
60 SERIES
BALL

Body fasteners (4) 316 SS gr B8M cl 2/A193

Body hex nuts (8 or 4) 316 SS gr 8M str hd/A194
Wetted components listed in italics.
All other components same as shown on page 4.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Valve Body Material
Stainless Steel Brass
Reinforced
PTFE, Carbon/
Seat Reinforced Carbon/ Virgin Glass PTFE, Virgin
Material PTFE Glass PTFE Polyethylene PTFE Polyethylene PTFE
Temperature
°F (°C) Valve Series Working Pressure, psig (bar)
On-Off (2-Way)
62 2200 (151) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 1500 (103) 2000 (137) 1500 (103)
–65 (–53) to
63 2200 (151) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103)
100 (37)
65 2200 (151) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) 1500 (103) 1500 (103) 1500 (103)
Switching (3-Way)
–65 (–53) to
62, 63, 65 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) 1000 (68.9) — —
100 (37)
See Pressure-Temperature Ratings, page 6, for ratings from 100 to 250°F (37 to 121°C).

Ordering Information
To order, insert L in the ordering number.
Examples: SS-L62TS4
SS-L62XTS4
Seal Kits
Seal kit components are the same materials and grades listed
in Materials of Construction.
See Seal Kits, page 27, for ordering information.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 21

Special-Application Valves
Valves for Rapid-Cycle
Service (R60T Series)
The ball valve with an O‑ring stem seal
may be more effective in applications
requiring rapid cycling of a valve or
when packing adjustments may be
difficult.

Materials of Construction Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Material Grade/ Pressure Rating Pressure Rating
Component ASTM Specification Valve at 0 to 100°F at 400°F
Series (–17 to 37°C) (204°C)
Packing bolt➀, spacer ring 316 SS/A276
R62T, R63T, R65T 2200 psig (151 bar)
Top O-ring support PEEK 330 psig (22.7 bar)
R67T, R68T 1500 psig (103 bar)

60 SERIES
Stem bearing PEEK

BALL
Bottom O-ring support Reinforced PTFE
Flange seal, stem O-ring Fluorocarbon FKM
Wetted components listed in italics.
All other components same as shown on page 4.
➀ Coated with molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder.

Ordering Information Seal Kits

To order, insert R before the series Seal kits contain stem spring, stem
Valve Series Kit Ordering Number
designator in the valve ordering number. O‑ring supports, spacer ring, stem
O‑ring, stem bearing, seats, seat R62T SS-91K-R62T
Example: SS-R63TS8
springs, flange seals, lubricant, and R63T SS-91K-R63T
instructions. R65T SS-91K-R65T
Kit components are the same materials R67T SS-91K-R67T
and grades listed in Materials of R68T SS-91K-R68T
Construction.
Select a kit ordering number.
 22 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Valve Handle Options

Lever handles are standard. Also available are: Sleeve Color Designators
■ oval handles
Color Designator Color Designator
■ locking brackets for lever and oval handles
Black BK Orange OG
■ oval latch-lock handles Blue BL Red RD
■ replacement vinyl sleeves. Green GR Yellow YW

Lever Handles
Lever handles with vinyl sleeves are standard, except for
thermal service (T60M) valve handles, which have no sleeves.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.

A B

C
60 SERIES
BALL

Lever-Handle Valves with Colored Sleeves

To order valves with sleeves of colors other than black, add
Dimensions, in. (mm) a dash and a sleeve color designator to the valve ordering
Valve Kit
Series Ordering Number A B C number.
62 SS-51K-62-BK 2.37 0.69 0.98 Example: SS-62TS4-BL
62 3-way SS-51K-62X-BK (60.2) (17.5) (24.9)
63 SS-51K-63-BK Lever Handle Kits
1.46 Kits include:
63 3-way SS-51K-63X-BK
4.50 0.88 (37.1)
T63M SS-51K-63 ■ stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve
(114) (22.4)
1.31 ■ stop plate (not required for 62 or W60 series valves)
W63 SS-51K-W63-BK
(33.3)
■ stem spring (not required for 62 series valves).
65 SS-51K-65-BK
1.69 To order a lever handle kit, select a kit ordering number from
65 3-way SS-51K-65X-BK
6.00 1.12 (42.9) the table at left.
T65M SS-51K-65 (152) (28.4) For sleeve colors other than black, replace BK in the ordering
1.45 number with a sleeve color designator.
W65 SS-51K-W65-BK
(36.8)
67, 68 SS-51K-67-BK Example: SS-51K-62-BL
9.14 1.38 2.50
67, 68 3-way SS-51K-67X-BK Replacement Vinyl Lever-Handle Sleeves
(232) (35.1) (63.5)
T67M, T68M SS-51K-67
Select a basic kit ordering number and add a color
designator.

Valve Basic Kit Valve Basic Kit

Series Ordering Number Series Ordering Number
62 VNL-51K-62- 65, W65 VNL-51K-65-
62 3-way VNL-51K-62X- 65 3-way VNL-51K-65X-
63, W63 VNL-51K-63- 67, 68 VNL-51K-67-
63 3-way VNL-51K-63X- 67, 68 3-way VNL-51K-67X-

Example: VNL-51K-62-BK
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 23

Valve Handle Options

Oval Handles
Oval handles are available. The standard sleeve color is
orange, except for thermal service (T60M) handles, which
have no sleeves.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.

A B

C
Oval-Handle Valves
To order 60 series valves with oval handles and orange vinyl
sleeves, add -JK to the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-62TS4-JK
For other colors, add or insert a dash and a sleeve color
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Kit Ordering designator so that the designators are in alphabetical order.

60 SERIES
Series Number A B C

BALL
Examples: SS-62TS4-BK-JK
62 SS-51K-62K-OG 2.09 1.59 0.88 SS-62TS4-JK-YW
62 3-way SS-51K-62XK-OG (53.1) (40.4) (22.4)
63 SS-51K-63K-OG Oval Handle Kits
2.07 Kits include:
63 3-way SS-51K-63XK-OG
4.09 2.34 (52.6)
T63M SS-51K-63K (104) (59.4) ■ stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve
2.06 ■ stop plate (not required for 62 or W60 series valves)
W63 SS-51K-W63K-OG
(52.3)
■ stem springs (not required for 62 series valves)
65 SS-51K-65K-OG
2.43 ■ stem nut (62 series valves only)
65 3-way SS-51K-65XK-OG
4.72 2.46 (61.7) ■ instructions.
T65M SS-51K-65K (120) (62.5)
2.45 To order an oval handle kit, select a kit ordering number from
W65 SS-51K-W65K-OG the table at left. For sleeve colors other than orange, replace
(62.2)
67, 68 SS-51K-67K-OG OG in the ordering number with a sleeve color designator.
5.59 2.59 2.79 Example: SS-51K-62K-BK
67, 68 3-way SS-51K-67XK-OG
(142) (65.8) (70.9)
T67M, T68M SS-51K-67K
Replacement Vinyl Oval-Handle Sleeves
Select a basic kit ordering number and add a color
designator.

Valve Basic Kit Valve Basic Kit

Series Ordering Number Series Ordering Number
62 VNL-51K-62K- 65, W65 VNL-51K-65K-
62 3-way VNL-51K-62XK- 65 3-way VNL-51K-65XK-
63, W63 VNL-51K-63K- 67, 68 VNL-51K-67K-
63 3-way VNL-51K-63XK- 67, 68 3-way VNL-51K-67XK-

Example: VNL-51K-62K-BK

Handle Extensions
Two- and four-inch handle extensions are available. Contact
your authorized Swagelok representative.
 24 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Valve Handle Options

Locking Brackets for Lever and Oval Handles
Locking brackets can lock valves open or closed with shackle
diameters smaller than:
■ 0.344 in. (8.7 mm)—62, 63, and 65 series
■ 0.375 in. (9.5 mm)—67 and 68 series
Valves with locking brackets cannot be panel mounted.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

A, B, and C dimensions of valves with locking brackets are
the same as those of standard valves.

Lever-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets

To order 60 series lever-handle valves with locking brackets,
62 Series Valves
add -JL to the valve ordering number.
Kits include lever or oval handle. Select a kit ordering number.
Example: SS-62TS4-JL
For a sleeve color other than black for lever handles or orange
For a sleeve color other than black, add or insert a dash for oval handles, replace BK or OG in the kit ordering number
and a sleeve color designator so that the designators are in with a sleeve color designator.
alphabetical order.
60 SERIES
BALL

Examples: SS-62TS4-BL-JL Lever Handle Kit Ordering Numbers

Valve
SS-62TS4-JL-RD Series 4-Bolt Valves 8-Bolt Valves

Oval-Handle Valves with Locking Brackets 62 SS-51K-62L-BK SS-51K-S62L-BK

62 3-way SS-51K-62XL-BK —
To order 60 series oval-handle valves with locking brackets,
add -JLK to the valve ordering number.
Example: SS-62TS4-JLK Oval Handle Kit Ordering Numbers
Valve
Series 4-Bolt Valves 8-Bolt Valves
For a sleeve color other than orange, add or insert a dash
and a sleeve color designator so that the designators are in 62 SS-51K-62LK-OG SS-51K-S62LK-OG
alphabetical order. 62 3-way SS-51K-62XLK-OG —
Examples: SS-62TS4-BL-JLK Examples: SS-51K-62L-BL for a locking bracket kit with lever
SS-62TS4-JLK-YW handle and blue sleeve
SS-51K-62LK-GR for a locking bracket kit with
Locking Bracket/Handle Kits
oval handle and green sleeve
Kits include:
■ stainless steel locking bracket 63, 65, 67, and 68 Series Valves
■ stainless steel stop lock plate (not required for 62 series Kits are for use for valves with either lever or oval handles.
valves) Select a kit ordering number.
■ stem spring (not required for 62 series valves)
Kit Ordering Numbers
Valve
■ body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits only)
Series 4-Bolt Valves 8-Bolt Valves
■ body fasteners (all 4-bolt valve kits and 62 series 8‑bolt 63 SS-51K-63L SS-51K-S63L
valve kits) 63 3-way SS-51K-63XL —
■ stainless steel lever handle with black vinyl sleeve 65 SS-51K-65L SS-51K-S65L
(62 series lever-handle valves only)
65 3-way SS-51K-65XL —
■ stainless steel oval handle with orange vinyl sleeve
67 SS-51K-67L SS-51K-S67L
(62 series oval-handle valves only)
67 3-way SS-51K-67XL —
■ instructions.
68 SS-51K-68L SS-51K-S68L
68 3-way SS-51K-68XL —
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 25

Valve Handle Options

Oval Latch-Lock Handles
Oval latch-lock handles are available
for 63 and 65 series 2-way valves. The
handles can be latched in the open and
closed position and can be locked with
shackle diameters smaller than 0.328
in. (8.3 mm) if desired. Valves with oval
latch-lock handles cannot be panel
mounted.

Ordering Information and

Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and
are subject to change. A B

Valves with Oval Latch‑Lock

Handles
To order 60 series valves with oval C
latch-lock handles, add -LLK to the

60 SERIES
valve ordering number.

BALL
Example: SS-63TS8-LLK
For a sleeve color other than orange,
add or insert a dash and a sleeve color
designator so that the designators are
in alphabetical order. Kit Ordering Numbers Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve 8-Bolt and
Examples: SS-63TS8-BL-LLK Series 4-Bolt Valves Welded Valves A B C
SS-63TS8-LLK-RD
Lock in open and closed position
Oval Latch-Lock Handle Kits 3.05
63 SS-51K-63LLK-OG SS-51K-S63LLK-OG
4.09 2.34 (77.5)
Kits include: (104) (59.4) 2.06
W63 — SS-51K-W63LLK-OG
■ stainless steel oval handle with (52.3)
trigger mechanism and orange vinyl 3.35
65 SS-51K-65LLK-OG SS-51K-S65LLK-OG
sleeve 4.72 2.46 (85.1)
(120) (62.5) 2.45
■ stainless steel stop lock-plate W65 — SS-51K-W65LLK-OG
(62.2)
bracket (not required for W60 series
valves) Lock in open position
4.09 2.34 3.05
■ body hex nuts (4-bolt valve kits only) 63 SS-51K-63LLKO-OG SS-51K-S63LLKO-OG
(104) (59.4) (77.5)
■ body fasteners (4-bolt valve kits only) 4.72 2.46 3.35
65 SS-51K-65LLKO-OG SS-51K-S65LLKO-OG
■ stem spring (120) (62.5) (85.1)
Lock in closed position
■ instructions.
3.05
Select a kit ordering number from the 63 SS-51K-63LLKC-OG SS-51K-S63LLKC-OG
4.09 2.34 (77.5)
table at right. For a sleeve color other (104) (59.4) 2.06
than orange, replace OG in the ordering W63 — SS-51K-W63LLKC-OG
(52.3)
number with a sleeve color designator. 3.35
65 SS-51K-65LLKC-OG SS-51K-S65LLKC-OG
Example: SS-51K-63LLK-BL 4.72 2.46 (85.1)
(120) (62.5) 2.45
W65 — SS-51K-W65LLKC-OG
(62.2)
 26 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Options and Accessories

Low Dead Space Inserts Panel Mount Kits
■ Allow vertical or horizontal
mounting.
■ be installed on panels up
to 3/16 in. (4.8 mm) for 62
series and 1/4 in. (6.4 mm)
thick for 63, 65, 67, and 68
series.
■ Fit oval and lever handle.
■ Reduce fluid entrapment around the ball, stem, and seats ■ Provide template for drilling
while the valve is in the open or closed position. holes.
■ For use in select ball valves; not for use on steam, thermal,
­Ordering Information
or fire series valves.
Select an ordering number.
■ Made from carbon/glass reinforced PTFE.
For 4-Bolt Valves Assembled
To order, add -LD to the valve ordering number. Valve Kit Ordering
with Carbon Steel or Series Number
Examples: SS-62TS4-LD; SS-62XTS4-F8-LD Stainless Steel Bolts
62 MS-PMK-62
Kits for Field Assembly Kits include self-cinching 63 MS-PMK-63
60 SERIES

nut, cover plate, cap screws,

BALL

Select an ordering number. 65 MS-PMK-65

panel mount brackets, two
stainless and two carbon 67 MS-PMK-67
Kit Ordering Numbers
steel bolts, and instructions. 68 MS-PMK-68
Valve Series Low Temperature All Other
On-Off (2-Way) Valves For 4-Bolt Valves Assembled
Valve Kit Ordering
62 TGC-91K-L62-LD TGC-91K-62-LD with Stainless Steel Studs Series Number
63 TGC-91K-L63-LD TGC-91K-63-LD and All 8-Bolt Valves
62 MS-PMK-S62
65 TGC-91K-L65-LD TGC-91K-65-LD Kits include self-cinching 63 MS-PMK-S63
nut, cover plate, cap screws,
67 TGC-91K-L67-LD TGC-91K-67-LD 65 MS-PMK-S65
panel mount brackets, and
68 TGC-91K-L68-LD TGC-91K-68-LD 67 MS-PMK-S67
instructions.
Switching (3-Way) Valves 68 MS-PMK-S68
62 TGC-91K-L62X-LD TGC-91K-62X-LD
63 TGC-91K-L63X-LD TGC-91K-63X-LD
65 TGC-91K-L65X-LD TGC-91K-65X-LD
Vented Valves
67 TGC-91K-L67X-LD TGC-91K-67X-LD
68 TGC-91K-L68X-LD TGC-91K-68X-LD

Vent
Passage

Vent Passage

External Vent Option Internal Vent Option

On-off (2-way) ball valves are available with either an internal

or an external vent. These vents are available for either
upstream or downstream service. For details and ordering
information, refer to Process Ball Valve Vent Options catalog,
MS-02-28.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 27

Options and Accessories

Seal Kits Flange Seal Kits
The swing-out design of 4-bolt valves allows fast and easy Each 4-bolt valve kit contains two flange seals, lubricant, and
maintenance with the valve inline. instructions. To order, add a flange seal material designator
Kits contain: and a uniform size number to basic ordering number -91K-.
■ gland Example: VA70-91K-121
■ packing support
Flange Seal Temperature Range Uniform Size
■ packings Material Designator °F (°C) Number
■ stem bearings Alloy X-750,
INCX –65 to 450 (–53 to 232)
PTFE coated➀
■ stem springs (not included in
62 series seal kits) Buna N BN70 –20 to 250 (–28 to 121) 017 62 series

■ seat subassemblies Buna C➀ BC70 –65 to 250 (–53 to 121) 121 63 series
Ethylene
■ flange seals EP70 –20 to 250 (–28 to 121) 129 65 series
propylene
■ ball (alloy X-750 seal kit only) Fluorocarbon 141 67 series
VA70 –20 to 450 (–28 to 232)
■ lubricant appropriate to seat FKM
147 68 series
material, shown on page 4 Neoprene NE70 –20 to 250 (–28 to 121)
■ instructions. PTFE T 50 to 150 (10 to 65)

60 SERIES
To order a seal kit for a stainless steel or steel valve, add a ➀ 62, 63, and 65 series valves only.

BALL
seat material designator to the basic ordering number.
Example: SS-91K-62T
To order a seal kit for a brass valve, replace SS with B. Fastener Kits
Example: B-91K-62T Each 4-bolt valve kit contains stem nuts, body fasteners,
To order a seal kit for a low-temperature service valves, insert and body nuts. Select an ordering number.
L before the series designator.
Valve Body Material
Example: SS-91K-L62T
Stainless Steel Brass, Steel
Valve
Valve Basic Ordering Seat Material Series Fastener Kit Ordering Number
Series Number Designator 62 316-61K-62 S-61K-62
62 SS-91K-62 T Reinforced PTFE 63 316-61K-63 S-61K-63
63 SS-91K-63 M Alloy X-750 65 316-61K-65 S-61K-65
C Carbon/glass reinforced PTFE
65 SS-91K-65 67 316-61K-67 S-61K-67
P PEEK
67 SS-91K-67 E UHMWPE 68 316-61K-68 S-61K-68
68 SS-91K-68 V Virgin PTFE
 28 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pneumatic Actuators
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum Actuator Pressure
Actuator psig (bar)
Actuator Service Temperature Range At At Maximum
Service Designator °F (°C) 100°F (37°C) Temperature
Standard — –20 to 200 (–28 to 93) 165 (11.3)
High temperature HT 0 to 400 (–17 to 204) 100 (6.8)
200 (13.7)
Low temperature LT –40 to 200 (–40 to 93) 165 (11.3)
Nonfluorocarbon NF –20 to 200 (–28 to 93) 165 (11.3)

Actuator Pressure at System Pressure—On-Off (2-Way) Valves

Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.

Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic Actuation Mode

actuators are compact, lightweight, Spring Return Double Acting
easily mountable, and can be operated Single Dual Single Dual
Seat System Actuator
with standard shop air. They are Valve Material Pressure Actuator Model Minimum Actuator Pressure
available in spring-return and double- Series Designator psig (bar) Model Designator psig (bar)
60 SERIES
BALL

acting modes. On-off (2-way) valves Maximum 31 (90°) -31 75 (5.2) — 45 (3.2) 80 (5.6)
require 90° actuation; switching (3‑way) C, E, T, V
valve rating 33 (90°) -33 70 (4.9) 80 (5.6) 15 (1.1) 20 (1.4)
valves require 180° actuation.
1050 (72.3) 31 (90°) -31 75 (5.2) — 50 (3.5) 85 (5.9)
Valve-actuator assemblies on this page 62 1500 (103) 31 (90°) -31 55 (3.8) 100 (6.9)
are: — —
P 2500 (172) 31 (90°) -31 70 (4.9) —
■ for standard 4-bolt cast stainless 1050 (72.3) 33 (90°) -33 70 (4.9) 80 (5.6) 20 (1.4) 35 (2.5)
steel valve bodies with seat materials 2500 (172) 33 (90°) -33 80 (5.6) 90 (6.3) 25 (1.8) 45 (3.2)
shown 31 (90°) -31 — 100 (6.9) —
■ based on a –20 to 100ºF (–28 to C, E, T, V Maximum
33 (90°) -33 80 (5.6) 40 (2.8) 70 (4.9)
valve rating
37°C) system temperature and the M 33 (90°) -33 — 90 (6.3) —
valve cycling at least once per day 31 (90°) -31 — 100 (6.9) —
but not more than once per hour. 1050 (72.3)
33 (90°) -33 80 (5.6) 35 (2.5) 60 (4.2)
63 —
For other valve body materials or if your P 1500 (103) 33 (90°) -33 85 (5.9) 45 (3.2) 75 (5.2)
application falls outside of this scope, 2000 (137) 33 (90°) -33 95 (6.6) 55 (3.8) 100 (6.9)
contact your authorized Swagelok
2500 (172) 33 (90°) -33 — 70 (4.9) —
representative.
Maximum
Low-pressure spring-return actuators T (fire) 33 (90°) -33 70 (4.9) — —
valve rating
for applications with lower-pressure 33 (90°) -33 — — 100 (6.9) —
actuator air supply are available. C, E, T, V Maximum
35 (90°) -35 75 (5.2) 80 (5.6) 40 (2.8) 70 (4.9)
Contact your authorized Swagelok valve rating
M 35 (90°) -35 — 60 (4.2) —
representative.
1050 (72.3) 33 (90°) -33 95 (6.6) — 50 (3.5) 90 (6.3)
For technical data, including materials 1500 (103) 33 (90°) -33 — 85 (5.9) —
of construction, air displacement, and 65
P 1050 (72.3) 35 (90°) -35 65 (4.5) 80 (5.6) 25 (1.8) 40 (2.8)
weight, refer to Ball Valve Actuation
1500 (103) 35 (90°) -35 75 (5.2) 35 (2.5) 60 (4.2)
Options catalog, MS‑02‑343.
2500 (172) 35 (90°) -35 80 (5.6) 50 (3.5) 90 (6.3)
—
Maximum
T (fire) 35 (90°) -35 70 (4.9) — —
valve rating
C, E, T, V Maximum 35 (90°) -35 90 (6.3) 50 (3.5) 90 (6.3)
• Caution: Actuated assemblies M valve rating 35 (90°) -35 — 80 (5.6) —
must be properly aligned 1050 (72.3) 35 (90°) -35 80 (5.6) 45 (3.2) 70 (4.9)
and supported. Inadequate 67 P 1500 (103) 35 (90°) -35 90 (6.3) — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
alignment or improper support 2000 (137) 35 (90°) -35 — 75 (5.2) —
of the actuated assembly may Maximum
T (fire) 35 (90°) -35 80 (5.6) — —
result in leakage or premature valve rating
valve failure. C, E, T, V Maximum 35 (90°) -35 — 85 (5.9) —
M valve rating 35 (90°) -35 — 100 (6.9) —
68 1050 (72.3) 35 (90°) -35 90 (6.3) — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
P 1500 (103) 35 (90°) -35 75 (5.2) —
—
2000 (137) 35 (90°) -35 90 (6.3) —
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 29

Pneumatic Actuators
Actuator Pressure at System Pressure—Switching (3-Way) Valves
Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.

Actuation Mode
Spring Return Double Acting

Seat System Actuator Single Dual Single Dual

Valve Material Pressure Actuator Model Minimum Actuator Pressure
Series Designator psig (bar) Model Designator psig (bar)
51 (180°) -51 75 (5.2) — 45 (3.2) 70 (4.9)
C, E, T, V
Maximum 53 (180°) -53 75 (5.2) 80 (5.6) 15 (1.1) 25 (1.8)
62
valve rating 51 (180°) -51 — — 50 (3.5) 85 (5.9)
P
53 (180°) -53 65 (4.5) 75 (5.2) 20 (1.4) 35 (2.5)
51 (180°) -51 — 95 (6.6) —
C, E, T, V
Maximum 53 (180°) -53 80 (5.6) 40 (2.8) 70 (4.9)
63 —
valve rating 51 (180°) -51 — 85 (5.9) —
P
53 (180°) -53 80 (5.6) 30 (2.1) 60 (4.2)
53 (180°) -53 — 85 (5.9) —
C, E, T, V
Maximum 55 (180°) -55 80 (5.6) — 30 (2.1) 50 (3.5)
65
valve rating 53 (180°)

60 SERIES
-53 — 50 (3.5) 90 (6.3)

BALL
P
55 (180°) -55 75 (5.2) 85 (5.9) 20 (1.4) 30 (2.1)
C, E, T, V Maximum 55 (180°) -55 85 (5.9) 50 (3.5) 80 (5.6)
67 —
P valve rating 55 (180°) -55 60 (4.2) 35 (2.5) 65 (4.5)
C, E, T, V Maximum 55 (180°) -55 90 (6.3) 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
68 —
P valve rating 55 (180°) -55 — 55 (3.8) 100 (6.9)

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C D
SS-63TS8 - 33 D HT
A Valve Ordering Number C Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
C = Spring return, normally closed FP = Fusible plug➀
B Actuator Model D = Double acting HT = High temperature➁
Based on valve series and seat O = Spring return, normally open LT = Low temperature
material, select actuator designator. S =Spring return, switching NF = Nonfluorocarbon➂
See Actuator Pressure at System (3‑way) valves None = Standard
Pressure tables, page 28 for on- ➀ Available for fire series valves: a fail-safe
off (2-way) valves and on this page pneumatic actuator that contains a Swagelok
for switching (3-way) valves. fusible plug and a Swagelok mud-dauber
fitting. The fusible plug melts if the external
31 = 90° actuation temperature reaches 280°F (137°C), relieving
33 = 90° actuation pressure in the actuator and allowing the valve
to cycle closed.
35 = 90° actuation ➁ Suggested for steam service and thermal
51 = 180° actuation service valves.
53 = 180° actuation ➂ Suggested for factory-assembled valves with
UHMWPE seats and packing.
55 = 180° actuation

For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one

actuator), add DM to the ordering number.
Example: SS-63TS8-33DDM
 30 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pneumatic Actuators
Ordering Information
Kits for Field Assembly
Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number

A B C
MS - 1 31 - DA -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Actuator Service
Based on valve series and seat DA = Double acting -FP = Fusible plug➀
material, select actuator designator. SR = Spring return -HT = High temperature➁
See Actuator Pressure at System -LT = Low temperature
Pressure tables, page 28 for on- -NF = Nonfluorocarbon
off (2-way) valves and page 29 for None = Standard
switching (3-way) valves.
➀ Available for fire series valves: a fail-safe
31 = 90° actuation pneumatic actuator that contains a Swagelok
33 = 90° actuation fusible plug and a Swagelok mud-dauber
60 SERIES

fitting. The fusible plug melts if the external

35 = 90° actuation
BALL

temperature reaches 280°F (137°C), relieving

51 = 180° actuation pressure in the actuator and allowing the valve
to cycle closed.
53 = 180° actuation ➁ Suggested for steam service and thermal
55 = 180° actuation  service valves.

Mounting Bracket Kits

Mounting
Mounting bracket kits for standard 4-bolt cast stainless steel Flow Pattern Bracket Kit
valves contain: Valve Actuator or Ordering
Series Model Valve Type Number
■ 304 stainless steel mounting bracket
On-off, switching MS-MB-62
■ 420 stainless steel actuator roll pin (31, 33, 51, and 53 31 (90°), 51 (180°)
actuators) or cadmium-plated carbon steel shoulder screw Steam MS-MB-S62
62
and lock nut (35 and 55 actuators) On-off, switching MS-MB-62-133
33 (90°), 53 (180°)
■ cadmium-plated carbon steel coupling Steam MS-MB-S62-133
■ 316 stainless steel lock tab On-off, switching,
MS-MB-63-131
63 31 (90°), 51 (180°) steam
■ two cadmium-plated carbon steel socket head cap screws
All welded MS-MB-73-131
■ two 316 SS gr 8M body hex nuts
On-off, switching,
■ two 316 SS gr B8M cl 2 body fasteners MS-MB-63
63 33 (90°), 53 (180°) fire, steam, thermal
■ two cadmium-plated carbon steel gr 8 body fasteners All welded MS-MB-73-133
■ instructions. On-off, switching,
MS-MB-65
65 33 (90°), 53 (180°) steam, thermal
Mounting bracket kits for all-welded (W60T series) valves All welded MS-MB-75-133
contain:
On-off, switching,
■ 304 stainless steel top plate MS-MB-65-135
65 35 (90°), 55 (180°) fire, steam, thermal
■ two 304 stainless steel side plates All welded MS-MB-75-135
■ cadmium-plated carbon steel shoulder screw and lock nut 67 35 (90°), 55 (180°) All MS-MB-67
(35 and 55 actuator models) 68 35 (90°), 55 (180°) All MS-MB-68
■ 304 stainless steel coupling (W63T series) or cadmium
plated carbon steel coupling (W65T series)
■ two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or
two 18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) hex bolts
■ two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or
two 18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) hex nuts
■ two 316 stainless steel (33 actuator with W65T series) or two
18-8 stainless steel (all other combinations) lock washers
■ two 18-8 stainless steel socket head cap screws
■ 304 stainless steel wall mount (33 actuator with W63T
series only)
■ instructions.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 31

Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.
A
A (spring return)
B
B (double acting)
C
C D D C K
K 2 mounting
2 mounting holes
holes

E
E J J
J J

62 series
mounting K
C 2 mounting
K bracket F
2 mounting F holes
for 31 and
holes 51 model
actuators
K
2 mounting

60 SERIES
holes G
L

BALL
H
All Welded

Flow
Pattern
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve or Valve
Series Type A B C D E F G H J K L
31 and 51 Models
On-off, 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.50 1.33 1.31 3.04 1/8 in. 0.34
62 —
switching (125) (104) (16.0) (22.9) (88.9) (33.8) (33.3) (77.2) NPT (8.6)
On-off, 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.38 1.92 1.31 3.04 1/8 in. 0.34
—
switching (125) (104) (16.0) (22.9) (85.9) (488) (33.3) (77.2) NPT (8.6)
63
All 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.52 1.86 1.31 3.04 1/8 in. 0.34 1.41
welded (125) (104) (16.0) (22.9) (89.4) (47.2) (33.3) (77.2) NPT (8.6) (35.8)
33 and 53 Models
On-off, 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.63 1.21 1.75 4.07 1/8 in. 0.34
62 —
switching (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (118) (30.7) (44.4) (103) NPT (8.6)
On-off, 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.63 1.64 1.75 4.07 1/8 in. 0.34
—
switching (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (118) (41.7) (44.4) (103) NPT (8.6)
63
All 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.51 1.87 1.75 4.07 1/8 in. 0.34 1.41
welded (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (115) (47.5) (44.4) (103) NPT (8.6) (35.8)
On-off, 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.63 2.54 1.75 4.07 1/8 in. 0.34
—
switching (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (118) (64.5) (44.4) (103) NPT (8.6)
65
All 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.68 2.47 1.75 4.07 1/8 in. 0.34 1.72
welded (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (119) (62.7) (44.4) (103) NPT (8.6) (43.7)
35 and 55 Models
On-off, 11.9 8.41 2.88 1.71 4.75 4.41 2.00 5.15 1/2 in. 0.53
—
switching (302) (214) (73.0) (43.5) (121) (112) (50.8) (131) NPT (13.5)
65
All 11.9 8.41 2.88 1.71 6.53 2.63 2.00 5.15 1/2 in. 0.53 2.13
welded (302) (214) (73.0) (43.5) (166) (66.8) (50.8) (131) NPT (13.5) (54.1)
On-off, 11.9 8.41 2.88 1.71 4.75 4.93 2.00 5.15 1/2 in. 0.53
67 —
switching (302) (214) (73.0) (43.5) (121) (125) (50.8) (131) NPT (13.5)
On-off, 11.9 8.41 2.88 1.71 4.75 5.20 2.00 5.15 1/2 in. 0.53
68 —
switching (302) (214) (73.0) (43.5) (121) (132) (50.8) (131) NPT (13.5)
 32 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8.0 bar). See
Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum
actuator pressures.

Actuator Temperature
Actuator Service Range
Service Designator °F (°C)
–40 to 176
Standard —
(–40 to 80)
High 5 to 302
HT
temperature (–15 to 150)

Swagelok 63 series valve

with actuator, solenoid,
and proximity sensor.
Minimum Actuator Pressure
These Swagelok rack and pinion
Actuation Mode
pneumatic actuators are ISO 5211
Spring Return Double Spring Double
compliant and are suitable for general Model Designators Return Acting
Acting
60 SERIES

applications. They are available in

BALL

Valve Actuator Normally Normally Actuator Model Minimum Actuator

spring-return and double-acting Series Model Closed Open Model Designator Pressure, psig (bar)
modes. On-off (2-way) valves require On-Off (2-Way) Valves
90° actuation; switching (3‑way) valves
A10 -A10D — 36 (2.5)
require 180° actuation (90° actuation 62 A15 -A15C4 -A15O4
for valves with L flow pattern). A15 -A15D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
63 A30 -A30C4 -A30O4 A30 -A30D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
Valve-actuator assemblies on this page
are: 65 A60 -A60C5 -A60O5 A60 -A60D 72 (5.0) 36 (2.5)
■ for standard 4-bolt cast stainless A100 -A100C5 -A100O5 65 (4.5)
67 A100 -A100D 43 (3.0)
steel valve bodies with reinforced A150 -A150C4 -A150O4 61 (4.2)
PTFE seats and packings A150 -A150C5 -A150O5 65 (4.5)
68 A100 -A100D 58 (4.0)
■ based on a –20 to 100ºF (–28 to A220 -A220C4 -A220O4 50 (3.5)
37°C) system temperature and the Switching (3-Way) Valves
valve cycling at least once per day 62 A15 A15 -A15XD 36 (2.5)
but not more than once per hour.
63 A30 A30 -A30XD 36 (2.5)
For other valve body and seat materials
65 A60 — — A60 -A60XD — 36 (2.5)
or if your application falls outside of this
67 A100 A100 -A100XD 43 (3.0)
scope, contact your Swagelok sales
and service representative. 68 A100 A100 -A100XD 58 (4.0)

For technical data, including actuator Switching (3-Way) Valves with L Flow Pattern
materials of construction and weight, 62 A15 -A15S4 A15 -A15D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
refer to Ball Valve Actuation Options 63 A30 -A30S4 A30 -A30D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
catalog, MS‑02‑343. 65 A60 -A60S5 A60 -A60D 72 (5.0) 36 (2.5)
For additional information on selecting A100 -A100S5 — 65 (4.5)
and sizing ISO 5211-compliant 67 A100 -A100D 43 (3.0)
A150 -A150S4 61 (4.2)
actuators, refer to Actuated Ball Valve
A150 -A150S5 65 (4.5)
Selection Guide—ISO 5211-Compliant 68 A100 -A100D 58 (4.0)
Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits A220 -A220S4 50 (3.5)
catalog, MS‑02‑136.

• Caution: Actuated assemblies

must be properly aligned and
supported. Improper alignment
or inadequate support of the
actuated assembly may result
in leakage or premature valve
failure.
 Ball Valves, General Purpose and Special Application—60 Series 33

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C
SS-63TS8 -A30D HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, actuation HT = High temperature
mode, and flow pattern, select None = Standard
actuator designator. See Minimum
Actuator Pressure table,
page 32.

Kits for Field Assembly

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.

60 SERIES
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number

BALL
A B C
MS - A30-4 - DIN -HT
A Actuator Model B Coupling Drive Type C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, actuation DIN -HT = High temperature
mode, and flow pattern, select None = Standard
actuator designator. See Minimum
Actuator Pressure table,
page 32, and Actuator Model
Designators table below.

Actuator Model Designators Mounting Bracket Kits

Swagelok ISO 5211 mounting bracket kits for 4-bolt cast
Spring Spring Double
Return Return Double Acting stainless steel valves contain:
Valve Actuator Model Acting Model ■ 316 stainless steel
Series Model Designator Model Designator mounting bracket Valve Mounting Bracket Kit
On-Off (2-Way) Valves and Series Ordering Number
■ four A4 stainless
Switching (3-Way) Valves with L Flow Pattern 62 SS-MB-62-F04-11DIN-M
steel socket head
A10 A10-DA 63 SS-MB-63-F05-14DIN-M
62 A15 A15-4 cap screws (A4
A15 A15-DA is approximately 65 SS-MB-65-F05-14DIN-M
63 A30 A30-4 A30 A30-DA equivalent to AISI 316.) 67 SS-MB-67-F07-17DIN-M
65 A60 A60-5 A60 A60-DA ■ 316 stainless steel 68 SS-MB-68-F07-17DIN-M
A100 A100-5 coupling
67 A100 A100-DA
A150 A150-4 ■ 316 stainless steel wall mounting bracket
A150 A150-4 ■ two 316 stainless steel lock washers
68 A100 A100-DA
A220 A220-4➀ ■ 302 stainless steel upper and lower grounding springs

Switching (3-Way) Valves ■ 316 stainless steel lock tab

62 A15 A15 A15-XDA ■ two 316 stainless steel hex nuts and bolts
63 A30 A30 A30-XDA ■ lubricant and MSDS
—
65 A60 A60 A60-XDA ■ instructions.
67, 68 A100 A100 A100-XDA For 60 series valves with other body materials and for
➀ Requires adapter insert MS-ADH22/17, available separately, to reduce 8‑bolt 60 series valves, contact your authorized Swagelok
actuator coupling receptacle to 0.67 in. (17 mm) square. representative.
 34 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators Options for

Dimensions ISO 5211-Compliant and
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to
Swagelok Pneumatic
change. Actuators
A
1.57
(39.9)➀

Swagelok offers a range of accessories

to enhance instrumentation and
C
2 mounting process ball valve performance and
60 SERIES

holes control, including solenoid valves, limit

BALL

0.53 (13.5)
dia switches, and position sensors. Factory
assemblies and kits for field assembly
4.50 are available.
D
(114)
E Refer to Ball Valve Actuation Options
catalog, MS‑02‑343, for additional
➀ A220 model: 2.56 (65.0). information.

Electric Actuators
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Actuator Swagelok electric actuators are
Series Model A B C D E
rugged and lightweight, and connect
On-Off (2-Way) Valves alternating- or direct-current
A10 4.65 (118) 4.21 (107) 1.54 (39.1) 2.90 (73.7) 4.61 (117) power sources. Refer to Electric
62
A15 5.33 (135) 4.33 (110) 1.54 (39.1) 2.90 (73.7) 4.61 (117) Actuators—141 and 142 Series catalog,
63 A30 6.04 (153) 4.96 (126) 1.62 (41.1) 2.92 (74.2) 4.83 (123) MS-01-35, for additional information.
A60 8.01 (203) 6.42 (163) 2.18 (55.4) 3.30 (83.8) 5.41 (137)
65
A100 9.46 (240) 6.93 (176) 2.18 (55.4) 3.30 (83.8) 5.52 (140) Oxygen Service Hazards
A100 9.46 (240) 7.17 (182) 2.43 (61.7) 3.58 (90.9) 5.98 (152) For more information about hazards
67 and risks of oxygen-enriched systems,
A150 10.2 (259) 7.65 (194) 2.43 (61.7) 3.58 (90.9) 6.06 (154)
refer to Oxygen System Safety
A100 9.46 (240) 7.17 (182) 2.58 (65.5) 3.57 (90.7) 5.98 (152)
technical report, MS-06-13.
68 A150 10.2 (259) 7.65 (194) 2.58 (65.5) 3.57 (90.7) 6.05 (154)
A220 11.9 (302) 8.75 (222) 2.58 (65.5) 3.57 (90.7) 6.41 (163)
Switching (3-Way) Valves
62 A15XD 7.55 (192) 4.33 (110) 1.54 (39.1) 2.90 (73.7) 4.61 (117)
63 A30XD 8.50 (216) 4.96 (126) 1.62 (41.1) 2.92 (74.2) 4.83 (123)
65 A60XD 11.4 (290) 6.42 (163) 2.18 (55.4) 3.30 (83.8) 5.41 (137)
67 A100XD 13.2 (335) 7.17 (182) 2.43 (61.7) 3.58 (90.9) 5.98 (152)
68 A100XD 13.2 (335) 7.17 (182) 2.58 (65.5) 3.57 (90.7) 5.98 (152)

Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers.
MS-01-146, RevY, November 2019
 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.

Swagelok, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting, IGC, Kenmac,

Warranty Information Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO, VCR, Ultra-Torr,
Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
your authorized Swagelok representative. AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
Safe Product Selection FM —TM FM Global
Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
When selecting a product, the total system design must Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, NACE—TM NACE International
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
responsibilities of the system designer and user. Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
other manufacturers. © 2019 Swagelok Company
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 1
www.swagelok.com

Tr unnion Ball Valve s

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

83 Se r ie s a nd H83 Se r ie s
■ Working pressures up to 10 000 psig (689 bar)

■ 1/8 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm Swagelok® tube fitting or NPT end connections

■ 316 stainless steel materials

 2 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Contents
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Important Information About Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Ordering Information and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Options and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Flow Data at 70°F (20°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 ISO 5211-Compliant Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Low Fugitive Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Features
■ Compact, maximum-flow design
■ Low operating torque
■ 2- or 3-way flow patterns Heavy-duty handle
indicates flow direction.
■ Panel mounting
83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

■ Pneumatic and electric actuators

available
■ Low Emissions certification per API
641 available
Bottom-loaded stem:
■ prevents stem blowout
■ enhances system safety.

Spring-loaded seats: Trunnion-style ball:

■ provide leak-tight integrity in both low- and ■ prevents ball blowout
high-pressure systems ■ contributes to low operating
■ contribute to low operating torque torque.
■ reduce seat wear from pressure surges.

Important Information Technical Data

About Ball Valves
Temperature Pressure Rating at 100°F (37°C) Flow
• Swagelok ball valves are Seat Rating psig (bar) Coefficient
designed to be used in a fully Material °F (°C) Stainless Steel Alloy 400 (Cv)
open or fully closed position. 83 Series
• Valves that have not been cycled PCTFE,
0 to 250
2-way valves—
for a period of time may have a reinforced 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 1.0 to 1.6
(–17 to 121)
higher initial actuation torque. nylon depending on
end connection;
PEEK 0 to 450 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 3-way valves—
PTFE (–17 to 232) 1500 (103) 0.75
H83 Series
2-way valves—
6000 to 10 000 1.0 to 1.6
0 to 450 (413 to 689) depending on
PEEK —
(–17 to 232) depending on end connection;
end connection 3-way valves—
0.75
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 3

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
83 Series Material 316 SS Alloy 400
Pressure-temperature ratings for PCTFE, PCTFE,
83 series valves are based on Seat Material Nylon PTFE PEEK Nylon PTFE PEEK
listed seat materials, fluorocarbon Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
FKM O­‑rings, and reinforced PTFE 0 (–17) to 100 (37) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 1500 (103) 5000 (344)
backup rings. 150 (65) 3000 (206) 1125 (77.5) 5800 (399) 3000 (206) 1125 (77.5) 4690 (323)
Low-temperature L83 series ball 200 (93) 2000 (137) 750 (51.6) 5000 (344) 2000 (137) 750 (51.6) 4390 (302)
250 (121) 1000 (68.9) 625 (43.0) 4100 (282) 1000 (68.9) 625 (43.0) 4100 (282)
valves are available, see page 9.
300 (148) — 500 (34.4) 3200 (220) — 500 (34.4) 3200 (220)
350 (176) — 375 (25.8) 2300 (158) — 375 (25.8) 2300 (158)
400 (204) — 250 (17.2) 1400 (96.4) — 250 (17.2) 1400 (96.4)
450 (232) — 125 (8.6) 500 (34.4) — 125 (8.6) 500 (34.4)

H83 Series
Material 316 SS
Pressure-temperature ratings for F2, F4,
H83 series valves are based on End Connections S4, S6MM S10MM S6, S8MM S8 S12MM
PEEK seats, fluorocarbon FKM Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
O‑rings, and reinforced PTFE
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 10 000 (689) 8400 (578) 7500 (516) 6700 (461) 6600 (454)
backup rings. 150 (65) 7 500 (516) 7500 (516) 7500 (516) 6700 (461) 6600 (454)
Low-temperature LH83 series 200 (93) 5 000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344)

83 / H83
SERIES
250 (121) 4 100 (282) 4100 (282) 4100 (282) 4100 (282) 4100 (282)

BALL
ball valves are available, see
page 9. 300 (148) 3 200 (220) 3200 (220) 3200 (220) 3200 (220) 3200 (220)
350 (176) 2 300 (158) 2300 (158) 2300 (158) 2300 (158) 2300 (158)
400 (204) 1 400 (96.4) 1400 (96.4) 1400 (96.4) 1400 (96.4) 1400 (96.4)
450 (232) 500 (34.4) 500 (34.4) 500 (34.4) 500 (34.4) 500 (34.4)

Flow Data at 70°F (20°C)

83 Series 2-Way H83 Series 2-Way
0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 1.2 Cv 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 1.2 Cv

Pressure Drop to Pressure Drop to

Atmosphere (∆p) Air Flow Water Flow Atmosphere (∆p) Air Flow Water Flow
psi (bar) std ft3/min (std L/min) U.S. gal/min (L/min) psi (bar) std ft3/min (std L/min) U.S. gal/min (L/min)
10
(0.68) 14
(390) 3.8
(14) 150
(10.3) 92
(2600) 15
(56)
50
(3.4) 36
(1000) 8.5
(32) 600
(41.3) 340
(9600) 29
(100)
100
(6.8) 64
(1800) 12
(45) 1000
(68.9) 570
(16 100) 38
(140)

83 Series 3-Way H83 Series 3-Way

0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 0.75 Cv 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) orifice, 0.75 Cv

Pressure Drop to Pressure Drop to

Atmosphere (∆p) Air Flow Water Flow Atmosphere (∆p) Air Flow Water Flow
psi (bar) std ft3/min (std L/min) U.S. gal/min (L/min) psi (bar) std ft3/min (std L/min) U.S. gal/min (L/min)
10
(0.68) 8.0
(220) 2.4
(9.0) 150
(10.3) 57
(1600) 9.2
(34)
50
(3.4) 23
(650) 5.3
(20) 600
(41.3) 210
(5900) 18
(68)
100
(6.8) 40
(1100) 7.5
(28) 1000
(68.9) 350
(9900) 24
(90)

Testing
Every Swagelok trunnion ball valve is factory tested with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar). Seats have a maximum allowable leak
rate of 0.1 std cm3/min. Shell testing is performed to a requirement of no detectable leakage with a liquid leak detector.
Low Fugitive Emissions
The American Petroleum Institute’s API 641 tests for fugitive emissions to atmosphere for quarter turn ball valves. The tests
are conducted at a third party lab and certify that at no point in the test did the valve leak in excess of 100 ppm of methane.
Certificates stating that the valve is certified for Low Emissions service are available for the 83 series with Fluorocarbon FKM
stem O-rings. For more information, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.
Cleaning and Packaging
All Swagelok trunnion ball valves are cleaned and packaged in accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging
(SC-10) catalog, MS-06-62. Cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11)
catalog, MS-06-63, to ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements stated in ASTM G93 Level C are available as
an option for 83 series valves, see page 10.
 4 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Materials of Construction
83 Series

1
2

5 15
22
17 19 21
16

18 20
83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

Valve Body Material

2-Way 3-Way
Stainless Steel Alloy 400
6 6 2-Way 3-Way 2-Way 3-Way
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
1 Handle Phenolic with brass insert
2 Set screw S17400 SS
3 Panel nut 316 SS/B783
9 4 Stop pins
8 Stainless steel
7 (2-way—2; 3-way—1)
7 5 Body 316 SS/A479 Alloy 400/B164
10 10
6 Stem 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164
7 Stem O-rings
Fluorocarbon FKM
(2-way—2; 3-way—1)
11
11 8 Primary stem backup ring — PEEK — PEEK
9 Secondary stem backup ring — PTFE/D1710 — PTFE/D1710
Reinforced Reinforced
10 Stem bearing PEEK PEEK
PTFE PTFE
11 Ball➀ 316 SS/A276 S21800/A276 Alloy 400/B164
12 13 14 Reinforced Reinforced
12 Trunnion backup rings (2) — —
PTFE PTFE
Fluorocarbon Fluorocarbon
13 Trunnion O-rings (2) — —
FKM FKM
14 Trunnion bearings — PEEK — PEEK
PCTFE/AMS 3650, PTFE/D1710,
15 Seats (2)
reinforced nylon, or PEEK
16 Seat carriers (2) 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164
17 Seat springs (6 with PTFE;
Alloy X-750/AMS 5542
12 with all others)
18 Seat carrier guides (2) 316 SS/A276 Alloy 400/B164
19 Seat carrier backup rings (4) Reinforced PTFE
20 Seat carrier O-rings (2) Fluorocarbon FKM
21 End screw seals (2) PTFE/D1710
22 End screws (2) 316 SS/A479 Alloy 400/B164
Fluorinated-based (all valves);
Wetted lubricants
tungsten disulfide additive (valves with PEEK seats)
Nonwetted lubricant Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ Ball trunnions are PTFE coated in 83 series 2-way valve.
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 5

Materials of Construction
H83 Series

1
2

5 13
20
15 17 19
14

16 18

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL
2-Way 3-Way
Material Grade/
Component ASTM Specification
6
1 Handle Phenolic with brass insert
2 Set screw S17400 SS
3 Panel nut 316 SS/B783
4 Stop pin
Stainless steel
(2-way—2; 3-way—1)
9 5 Body 316 SS/A479
8
7 6 Stem 316 SS/A276
10 7 Stem O-ring Fluorocarbon FKM
8 Primary stem backup ring PEEK
9 Secondary stem backup ring PTFE/D1710
10 Stem bearing PEEK
2-Way 3-Way
11 Ball➀ S21800/A276
12 Plug (2-way only) 316 SS/A276 —
13 Seats (2) PEEK
14 Seat carriers (2) 316 SS/A276

11 11 15 Seat springs (12) Alloy X-750/AMS 5542

16 Seat carrier guides (2) 316 SS/A276
17 Seat carrier backup rings (4) Reinforced PTFE
18 Seat carrier O-rings (2) Fluorocarbon FKM
19 End screw seals (2) PTFE/D1710
20 End screws (2) 316 SS/A479
Tungsten disulfide and
Wetted lubricants
12 fluorinated-based
Molybdenum disulfide with
Nonwetted lubricant
hydrocarbon binder coating
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ Ball trunnions are Xylan® coated.
 6 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube
fitting nuts finger-tight.

83 Series 2-Way 83 Series 3-Way

1.50 1.50
(38.1) (38.1)

0.38 (9.7) max 0.38 (9.7) max

29/32 (23.0) panel thickness panel thickness
1.84 29/32 (23.0)
panel hole 1.83 panel hole
(46.7)
drill (46.5) drill

0.51 0.50
(13.0) (12.7)

0.58
(14.7)
1.06
(26.9)
B
A
1/4 in. female
83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

B NPT port
A

H83 Series

1.50
(38.1)

0.38 (9.7) max

29/32 (23.0) panel thickness
1.84 panel
(46.7) hole drill

0.50
(12.7)

1.06
(26.9)

1/4 in. female

B NPT port
A
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 7

Ordering Information and Dimensions

83 Series H83 Series
Select a valve ordering number from Valve ordering numbers specify a Select a valve ordering number from
the table below. PCTFE seat. To order valves with the table below.
Valve ordering numbers specify other seat materials, replace K in the
stainless steel material. To order valves ordering number with a seat material
of alloy 400 material, replace SS in the designator.
ordering number with M.
Seat Material Designator
Example: M-83KF2
PTFE T
Reinforced nylon N
PEEK P

Example: SS-83TF2

Flow 83 Series H83 Series

End Connections Dimensions, in. (mm)
Coefficient Valve Valve
Type Size (Cv) Ordering Number Ordering Number A B
2-Way Valve, 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) Orifice
1/8 in. 1.2 SS-83KF2 SS-H83PF2 2.94
(74.7) 1.47
(37.3)

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL
Female SS-83KF4 — 2.94
(74.7) 1.47
(37.3)
1/4 in. 1.0
NPT — SS-H83PF4 3.93
(99.8) 1.97
(50.0)
1/2 in.➀ 1.2 SS-83KF8 — 4.25
(108) 2.13
(54.1)
1/4 in. 1.6 SS-83KS4 SS-H83PS4 4.14
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Fractional
Swagelok 3/8 in. 1.4 SS-83KS6 SS-H83PS6 4.39
(112) 2.19
(55.6)
tube fitting 1/2 in.➀ 1.0 SS-83KS8 SS-H83PS8 4.60
(117) 2.30
(58.4)
6 mm 1.6 SS-83KS6MM SS-H83PS6MM 4.14
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Metric 8 mm 1.5 SS-83KS8MM SS-H83PS8MM 4.15
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Swagelok
tube fitting 10 mm 1.3 SS-83KS10MM SS-H83PS10MM 4.41
(112) 2.20
(55.9)
12 mm➀ 1.0 SS-83KS12MM SS-H83PS12MM 4.60
(117) 2.30
(58.4)
3-Way Valve, 0.187 in. (4.75 mm) Orifice
1/8 in. SS-83XKF2 SS-H83XPF2 2.94
(74.7) 1.47
(37.3)
Female
SS-83XKF4 — 2.94
(74.7) 1.47
(37.3)
NPT➁ 1/4 in.
— SS-H83XPF4 3.93
(99.8) 1.97
(50.0)
1/4 in. SS-83XKS4 SS-H83XPS4 4.14
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Fractional
Swagelok 3/8 in. SS-83XKS6 SS-H83XPS6 4.39
(112) 2.19
(55.6)
tube fitting➁ 0.75
1/2 in.➀ SS-83XKS8 SS-H83XPS8 4.60
(117) 2.30
(58.4)
6 mm SS-83XKS6MM SS-H83XPS6MM 4.14
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Metric 8 mm SS-83XKS8MM SS-H83XPS8MM 4.15
(105) 2.07
(52.6)
Swagelok
tube fitting➁ 10 mm SS-83XKS10MM SS-H83XPS10MM 4.41
(112) 2.20
(55.9)
12 mm➀ SS-83XKS12MM SS-H83XPS12MM 4.60
(117) 2.30
(58.4)
For more information about pressure ratings of valves with tube fitting end connections, refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107.
➀ Not recommended for panel mounting.
➁ Bottom port of all 3-way valves is 1/4 in. female NPT.
 8 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Options and Accessories

83 and H83 Series Handles 83 Series Seal Kits
Black phenolic handles are Seal kits contain components of the same materials as new
Handle Designator
standard. Colored phenolic, components. See Materials of Construction, page 4, or
oval, and 316 stainless steel Black phenolic -BK Low-Temperature Service,
bar handles are available. Blue phenolic -BL page 9. Seat Material Designator
To order, add a handle Green phenolic -GR PEEK P
For a complete ordering
designator to the valve Orange phenolic -OG number, add a seat material PCTFE K
ordering number. Red phenolic -RD designator to a basic seal kit PTFE T
Example: SS-83KF2-RD Yellow phenolic -YW ordering number. Reinforced
N
Example: SS-9K-83K nylon
Stainless steel
Handle Kits bar
-SH
Handle kits contain a handle Oval -K Basic Seal Kit
and set screw. Valve Ordering Kit
Series Number Contents
Standard black phenolic handle kit ordering number:
83 O-rings, stem bearing, ball, seat
PH‑5K‑83-BK SS-9K-83
2-way subassemblies (seats and seat
To order handles in other colors, replace -BK in the kit carriers), seat springs, end screw
ordering number with a handle designator. Low- seals, lubricant, lubricant Material
temperature 83 SS-9K-L83 Safety Data Sheet (MSDS),
Example: PH-5K-83-RD 2-way instructions
83 / H83
SERIES

Oval handles are available factory assembled only.

BALL

83 Stem, handle set screw, O-rings,

SS-9K-83X backup rings, bearings, ball, seat
Stainless steel bar handle kit ordering number: SS‑5K‑83 3-way
subassemblies (seats and seat
Low- carriers), seat springs, end screw
Locking Handle temperature SS-9K-L83X seals, lubricant, lubricant MSDS,
83 3-way instructions
The stainless steel locking
handle accommodates Seal kit ordering numbers specify stainless steel material. For
shackle diameters from alloy 400 material, replace SS with M for in the basic ordering
1/4 to 5/16 in. (6.4 to 7.9 number.
mm) and a 3/4 in. (19.0 mm)
Example: M-9K-83K
minimum shackle length. It
can lock 83 series and H83
series 2-way and 3-way
H83 Series Seal Kits
valves in the open or closed Seal kits contain components of the same materials as new
position. components. See Materials of Construction, page 5, or
Low-Temperature Service, page 9.
To order a valve with a factory-assembled locking handle,
add -LH to a valve ordering number. Seal Kit
Valve Ordering Kit
Examples: SS-83KS8-LH Series Number Contents
SS-83XKS8-LH
H83 2-way SS-9K-H83P Stem, handle set screw,
Locking Handle Kits Low-temperature O­-rings, backup rings,
SS-9K-LH83P stem bearing, ball, seat
H83 2-way
The stainless steel locking handle kit is available for replacing subassemblies (seats and
an existing phenolic or stainless steel bar handle; it cannot H83 3-way SS-9K-H83XP seat carriers), seat springs,
be used to replace an existing oval handle. The kit includes a Low-temperature end screw seals, lubricant,
SS-9K-LH83XP lubricant MSDS, instructions
locking handle, lock plate, set screw, and instructions. H83 3-way

Kit ordering number: SS-5K-83LH

83 Series Vent Options

A downstream or upstream ball vent is Downstream (DV) Vent Upstream (UV) Vent
available in 83 series 2-way valves. The When a downstream-vented valve When an upstream-vented valve
vent port in the ball does not intersect is closed, full shutoff occurs at the is closed, full shutoff occurs at the
the main flow passage, ensuring no upstream seat. Downstream system downstream seat. Upstream system
leakage of system media from the vent media passes through the vent hole media passes through the vent hole
port. When the valve is open, flow is in the ball trunnion and vents to in the ball trunnion and vents to
straight through. The pressure rating atmosphere through the bottom of the atmosphere through the bottom of the
with a ball vent is reduced to 500 psig trunnion. trunnion.
(34.4 bar).
To order, insert DV into the valve To order, insert UV into the valve
ordering number. ordering number.
Example: SS-83KDVF2 Example: SS-83KUVF2
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 9

Service Options
83 and H83 Series Low-Temperature Service
Trunnion ball valves for low-temperature L83 Series Pressure-Temperature Ratings
service, with a temperature rating
of –40 to 200°F (–40 to 93°C), are Material 316 SS Alloy 400
available. Low-temperature valves PCTFE, PCTFE,
have low-temperature Buna C O-rings. Seat Material Nylon PTFE PEEK Nylon PTFE PEEK
All other materials and ratings are the Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
same as those of standard valves. –40 (–40) to 100 (37) 6000 (413) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 1500 (103) 5000 (344)
150 (65) 3000 (206) 1125 (77.5) 5800 (399) 3000 (206) 1125 (77.5) 4690 (323)
To order a valve for low-temperature 200 (93) 2000 (137) 750 (51.6) 5000 (344) 2000 (137) 750 (51.6) 4390 (302)
service, insert L into the valve ordering
number.
Example: SS-L83KF2 LH83 Series Pressure-Temperature Ratings

Material 316 SS
F2, F4,
End Connections S4, S6MM S10MM S6, S8MM S8 S12MM
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–40 (–40) to 100 (37) 1
0 000 (689) 8400 (578) 7500 (516) 6700 (461) 6600 (454)
150 (65) 7 500 (516) 7500 (516) 7500 (516) 6700 (461) 6600 (454)

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL
200 (93) 5 000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344) 5000 (344)

83 Series Valves With Additional Valve Materials

ECE R110-Type Approval Alloy 625, alloy 825, and Alloy 2507
–40 to 185°F (–40 to 85°C) super duplex stainless steel materials
Temperature Range are available for 83 series valves. Refer
to Trunnion Ball Valves—Special Alloy
Stainless steel 83 series 2-way and
Materials catalog, MS‑02‑357.
3-way valves with PEEK seats and
Buna C O‑rings are available with
ECE R110-type approval for use in
alternative fuel service.
■ Temperature rating: –40 to 185°F
(–40 to 85°C)
■ Pressure rating within the range:
3770 psig (260 bar)
To order, add -11354 to a PEEK-seated,
low-temperature valve ordering number.
Examples: SS-L83PS8-11354
SS-L83XPS8-11354

–40 to 248°F (–40 to 120°C)

Temperature Range
Stainless steel 83 series 2-way and
3-way valves with PEEK seats and
low-temperature fluorocarbon FKM
O‑rings are available with ECE R110-
type approval for use in alternative fuel
service.
■ Temperature rating: –40 to 248°F
(–40 to 120°C)
■ Pressure rating within the range:
3770 psig (260 bar)
To order, add -21265 to a PEEK-seated,
low-temperature valve ordering number.
Examples: SS-L83PS8-21265
SS-L83XPS8-21265
 10 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Service Options
83 Series for “Fast Fill” CNG Filling Station Applications 83 Series Special Cleaning
Stainless steel 83 series 3-way manual valves are available for use in a variety of and Packaging (SC-11)
filling station applications. These valves improve performance in demanding high- To order optional cleaning and
cycle, high-pressure applications, and prevent the need for frequent rebuilds. packaging in accordance with
Features include: Swagelok Special Cleaning and
■ A directional installation with 90 degree actuation for ease of operation
Packaging (SC-11) catalog, MS-06-63,
to ensure compliance with product
during filling
cleanliness requirements stated in
■ 3-way design with vent port for ease of venting after fill ASTM G93 Level C for 83 series
■ PEEK seats to reduce maintenance required in high-cycle applications valves, add ‑SC11 to the valve ordering
■ Cycle life test report available upon request number.
Example: SS-83DXLPF4 Example: SS-83KF2-SC11
SS-L83DXLPF4
Oxygen Service Hazards
Note: The handle set screw used in this valve is longer than the standard 83 series
For more information about hazards
handle set screw and thus is not interchangeable. Seal kits are not available for the
and risks of oxygen-enriched systems,
83DXL valve.
see the Swagelok Oxygen System
Safety technical report, MS-06-13.

FFKM O-Ring Material

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

An optional FFKM O-ring material is

available for 83 and H83 Series ball
valves.
■ Temperature rating for 83 Series with
FFKM O-ring material: 25 to 250°F
(–3 to 121°C)
■ Temperature rating for H83 Series
with FFKM O-ring material: 36 to
250°F (3 to 121°C)
To order, add -KZ to the valve ordering
number.
Example: SS-83PS4-KZ

Vent Fill
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 11

Pneumatic Actuators
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum Actuator
Actuator Temperature Pressure, psig (bar)
Actuator Service Range At 100°F At Maximum
Service Designator °F (°C) (37°C) Temperature
Standard — –20 to 200 (–28 to 93) 165 (11.3)
High temperature HT 0 to 400 (–17 to 204) 100 (6.8)
200 (13.7)
Low temperature LT –40 to 200 (–40 to 93) 165 (11.3)
Nonfluorocarbon NF –20 to 200 (–28 to 93) 165 (11.3)

83 Series Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure

Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.

Actuation Modes
Double Acting Spring Return
Actuator System
Single Dual Single Dual
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic Valve Actuator Model Pressure
Series Model Designator psig (bar) Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)

83 / H83
actuators are compact, lightweight,

SERIES
BALL
easily mountable, and can be operated 1500 (103) 30
(2.1) 50
(3.5) 70
(4.9) 80
(5.6)
31 (90°) -31
with standard shop air. They are 83 6000 (413) 35
(2.5) 60
(4.2) 75
(5.2) —
available in spring-return and double- 2-way 1500 (103) 15
(1.1) 20
(1.4) 65
(4.5) 70
(4.9)
acting modes. On-off (2-way) valves 33 (90°) -33
6000 (413) 20
(1.4) 25
(1.8) 75
(5.2) 75
(5.2)
require 90° actuation; switching (3-way)
1500 (103) 35
(2.5) 60
(4.2) 75
(5.2)
valves require 180° actuation. 51 (180°) -51 —
83 6000 (413) 45
(3.2) 85
(5.8) —
For technical data, including pressure-
3-way 1500 (103) 15
(1.1) 25
(1.8) 70
(4.9) 75
(5.2)
temperature ratings and materials 53 (180°) -53
of construction, refer to Ball Valve 6000 (413) 20
(1.4) 35
(2.5) 75
(5.2) —
Actuation Options catalog,
MS‑02-343.
H83 Series Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure
Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.

Actuation Modes
• Actuated assemblies must Double Acting Spring Return
be properly aligned and Actuator System
Single Dual Single Dual
supported. Improper alignment Valve Actuator Model Pressure
or inadequate support of the Series Model Designator psig (bar) Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)
actuated assembly may result 1 500 (103) 35
(2.5) 60
(4.2)
in leakage or premature valve 31 (90°) -31 6 000 (413) 45
(3.2) 85
(5.9) — —
failure. H83 10 000 (689) 55
(3.8) 100 (6.9)
2-way 1 500 (103) 15
(1.1) 25
(1.8) 70
(4.9) 75
(5.2)
33 (90°) -33 6 000 (413) 20
(1.4) 35
(2.5) 75
(5.2) 85
(5.9)
10 000 (689) 25
(1.8) 45
(3.2) 80
(5.6) 90
(6.3)
1 500 (103) 35
(2.5) 60
(4.2)
51 (180°) -51 6 000 (413) 45
(3.2) 85
(5.9) — —
H83 10 000 (689) 55
(3.8) 100 (6.9)
3-way 1 500 (103) 15
(1.1) 25
(1.8) 70
(4.9)
53 (180°) -53 6 000 (413) 20
(1.4) 35
(2.5) 75
(5.2) —
10 000 (689) 25
(1.8) 45
(3.2) 80
(5.6)
 12 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pneumatic Actuators
Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C D
SS - 83KF2 -31 D HT
A Valve Ordering Number C Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
C = Spring return, normally closed HT = High temperature
B Actuator Model D = Double acting LT = Low temperature
Based on valve series, flow pattern, O = Spring return, normally open NF = Nonfluorocarbon
and actuation mode, select an S = Spring return, 3-way valves None = Standard
actuator designator. See Actuator
Pressure at Maximum System
Pressure tables, page 11.
-31 = 90° actuation
-33 = 90° actuation For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one
83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

-51 = 180° actuation actuator), add DM to the ordering number.

-53 = 180° actuation Example: SS-83KF2-31DDM

Kits for Field Assembly

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number

A B C
MS-1 31 - DA -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, flow pattern, DA = Double acting -HT = High temperature
and actuation mode, select an SR = Spring return -LT = Low temperature
actuator designator. See Actuator
-NF = Nonfluorocarbon
Pressure at Maximum System
None = Standard
Pressure tables, page 11.
31 = 90° actuation
33 = 90° actuation
51 = 180° actuation
53 = 180° actuation

Mounting Bracket Kits

Mounting bracket kits contain: Mounting
■ 316 stainless steel mounting bracket Bracket Kit
Valve Actuator Ordering
■ carbon steel coupling Series Model Number
■ stainless steel stop pin (90° actuation, 83, H83 31 (90°) MS-MB-83-131
2 roll pins; 180° actuation, 1 roll pin) 2-way 33 (90°) MS-MB-83-133
■ S17400 set screw 51 (180°) MS-MB-83-131
83, H83
■ instructions. 3-way 53 (180°) MS-MB-83-133
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 13

Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.

A (spring return)
B (double acting)
2 C D
mounting
holes
0.34 (8.6)
dia

E
1/8 in.
NPT

1/8 in.

83 / H83
SERIES
BALL
NPT

2 F
mounting
holes
0.34 (8.6)
dia

H
G J

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Actuator
Model A B C D E F G H J
31 (90°) 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.64 1.28 2.00 1.31 3.04
51 (180°) (125) (104) (16.0) (29.2) (92.5) (32.5) (50.8) (33.3) (77.2)
33 (90°) 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.88 1.51 2.00 1.75 4.07
53 (180°) (200) (150) (22.4) (44.0) (124) (38.4) (50.8) (44.4) (103)
 14 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8.0 bar). See
Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum
actuator pressures.

Actuator Temperature
Actuator Service Range
Service Designator °F (°C)
–40 to 176
Standard —
(–40 to 80)
High 5 to 302
HT
temperature (–15 to 150)

83 Series Minimum Actuator Pressure

Swagelok ISO 5211-compliant rack and Actuation Mode
pinion pneumatic actuators are suitable
Spring Return Model Double Spring Double
for general applications. They are Designators Return Acting
Acting
available in spring-return and double- Valve Actuator Normally Normally Model Minimum Actuator
83 / H83
SERIES

acting modes. On-off (2-way) valves

BALL

Series Model Closed Open Designator Pressure, psig (bar)

require 90° actuation; switching (3-way)
valves require 180° actuation. A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 36 (2.5)
83
Valve-actuator assemblies on this page 2-way
A15 (90°) -A15C3 -A15O3 -A15D 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5)
are based on:
83
■ maximum valve pressure A15 (180°) — — -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
3-way
■ ambient temperature (50 to 100°F
[10 to 37°C])
For technical data, including actuator
H83 Series Minimum Actuator Pressure
materials of construction and weight,
refer to Ball Valve Actuation Options Actuation Mode
catalog, MS‑02-343. Spring Return Model Spring Double
Double
For additional information on selecting Designators Acting Return Acting
and sizing ISO 5211-compliant Valve Actuator Normally Normally Model Minimum Actuator
actuators, refer to Actuated Ball Valve Series Model Closed Open Designator Pressure, psig (bar)
Selection Guide—ISO 5211-Compliant A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 43 (3.0)
Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits H83
catalog, MS‑02‑136. 2-way
A15 (90°) -A15C3 -A15O3 -A15D 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5)

H83
A15 (180°) — — -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
3-way

• Actuated assemblies must

be properly aligned and
supported. Improper alignment
or inadequate support of the
actuated assembly may result
in leakage or premature valve
failure.
 Trunnion Ball Valves—83 Series and H83 Series 15

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C
SS-83KF2 -A15D HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, flow pattern, HT = High temperature
and actuation mode, select an None = Standard
actuator designator. See Minimum
Actuator Pressure tables,
page 14.

Kits for Field Assembly

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.

83 / H83
SERIES
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number

BALL
A B C D
MS - A15 - 3 - DIN -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
Based on valve series, flow pattern, DA = Double acting (2-way valves) -HT = High temperature
and actuation mode, select an XDA = Double acting (3-way valves) None = Standard
actuator. See Minimum Actuator 3 = Spring return
Pressure tables, page 14.
C Coupling Drive Type
A10 = A10
A15 = A15 DIN

Mounting Bracket Kits

Swagelok ISO 5211 mounting bracket kits contain:
■ 316 stainless steel mounting bracket
■ four A4 stainless steel socket head cap screws
(A4 is approximately equivalent to AISI 316.)
■ 316 stainless steel coupling
■ A4 stainless steel set screw
■ instructions.
Kit ordering number: SS-MB-83-F04-11DIN-M
 16 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.

A
1.57
(39.9)

2 mounting
holes
83 / H83
SERIES
BALL

0.34 (8.6) dia

C

2.00 1.44
(50.8) (36.6)
D

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Valve Actuator
Series Model A B C D
83, H83 A10 (90°) 4.65 (118) 4.17 (106) 1.29 (32.8) 2.84 (72.1)
2-way A15 (90°) 5.33 (135) 4.17 (106) 1.29 (32.8) 3.09 (78.5)
83, H83
A15 (180°) 7.55 (192) 4.28 (109) 1.29 (32.8) 3.09 (78.5)
3-way

Options for ISO 5211-Compliant and Electric Actuators

Swagelok Pneumatic Actuators Swagelok electric actuators are rugged and lightweight, and
Swagelok offers a connect alternating- or direct-current power sources.
range of accessories Refer to Electric Actuators—141 and 142 Series catalog,
to enhance MS-01-35, for additional information.
instrumentation and
process ball valve
performance and
control, including
solenoid valves, limit
switches, and position
sensors. Factory
assemblies and kits
for field assembly are
available.
Refer to Ball Valve Actuation Options catalog, MS‑02-343, for
additional information.

• WARNING
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or
components not governed by industrial design
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end
connections, with those of other manufacturers.
MS-01-166, RevS, August 2020
 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Warranty Information
Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Life- Swagelok, Cajon, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting,
IGC, Kenmac, Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO,
time Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your VCR, Ultra-Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
authorized Swagelok representative. 15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Safe Product Selection Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
When selecting a product, the total system design must Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
responsibilities of the system designer and user. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
• WARNING Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
components not governed by industrial design Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
connections, with those of other manufacturers. Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
© 2020 Swagelok Company
 Pipe Fittings 1
www.swagelok.com

P ip e F itti n gs

FITTINGS
■ 1/16 to 1 in. sizes PIPE

■ NPT, ISO/BSP, and SAE threads

■ 316 stainless steel, carbon steel, brass, 6-Moly, Alloy 625, Alloy 825, and Alloy 2507
 2 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Contents Ordering Information

Nipples Page 5 Crosses Page 21 Add a material designator to the basic ordering number.
Example: SS-2-CN

Material Designator
316 stainless steel SS
FITTINGS
PIPE

Carbon steel S
Adapters, Adapter Brass B
Gaskets, Gauge 6-Moly 6Mo
Adapter, Reducing Alloy 625 625
Adapters Page 8 Union Ball Alloy 825 825
Joints Page 21
Alloy 2507 2507

■ Heavy-wall fittings are available only in 316 stainless steel.

The basic ordering numbers for these fittings include the
material designator.
Reducing Bushings, ■ Minimum order quantities may apply to certain materials
Reducers Page 14 and configurations.
Pipe Caps Page 22 ■ Contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service
representative for information about additional sizes and
special alloys.

Materials
Couplings Page 15 Pipe Plugs Page 22 Material Standards
Material➅ Bar Stock➀ Forgings➁
316 stainless ASTM A276, ASME ASTM A182, ASME SA182,
steel SA479, EN 1.4401 EN 1.4401
Carbon steel ASTM A108 —
Brass ASME B16, ASTM B453 ASTM B283
Elbows Page 17 Hollow
6-Moly ASTM A479 ASTM A182
Hex Plugs Page 22
Alloy 625 ASTM B446➂ ASTM B564, ASME SB564➃
Alloy 825 ASTM B425 ASTM B564, ASME SB564
Alloy 2507➄ ASTM A479 ASTM A182

➀ Straight fittings and tube adapters.

➁ Elbows, crosses, and tees.
Hex ➂ All straight fittings and tube adapters and 1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm
elbows, crosses, and tees.
Head Plugs Page 23
Tees Page 19 ➃ Elbows, crosses, and tees larger than 3/8 in. and 10 mm.
➄ Refer to Gaugeable Alloy 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-174.
➅ Refer to Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog, MS-01-140
or contact your authorized Swagelok representative for materials not listed.

Plating and Coating

To resist corrosion, all carbon steel fittings are treated with an
electrodeposited zinc plating.
Pipe Thread Sealants
Dimensions
Always use a pipe thread sealant
■ Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
when assembling tapered
threads. SWAK™ anaerobic pipe ■ E dimensions refer to the minimum opening.
thread sealant, PTFE-FREE pipe
thread sealant, and Swagelok®
PTFE Tape are available. Cleaning
Refer to Leak Detectors, Components are cleaned to remove oil, grease, and loose
Lubricants, and Sealants particles. Refer to Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10)
catalog, MS‑01‑91, for catalog, MS-06-62, for additional information.
additional information.
 Pipe Fittings 3

Temperature Ratings Features

System temperatures may be limited by the thread sealant ■ All fittings have a high-quality appearance.
or, when applicable, the gasket or O-ring material. ■ Every fitting is marked with manufacturer’s name for
Fitting Materials easy source tracing.
■ Male threads are capped for protection.
Maximum Temperature

FITTINGS
Material °F (°C) Straight fittings are manufactured from

PIPE
316 stainless steel 1000 (537) quality bar stock for strength.
Carbon steel 375 (190)
Brass 400 (204)
6-Moly 600 (315)
Alloy 625 1000 (537)
Alloy 825 800 (426)
Alloy 2507 482 (250)

Gasket, O-Ring Materials

Maximum Minimum
Temperature Temperature
Component Material °F (°C) °F (°C)
Burr-free NPT threads are based
Buna N 230 (110) –13 (–25) internal surfaces. on requirements of
RS gaskets Fluorocarbon
400 (204) 5 (–15) ASME B1.20.1 and
FKM
SAE AS71051.
RG, RP gaskets Copper 400 (204) –325 (–198)
Fluorocarbon
SAE O-rings 400 (204) –20 (–28)
FKM Shaped fittings are
manufactured from forgings. Marking identifies
material, heat
code for material
traceability, and ISO
end connection.

Smooth thread
flanks provide
optimum sealing
and minimize galling.

Angles on elbows, tees,

and crosses are rigidly
controlled for accurate
piping layout.
 4 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Pressure Rating Basis and Thread Specifications

Thread Type (End Connection) Pressure Rating Basis Thread Type Reference Specification
ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ASME B1.20.1,
NPT NPT
design factor based on hydraulic fluid. leakage. SAE AS71051

ISO/BSP (tapered) ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ISO/BSP (tapered) ISO 7, BS EN 10226-1,
FITTINGS

(Swagelok RT fittings) design factor based on hydraulic fluid. leakage. Swagelok RT fittings JIS B0203
PIPE

ISO 1179-3, ISO 228-1 Threads with Light-Duty Stud Ends

ISO/BSP (parallel)
ISO/BSP (parallel) with Sealing by O-ring with Retaining Ring (types G and ISO 228, J
Swagelok RP and RS
(Swagelok RS fittings) H) or pressure testing with a 4:1 design factor based on IS B0202
fittings
hydraulic fluid leakage.

ISO 1179-4, ISO 228-1 Threads with Stud Ends for general use ISO/BSP (parallel)
ISO/BSP (parallel) ISO 228,
only with metal-to-metal sealing (type B) or pressure testing Swagelok RP and RS
(Swagelok RP fittings) JIS B0202
with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. fittings

ISO/BSP (gauge) ISO/BSP (parallel)

ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ISO 228,
(Based on EN 837-1 and 837-3) Swagelok RG and RJ
design factor based on hydraulic fluid. leakage. JIS B0202
(Swagelok RG and RJ fittings) fittings

SAE J1926/3, Connections for General Use and Fluid

Power-Ports and Stud Ends with ASME B1.1 Threads and Unified Inch Screw
SAE–Light Duty
O-ring Sealing-Part 3: Light-Duty (L-Series) Stud Ends or Threads ASME B1.1
(Swagelok ST fittings)
pressure testing with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic Swagelok ST fittings
fluid leakage.

SAE J1926/2, Connections for General Use and Fluid

Power-Ports and Stud Ends with ASME B1.1 Threads and Unified Inch Screw
SAE–Heavy Duty
O-ring Sealing-Part 2: Heavy-Duty (S-Series) or pressure Threads Swagelok ST ASME B1.1
(Swagelok STH fittings)
testing with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid fittings
leakage.

Unified Inch Screw

SAE J514, Hydraulic Tube Fittings or pressure testing with a ASME B1.1 UNJ,
Swagelok AN fittings Threads
4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. SAE AS 8879
Swagelok AN fittings

Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
■ To determine pressure ratings in accordance with B31.1, Power Piping:
■ Carbon steel material—multiply by 0.85.
All other material ratings remain the same.
 Pipe Fittings 5

Close Nipples

Male NPT

FITTINGS
PIPE
Dimensions, Pressure Ratings,
NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-CN 0.75 (19.1) 0.19 (4.8) 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 -4-CN 1.12 (28.4) 0.28 (7.1) 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 -6-CN 1.12 (28.4) 0.38 (9.6) 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 -8-CN 1.50 (38.1) 0.47 (11.9) 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
3/4 -12-CN 1.50 (38.1) 0.62 (15.7) 7 300 (502) 3 600 (248) 10 000 (689) 9 800 (675) 8 500 (585)
1 -16-CN 1.88 (47.8) 0.88 (22.4) 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)

Hex Nipples F flat

Male NPT
Dimensions, Pressure Ratings,
NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/16 -1-HN 1.01 (25.6) 0.12 (3.0) 5/16 11 000 (757) 5 500 (378) 15 000 (1 033) 14 900 (1 026) 12 800 (881)
1/8 -2-HN 1.01 (25.6) 0.19 (4.8) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 -4-HN 1.40 (35.6) 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 -6-HN 1.43 (36.3) 0.38 (9.6) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 -8-HN 1.84 (46.7) 0.47 (11.9) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
3/4 -12-HN 1.84 (46.7) 0.62 (15.7) 1 1/16 7 300 (502) 3 600 (248) 10 000 (689) 9 800 (675) 8 500 (585)
1 -16-HN 2.32 (58.9) 0.88 (22.4) 1 3/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)

Heavy-Wall Male NPT

1/4 SS-4-HN-10K 1.40 (35.6) 0.23 (5.8) 9/16 10 000 (689)
— — — —
1/2 SS-8-HN-10K 1.84 (46.7) 0.39 (9.9) 7/8 10 000 (689)

Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-HN-RT 1.01 (25.6) 0.19 (4.8) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 034) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (800)
1/4 -4-HN-RT 1.40 (35.6) 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 034) 10 800 (740) 9 300 (640)
3/8 -6-HN-RT 1.43 (36.3) 0.38 (9.6) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 034) 10 500 (720) 9 000 (620)
1/2 -8-HN-RT 1.84 (46.7) 0.47 (11.9) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (265) 14 800 (1 025) 10 400 (710) 8 900 (610)
 6 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Hex Nipples
Male NPT to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

NPT Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
FITTINGS
PIPE

in. in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 1/8 -2-HN-2RT 1.01 (25.6) 0.19 (4.8) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 1/4 -4-HN-4RT
CAJON THREADED ADAPTER HEX NIPPLE
1.40 (35.6) 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 8 000 (551)
CA-ELD-0074 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 3/8 -6-HN-6RT 1.43 (36.3) 0.38 (9.6) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 1/2 -8-HN-8RT 1.84 (46.7) 0.47 (11.9) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
3/4 3/4 -12-HN-12RT 1.84 (46.7) 0.62 (15.7) 1 1/16 7 300 (502) 3 600 (248) 10 000 (689) 9 800 (675) 8 500 (585)
1 1 -16-HN-16RT 2.32 (58.9) 0.88 (22.4) 1 3/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)

F flat C dia

B
A

Male NPT to Male ISO Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

NPT Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B C E➀ F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1.09 0.32 0.54 0.16
1/8 1/8 -2-HN-2RS 9/16 5800 (400) 2900 (200) 5800 (400) 5800 (400) 5800 (400)
(27.7) (8.1) (13.7) (4.1)
1.45 0.47 0.70 0.23
1/4 1/4 -4-HN-4RS 3/4 5800 (400) 2900 (200) 5800 (400) 5800 (400) 5800 (400)
(36.8) (11.9) (17.8) (5.8)
1.48 0.47 0.86 0.31
3/8 3/8 -6-HN-6RS 7/8 5800 (400) 2900 (200) 5800 (400) 5800 (400) 5800 (400)
(37.6) (11.9) (21.8) (7.9)
1.75 0.55 1.02 0.47
1/2 1/2 -8-HN-8RS 1 1/16 4700 (324) 2350 (162) 4640 (320) 4640 (320) 4640 (320)
(44.4) (14.0) (25.9) (11.9)
1.93 0.63 1.25 0.62
3/4 3/4 -12-HN-12RS 1 5/16 3620 (250) 1810 (125) 3620 (250) 3620 (250) 3620 (250)
(49.0) (16.0) (31.8) (15.7)
2.23 0.71 1.53 0.78
1 1 -16-HN-16RS 1 5/8 3620 (250) 1810 (125) 3620 (250) 3620 (250) 3620 (250)
(56.6) (18.0) (38.9) (19.8)

For gasket information, see page 12.

➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at one end.
 Pipe Fittings 7

Hex Reducing Nipples

F flat

FITTINGS
A

PIPE
Male NPT
Pressure Ratings,
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E➀ F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 to 1/16 -2-HRN-1 1.01 (25.6) 0.12 (3.0) 7/16 11 000 (757) 5 500 (378) 15 000 (1 033) 14 900 (1 026) 12 800 (881)
1/4 to 1/8 -4-HRN-2 1.22 (31.0) 0.19 (4.8) 9/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
3/8 to 1/8 -6-HRN-2 1.25 (31.8) 0.19 (4.8) 11/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
3/8 to 1/4 -6-HRN-4 1.43 (36.3) 0.28 (7.1) 11/16 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
1/2 to 1/8 -8-HRN-2 1.47 (37.3) 0.19 (4.8) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
1/2 to 1/4 -8-HRN-4 1.65 (41.9) 0.28 (7.1) 7/8 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
1/2 to 3/8 -8-HRN-6 1.65 (41.9) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
3/4 to 1/4 -12-HRN-4 1.65 (41.9) 0.28 (7.1) 1 1/16 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 9 300 (640)
3/4 to 1/2 -12-HRN-8 1.84 (46.7) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 8 900 (613)
1 to 1/4 -16-HRN-4 1.94 (49.3) 0.28 (7.1) 1 3/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1 to 1/2 -16-HRN-8 2.13 (54.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1 3/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 8 900 (613)
1 to 3/4 -16-HRN-12 2.13 (54.1) 0.62 (15.7) 1 3/8 7 300 (502) 3 600 (248) 10 000 (689) 9 800 (675) 8 500 (585)

Heavy-Wall Male NPT

1/2 to 1/4 SS-8-HRN-4-10K 1.65 (41.9) 0.23 (5.8) 7/8 10 000 (689) — — — —

➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the larger end.

Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

Thread in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Basic Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E➀ F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
3/8 to 1/4 -6-HRNT-4RT 1.43 (36.3) 0.28 (7.1) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 to 1/8 -8-HRNT-2RT 1.47 (37.3) 0.19 (4.8) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
1/2 to 3/8 -8-HRNT-6RT 1.65 (41.9) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)

➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the larger end.
 8 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Hex Long Nipples

E

F
FITTINGS

flat
PIPE

Male NPT
A (Available Lengths) Dimensions Pressure Ratings,
NPT in. Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. 1.50 2.00 2.50 3.00 4.00 6.00 Number E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — — -2-HLN- 0.19 (4.8) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — -4-HLN- 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ — -6-HLN- 0.38 (9.6) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 — ✓ — ✓ ✓ ✓ -8-HLN- 0.47 (11.9) 7/8 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
3/4 — ✓ — ✓ ✓ — -12-HLN- 0.62 (15.7) 1 1/16 7 300 (502) 3 600 (248) 10 000 (689) 9 800 (675) 8 500 (585)
1 — — — ✓ ✓ — -16-HLN- 0.88 (22.4) 1 3/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
To order, insert the material designator as a prefix and the available length as a suffix to the basic ordering number.
Example: SS-2-HLN-1.50

Adapters
F flat

D
A

Female ISO Tapered Thread to Male NPT

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

Thread NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A D E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 1/4 -4-AT-4 1.43 (36.3) 0.56 (14.2) 0.28 (7.1) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 3/8 -6-AT-6 1.51 (38.4) 0.56 (14.2) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 1/2 -8-AT-8 1.96 (49.8) 0.75 (19.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
 Pipe Fittings 9

Adapters
J tube flare F flat

B C

FITTINGS
A

PIPE
Male JIC (AN) to Male NPT

JIC Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

Thread NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering Carbon Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B C E F J 316 SS Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1.40 0.55 0.56 0.17 8000 5000 4000 8000 8000 8000
7/16-20 1/4 -4-AN-1-4 9/16 1/4
(35.6) (13.0) (14.2) (4.3) (551) (344) (275) (551) (551) (551)
1.43 0.56 0.56 0.28 8000 5000 4000 8000 8000 8000
1/4 -6-AN-1-4 5/8 3/8
(36.3) (14.2) (14.2) (7.1) (551) (344) (275) (551) (551) (551)
9/16-18
1.43 0.56 0.56 0.30 7800 5000 3900 7800 7800 7800
3/8 -6-AN-1-6 11/16 3/8
(36.3) (14.2) (14.2) (7.6) (537) (344) (268) (537) (537) (537)
1.75 0.66 0.75 0.39 7700 4500 3850 7700 7700 7700
3/4-16 1/2 -8-AN-1-8 7/8 1/2
(44.4) (16.8) (19.0) (9.9) (530) (310) (265) (530) (530) (530)
1 1/16- 1.99 0.86 0.75 0.61 7000 3500 3500 7000 7000 7000
3/4 -12-AN-1-12 1 1/8 3/4
12 (50.5) (21.8) (19.0) (15.5) (482) (240) (241) (482) (482) (482)
1 5/16- 2.30 0.91 0.94 0.84 5000 3000 2500 5000 5000 5000
1 -16-AN-1-16 1 3/8 1
12 (58.4) (23.1) (23.9) (21.3) (344) (210) (172) (344) (344) (344)

F flat
O-ring

B
A

Male SAE/MS Straight Thread to Female NPT

SAE/MS Dimensions Pressure Ratings,

Thread NPT Basic in. (mm) Uniform psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering O-Ring➀ 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B E F Size Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1.32 0.36 0.20 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
7/16-20 1/4 -4-SAE-7-4 3/4 -904
(33.5) (9.1) (5.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
1.36 0.39 0.28 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
9/16-18 3/8 -6-SAE-7-6 15/16 -906
(34.5) (9.9) (7.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
1.62 0.44 0.42 4568 2277 4568 4568 4568
3/4-16 1/2 -8-SAE-7-8 1 1/16 -908
(41.1) (11.2) (10.7) (315) (157) (315) (315) (315)
1.82 0.59 0.66 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
1 1/16-12 3/4 -12-SAE-7-12 1 3/8 -912
(46.2) (15.0) (16.7) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
2.12 0.59 0.88 3045 1522 3045 3045 3045
1 5/16-12 1 -16-SAE-7-16 1 5/8 -916
(53.8) (15.0) (22.4) (210) (105) (210) (210) (210)
➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.
 10 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Adapters
J
F flat tube flare
O-ring

E
FITTINGS

B C
PIPE

Male SAE/MS Straight Thread to Male JIC (AN)

SAE/
MS JIC Dimensions Pressure Ratings,
Thread Thread Basic in. (mm) Uniform psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering O-Ring➀ 316 SS, Alloy 2507, Alloy
in. in. Number A B C E F J Size Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly 825
7/16- 7/16- 1.19 0.36 0.55 0.17 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
-4-SAE-1-4AN 9/16 1/4 -904
20 20 (30.2) (9.1) (14.0) (4.3) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
9/16- 9/16- 1.26 0.39 0.56 0.28 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
-6-SAE-1-6AN 11/16 3/8 -906
18 18 (32.0) (9.9) (14.2) (7.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
3/4- 3/4- 1.44 0.44 0.66 0.39 4568 2284 4568 4568 4568
-8-SAE-1-8AN 7/8 1/2 -908
16 16 36.6) (11.2) (16.8) (9.9) (315) (150) (315) (315) (315)
1 1/16- 1 1/16- 1.87 0.59 0.86 0.61 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
-12-SAE-1-12AN 1 1/4 3/4 -912
12 12 (47.5) (15.0) (21.8) (15.5) (250) (120) (250) (250) (250)
1 5/16- 1 5/16- 1.98 0.59 0.91 0.84 3045 1522 3045 3045 3045
-16-SAE-1-16AN 1 1/2 1 -916
12 12 (50.3) (15.0) (23.1) (21.3) (210) (105) (210) (210) (210)
➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.

F flat

Female to Male NPT

Pressure Ratings,
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-A 1.10 (27.9) 0.19 (4.8) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-A 1.40 (35.6) 0.28 (7.1) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 -6-A 1.51 (38.4) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 -8-A 1.94 (49.3) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
3/4 -12-A 2.02 (51.3) 0.62 (15.7) 1 5/16 4 600 (316) 2 300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6 200 (427) 5 300 (365)
1 -16-A 2.28 (57.9) 0.88 (22.4) 1 5/8 4 400 (303) 2 200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5 900 (406) 5 100 (351)
Heavy-Wall Female to Male NPT
1/4 SS-4-A-10K 1.43 (36.3) 0.23 (5.8) 1 10 000 (689)
— — — —
1/2 SS-8-A-10K 2.02 (51.3) 0.39 (9.9) 1 1/2 10 000 (689)
 Pipe Fittings 11

Adapters
Female to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,

FITTINGS
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825

PIPE
1/8 -2-A-RT 1.09 (27.7) 0.19 (4.8) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-A-RT 1.42 (36.1) 0.28 (7.1) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 -6-A-RT 1.50 (38.1) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 -8-A-RT 1.95 (49.5) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)

F flat C dia

E
B
A

Female NPT to Male ISO Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

NPT Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B C E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
0.99 0.32 0.54 0.16 5800 2900 5800 5800 5800
1/8 1/8 -2-A-2RS 9/16
(25.1) (8.1) (13.7) (4.1) (400) (200) (400) (400) (400)
1.32 0.47 0.70 0.23 5800 2900 5800 5800 5800
1/4 1/4 -4-A-4RS 3/4
(33.5) (11.9) (17.8) (5.8) (400) (200) (400) (400) (400)
1.41 0.47 0.86 0.31 5800 2900 5800 5800 5800
3/8 3/8 -6-A-6RS 7/8
(35.8) (11.9) (21.8) (7.9) (400) (200) (400) (400) (400)
1.74 0.55 1.02 0.47 4700 2350 4700 4700 4700
1/2 1/2 -8-A-8RS 1 1/16
(44.2) (14.0) (25.9) (11.9) (324) (162) (324) (324) (324)
1.89 0.63 1.25 0.62 3620 1810 3620 3620 3620
3/4 3/4 -12-A-12RS 1 5/16
(48.0) (16.0) (31.8) (15.7) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
2.10 0.71 1.53 0.78 3620 1810 3620 3620 3620
1 1 -16-A-16RS 1 5/8
(53.3) (18.0) (38.9) (19.8) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
For gasket information, see page 12.

F flat

D
A

Female NPT to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

NPT Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A D E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 1/8 -2-A-2RT 1.09 (27.7) 0.38 (9.6) 0.19 (4.8) 9/16 6500 (447) 3200 (220) 5800 (399) 5200 (358) 2600 (179)
1/4 1/4 -4-A-4RT 1.42 (36.1) 0.56 (14.2) 0.28 (7.1) 3/4 6600 (454) 3300 (227) 5900 (406) 5200 (358) 2600 (179)
3/8 3/8 -6-A-6RT 1.50 (38.1) 0.56 (14.2) 0.38 (9.6) 7/8 5300 (365) 2600 (179) 4700 (323) 4200 (289) 2100 (144)
1/2 1/2 -8-A-8RT 1.94 (49.3) 0.75 (19.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1 1/16 4900 (337) 2400 (165) 4400 (303) 3900 (268) 1900 (130)
3/4 3/4 -12-A-12RT 2.02 (51.3) 0.75 (19.1) 0.62 (15.7) 1 5/16 4600 (316) 2300 (158) 4100 (282) 3600 (248) 1800 (124)
1 1 -16-A-16RT 2.30 (58.4) 0.94 (23.9) 0.88 (22.4) 1 5/8 4400 (303) 2200 (151) 3900 (268) 3500 (241) 1700 (117)
 12 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Adapters
F flat
O-ring

B C
FITTINGS
PIPE

Male SAE/MS Straight Thread to Male NPT

SAE/
MS Dimensions Pressure Ratings,
Thread NPT Basic in. (mm) Uniform psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering O-Ring➀ 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B C E F Size Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
7/16- 1.20 0.36 0.56 0.20 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
1/4 -4-SAE-1-4 9/16 -904
20 (30.5) (9.1) (14.2) (5.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
9/16- 1.26 0.36 0.56 0.28 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
3/8 -6-SAE-1-6 11/16 -906
18 (32.0) (9.1) (14.2) (7.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
3/4- 1.53 0.44 0.75 0.42 4568 2277 4568 4568 4568
1/2 -8-SAE-1-8 7/8 -908
16 (38.9) (11.2) (19.1) (10.7) (315) (157) (315) (315) (315)
1 1/16- 1.75 0.59 0.75 0.62 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
3/4 -12-SAE-1-12 1 1/4 -912
12 (44.4) (15.0) (19.1) (15.7) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
1 5/16- 2.00 0.59 0.94 0.88 3045 1522 3045 3045 3045
1 -16-SAE-1-16 1 1/2 -916
12 (50.8) (15.0) (23.9) (22.4) (210) (105) (210) (210) (210)
➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.

Adapter Gaskets

Steel and Stainless Steel ISO

(RS Fitting) Ordering Number
Thread
Size, in. RS Gasket➀ RSD Gasket➁ RSNB Gasket
RS fitting steel gaskets provide a
seal with male ISO/BSP parallel 1/8 S-2-RS-2V SS-2-RSD-2V 304L-2-RSNB-2
threads. 1/4 S-4-RS-2V➂ SS-4-RSD-2V 304L-4-RSNB-2
RS/RSD 3/8 S-6-RS-2V➂ SS-6-RSD-2V 304L-6-RSNB-2
Gasket The RS gasket is of a fluorocarbon
FKM inner ring bonded to a carbon 1/2 S-8-RS-2V➂ SS-8-RSD-2V 304L-8-RSNB-2
steel outer ring. 3/4 S-12-RS-2V SS-12-RSD-2V 304L-12-RSNB-2
The RSD (DIN-style) gasket is a 1 S-16-RS-2V SS-16-RSD-2V 304L-16-RSNB-2
fluorocarbon FKM inner ring bonded ➀ Also available with a Buna inner ring. To order, replace V with B
to a stainless steel or carbon in the ordering number.
steel outer ring as recommended Example: S -2-RS-2B
in ISO 1179-1973. It can be used ➁ Also available with a carbon steel outer ring. To order, replace
SS with S in the ordering number.
with end connections designed in
Example: S-8-RSD-2V
accordance with DIN 3852 Part 2.
➁ Also available with a stainless steel outer ring. To order, replace
The RSNB gasket is an all-metal S with SS in the ordering number.
304L stainless steel gasket similar Example: SS-8-RS-2V
to DIN 7603 form D.
RSNB
Gasket

Copper (RP and RS Fitting) ISO

The RP and RS fitting copper Thread Ordering
gasket provides a seal with male Size, in. Number
ISO/BSP parallel threads. 1/8 CU-2-RP-2
1/4 CU-4-RP-2
3/8 CU-6-RP-2
1/2 CU-8-RP-2
3/4 CU-12-RP-2
1 CU-16-RP-2

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for gasket dimensions.

 Pipe Fittings 13

Gauge Adapters F flat

D
A

FITTINGS
PIPE
Female ISO Parallel (Gauge) Thread to Male NPT

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread NPT in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A D E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 1/4 SS-4-AG-4 1.19 (30.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.22 (5.6) 3/4 5700 (392) 2850 (196) 5700 (392) 5700 (392) 5700 (392)
3/8 3/8 SS-6-AG-6 1.27 (32.2) 0.56 (14.2) 0.26 (6.6) 15/16 5700 (392) 2850 (196) 5700 (392) 5700 (392) 5700 (392)
1/2 1/2 SS-8-AG-8 1.68 (42.7) 0.75 (19.1) 0.28 (7.1) 1 1/16 3900 (268) 1950 (134) 3900 (268) 3900 (268) 3900 (268)

Gauge Adapter Copper and Nickel ISO

(RG, Gauge Fitting) Ordering Number
Gaskets Thread
Size, in. Copper Nickel
The RG fitting gasket provides
a seal on pressure gauges 1/4 CU-4-RG-2 NI-4-RG-2
equipped with ISO/BSP parallel 3/8 CU-6-RG-2 NI-6-RG-2
male threads. 1/2 CU-8-RG-2 NI-8-RG-2

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for gasket dimensions.

Reducing Adapters
F flat

Female to Male NPT

Female Male Dimensions Pressure Ratings
NPT NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 1/16 -2-RA-1 1.09 (27.7) 0.12 (3.0) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8800 (606) 7500 (516)
1/4 1/8 -4-RA-2 1.26 (32.0) 0.19 (4.8) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8900 (613) 7600 (523)
1/8 -6-RA-2 1.33 (33.8) 0.19 (4.8) 5 300 (365) 2600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7100 (489) 6100 (420)
3/8 7/8
1/4 -6-RA-4 1.50 (38.1) 0.28 (7.1) 5 300 (365) 2600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7100 (489) 6100 (420)
1/8 -8-RA-2 1.58 (40.1) 0.19 (4.8) 4 900 (337) 2400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6600 (454) 5700 (392)
1/2 1/4 -8-RA-4 1.76 (44.7) 0.28 (7.1) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6600 (454) 5700 (392)
3/8 -8-RA-6 1.75 (44.4) 0.38 (9.6) 4 900 (337) 2400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6600 (454) 5700 (392)
1/4 -12-RA-4 1.85 (47.0) 0.28 (7.1) 4 600 (316) 2300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6200 (427) 5300 (365)
3/4 3/8 -12-RA-6 1.82 (46.2) 0.38 (9.6) 1 5/16 4 600 (316) 2300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6200 (427) 5300 (365)
1/2 -12-RA-8 2.02 (51.3) 0.47 (11.9) 4 600 (316) 2300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6200 (427) 5300 (365)
1/4 -16-RA-4 1.96 (49.8) 0.28 (7.1) 4 400 (303) 2200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5900 (406) 5100 (351)
1 1/2 -16-RA-8 2.16 (54.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1 5/8 4 400 (303) 2200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5900 (406) 5100 (351)
3/4 -16-RA-12 2.17 (55.1) 0.62 (15.7) 4 400 (303) 2200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5900 (406) 5100 (351)
Heavy-Wall Female to Male NPT
1/2 1/4 SS-8-RA-4-10K 1.81 (46.0) 0.23 (5.8) 1 1/2 10 000 (689) — — — —
 14 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Reducing Adapters

Female to Male ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

Female Male
ISO ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings
Thread Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
FITTINGS
PIPE

Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,

in. in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 1/8 -4-RAT-2RT 1.26 (32.0) 0.19 (4.8) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 1/4 -6-RAT-4RT 1.50 (38.1) 0.28 (7.1) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/4 -8-RAT-4RT 1.76 (44.7) 0.28 (7.1) 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
1/2 1 1/16
3/8 -8-RAT-6RT 1.75 (44.4) 0.38 (9.6) 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)

Reducing Bushings
F flat

Male to Female NPT

Male Female Dimensions Pressure Ratings

NPT NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 1/16 -2-RB-1 1.03 (26.2) 0.19 (4.8) 7/16 6 700 (461) 3 300 (227) 12 900 (888) 9 000 (620) 7 800 (537)
1/4 1/8 -4-RB-2 1.06 (26.9) 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/8 -6-RB-2 0.86 (21.8) 0.34 (8.6) 11/16 9 200 (633) 4 600 (316) 15 000 (1 033) 12 400 (854) 10 700 (737)
3/8
1/4 -6-RB-4 1.19 (30.2) 0.38 (9.6) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
1/8 -8-RB-2 0.34 (8.6) 12 200 (840) 6 100 (420) 15 000 (1 033) 15 000 (1 033) 14 200 (978)
1.08 (27.4) 7/8
1/2 1/4 -8-RB-4 0.45 (11.4) 8 300 (571) 4 100 (282) 15 000 (1 033) 11 200 (771) 9 600 (661)
3/8 -8-RB-6 1.41 (35.8) 0.47 (11.9) 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/4 -12-RB-4 0.45 (11.4) 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689)
1.08 (27.4)
3/4 3/8 -12-RB-6 0.59 (15.0) 1 1/16 8 200 (564) 4 100 (282) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 9 500 (654)
1/2 -12-RB-8 1.63 (41.4) 0.62 (15.7) 4 900 (337) 2 400 (168) 9 400 (652) 6 600 (456) 5 700 (392)
1/4 -16-RB-4 0.45 (11.4) 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689)
3/8 -16-RB-6 1.37 (34.8) 0.59 (15.0) 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689)
1 1 3/8
1/2 -16-RB-8 0.73 (18.5) 8 600 (592) 4 300 (296) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689) 10 000 (689)
3/4 -16-RB-12 1.85 (47.0) 0.88 (22.4) 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)

Male to Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

Male Female
ISO ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings
Thread Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 1/8 -4-RBT-2RT 1.06 (26.9) 0.28 (7.1) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
3/8 1/4 -6-RBT-4RT 1.19 (30.2) 0.38 (9.6) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
1/4 -8-RBT-4RT 1.08 (27.4) 0.44 (11.2) 8 300 (571) 4 100 (282) 15 000 (1 033) 11 200 (771) 9 600 (661)
1/2 7/8
3/8 -8-RBT-6RT 1.41 (35.8) 0.47 (11.9) 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
 Pipe Fittings 15

Reducers O-ring F flat

B
A

FITTINGS
PIPE
Male to Female SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

Male Female Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread Thread Basic in. (mm) Uniform psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering O-Ring➀ 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number A B E F Size Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1.12 0.39 0.28 5076 2538 5076 5076 5076
9/16-18 7/16-20 -6-RBST-4 13/16 -906
(28.4) (9.9) (7.1) (350) (175) (350) (350) (350)
0.98 0.44 0.39 4568 2277 4568 4568 4568
7/16-20 -8-RBST-4 7/8 -908
(24.9) (11.2) (9.9) (315) (157) (315) (315) (315)
3/4-16
HEX COUPLING
CA-ELD-0062
1.19 0.44 0.42 4568 2277 4568 4568 4568
9/16-18 -8-RBST-6 1 -908
(30.2) (11.2) (10.7) (315) (157) (315) (315) (315)
1.10 0.50 0.50 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
9/16-18 -10-RBST-6 1 -910
(27.9) (12.7) (12.7) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
7/8-14
1.42 0.50 0.50 1 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
3/4-16 -10-RBST-8 -910
(36.1) (12.7) (12.7) 3/16 (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
1.27 0.59 0.65 3625 1812 3625 3625 3625
1 1/16-12 3/4-16 -12-RBST-8 1 1/4 -912
(32.3) (15.0) (16.5) (250) (125) (250) (250) (250)
1.61 0.59 0.87 3045 1522 3045 3045 3045
1 5/16-12 1 1/16-12 -16-RBST-12 1 5/8 -916
(40.9) (15.0) (22.1) (210) (105) (210) (210) (210)
1.98 0.59 1.09 2538 1261 2538 2538 2538
1 5/8-12 1 5/16-12 -20-RBST-16 2 1/8 -920
(50.3) (15.0) (27.7) (175) (87) (175) (175) (175)
1.27 0.59 1.23 2538 1261 2538 2538 2538
1 7/8-12 1 5/16-12 -24-RBST-16 2 1/8 -924
(32.3) (15.0) (31.2) (175) (87) (175) (175) (175)

➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.

Hex Couplings
F flat

Female NPT

NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Pressure Ratings, psig (bar)

Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-HCG 0.81 (20.6) 0.34 (8.6) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8800 (606) 7500 (516)
1/4 -4-HCG 1.19 (30.2) 0.45 (11.4) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8900 (613) 7600 (523)
3/8 -6-HCG 1.31 (33.3) 0.59 (15.0) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7100 (489) 6100 (420)
1/2 -8-HCG 1.56 (39.6) 0.73 (18.5) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6600 (454) 5700 (392)
3/4 -12-HCG 1.62 (41.1) 0.94 (23.9) 1 5/16 4 600 (316) 2300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6200 (427) 5300 (365)
1 -16-HCG 2.00 (50.8) 1.17 (29.7) 1 5/8 4 400 (303) 2200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5900 (406) 5100 (351)
Heavy-Wall Female NPT
1/4 SS-4-HCG-10K 1.19 (30.2) 0.45 (11.4) 1 10 000 (689) — — — —
1/2 SS-8-HCG-10K 1.56 (39.6) 0.73 (18.5) 1 1/2 10 000 (689) — — — —
 16 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Hex Couplings

Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
FITTINGS

Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,

PIPE

in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-HCG-RT 0.81 (20.6) 0.33 (8.4) 9/16 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-HCG-RT 1.19 (30.2) 0.44 (11.2) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 -6-HCG-RT 1.31 (33.3) 0.58 (14.7) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 -8-HCG-RT 1.56 (39.6) 0.72 (18.3) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)

Hex Reducing Couplings

F flat

Female NPT

NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Pressure Ratings, psig (bar)

Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 to 1/8 -4-HRCG-2 1.22 (31.0) 0.34 (8.6) 3/4 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 to 1/4 -6-HRCG-4 1.38 (35.1) 0.45 (11.4) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 to 1/8 -8-HRCG-2 1.56 (39.6) 0.34 (8.6) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
1/2 to 1/4 -8-HRCG-4 1.75 (44.4) 0.45 (11.4) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
1/2 to 3/8 -8-HRCG-6 1.78 (45.2) 0.59 (15.0) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
3/4 to 1/4 -12-HRCG-4 1.81 (46.0) 0.45 (11.4) 1 5/16 4 600 (316) 2 300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6 200 (427) 5 300 (365)
3/4 to 1/2 -12-HRCG-8 2.06 (52.3) 0.73 (18.5) 1 5/16 4 600 (316) 2 300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6 200 (427) 5 300 (365)
1 to 1/2 -16-HRCG-8 2.19 (55.6) 0.73 (18.5) 1 5/8 4 400 (303) 2 200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5 900 (406) 5 100 (351)
1 to 3/4 -16-HRCG-12 2.25 (57.2) 0.94 (23.9) 1 5/8 4 400 (303) 2 200 (151) 8 500 (585) 5 900 (406) 5 100 (351)
Heavy-Wall Female NPT
1/2 to 1/4 SS-8-HRCG-4-10K 1.75 (44.4) 0.45 (11.4) 1 1/2 10 000 (689) — — — —

Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) Pressure Ratings, psig (bar)

Thread Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
3/8 to 1/4 -6-HRCGT-4RT 1.38 (35.1) 0.44 (11.2) 7/8 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 to 1/4 -8-HRCGT-4RT 1.75 (44.4) 0.44 (11.2) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
1/2 to 3/8 -8-HRCGT-6RT 1.78 (45.2) 0.58 (14.7) 1 1/16 4 900 (337) 2 400 (165) 9 400 (647) 6 600 (454) 5 700 (392)
 Pipe Fittings 17

Elbows
L F flat

FITTINGS
PIPE
Female NPT
Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-E 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-E 0.45 (11.4) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-E 0.59 (15.0) 1.42 (36.1) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-E 0.73 (18.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
3/4 -12-E 0.94 (23.9) 1.92 (48.8) 1 1/4 5 100 (351) 2 500 (172) 9 800 (675) 6 900 (475) 5 900 (406)
1 -16-E 1.17 (29.7) 1.91 (48.5) 1 11/16 6 400 (440) 3 200 (220) 10 000 (689) 8 600 (592) 7 400 (509)
Heavy-Wall Female NPT
1/4 SS-4-E-10K 0.45 (11.4) 1.56 (39.6) 1 10 000 (689) — — — —
1/2 SS-8-E-10K 0.73 (18.5) 1.97 (50.0) 1 11/16 10 000 (689) — — — —

Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 -4-E-RT 0.44 (11.2) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-E-RT 0.58 (14.7) 1.42 (36.1) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-E-RT 0.72 (18.3) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)

L F flat

Male NPT
Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-ME 0.19 (4.8) 0.88 (22.4) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 -4-ME 0.28 (7.1) 1.05 (26.7) 1/2 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 -6-ME 0.38 (9.6) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 -8-ME 0.47 (11.9) 1.45 (36.8) 13/16 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
 18 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Street Elbows
L
F flat

S
FITTINGS
PIPE

Female to Male NPT

Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number E L S F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/16 -1-SE 0.12 (3.0) 0.86 (21.8) 0.88 (22.4) 7/16 9 200 (633) 4 600 (316) 15 000 (1 033) 12 400 (854) 10 700 (737)
1/8 -2-SE 0.19 (4.8) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-SE 0.28 (7.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-SE 0.38 (9.6) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-SE 0.47 (11.9) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
3/4 -12-SE 0.62 (15.7) 1.92 (48.8) 1.67 (42.4) 1 1/4 5 100 (351) 2 500 (172) 9 800 (675) 6 900 (475) 5 900 (406)
1 -16-SE 0.88 (22.4) 1.91 (48.5) 1.94 (49.3) 1 11/16 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 000 (689) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)

Reducing Street Elbows

L F flat

Female to Male NPT

Female Male Dimensions Pressure Ratings

NPT NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. in. Number E L S F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 1/16 -2-RSE-1 0.12 (3.0) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 1/8 -4-RSE-2 0.19 (4.8) 1.17 (29.7) 1.00 (25.4) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 1/4 -6-RSE-4 0.28 (7.1) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/4 -8-RSE-4 0.28 (7.1) 1.56 (39.6) 1.38 (35.1) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2
3/8 -8-RSE-6 0.38 (9.6) 1.56 (39.6) 1.38 (35.1) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
 Pipe Fittings 19

Tees
F flat
L L

FITTINGS
PIPE
A

Female NPT
Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-T 2.08 (52.8) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-T 2.34 (59.4) 0.45 (11.4) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-T 2.84 (72.1) 0.59 (15.0) 1.42 (36.1) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-T 3.12 (79.2) 0.73 (18.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
3/4 -12-T 3.84 (97.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.92 (48.8) 1 1/4 5 100 (351) 2 500 (172) 9 800 (675) 6 900 (475) 5 900 (406)
1 -16-T 3.82 (97.0) 1.17 (29.7) 1.91 (48.5) 1 11/16 6 400 (440) 3 200 (220) 10 000 (689) 8 600 (592) 7 400 (509)
Heavy-Wall Female NPT
1/4 SS-4-T-10K 3.12 (79.2) 0.45 (11.4) 1.56 (39.6) 1 10 000 (689) — — — —
1/2 SS-8-T-10K 3.94 (100) 0.73 (18.5) 1.97 (50.0) 1 11/16 10 000 (689) — — — —

Female ISO Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Dimensions Pressure Ratings

Thread Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/4 -4-T-RT 2.34 (59.4) 0.44 (11.2) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-T-RT 2.84 (72.1) 0.58 (14.7) 1.42 (36.1) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-T-RT 3.12 (79.2) 0.72 (18.3) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)

F flat
L L

E
L

Male NPT
Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-MT 1.76 (44.7) 0.19 (4.8) 0.88 (22.4) 7/16 10 000 (689) 5 000 (344) 15 000 (1 033) 13 500 (930) 11 600 (799)
1/4 -4-MT 2.10 (53.3) 0.28 (7.1) 1.05 (26.7) 1/2 8 000 (551) 4 000 (275) 15 000 (1 033) 10 800 (744) 9 300 (640)
3/8 -6-MT 2.34 (59.4) 0.38 (9.6) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 800 (537) 3 900 (268) 15 000 (1 033) 10 500 (723) 9 000 (620)
1/2 -8-MT 2.90 (73.7) 0.47 (11.9) 1.45 (36.8) 13/16 7 700 (530) 3 800 (261) 14 800 (1 019) 10 400 (716) 8 900 (613)
 20 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Branch Tees
F flat
L L

S
FITTINGS
PIPE

E
A

Male and Female NPT

Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L S F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-BT 2.08 (52.8) 0.19 (4.8) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-BT 2.34 (59.4) 0.28 (7.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-BT 2.84 (72.1) 0.38 (9.6) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-BT 3.12 (79.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)

Street Tees
F flat E
L S

Male and Female NPT

Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L S F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-ST 1.91 (48.5) 0.19 (4.8) 1.04 (26.4) 0.87 (22.1) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-ST 2.34 (59.4) 0.28 (7.1) 1.17 (29.7) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-ST 2.68 (68.1) 0.38 (9.6) 1.42 (36.1) 1.26 (32.0) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-ST 3.12 (79.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.56 (39.6) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
3/4 -12-ST 3.59 (91.2) 0.62 (15.7) 1.92 (48.8) 1.67 (42.4) 1 1/4 5 100 (351) 2 500 (172) 9 800 (675) 6 900 (475) 5 900 (406)
 Pipe Fittings 21

Crosses

F flat
L

E A

FITTINGS
PIPE
L L
A

Female NPT
Pressure Ratings
NPT Basic Dimensions, in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E L F Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 -2-CS 2.08 (52.8) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) 1/2 6 500 (447) 3 200 (220) 12 500 (861) 8 800 (606) 7 500 (516)
1/4 -4-CS 2.34 (59.4) 0.45 (11.4) 1.17 (29.7) 11/16 7 200 (496) 3 600 (248) 13 900 (957) 9 700 (668) 8 300 (571)
3/8 -6-CS 2.84 (72.1) 0.59 (15.0) 1.42 (36.1) 13/16 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
1/2 -8-CS 3.12 (79.2) 0.73 (18.5) 1.56 (39.6) 1 5 600 (385) 2 800 (192) 10 800 (744) 7 500 (516) 6 500 (447)
3/4 -12-CS 3.84 (97.5) 0.94 (23.9) 1.92 (48.8) 1 1/4 5 100 (351) 2 500 (172) 9 800 (675) 6 900 (475) 5 900 (406)
1 -16-CS 3.82 (97.0) 1.17 (29.7) 1.91 (48.5) 1 11/16 6 400 (440) 3 200 (220) 10 000 (689) 8 600 (592) 7 400 (509)

Union Ball Joints F1 flat

F2 flat

Female NPT

Dimensions Pressure Ratings

NPT Basic in. (mm) psig (bar)
Size Ordering 316 SS, Alloy 2507,
in. Number A E F1 F2 Carbon Steel Brass Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825
1/8 A
-2-UBJ 1.81 (46.0) 0.27 (6.8) 1 1/8 15/16 8 400 (578) 4 200 (289) 15 000 (1 033) 11 300 (778) 9 700 (668)
1/4 -4-UBJ 2.34 (59.4) 0.36 (9.1) 1 3/8 1 3/16 6 600 (454) 3 300 (227) 12 700 (875) 8 900 (613) 7 600 (523)
3/8 -6-UBJ 2.50 (63.5) 0.52 (13.2) 1 1/2 1 5/16 5 300 (365) 2 600 (179) 10 200 (702) 7 100 (489) 6 100 (420)
1/2 -8-UBJ 2.69 (68.3) 0.62 (15.7) 1 3/4 1 5/8 6 000 (413) 3 000 (206) 11 600 (799) 8 100 (558) 6 900 (475)
3/4 -12-UBJ 3.12 (79.2) 0.88 (22.4) 2 1/8 1 7/8 4 600 (316) 2 300 (158) 8 900 (613) 6 200 (427) 5 300 (365)
1 -16-UBJ 3.56 (90.4) 1.03 (26.2) 2 1/2 2 3/8 6 800 (468) 3 400 (234) 10 000 (689) 9 200 (633) 7 900 (544)
Union ball joint nuts are silver plated. A lubricant is utilized for assembly.
 22 Weld, VCR, VCO, Pipe, and Vacuum Fittings

Pipe Caps Pipe Plugs

F flat
F flat

A
FITTINGS

A
PIPE

Female NPT Male NPT

Dimensions Dimensions
NPT Basic NPT Basic
in. (mm) in. (mm)
Size Ordering Size Ordering
in. Number A F in. Number A F
1/8 -2-CP 0.75 (19.1) 9/16 1/16 -1-P 0.75 (19.1) 5/16
1/4 -4-CP 0.91 (23.1) 3/4 1/8 -2-P 0.75 (19.1) 7/16
3/8 -6-CP 1.03 (26.2) 7/8 1/4 -4-P 0.96 (24.4) 9/16
1/2 -8-CP 1.34 (34.0) 1 1/16 3/8 -6-P 0.99 (25.1) 11/16
3/4 -12-CP 1.44 (36.6) 1 5/16 1/2 -8-P 1.21 (30.7) 7/8
1 -16-CP 1.62 (41.1) 1 5/8 3/4 -12-P 1.21 (30.7) 1 1/16
Heavy-Wall Female NPT 1 -16-P 1.50 (38.1) 1 3/8
1/4 SS-4-CP-10K 1.11 (28.2) 1 For pipe plugs with male ISO/BSP parallel
threads (RS), contact your authorized Swagelok
1/2 SS-8-CP-10K 1.58 (40.1) 1 1/2 representative.

Hollow Hex Plugs

O-ring F flat

B
A

Male SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS
Dimensions
Thread Basic Uniform
in. (mm)
Size Ordering O-Ring➀
in. Number A B C F Size
7/16-20 -4-HPST 0.45 (11.4) 0.36 (9.1) 0.56 (14.2) 3/16 -904
9/16-18 -6-HPST 0.48 (12.2) 0.39 (9.9) 0.69 (17.5) 1/4 -906
3/4-16 -8-HPST 0.56 (14.2) 0.44 (11.2) 0.88 (22.4) 5/16 -908
1 1/16-12 -12-HPST 0.75 (19.1) 0.59 (15.0) 1.25 (31.8) 9/16 -912
1 5/16-12 -16-HPST 0.75 (19.1) 0.59 (15.0) 1.50 (38.1) 5/8 -916
➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.
 Pipe Fittings 23

Hollow Hex Plugs

F flat
C

FITTINGS
A

PIPE
Male NPT
NPT Basic
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Size Ordering
in. Number A B C F
1/8 SS-2-HP 0.41 (10.4) 0.30 (7.6) 0.37 (9.4) 3/16
1/4 SS-4-HP 0.61 (15.5) 0.49 (12.4) 0.48 (12.1) 1/4
3/8 SS-6-HP 0.59 (15.0) 0.47 (11.9) 0.62 (15.7) 5/16
1/2 SS-8-HP 0.76 (19.3) 0.64 (16.2) 0.76 (19.3) 3/8

Hex Head Plugs

F flat
O-ring

B
A

Male SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS
Dimensions
Thread Basic Uniform
in. (mm)
Size Ordering O-Ring➀
in. Number A B F Size
7/16-20 -4-PST 0.76 (19.3) 0.36 (9.1) 9/16 -904
9/16-18 -6-PST 0.82 (20.8) 0.39 (9.9) 11/16 -906
3/4-16 -8-PST 0.89 (22.6) 0.44 (11.2) 7/8 -908
1 1/16-12 -12-PST 1.12 (28.4) 0.59 (15.0) 1 1/4 -912
1 5/16-12 -16-PST 1.18 (30.0) 0.59 (15.0) 1 1/2 -916
➀ O-ring material is 90 durometer fluorocarbon FKM.

MS-01-147, RevR, January 2021

 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Warranty Information
Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Life- Swagelok, Cajon, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting,
IGC, Kenmac, Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO,
time Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your VCR, Ultra-Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
authorized Swagelok representative. 15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Safe Product Selection Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
When selecting a product, the total system design must Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
responsibilities of the system designer and user. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
• WARNING Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
components not governed by industrial design Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
connections, with those of other manufacturers. Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
© 2020 Swagelok Company
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 1
www.swagelok.com

Stainle s s Ste el Se amle ss Tubing and

Tube Suppor t Syste ms
Fractional, Metr ic, a nd Impe r ial Size s

STANDARD
TUBING
■ 316 / 316L and 304 / 304L stainless steel

■ Standard instrumentation tubing

■ 1/8 to 2 in. and 3 to 25 mm sizes

■ Marked to indicate size, material, specifications, and heat code

 2 Tubing, Tubing Tools, and Welding System

Contents
Materials Standards
Fractional, Metric,
Imperial Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Chemical Composition
316 / 316L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

304 / 304L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
STANDARD
TUBING

Ordering Information, Dimensions,

and Pressure Ratings
Fractional Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

Metric Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Imperial Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Pressure Ratings
Elevated Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Tube Support Systems

Bolted Plastic
Clamp Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5

Cushioned Clamp
Tube Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

P Clamp Supports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

Tube Support Strips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10

Related Products
Ultrahigh-Purity and
High-Purity Tubing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Tube Fittings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Tubing Tools and

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11

Swagelok Orbital Welding

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 3

Material Standards Ordering Information, Dimensions, and

Metric and
Pressure Ratings
Fractional Sizes Imperial Sizes Select an ordering number.
316 / 316L Ordering numbers specify 316 / 316L stainless steel material.
UNS S31600 / S31603 For tubing of 304 / 304L stainless steel, replace SS in the
UNS S31600 / S31603 ASTM A213 / A269 ordering number with 304L.
ASTM A213 / A269 W.-NR 1.4435 Examples: 3
 04L-T4-S-035-20
W.-NR 1.4401 / 1.4404 SS 2353
AFNOR Z2CND17-13 304L-T6M-S-1,5M-6ME
304L-T4-S-065-6ME
304 / 304L
Pressure ratings of tubing used with Swagelok® tube fittings
UNS S30400 / S30403

STANDARD
may be limited by the end connection. Refer to Tubing Data

TUBING
ASTM A213 / A269
UNS S30400 / S30403 catalog, MS‑01‑107, for additional information.
W.-NR 1.4301 / 1.4306
ASTM A213 / A269
SS 2352
AFNOR Z2CN18-10
Fractional Sizes
Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value
of 20 000 psi (137.8 MPa) for ASTM A269 tubing at –20 to
Chemical Composition 100°F (–28 to 37°C), as listed in ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1.
Tubing nominal length is 20 ft.
316 / 316L
Tube Tube Working
Metric and OD Wall Ordering Weight Pressure
Fractional Sizes Imperial Sizes in. in. Number lb/ft psig
Element Composition, wt. % 1/8 0.028 SS-T2-S-028-20 0.029 8 500
Chromium 16.0 to 18.0 17.0 to 19.0 0.035 SS-T4-S-035-20 0.080 5 100
Nickel 11.0 to 14.0 12.5 to 15.0 1/4 0.049 SS-T4-S-049-20 0.105 7 500
Molybdenum 2.00 to 3.00 2.50 to 3.00 0.065 SS-T4-S-065-20 0.128 10 200
Manganese 2.00 max 2.00 max 0.035 SS-T6-S-035-20 0.127 3 300
Silicon 0.75 max 1.00 max 3/8 0.049 SS-T6-S-049-20 0.171 4 800
Carbon 0.035 max 0.030 max 0.065 SS-T6-S-065-20 0.215 6 500
Sulfur 0.030 max 0.015 max 0.035➀ SS-T8-S-035-20 0.174 2 600
1/2 0.049 SS-T8-S-049-20 0.236 3 700
304 / 304L 0.065 SS-T8-S-065-20 0.302 5 100
All Sizes 5/8 0.065 SS-T10-S-065-20 0.389 4 000
Composition 3/4 0.065 SS-T12-S-065-20 0.476 3 300
Element wt. %
1 0.083 SS-T16-S-083-20 0.813 3 100
Chromium 18.0 to 20.0
0.095➀ SS-T20-S-095-20 1.187 2 800
Nickel 8.0 to 11.0 1 1/4
0.120 SS-T20-S-120-20 1.473 3 600
Manganese 2.00 max
0.120➀ SS-T24-S-120-20 1.792 3 000
Silicon 0.75 max 1 1/2
0.134 SS-T24-S-134-20 1.981 3 400
Carbon 0.035 max
0.134➀ SS-T32-S-134-20 2.705 2 500
Sulfur 0.030 max 2
0.188 SS-T32-S-188-20 3.686 3 600
➀ Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings in gas service.
 4 Tubing, Tubing Tools, and Welding System

Ordering Information, Dimensions, and Pressure Ratings

Metric Sizes Imperial Sizes
Allowable working pressures are based on equations from Allowable working pressures are calculated from an S value
ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1 for EN ISO 1127 tubing (D4, of 20 000 psi (137.8 MPa) for ASTM A269 tubing at –20 to
T4 tolerance for 3 to 12 mm; D4, T3 tolerance 14 to 50 mm), 100°F (–28 to 37°C), as listed in ASME B31.3 and ASME B31.1.
using a stress value of 137.8 MPa (20 000 psi) and tensile Tubing nominal length is 6 m.
strength of 516.4 MPa (74 900 psi).
Tube Tube Working
Tubing nominal length is 6 m. OD Wall Ordering Weight Pressure
in. in. Number kg/m psig
Tube Tube Working
OD Wall Ordering Weight Pressure 0.014 SS-T1-S-014-6ME 0.01 8 100
STANDARD

1/16
TUBING

mm mm Number kg/m bar 0.020 SS-T1-S-020-6ME 0.01 12 000

0.5➀ SS-T3M-S-0,5M-6ME 0.021 330
3 0.028 SS-T2-S-028-6ME 0.04 8 500
0.7➀ SS-T3M-S-0,7M-6ME 0.027 560 1/8
0.035 SS-T2-S-035-6ME 0.05 10 900
1.0 SS-T6M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.125 420
6 0.035 SS-T4-S-035-6ME 0.12 5 100
1.5 SS-T6M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.169 710
1/4 0.049 SS-T4-S-049-6ME 0.16 7 500
1.0 SS-T8M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.175 310
8 0.065 SS-T4-S-065-6ME 0.19 10 200
1.5 SS-T8M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.244 520
0.035 SS-T6-S-035-6ME 0.19 3 300
1.0 SS-T10M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.225 240
10 3/8 0.049 SS-T6-S-049-6ME 0.25 4 800
1.5 SS-T10M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.319 400
0.065 SS-T6-S-065-6ME 0.32 6 500
1.0 SS-T12M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.275 200
0.035➀ SS-T8-S-035-6ME 0.26 2 600
12 1.5 SS-T12M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.394 330
0.049 SS-T8-S-049-6ME 0.35 3 700
2.0 SS-T12M-S-2,0M-6ME 0.500 470 1/2
0.065 SS-T8-S-065-6ME 0.45 5 100
1.0➀ SS-T16M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.375 140
0.083 SS-T8-S-083-6ME 0.55 6 700
16 1.5 SS-T16M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.507 230
0.049➀ SS-T10-S-049-6ME 0.45 2 900
2.0 SS-T16M-S-2,0M-6ME 0.651 330 5/8
0.065 SS-T10-S-065-6ME 0.58 4 000
1.0➀ SS-T18M-S-1,0M-6ME 0.425 120
0.049➀ SS-T12-S-049-6ME 0.56 2 400
18 1.5 SS-T18M-S-1,5M-6ME 0.619 200 3/4
0.065 SS-T12-S-065-6ME 0.71 3 300
2.0 SS-T18M-S-2,0M-6ME 0.801 290
1 0.083 SS-T16-S-083-6ME 1.2 3 100
20 2.0 SS-T20M-S-2,0M-6ME 0.901 260
➀ Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings in gas service.
22 2.0 SS-T22M-S-2,0M-6ME 1.00 230
2.0➁ SS-T25M-S-2,0M-6ME 1.15 200
25
2.5 SS-T25M-S-2,5M-6ME 1.41 260
➀ Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings.
➁ Not recommended for use with Swagelok tube fittings in gas service.

Pressure Ratings at Elevated Temperatures

To determine elevated-temperature pressure ratings in Example:
accordance with B31.3 and B31.1, multiply the pressure ratings Type 316 stainless steel 1/2 in. OD × 0.035 in. wall at 1000°F
provided in the tables above by the factors in the table below.
1. The allowable working pressure at –20 to 100°F (–28 to
Temperature Material 37°C) is 2600 psig (Fractional Sizes, page 3).
304, 316, 2. The elevated temperature factor for 1000°F (537°C) is
°F °C 304 / 304L 316 / 316L 0.76:
200 93 1.00 1.00 2600 psig × 0.76 = 1976 psig
400 204 0.93 0.96 The allowable working pressure for 316 SS 1/2 in. OD ×
600 315 0.82 0.85 0.035 in. wall tubing at 1000°F (537°C) is 1976 psig.
800 426 0.76 0.79
1000 537 0.69 0.76
Dual-certified grades 304 / 304L and 316 / 316L
meet the requirements for the lower maximum
carbon content of the L grades and for the higher
minimum yield and tensile strength of the non-L
grades.
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 5

Tube Support Systems

Bolted Plastic Clamp Supports
Swagelok bolted plastic clamp 1
supports offer versatility for mounting
tubing and pipe. Three support kit 2
configurations—single, twin, and
single stacking—are available. See Single
page 6. 3
support
Three mounting configurations—weld kit
plate, mounting rail and rail nuts,

STANDARD
and strut nuts—are available. See

TUBING
page 7.

Features
4
■ Absorb shock and vibration
■ Resist many chemicals and
corrosives 5
■ Reduce stress on system components
■ Enhance system reliability
Stacking
■ Resist ultraviolet light 3 support
■ Make system easily accessible for installation and kit
maintenance.

Temperature Rating
–22 to 194°F (–30 to 90°C)

Materials of Construction
Component Material/Specification
6
1 Hex head support bolts 304 SS➀
7 Weld plate
2 Cover plate 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS➀
mounting
3 Support body Virgin polypropylene➁ option
4 Lock plate 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS➀
5 7/16 in. or 10 mm hex 9
304 SS➀
head stacking bolts
8 Mounting rail
6 Weld nut 303 SS/DIN 1.4305 SS
and rail nuts
7 Weld plate 304 SS/DIN 1.4301 SS➀
mounting option
8 Mounting rail 303 SS/DIN 1.4305 SS
9 Rail nut CF8M/DIN 1.4408 SS
10 Strut nut Zinc-plated steel➂

➀ 316 stainless steel bolts and plates are available (see Bolted Plastic 10 Strut nut
Clamp Support Options, page 8). mounting
➁ Polyamide support bodies are available (see Bolted Plastic Clamp option
Support Options, page 8).
➂ 316 stainless steel strut nuts are available (see Bolted Plastic Clamp
Support Options, page 8).
 6 Tubing, Tubing Tools, and Welding System

Tube Support Systems

Ordering Information and Dimensions, Bolted Plastic Clamp Support Kit
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
For hose applications, consult your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.

D
E
D

B➀ B➀
STANDARD

F A
TUBING

C
C

Single-Support Kits Twin-Support Kits

Pipe Kits Tube Kits Dimensions, in. (mm)

Pipe Tube Tube
Size A Ordering Size A Ordering Size A Ordering
in. Number in. Number mm Number Group B➀ C D E F
Single Support➁
6 304-S1-PP-6TM
1/4 304-S1-PP-4T
8 304-S1-PP-8TM 1.30 0.51 1.34 0.79 1.06
— — 1
10 304-S1-PP-10TM (33.0) (13.0) (34.0) (20.0) (27.0)
3/8 304-S1-PP-6T
12 304-S1-PP-12TM
14 304-S3-PP-14TM
1/2 304-S3-PP-8T 15 304-S3-PP-15TM
16 304-S3-PP-16TM
1.61 0.67 1.89 1.30 1.38
1/2 304-S3-PP-8P 5/8 304-S3-PP-10T 18 304-S3-PP-18TM 3
(40.9) (17.0) (48.0) (33.0) (35.1)
3/4 304-S3-PP-12T 20 304-S3-PP-20TM
7/8 304-S3-PP-14T 22 304-S3-PP-22TM
1 304-S3-PP-16T 25 304-S3-PP-25TM
3/4 304-S5-PP-12P 30 304-S5-PP-30TM
1 1/4 304-S5-PP-20T
1 304-S5-PP-16P 32 304-S5-PP-32TM
2.56 1.14 2.80 2.05 2.28
1 1/4 304-S5-PP-20P 1 1/2 304-S5-PP-24T 38 304-S5-PP-38TM 5
(65.0) (29.0) (71.1) (52.1) (57.9)

— — — — 40 304-S5-PP-40TM

2.87 1.28 3.39 2.60 2.60

1 1/2 304-S6-PP-24P 2 304-S6-PP-32T 48 304-S6-PP-48TM 6
(72.9) (32.5) (86.1) (66.0) (66.0)
Twin Support➂
6 304-S1T-PP-6TM
1/4 304-S1T-PP-4T
8 304-S1T-PP-8TM 1.50 0.53 1.42 0.79
1
10 304-S1T-PP-10TM (38.1) (13.5) (36.1) (20.1)
3/8 304-S1T-PP-6T
— — 12 304-S1T-PP-12TM —
1/2 304-S3T-PP-8T 15 304-S3T-PP-15TM
16 304-S3T-PP-16TM 1.93 0.73 2.64 1.42
3/4 304-S3T-PP-12T 3
18 304-S3T-PP-18TM (49.0) (18.5) (67.1) (36.1)
1 304-S3T-PP-16T 20 304-S3T-PP-20TM
➀ For overall height, add appropriate mounting option dimension.
➁ Threads for single fractional supports are 1/4-20 (metric M6).
➂ Threads for group 1 twin supports are 1/4-20 (metric M6), group 3 twin supports are 5/16-18 (metric M8).

Single-Support Stacking Kit

You can stack up to three single bolted plastic clamp
supports. The top support uses a cover plate. The lower
support(s) uses a lock plate. To order a stacking support kit,
add -ST to the single tube kit ordering number.
Example: 304-S1-PP-4T-ST
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 7

Tube Support Systems

Bolted Plastic Clamp Support Mounting Configurations
To order a bolted plastic clamp system, choose from the three mounting options
listed below and on the next page..

Weld Plate Mounting Option

■ Weld plates are available in standard and elongated lengths. Then identify the support kit group number listed in the table.
■ Weld nuts are welded, not press fit, to the weld plate. Example: Group 1
To order, select a support kit ordering number from the table Select the corresponding weld plate ordering number.
on page 6. Note: The Group number for the support kit and the weld

STANDARD
TUBING
Example: 304-S1-PP-4T kit must be the same.
Example: 304-S1-WP

Single-Support Standard weld plate Twin-Support

Weld Plate Weld Plate

Elongated weld plate

Top
A
Top 0.25 (6.4) dia
D
D1
Side C
B
E B Side C

A or A1

Weld Plate Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.

Ordering Number
Standard Elongated Dimensions, in. (mm)
Group Fractional Metric Fractional Metric A A1➀ B C D D1➀ E
Single-Support Weld Plate
1.42 2.52 1.97
1 304-S1-WP 304-S1-WPM 304-S1-WPE 304-S1-WPEM
(36.1) (64.0) (50.0)
1.97 3.07 2.52
3 304-S3-WP 304-S3-WPM 304-S3-WPE 304-S3-WPEM
(50.0) (78.0) 1.18 0.12 (64.0)
— —
2.83 3.94 (30.0) (3.0) 3.39
5 304-S5-WP 304-S5-WPM 304-S5-WPE 304-S5-WPEM
(71.9) (100) (86.1)
3.46 4.57 3.94
6 304-S6-WP 304-S6-WPM 304-S6-WPE 304-S6-WPEM
(87.9) (116) (100)
Twin-Support Weld Plate
1.46 0.12 0.84 0.56
1 304-S1T-WP 304-S1T-WPM 304-S1T-WPE 316-S1T-WPEM
(37.1) 1.18 (3.0) (21.3) (14.2)
— —
2.76 (30.0) 0.20 2.04 0.45
3 304-S3T-WP 304-S3T-WPM 304-S3T-WPE 316-S3T-WPEM
(70.1) (5.1) (51.8) (11.4)

➀ Elongated weld plate only.

 8 Tubing, Tubing Tools, and Welding System

Tube Support Systems

Bolted Plastic Clamp Support Mounting Configurations
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.

Mounting Rail and Rail Nuts Mounting Option

■ Rail nuts can be added or removed Mounting Rail Ordering Information
anywhere along the rail span.
Length, ft (m) Ordering Number Ordering Number
■ Neoprene cap holds nuts and
support body in place. 3.3 (1) 303-S0-R-3.3 316-S0-R-3.3

■ Two rail nuts are required for single- 6.6 (2) 303-S0-R-6.6 316-S0-R-6.6
STANDARD
TUBING

support kits; one rail nut is required

for twin-support kits. Rail Nuts Ordering Information

To order, select a support kit ordering Ordering Number

number from the table on page 6. Group Fractional Metric
Example: 304-S1-PP-4T Single (two nuts required) 1.12 0.44
(28.4) (11.2)
All SS-S0-RN SS-S0-RNM
Then select a mounting rail ordering
number. Twin (one nut required)
Example: 303-S0-R-3.3 1 SS-S0-RN SS-S0-RNM
0.08
3 SS-S3T-RN SS-S3T-RNM
Select the corresponding (fractional or (2.0)

metric) rail nut ordering number.

Example: 2 pc SS-S0-RN

Strut Nuts Mounting Option

Strut Nuts Ordering Information
■ Strut nuts are for use on 1 5/8 in.
(41.3 mm) strut rail mounting Ordering Number
systems. Group Fractional Metric
■ Strut nuts can be added or removed Single (two nuts required)
anywhere along the strut rail span. All S-S0-SN S-S0-SNM 0.06
(1.5)
■ Two strut nuts are required for Twin (one nut required)
single-support kits; one strut nut is 1 S-S0-SN S-S0-SNM
required for twin-support kits. 3 S-S3T-SN S-S3T-SNM
To order, select a support kit ordering
number from the table on page 6. Ordering Number
Example: 304-S1-PP-4T Group Fractional Metric
Then select the corresponding Single (two nuts required)
(fractional or metric) strut nut ordering All SS-S0-SN SS-S0-SNM
number(s). Twin (one nut required)
Example: 2 pc S-S0-SN 1 SS-S0-SN SS-S0-SNM
3 SS-S3T-SN SS-S3T-SNM

Bolted Plastic Clamp Support Options

Blind Support Body (Undrilled) Polyamide Support Body
To order, replace the tube size designator in the support kit A polyamide support body is available for use in temperatures
ordering number with BL. from –40 to 284°F (–40 to 140°C). To order, replace PP with
Example: 304-S1-PP-BL PA in the support kit ordering number.
Example: 304-S1-PA-4T
316 Stainless Steel Bolts and Plates
To order, replace 304 with 316 in the support kit ordering 316 Stainless Steel Strut Nuts
number. To order, replace S with SS in the strut nuts ordering number.
Examples: 3
 16-S1-PP-4T Example: SS-S0-SN
316-S1-WP

Hammerhead Bolt (Cable for Fastening)

Available on request.
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 9

Tube Support Systems

Cushioned Clamp Tube Supports D

B
C
A

STANDARD
Ordering Information and Dimensions

TUBING
■ Provide channel-mounted tube support Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
■ Dampen shock and vibration
Basic
■ Resist galvanic corrosion. A, Tube Size Dimensions, in. (mm)
Ordering
in. mm Number B C D
Technical Data 0.27 0.98 0.62
1/4 — TBC4
(6.9) (24.9) (15.7)
Component Material Temperature Rating 0.33 1.13 0.82
3/8 10 TBC6
Electro-dichromate– (8.4) (28.7) (20.8)
Clamp finished carbon steel or 0.40 1.34 0.94
316 stainless steel –50 to 275°F 1/2 — TBC8
(10.2) (34.0) (23.9)
Thermoplastic (–45 to 135°C)
0.52 1.68 1.20
Cushion polypropylene-based 3/4 20 TBC12
(13.2) (42.7) (30.5)
elastomer
0.65 1.95 1.44
1 25 TBC16
(16.5) (49.5) (36.6)
Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes.
Clamp fits any 1 5/8 in. mounting channel.

To order, select a basic

Clamp Material Designator
ordering number and add a
Electro-dichromate–
clamp material designator. S-
finished carbon steel
Example: S-TBC4 316 stainless steel SS-

Tube Support Systems

P Clamp Supports 0.61
(15.5)
■ Are an economical way to support
tube or hose runs in a variety of sizes
■ Install easily to a wall or equipment A
frame using a single screw or bolt. 0.22
B
(5.6) 0.27
Technical Data (6.9)
dia

Component Material Temperature Rating 0.032 (0.81) 0.50

0.07 (1.8) (12.7)
Clamp 316 SS/AMS 5524
–40 to 212°F
Black EPDM/ (–40 to 100°C) Ordering Information and Dimensions
Cushion
SAE J200BC715 C12, C20
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only
and are subject to change.

A, Tube Size Ordering B

in. mm Number in. (mm)
1/4 6 SS-TBP4 0.52 (13.2)
3/8 10 SS-TBP6 0.59 (15.0)
1/2 12 SS-TBP8 0.65 (16.5)
3/4 20 SS-TBP12 0.84 (21.3)
1 25 SS-TBP16 0.95 (24.1)

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes.

 10 Tubing, Tubing Tools, and Welding System

Tube Support Systems

Tube Support Strips

SWAGELOK TUBE SUPPORT STRIP C-HRPH-1423-DIM

■ Organize multiple tubing or hose runs

STANDARD
TUBING

■ Offer push-in installation

■ Install easily to a wall or equipment frame using two screws
or bolts.

Technical Data
Component Material Temperature Rating
–40 to 200°F
Tube support strip Polypropylene
(–40 to 93°C)

D
A F
E dia

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.

Maximum
Number of
A Dimensions
Tubing and
Tube Size in. (mm)
Ordering Hose
in. mm Number Channels B C D E F Width
4.50 0.50 4.05 0.18 0.31 0.49
1/8 — MS-TSS-2 10
(114) (12.7) (103) (4.6) (8.0) (12.4)
4.50 0.50 4.05 0.18 0.31 0.49
1/4 — MS-TSS-4 10
(114) (12.7) (103) (4.6) (8.0) (12.4)
5.37 0.56 4.93 0.18 0.39 0.49
5/16 8 MS-TSS-5 10
(136.3) (14.1) (125.3) (4.6) (10.0) (12.4)
5.62 0.61 5.15 0.18 0.43 0.60
3/8 10 MS-TSS-6 10
(143) (15.6) (131) (4.6) (11.0) (15.3)
5.25 0.93 4.56 0.24 0.57 0.96
1/2 — MS-TSS-8 6
(133) (23.6) (116) (6.1) (14.5) (24.5)

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for additional sizes.

Minimum order quantities and tooling may apply.
 Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes 11

Ultrahigh-Purity and High-Purity Tubing Tube Fittings

Refer to Ultrahigh-Purity and High-Purity Stainless Steel Refer to Gaugeable Tube
Tubing—Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes catalog, Fittings and Adapter Fittings
MS‑01‑182, for ordering numbers and complete information catalog, MS-01-140, for
on: additional information.
■ Ultrahigh-Purity Tubing
Ultrahigh-purity tubing with an electropolished inside-
diameter internal surface finish of 10 µin. / 0.25 µm Ra max
is available.
■ Chemically Cleaned and Passivated Tubing Tubing Tools and
Accessories

STANDARD
High-purity tubing with an inside diameter finish of

TUBING
20 µin. / 0.51 µm Ra (-G20 process) or 30 µin. / 0.76 µm Refer to Tubing Tools
Ra (-G30 process) is available. This tubing complies with and Accessories catalog,
ASTM G93, Level A requirement for nonvolatile residue MS‑01‑179, for additional
levels and also meets requirements of CGA G4.1. information.
■ Thermocouple-Cleaned Tubing
High-purity tubing thermocouple cleaned (-G process)
is available to meet the cleanliness requirements of
ASTM A632‑S3.

Swagelok Orbital
Welding System
Refer to Welding System
M200 Power Supply catalog,
MS‑02‑342, for additional
information.

MS-01-181, RevG, June 2019

 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page the individual catalog; for example, the Swagelok Gaugeable Tube Fittings and
Tube Adapters catalog is MS-01-140, RevW. Subsequent revisions will supersede the
printed version and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok elec-
tronic Desktop Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Warranty Information
Safe Product Selection Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited
When selecting a product, the total system design must Lifetime Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. your authorized Swagelok representative.
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings,
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the
responsibilities of the system designer and user.

Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers.
Swagelok, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting, IGC, Kenmac,
Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO, VCR, Ultra-Torr,
Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
© 2018 Swagelok Company
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 1
www.swagelok.com

FITTINGS
TUBE
Gauge able Tube Fit tings
and Adapte r Fit tings

■ Available in tube sizes from 1/16 to 2 in. and 2 to 50 mm

■ Consistent gaugeability upon initial installation

■ Easy to disconnect and retighten

■ Wide variety of materials and configurations

■ Demonstrated reliability and performance

 2 Tube Fittings

Features
FITTINGS
TUBE

■ Live-loaded, two-ferrule design.

■ Easy to install.
■ No torque is transmitted to tubing during installation.
■ Swagelok® gap inspection gauge ensures sufficient pull-up upon initial installation.

Back ferrule

Hinge point

Nut
Tubing

Front ferrule

Fitting body

During assembly of the advanced-geometry design

(above), the front ferrule is driven into the fitting body and
the tubing to create primary seals, while the back ferrule
hinges inward to create a strong grip on the tubing. The
back ferrule geometry allows for an improved engineering
hinging-colleting™ action that translates axial motion into
radial swaging action on the tube, yet operates with a low
assembly torque requirement.

Two-Ferrule, Mechanical Grip Design Advanced-Geometry, Hinging‑Colleting

The two ferrules separate sealing and tube gripping Back Ferrule Design
functions; each ferrule is optimized for its function. This design is standard on all 1/4 to 1 in. and 6 to
The front ferrule creates a seal: 25 mm Swagelok stainless steel tube fittings to help
installers make more consistent, leak-tight tube
■ against the fitting body
connections.
■ on the tubing outside diameter.
In these sizes, a patented case hardening process
As the nut is turned, the back ferrule: and patented recessed and contoured geometry
■ axially advances the front ferrule provide a unique engineered advantage to the
■ radially applies an effective tube grip. Swagelok back ferrule, providing:
■ excellent gas-tight sealing and tube-gripping action
■ easily achieved proper installation
■ consistent remakes
■ excellent vibration fatigue resistance and tube
support
■ full compatibility with original Swagelok stainless
steel tube fittings of identical sizes.
Refer to 316 Stainless Steel Swagelok Tube Fittings
with Advanced Geometry Back Ferrules technical
report, MS‑06‑16, for additional information.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 3

Contents

FITTINGS
TUBE
Features, 2 Straight Fittings Weld Connectors

The Swagelok Tube Unions

Fitting Advantage, 6 Tube Socket, 24
Union, 14

Reducing Union,
Compliance with Industry
15
Standards, 7
Male Pipe, 25
Materials, 8
Bulkhead Union
and Bulkhead
O-Rings, 8
Reducing Female Connectors
Union, 16
Cleaning and NPT, 26
Packaging, 8
ISO/BSP Tapered
Male Connectors Thread (RT),
Metric Swagelok Tube
ISO/BSP Parallel
Fittings, 9 NPT, 17 Thread (RJ and
ISO/BSP Tapered RP), 27
Pressure Rating Basis and
Thread (RT), 18
Thread Specifications, 9 ISO/BSP Parallel
ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG,
Pressure Ratings, 10 Thread (RS), 19 Gauge), 28

ISO/BSP Parallel
Ordering Numbers and Thread (RP), 20
Dimensions, 14 Bulkhead
NPT, 28
Bulkhead
NPT, 21

Reducers
SAE/MS
Straight Thread Reducer, 29
(ST) and Long Long Reducer,
SAE/MS Straight 30
Thread (ST), 21

Additional Products
O-Seal (SAE/MS Bulkhead
■ For Alloy 2507 super duplex
Straight Thread Reducer,  30
tube fittings, refer to Gaugeable
Alloy 2507 Super Duplex Tube and NPT), 22
Fittings catalog, MS‑01‑174.
■ For alloy 400 tube fittings, AN and
refer to Gaugeable Alloy 400
Port Connectors
AN Bulkhead
Mechanically Attached Pipe Fitting, 23 Port Connector
and Tube Fittings catalog,
and Reducing
MS‑02‑332.
10-32 Thread, Port Connector,
■ For PFA tube fittings, refer to
M5 × 0.8 Thread, 31
PFA Tube Fittings catalog,
MS‑01‑05. and Metric
■ For medium- and high-pressure Thread (RS), 24
tube fittings, refer to Medium-
and High-Pressure Fittings,
Tubing, Valves, and Accessories
catalog, MS-02-472.
 4 Tube Fittings

Contents
FITTINGS
TUBE

Caps and Plugs 45° Elbows Cross

Male
Cap, 32 Union, 46
NPT, 39

Plug, 32
Positionable, Application-Specific Fittings
SAE/MS Straight
Thread (ST), 39 Kwik-Clamp Flange
Vent Protectors
to Swagelok Tube
Fitting, 47
Mud Dauber, 32
Tees
Orifice Plate Fitting,
Unions
48
90° Elbows
Union and Reducing Bored-Through Fittings
Unions Union, 40
For thermocouples, dip tubes, and heat
exchanger tees, 20
Union, 33
Male
Tube Adapters
Branch, NPT (TTM) and Tube Adapter Information, 49
Male
Adapter Tees, 42
NPT, 34 Male

ISO/BSP Tapered
Run, NPT (TMT), 43 NPT and ISO/BSP
Thread (RT), 35
Tapered Thread (RT),
50
Reducing Elbow, Positionable Branch,
36 SAE/MS Straight ISO/BSP Parallel
Thread (TTS) and Thread (RS and RP),
Positionable, ISO/BSP Positionable Branch, 51
Parallel Thread (PR) ISO/BSP Parallel
and Positionable, Thread (TTR), 44
SAE/MS Straight
SAE/MS Straight
Positionable Run, Thread (ST) and O-Seal
Thread (ST), 37
SAE/MS Straight (SAE/MS Straight
Thread (TST), 44 Thread), 52
Weld
Positionable Run,
Tube Socket, 38 ISO/BSP Parallel AN Thread, 52
Thread (TRT), 45

Female
Male Pipe, 38
Pipe Weld, 53
Run, NPT (TFT), 45

Female
Branch, NPT (TTF),
NPT, 38 46
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 5

Contents

FITTINGS
TUBE
Female ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets Gaugeability, 69
 PT and ISO/BSP
N Steel (RS Fitting),
Tapered Thread Copper (RP Fitting), Installation Instructions, 69
(RT), 53 Copper (RG, Gauge
Swagelok Tube Fittings, 70
Fitting), and PTFE
ISO/BSP Parallel (RJ Fitting), 60 O-Seal Male Connectors, 70
Thread (RP and RJ),
and ISO/BSP O-Rings Caps and Plugs, 71
Parallel Thread (RG, Buna N (O-Seal Port Connectors, 71
Gauge), 54 Straight Threads
and O-Seal Pipe Positionable Elbows and Tees, 72
Threads) and Tube Adapters, 72
Fluorocarbon FKM
AN Thread, 54 AN Thread Swivel Nut, 72
(ISO/BSP Parallel
Threads and Weld Fittings, 73
SAE/MS Straight
Threads), 61 Depth Marking Tool, 73
Additional Ordering
Preswaging Tool, 73
Information, 55 Tools and Accessories
Hydraulic Swaging Units, 62
Replacement Parts Chromatograph Fittings
Nuts Refer to Gaugeable
Chromatograph and
Column End Fittings
Female, 57 catalog, MS-02-173.

Dielectric Fittings
Preswaging Tools, 65
Refer to Dielectric
Fittings catalog,
Knurled Female, 57 MS‑02‑36‑SCS.
Wrenches, 66

Flanges
Gap Inspection For ANSI, DIN, and JIS
Gauges and Depth flanges, refer to Flange
Male, 57
Marking Tools, 67 Adapters catalog,
MS-02-200.

Bulkhead Retainers,
Ferrules 68
VCO® and VCR®
Face Seal Fittings
Front, 58 Refer to VCR Metal
Inserts for Soft Gasket Face Seal
Plastic Tubing, 68 Fittings catalog,
MS-01-24 and VCO
O-Rings Face Seal
Back, 58 For liquid leak detectors, lubricants, Fittings catalog
and sealants, refer to Leak Detectors, MS‑01‑28.
Nut-Ferrule Set and Lubricants, and Sealants catalog,
Package and MS‑01‑91.
Ferrule Set and
For tube benders and tube preparation
Ferrule-Pak™
tools, refer to Tubing Tools and
Package, 59
Accessories catalog, MS-01-179.
 6 Tube Fittings

The Swagelok Tube Fitting Advantage

FITTINGS
TUBE

“Over 10 000 fittings

and not a single leak.”
Messages from customers credit
Swagelok components and tube
fittings, along with Swagelok distributor
support, as having played a major role
in helping them succeed.
Swagelok continues to improve the
performance and reliability of the tube
fitting for use in thousands of diverse
applications—including research,
alternative fuels, analytical and process
instrumentation, oil and gas, power,
petrochemical, and semiconductor
industries—and addressing such
critical issues as:
■ gas-tight seal
■ vibration (tube grip)
Vibration (Tube Grip) minimizes the effects of bending
■ thermal shock deflection at the point of grip on the
The patented case-hardening process
■ compliance with industry standards and back-ferrule geometry provide tubing.
■ installation excellent vibration fatigue resistance Contact your authorized Swagelok
and tube support—even in harsh representative for more information
■ corrosion
or stressful environments, such as about vibration test reports.
■ intermix/interchange.
hydrocarbon processing, on-vehicle
applications, or rotary equipment
Gas-tight Seal
applications.
Excellent sealing and consistent
reassembly help ensure accurate
Swagelok has conducted vibration “Used exclusively on our
measurements of process
tests, which show that the Swagelok equipment and has proven
parameters—air, steam, fuel, and
tube fitting with advanced geometry to be very reliable and easy
hinging-colleting back ferrule isolates
water—to keep your plant operating to maintain.”
and protects the stress riser that is
efficiently. Moreover, Swagelok tube
generated along the tube during the
fittings minimize fugitive emissions,
gripping part of assembly. The colleting
as well as process fluid leakage and
portion of the back ferrule allows
operation costs.
more material to contact the tube, for
Contact your authorized Swagelok sales additional support. This colleting action
and service representative for more enhances gripping performance and
information about Swagelok Energy provides both direct and axial support
Emissions Surveys or to schedule a to the gripping function. This design
survey.

“I have used Swagelok

fittings from when I was
a technician through
today in my role in facility
management. Would
recommend them for any
use.”
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 7

Thermal Shock Third-Party Agencies metallurgical, and mechanical

The elastic, live-loaded two-ferrule uniformity that allow predictable,
■ Vd TÜV

FITTINGS
TUBE
design compensates for changes in repeatable installation.
■ TÜV SUD Automotive
temperature during system start-up Swagelok authorized sales and service
■ DVGW
and shutdown and helps eliminate centers offer installation training
■ Department of the Navy (U.S.)
leakage related to rapid thermal seminars that provide additional
expansion or contraction. ■ Det Norske Veritas (DNV) information on:
■ Nippon Kaiji Kyokai (NK) ■ The requirements for making safe,
Swagelok has conducted tests
that demonstrated the capability of ■ American Bureau of Shipping (ABS) leak-tight connections
Swagelok tube fittings to withstand ■ Lloyd’s Register of Shipping (LR) ■ A variety of tools and accessories
thermal shock and high temperature. ■ Bureau Veritas (BV) designed for use with Swagelok tube
Contact your authorized Swagelok ■ RS Maritime fittings.
representative for more information ■ Canadian Provincial Agencies (CRN)
about thermal shock test reports. Corrosion
■ Russian GOST TR (Customs Union
Swagelok tube fittings are available
Countries)
Compliance with in a variety of materials, including
Industry Standards ■ UkSepro for Ukraine
optimized 316 stainless steel chemistry
■ Inspecta Nuclear for Sweden with elevated nickel, chromium, and
Swagelok Company works with
standards organizations around the ■ METI/KHK other elements for superior corrosion
world to provide you with products that ■ Engineers India Limited (EIL) resistance in a variety of applications,
address your needs. For a complete listing, refer to the including chemical processing, sour
Stainless steel Swagelok tube fittings Tube Fitting Performance Product Test gas and subsea systems.
used with 316 stainless steel and 316 Ti Reports PTRs and Third-Party Product Swagelok has conducted tests in
stainless steel alloy tubing as shown Approvals and Registrations, accordance with ASTM B117-95 to
in the table have been tested to the MS-06-108. evaluate the corrosion resistance of
requirements of ECE R110. In addition, Swagelok tube fittings.
stainless steel Swagelok tube fittings See Materials, page 8; Thread
are available with EC-79 certification. Specifications, page 9; and Contact your authorized Swagelok
Pressure Ratings, page 9, for more representative for more information
Tube OD Wall Thickness information about the specifications about corrosion resistance test reports.
3 to 16 mm 0.7 to 2.5 mm to which Swagelok tube fittings are
1/8 to 5/8 in. 0.028 to 0.095 in. manufactured. Intermix/Interchange
Contact your authorized Swagelok Swagelok recommends NO intermix/
NACE - Sour Gas representative for more information interchange of Swagelok tube fitting
about Swagelok tube fitting components with other manufacturers’
Swagelok offers fittings in materials that
meet the metallurgical requirements of certifications. components.
NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 and MR0103. ■ No industrial design standard
Refer to NACE MR0175/ISO 15156 Installation exists for two ferrule tube fittings.
Compliant Swagelok Fittings, The Swagelok tube fitting installation Each company makes components
MS-06-124, for additional information. advantages: to its own design and not to any
■ Easy to install recognized standards.
NORSOK
■ Interchanging and intermixing
Fittings manufactured from alloy 2507 ■ No torque is transmitted to tubing
and 6MO are NORSOK M-630 and during installation tube fitting components can result
M-650 compliant as standard. Contact in unpredictable performance,
■ Swagelok gap inspection gauge
your authorized sales and service environmental releases, increased
assures sufficient pull-up upon initial
representative for additional details. costs, and can be dangerous in
installation.
critical applications.
Swagelok tube fitting components
provide exceptional dimensional,
 8 Tube Fittings

Materials O-Rings
O-seal fittings include a 70 durometer Buna N O-ring. Other
FITTINGS

Materials Standards
TUBE

straight-thread fittings with O-rings include a 90 durometer

Material➆ Bar Stock➀ Forgings➁ fluorocarbon FKM O-ring. Other O-ring materials are available
316 stainless ASTM A276, ASME ASTM A182, upon request. O-rings are coated with a thin film of silicone-
steel SA479, EN 1.4401 ASME SA182, EN 1.4401 based lubricant. Removal of factory-applied lubricants may
6-Moly ASTM A479 ASTM A182 alter performance.
Alloy 400 ASTM B164 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 For ST and ST positionable fittings used in ECE-R110
Alloy 600 ASTM B166, ASME SB166 ASTM B564, ASME SB564 applications, add the DE O-ring suffix to the ordering number.
Example: SS-600-1-6STDE
Alloy 625 ASTM B446➂ ASTM B564, ASME SB564➃
Alloy 825 ASTM B425 ASTM B564, ASME SB564
Cleaning and Packaging
Alloy C-276 ASTM B574 ASTM B564
Fitting components are cleaned to remove machine oil, grease,
Aluminum ASTM B211 ASTM B247
and loose particles. For more information, see Swagelok
Brass ASTM B16, ASTM B453 ASTM B283 Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC-10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
Carbon steel ASTM A108 — Fittings are available individually bagged; add CP to the
PFA➄ — ASTM D3307 Type I ordering number. Example: SS-200-6CP
PTFE ASTM D1710 ASTM D3294 On request, fittings can be specially cleaned and packaged.
Alloy 2507➅ ASTM A479 ASTM A182 Cleaning and packaging options can be found in Special
Titanium Cleaning of Swagelok Tube Fittings, SCS-00663. Contact
ASTM B348 ASTM B381
(grade 4) your authorized Swagelok representative for details.
➀ Straight fittings and tube adapters. Fittings cleaned and packaged in accordance with ASTM G93
➁ Elbows, crosses, and tees. Level C, will have the front ferrule silver-plated and Krytox®
➂ All straight fittings and tube adapters and 1/4 and 3/8 in.; 6 and 10 mm 240 AC applied to the internal surface of the nut. To order, add
elbows, crosses, and tees.
➃ Elbows, crosses, and tees larger than 3/8 in. and 10 mm. BQ to the ordering number.
➄ Refer to PFA Tube Fittings catalog, MS-01-05. Example: SS-400-1-4BQ
➅ Refer to Gaugeable Alloy 2507 Super Duplex Tube Fittings catalog,
MS-01-174. Oxygen Service Hazards
➆ Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for materials not listed.
For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen-
enriched systems, see the Swagelok Oxygen System Safety
technical report catalog, MS‑06‑13.
Additional Processing
Fitting bodies are processed for improved performance, as
listed below. No additional processing is required for alloy 625,
alloy 825, brass, 316 stainless steel, and PTFE materials.

Fitting Body Material Process

Aluminum Anodized, hydrocarbon film
Alloy 400, alloy C-276,
Hydrocarbon film
alloy 600
Carbon steel (except weld bodies) Zinc plating
Hydrocarbon film chemical
Carbon steel (weld bodies)
conversion coating
Titanium Anodized

■ Over 1 in./25 mm fittings are supplied with a package of

fluorinated-base with PTFE and tungsten disulfide lubricant
for use in fitting assembly.
■ Over 1 in./25 mm stainless steel fittings use stainless steel
ferrules with PFA coating. Applications above 450°F (232°C)
require silver-plated front ferrules and uncoated back
ferrules. To order fittings with silver-plated front ferrules
and uncoated back ferrules, add BM to the fitting ordering
number.
Example: SS-2400-6BM
■ All carbon steel Swagelok tube fittings are supplied with
316 stainless steel back ferrules.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 9

Metric Swagelok Tube Fittings Pipe Thread Sealants

Metric tube fittings have a stepped shoulder on the body hex. A thread sealant should always be used when assembling

FITTINGS
TUBE
Shaped fittings, such as elbows, crosses, and tees, are tapered threads. SWAK™ anaerobic pipe thread sealant and
stamped MM for metric tubing and have no step on the forging. Swagelok PTFE tape are available. Refer to Leak Detectors,
Lubricants, and Sealants catalog, MS-01-91, for additional
Swagelok Swagelok Swagelok information.
metric fractional metric tube
tube end tube stub ends
Port Connectors, Reducers, and Tube
Adapters
Swagelok tube adapters with the machined groove are
rated to the highest suggested allowable working pressure,
Stepped identification No shoulder Stepped identification see Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107 for a tube outside
shoulders shoulders diameter and material in question.

Pressure Rating Basis and Thread Specifications

Thread Type (End Connection) Pressure Rating Basis Thread Type Reference Specification
Swagelok tube fitting ends are rated to the working pressure
of tubing as listed in Swagelok Tubing Data, MS-01-107. Unified Inch Screw
Swagelok Tube Fittings ASME B1.1
Careful selection of high-quality tubing is important when Threads
installing safe, leak-tight systems.

ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ASME B1.20.1,
NPT NPT
design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. SAE AS71051

ISO/BSP (tapered) ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ISO/BSP (tapered) ISO 7, BS EN 10226-1,
(Swagelok RT fittings) design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. Swagelok RT fittings JIS B0203

ISO 1179-3, ISO 228-1 Threads with Light-Duty Stud Ends

ISO/BSP (parallel)
ISO/BSP (parallel) with Sealing by O-ring with Retaining Ring (types G and ISO 228,
Swagelok RP and RS
(Swagelok RS fittings) H) or pressure testing with a 4:1 design factor based on JIS B0202
fittings
hydraulic fluid leakage.

ISO 1179-4, ISO 228-1 Threads with Stud Ends for general use ISO/BSP (parallel)
ISO/BSP (parallel) ISO 228,
only with metal-to-metal sealing (type B) or pressure testing Swagelok RP and RS
(Swagelok RP fittings) JIS B0202
with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. fittings

ISO/BSP (gauge) ISO/BSP (parallel)

ASME B31.3, Process Piping or pressure testing with a 4:1 ISO 228,
(Based on EN 837-1 and 837-3) Swagelok RG and RJ
design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. JIS B0202
(Swagelok RG and RJ fittings) fittings

SAE J1926/3, Connections for General Use and Fluid

Power-Ports and Stud Ends with ASME B1.1 Threads and Unified Inch Screw
SAE–Light Duty
O-ring Sealing-Part 3: Light-Duty (L-Series) Stud Ends or Threads ASME B1.1
(Swagelok ST fittings)
pressure testing with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic Swagelok ST fittings
fluid leakage.

SAE J1926/2, Connections for General Use and Fluid

Power-Ports and Stud Ends with ASME B1.1 Threads and Unified Inch Screw
SAE–Heavy Duty
O-ring Sealing-Part 2: Heavy-Duty (S-Series) or pressure Threads Swagelok ST ASME B1.1
(Swagelok STH fittings)
testing with a 4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid fittings
leakage.

Unified Inch Screw

SAE J514, Hydraulic Tube Fittings or pressure testing with a ASME B1.1 UNJ,
Swagelok AN fittings Threads
4:1 design factor based on hydraulic fluid leakage. SAE AS 8879
Swagelok AN fittings
 10 Tube Fittings

Pressure Ratings
FITTINGS

NPT/ISO Pipe Pressure Ratings

TUBE

Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping, at ambient temperature.
316 SS, Carbon
Steel, Alloy (600, Brass and Alloy 2507 and
and C-276) Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium Alloy 625 6-Moly Alloy 825

NPT/ISO Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female Male Female
Pipe Size psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig
in. (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar)
11 000 6 700 5 500 3 300 9 900 6 000 8 800 5 300 15 000 12 900 14 900 9 000 12 800 7800
1/16
(757) (461) (378) (227) (682) (413) (606) (365) (1 033) (888) (1 026) (620) (881) (537)
10 000 6 500 5 000 3 200 9 000 5 800 8 000 5 200 15 000 12 500 13 500 8 800 11 600 7500
1/8
(689) (447) (344) (220) (620) (399) (551) (358) (1 033) (861) (930) (606) (799) (516)
8 000 6 600 4 000 3 300 7 200 5 900 6 400 5 200 15 000 12 700 10 800 8 900 9 300 7600
1/4
(551) (454) (275) (227) (496) (406) (440) (358) (1 033) (875) (744) (613) (640) (523)
7 800 5 300 3 900 2 600 7 000 4 700 6 200 4 200 15 000 10 200 10 500 7 100 9 000 6100
3/8
(537) (365) (268) (179) (482) (323) (427) (289) (1 033) (702) (723) (489) (620) (420)
7 700 4 900 3 800 2 400 6 900 4 400 6 100 3 900 14 800 9 400 10 400 6 600 8 900 5700
1/2
(530) (337) (261) (165) (475) (303) (420) (268) (1 019) (647) (716) (454) (613) (392)
7 300 4 600 3 600 2 300 6 500 4 100 5 800 3 600 10 000 8 900 9 800 6 200 8 500 5300
3/4
(502) (316) (248) (158) (447) (282) (399) (248) (689) (613) (675) (427) (585) (365)
5 300 4 400 2 600 2 200 4 700 3 900 4 200 3 500 10 000 8 500 7 100 5 900 6 100 5100
1
(365) (303) (179) (151) (323) (268) (289) (241) (689) (585) (489) (406) (420) (351)
6 000 5 000 3 000 2 500 5 400 4 500 4 800 4 000 10 000 9 600 8 100 6 700 6 900 5800
1 1/4
(413) (344) (206) (172) (372) (310) (330) (275) (689) (661) (558) (461) (475) (399)
5 000 4 600 2 500 2 300 4 500 4 100 4 000 3 600 9 600 8 900 6 700 6 200 5 800 5300
1 1/2
(344) (316) (172) (158) (310) (282) (275) (248) (661) (613) (461) (427) (399) (365)
3 900 3 900 1 900 1 900 3 500 3 500 3 100 3 100 7 500 7 500 5 200 5 200 4 500 4500
2
(268) (268) (130) (130) (241) (241) (213) (213) (516) (516) (358) (358) (310) (310)

■ To determine pressure ratings in accordance with ASME B31.1, Power Piping:

■ carbon steel material—multiply by 0.85.
Stainless steel and brass material ratings remain the same.
■ To determine MPa, multiply bar by 0.10.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 11

Pressure Ratings
STH SAE/MS Heavy Duty Pressure Ratings

FITTINGS
TUBE
Pressure ratings are based on SAE J1926/2 at ambient temperature.
316 SS, Carbon Steel, and
Alloy (C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and 600) Brass and Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
STH
Non- Non- Non- Non-
SAE/MS
positionable Positionable positionable Positionable positionable Positionable positionable Positionable
Thread
Size Designator psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
3/8-24 3STH
7/16-20 4STH
1/2-20 5STH
9137 (630) 4568 (315) 8223 (567) 7309 (504)
9/16-18 6STH
6091 (420) 3045 (210) 5482 (378) 4873 (336)
3/4-16 8STH
7/8-14 10STH
1 1/16-12 12STH
1 3/16-12 14STH 6091 (420) 3045 (210) 5482 (378) 4873 (336)
1 5/16-12 16STH 5076 (350) 2538 (175) 4568 (315) 4061 (280)
1 5/8-12 20STH 4061 (280) 2030 (140) 3654 (252) 3248 (224)
4061 (280) 2030 (140) 3654 (252) 3248 (224)
1 7/8-12 24STH 3045 (210) 1522 (105) 2741 (189) 2436 (168)
2 1/2-12 32STH 3045 (210) 2538 (175) 1522 (105) 1261 (87) 2741 (189) 2277 (157) 2436 (168) 2030 (140)

SAE/MS Fittings Pressure Ratings

Pressure ratings are based on SAE J1926/3 at ambient temperature.
316 SS, Carbon Steel, and
Alloy (C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and 600) Brass and Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
Non- Non- Non- Non-
SAE/MS
positionable Positionable positionable Positionable positionable Positionable positionable Positionable
Thread
Size Designator psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
5/16-24 2ST
5076 (350) 2538 (175) 4568 (315) 4061 (280)
3/8-24 3ST
7/16-20 4ST 5076 (350) 2538 (175) 4568 (315) 4061 (280)
4568 (315) 2277 (157) 4104 (283) 3654 (252)
1/2-20 5ST
9/16-18 6ST
4061 (280) 2030 (140) 3654 (252) 3248 (224)
3/4-16 8ST 4568 (315) 2175 (150) 4104 (283) 3654 (252)
7/8-14 10ST
3625 (250) 3045 (210) 1740 (120) 1522 (105) 3263 (225) 2741 (189) 2900 (200) 2436 (168)
1 1/16-12 12ST
1 3/16-12 14ST
3045 (210) 2538 (175) 1450 (100) 1261 (87) 2741 (189) 2277 (157) 2436 (168) 2030 (140)
1 5/16-12 16ST
1 5/8-12 20ST
2538 (175) 2030 (140) 1160 (80) 1015 (70) 2277 (157) 1827 (126) 2030 (140) 1624 (112)
1 7/8-12 24ST
2 1/2-12 32ST 2030 (140) 1522 (105) 1015 (70) 754 (52) 1827 (126) 1363 (94) 1624 (112) 1218 (84)
 12 Tube Fittings

Pressure Ratings
FITTINGS

Male AN (JIC) Fittings Pressure Ratings

TUBE

Pressure ratings are at ambient temperature and apply to slide-on and crimped-on swivel nuts with a female gland.
316 SS, Carbon
Steel, and
Alloy (C-276,
2507, 625, 6-Moly, Brass and
825, and 600) Carbon Steel Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium

Male AN Straight Shape Straight Shape Straight Shape Straight Shape Straight Shape
(JIC) psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig psig
Thread Size Designator (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar) (bar)
10 000 10 000 4 500 4 500 5 000 5 000 9 000 9 000 8 000 8 000
7/16-20 4AN
(689) (689) (310) (310) (345) (345) (620) (620) (551) (551)

9/16-18 6AN
8 200 7 600 4 000 4 000 4 100 3 800 7 380 6 840 6 560 6 080
(564) (523) (275) (275) (282) (262) (508) (471) (452) (410)
3/4-16 8AN

7 000 6 300 3 000 3 000 3 500 3 150 6 300 5 670 5 600 5 040
1 1/16-12 12AN
(482) (434) (210) (210) (241) (217) (434) (391) (386) (347)
5 000 4 100 2 500 2 500 2 500 2 050 4 500 3 690 4 000 3 280
1 5/16-12 16AN
(344) (282) (170) (170) (172) (141) (310) (254) (276) (226)
2 000 2 000 2 000 2 000 1 000 1 000 1 800 1 800 1 600 1 600
1 5/8-12 20AN
(140) (140) (140) (140) (69) (69) (124) (124) (110) (110)
1 500 1 500 1 500 1 500 700 750 1 350 1 350 1 200 1 200
1 7/8-12 24AN
(105) (105) (105) (105) (48) (52) (93) (93) (83) (83)
1 125 1 125 1 125 1 125 500 560 1 010 1 010 900 900
2 1/2-12 32AN
(80) (80) (80) (80) (34) (39) (70) (70) (62) (62)

O-Seal Pressure Ratings

Stainless steel and carbon steel O-seal fittings up to 1 in. and
25 mm are rated to 3000 psig (206 bar).

Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR)

Pressure Ratings
Pressure ratings are at ambient temperature.

316 SS, Carbon

Steel, and Alloy
(C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and Brass and
ISO/BSP Male
600 Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
Pipe Size
in. psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
1/8, 3/16, 1/4, 3/8 4568 (315) 2277 (157) 4104 (283) 3654 (252)
1/2, 3/4, 1 2320 (160) 1160 (80) 2088 (144) 1856 (128)
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 13

Pressure Ratings

FITTINGS
TUBE
ISO 228/BSP Parallel Thread (RS and RP)
Pressure Ratings
Hydraulic pressure ratings are based on ISO 1179 at ambient
temperature.
■ RS and RP male connectors were tested with RP female
connectors.
■ RS end connections were tested with bonded RS gaskets.
■ RP connections were tested without a gasket.
■ Gasket selection is the responsibility of the system
designer and user and may affect product performance.

ISO 228/BSP Parallel Thread RS Pressure Ratings

316 SS, Carbon
Steel, and Alloy
(C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and Brass and
ISO/BSP Male
600) Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
Pipe Size
in. psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
1/8, 1/4, 3/8 5800 (400) 2900 (200) 5220 (360) 4640 (320)
1/2 4700 (324) 2350 (162) 4220 (291) 3750 (259)
3/4
3620 (250) 1810 (125) 3260 (225) 2900 (200)
1
1 1/4
2320 (160) 1160 (80) 2080 (144) 1850 (128)
1 1/2

ISO 228/BSP Parallel Thread RP Pressure Ratings

316 SS, Carbon
Steel, and Alloy
(C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and Brass and
ISO/BSP Male
600) Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
Pipe Size
in. psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
1/8, 1/4, 3/8 5800 (400) 2900 (200) 5200 (360) 4640 (320)
1/2 4700 (324) 2350 (162) 4220 (291) 3750 (259)
3/4 2320 (160) 1160 (80) 2080 (144) 1850 (128)
1
1 1/4 1450 (100) 720 (50) 1300 (90) 1160 (80)
1 1/2

ISO 228/BSP/JIS Parallel Thread RG and RJ Pressure Ratings

316 SS, Carbon
Steel, and Alloy
(C-276, 2507, 625,
6-Moly, 825, and Brass and
ISO/BSP Male
600) Aluminum Alloy 400 Titanium
Pipe Size
in. psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar) psig (bar)
1/8
1/4 5700 (392) 2850 (196) 5110 (352) 4560 (314)
3/8
1/2 3900 (288) 1950 (134) 3490 (240) 3120 (215)
 14 Tube Fittings

Ordering Numbers and Dimensions

■ See How to Order, below. Minimum order quantities may apply to certain materials and configurations.
FITTINGS
TUBE

■ Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Unless noted otherwise, dimensions shown are for stainless
steel components and with Swagelok nuts finger-tight. For Swagelok nut dimensions, see page 57.
■ CAD templates are available on www.swagelok.com.

Straight Fittings
Unions
F flat
Tx

D E D D E Dx
A A

Union Union (Metric to Fractional)

Basic Basic
Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Tube Ordering Ordering
OD Number A D E T Tx, in. Number A D Dx E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-6 0.99 0.34 0.05 1/8 -2M0-6-2 35.2 12.8 12
2 12.9 1.7
1/8 -200-6 1.40 0.50 0.09 1/4 -2M0-6-4 38.6 15.3 14
3/16 -300-6 1.47 0.54 0.12 3 1/8 -3M0-6-2 35.2 12.9 12.8 2.4 12
1/8 -4M0-6-2 36.5 12.8 12
1/4 -400-6 1.61 0.60 0.19 4 13.7 2.4
1/4 -4M0-6-4 39.4 15.3 14
5/16 -500-6 1.69 0.64 0.25 1/16 -6M0-6-1 34.3 8.6 1.3 14
3/8 -600-6 1.77 0.66 0.28 1/8 -6M0-6-2 38.5 12.8 2.4 14
1/2 -810-6 2.02 0.90 0.41 6 1/4 -6M0-6-4 41.0 15.3 15.3 4.8 14
5/16 -6M0-6-5 42.3 16.2 4.8 14
1/2 -810-6-0030➀ 4.30 — 3/8 -6M0-6-6 43.2 16.8 4.8 16
0.50
5/8 -1010-6 2.05 1/4 -8M0-6-4 42.3 15.3 4.8 15
0.96 8 16.2
3/4 -1210-6 2.11 0.62 3/8 -8M0-6-6 44.3 16.9 6.4 16
7/8 -1410-6 2.17 1.02 0.72 1/8 -10M0-6-2 41.8 12.8 2.4
1 -1610-6 0.88 1/4 -10M0-6-4 44.5 15.3 4.8
2.55 1.23 10 17.2 18
5/16 -10M0-6-5 45.1 16.2 6.4
1 1/8 B-1810-6 0.97
3/8 -10M0-6-6 45.9 16.9 7.1
1 1/4 -2000-6 3.63 1.62 1.09
1/4 -12M0-6-4 47.0 15.3 4.8
1 1/2 -2400-6 4.25 1.97 1.34 5/16 -12M0-6-5 47.8 16.2 6.4
12 22.8 22
2 -3200-6 5.88 2.66 1.81 3/8 -12M0-6-6 48.4 16.9 7.1
Dimensions, mm 1/2 -12M0-6-8 51.2 22.9 9.5
2 -2M0-6 35.6 1.7 14 1/2 -14M0-6-8 52.0 24.4 22.9 10.3 24
12.9 15 1/2 -15M0-6-8 52.0 24.4 22.9 10.3 24
3 -3M0-6 35.3
2.4 16 5/8 -16M0-6-10 52.0 24.4 24.4 12.7 24
4 -4M0-6 37.3 13.7
18 3/4 -18M0-6-12 53.5 24.4 24.4 15.1 27
6 -6M0-6 41.0 15.3 4.8
1/2 -20M0-6-8 55.0 22.9 10.3 30
8 -8M0-6 43.2 16.2 6.4 20 26.0
1 -20M0-6-16 62.8 31.3 15.9 35
10 -10M0-6 46.2 17.2 7.9
25 1 -25M0-6-16 65.0 31.3 31.3 21.8 35
12 -12M0-6 51.2 22.8 9.5
14 -14M0-6 11.1
15 -15M0-6 52.0 11.9 How to Order
24.4
16 -16M0-6 12.7 Select a basic ordering number. Example -100-6
18 -18M0-6 53.5 15.1 Add a material designator. Example: SS-100-6
20 -20M0-6 15.9
55.0 26.0 Material Designator Material Designator
22 -22M0-6 18.3
316 SS SS Alloy 2507 2507
25 -25M0-6 65.0 31.3
21.8 Aluminum A Alloy C-276 HC
-28M0-6 85.0 36.6
28 6-Moly 6MO Brass B
B-28M0-6 65.4 31.6 24.6
Alloy 400 M Carbon steel S
30 -30M0-6 92.7 39.6 26.2
Alloy 600 INC PTFE T
32 -32M0-6 97.3 42.0 28.6
Alloy 625 625 Titanium
38 -38M0-6 114 49.4 33.7 TI
Alloy 825 825 (grade 4)
50 -50M0-6 146 65.0 45.2
➀ Bored through.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 15

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Unions Reducing Union

TUBE
Basic
Tx Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T T Tx Number A D Dx E
Dimensions, in.
D E Dx
1/8 1/16 -200-6-1 1.22 0.50 0.34 0.05
A 1/16 -300-6-1 1.27 0.34 0.05
3/16 0.54
1/8 -300-6-2 1.44 0.50 0.09
1/16 -400-6-1 1.35 0.34 0.05
1/4 1/8 -400-6-2 1.52 0.60 0.50 0.09
3/16 -400-6-3 1.55 0.54 0.12
1/8 -500-6-2 1.56 0.50 0.09
5/16 0.64
1/4 -500-6-4 1.66 0.60 0.19
1/16 -600-6-1 1.44 0.34 0.05
1/8 -600-6-2 1.61 0.50 0.09
3/8 0.66
1/4 -600-6-4 1.70 0.60 0.19
5/16 -600-6-5 1.74 0.64 0.25
1/8 -810-6-2 1.78 0.50 0.09
1/2 1/4 -810-6-4 1.85 0.90 0.60 0.19
3/8 -810-6-6 1.91 0.66 0.28
3/8 -1010-6-6 1.94 0.66 0.28
5/8 0.96
1/2 -1010-6-8 2.05 0.90 0.41
1/4 -1210-6-4 1.94 0.60 0.19
3/8 -1210-6-6 2.00 0.66 0.28
3/4 0.96
1/2 -1210-6-8 2.11 0.90 0.41
5/8 -1210-6-10 2.11 0.96 0.50
1/2 -1610-6-8 0.90 0.41
1 2.38 1.23
3/4 -1610-6-12 0.96 0.62
Dimensions, mm
3 2 -3M0-6-2M 35.3 12.9 12.9 1.7
2 -6M0-6-2M 38.6 12.9 1.7
6 3 -6M0-6-3M 38.6 15.3 12.9 2.4
4 -6M0-6-4M 39.4 13.7 2.4
8 6 -8M0-6-6M 42.3 16.2 15.3 4.8
6 -10M0-6-6M 44.5 15.3 4.8
10 17.2
8 -10M0-6-8M 45.1 16.2 6.4
6 -12M0-6-6M 47.0 15.3 4.8
12 8 -12M0-6-8M 47.8 22.8 16.2 6.4
10 -12M0-6-10M 48.7 17.2 7.9
14 12 -14M0-6-12M 48.8 24.4 22.8 6.4
15 12 -15M0-6-12M 48.8 24.4 22.8 6.4
10 -16M0-6-10M 49.5 17.2 7.9
16 24.4
12 -16M0-6-12M 52.0 22.8 9.5
18 12 -18M0-6-12M 53.5 24.4 22.8 9.5
18 -25M0-6-18M 61.0 24.4 15.1
25 31.3
20 -25M0-6-20M 62.3 26.0 15.9
18 -30M0-6-18M 75.4 24.4 15.1
30 20 -30M0-6-20M 75.4 39.6 26.0 15.9
25 -30M0-6-25M 80.1 31.3 21.8
18 -32M0-6-18M 77.8 24.4 15.1
32 20 -32M0-6-20M 77.8 42.0 26.0 15.9
25 -32M0-6-25M 82.3 31.3 21.8
20 -38M0-6-20M 87.5 26.0 15.9
38 25 -38M0-6-25M 92.0 49.4 31.3 21.8
30 -38M0-6-30M 105 39.6 26.2

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 16 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Unions Bulkhead Union

TUBE

F flat F flat
Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
Tube Ordering Hole Panel
OD Number A D E F Size Thickness
D D Dimensions, in.
E
A 1/16 -100-61 1.24 0.34 0.05 5/16 13/64 0.12➀
1/8 -200-61 2.02 0.50 0.09 1/2 21/64
0.50
3/16 -300-61 2.11 0.54 0.12 9/16 25/64
1/4 -400-61 2.27 0.60 0.19 5/8 29/64 0.40
5/16 -500-61 2.39 0.64 0.25 11/16 33/64
0.44
3/8 -600-61 2.45 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64
1/2 -810-61 2.80 0.90 0.41 15/16 49/64
0.50
5/8 -1010-61 2.86 0.96 0.50 1 1/16 57/64
3/4 -1210-61 3.11 0.96 0.62 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 -1610-61 3.77 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 1 21/64
1 1/4 -2000-61 4.85 1.62 1.09 1 7/8 1 41/64
0.75
1 1/2 -2400-61 5.48 1.97 1.34 2 1/4 1 61/64
2 -3200-61 7.10 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 41/64
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-61 51.3 12.9 2.4 8.3
14 12.7
4 -4M0-61 53.6 13.7 2.4 9.9
6 -6M0-61 57.7 15.3 4.8 16 11.5 10.2
8 -8M0-61 61.0 16.2 6.4 18 13.1
11.2
10 -10M0-61 63.7 17.2 7.9 22 16.3
12 -12M0-61 71.0 22.8 9.5 24 19.5
14 -14M0-61 72.5 24.4 11.1 22.5
12.7
15 -15M0-61 72.5 24.4 11.9 27
22.8
16 -16M0-61 72.5 24.4 12.7
18 -18M0-61 78.9 24.4 15.1 30 26.0 16.8
20 -20M0-61 84.5 26.0 15.9 35 29.0
25 -25M0-61 96.0 31.3 21.8 41 34.0
30 -30M0-61 124 39.6 26.2 40.5 19.0
50
32 -32M0-61 128 42.0 28.6 42.5
38 -38M0-61 145 49.4 33.7 60 50.5
➀ Minimum panel thickness is 0.06 in.

Bulkhead Reducing Union

F flat F flat
Tube OD Dimensions
Tx Basic Panel Max
T Ordering Hole Panel
T Tx Number A D Dx E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D E Dx
A 1/8 1/16 -200-61-1 1.85 0.50 0.34 0.05 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/4 1/8 -400-61-2 2.17 0.60 0.50 0.09 5/8 29/64 0.40
3/8 1/4 -600-61-4 2.39 0.66 3/4 37/64 0.44
0.60 0.19
1/2 1/4 -810-61-4 2.63 0.90 15/16 49/64 0.50

Bulkhead Reducing Union (Metric to Fractional)

Tube OD Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
Ordering Hole Panel
T Tx, in. Number A D Dx E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, mm
6 1/8 -6M0-61-2 55.1 15.3 12.7 2.4 16 11.5 10.2

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 17

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Male Connectors

TUBE
F flat

D
A
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD in. Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-1-1 0.94 5/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2 30.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/16 1/8 -100-1-2 1.03 0.34 0.05 7/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2 30.5 12
1/4 -100-1-4 1.22 9/16 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -3M0-1-4 35.6 14
1/16 -200-1-1 1.17 7/16 1/8 -4M0-1-2 31.2 12
1/8 -200-1-2 1.20 7/16 4 13.7 2.4
1/4 -4M0-1-4 36.3 14
1/8 1/4 -200-1-4 1.40 0.50 0.09 9/16
3/8 -200-1-6 1.41 11/16 1/8 -6M0-1-2 32.8 14
1/2 -200-1-8 1.66 7/8 1/4 -6M0-1-4 37.9 14
6 15.3 4.8
3/8 -6M0-1-6 38.4 18
1/8 -300-1-2 1.23 7/16 1/2 -6M0-1-8 44.7 22
3/16 0.54 0.12
1/4 -300-1-4 1.43 9/16
1/8 -8M0-1-2 34.2 4.8 15
1/16 -400-1-1 1.29 0.12 1/2 1/4 -8M0-1-4 38.7 6.4 15
1/8 -400-1-2 1.29 0.19 1/2 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6 39.3 6.4 18
1/4 -400-1-4 1.49 0.19 9/16
1/4 0.60 1/2 -8M0-1-8 45.6 6.4 22
3/8 -400-1-6 1.51 0.19 11/16
1/2 -400-1-8 1.76 0.19 7/8 1/8 -10M0-1-2 36.3 4.8 18
3/4 -400-1-12 1.82 0.19 1 1/16 1/4 -10M0-1-4 40.9 7.1 18
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6 40.9 17.2 7.9 18
1/8 -500-1-2 1.34 0.19 9/16 1/2 -10M0-1-8 46.5 7.9 22
5/16 1/4 -500-1-4 1.52 0.64 0.25 9/16 3/4 -10M0-1-12 48.0 7.9 27
3/8 -500-1-6 1.54 0.25 11/16
1/8 -12M0-1-2 38.8 4.8 22
1/8 -600-1-2 1.39 0.19 5/8 1/4 -12M0-1-4 43.4 7.1 22
1/4 -600-1-4 1.57 0.28 5/8 12 3/8 -12M0-1-6 43.4 22.8 9.5 22
3/8 -600-1-6 1.57 0.28 11/16 1/2 -12M0-1-8 49.0 9.5 22
3/8 0.66
1/2 -600-1-8 1.82 0.28 7/8 3/4 -12M0-1-12 50.5 9.5 27
3/4 -600-1-12 1.88 0.28 1 1/16
1 -600-1-16 2.14 0.28 1 3/8 1/4 -14M0-1-4 44.1 7.1
14 3/8 -14M0-1-6 44.1 24.4 9.5 24
1/8 -810-1-2 1.53 0.19 13/16 1/2 -14M0-1-8 49.0 11.1
1/4 -810-1-4 1.71 0.28 13/16
3/8 -810-1-6 1.71 0.38 13/16 15 1/2 -15M0-1-8 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-1-8 1.93 0.41 7/8 3/8 -16M0-1-6 44.1 9.5 24
3/4 -810-1-12 1.99 0.41 1 1/16 16 1/2 -16M0-1-8 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1 -810-1-16 2.25 0.41 1 3/8 3/4 -16M0-1-12 50.5 12.7 27
1/4 -1010-1-4 1.74 0.28 15/16 1/2 -18M0-1-8 11.9
18 50.5 24.4 27
3/8 -1010-1-6 1.74 0.38 15/16 3/4 -18M0-1-12 15.1
5/8 0.96
1/2 -1010-1-8 1.93 0.47 15/16 1/2 -20M0-1-8 11.9
3/4 -1010-1-12 1.99 0.50 1 1/16 20 52.3 26.0 30
3/4 -20M0-1-12 15.9
3/8 -1210-1-6 1.80 0.41 1 1/16 3/4 -22M0-1-12 52.3 15.9 30
22 26.0
1/2 -1210-1-8 1.99 0.47 1 1/16 1 -22M0-1-16 57.1 18.3 35
3/4 0.96
3/4 -1210-1-12 1.99 0.62 1 1/16 1/2 -25M0-1-8 57.5 11.9
1 -1210-1-16 2.25 0.62 1 3/8 25 3/4 -25M0-1-12 57.5 31.3 15.9 35
1/2 -1410-1-8 1.99 0.47 1 3/16 1 -25M0-1-16 62.3 21.8
7/8 3/4 -1410-1-12 1.99 1.02 0.62 1 3/16 1 -28M0-1-16 72.4 41
1 -1410-1-16 2.25 0.72 1 3/8 36.6 21.8
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20 73.1 46
1/2 -1610-1-8 2.26 0.47 28
1 B-28M0-1-16 75.0 41
1 3/4 -1610-1-12 2.26 1.23 0.62 1 3/8 31.6 24.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20 77.3 46
1 -1610-1-16 2.45 0.88
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20 77.2 39.6 26.2 46
1 1/8 1 B-1810-1-16 2.45 1.23 0.88 1 5/8
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20 79.6 42.0 28.6 46
1 -2000-1-16 0.88
1 1/4 3.04 1.62 1 3/4 38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24 91.6 49.4 33.7 55
1 1/4 -2000-1-20 1.09
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-1-24 3.50 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
2 2 -3200-1-32 4.47 2.66 1.81 2 3/4
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 18 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Male Connectors
TUBE

F flat

See page 9 for thread specifications.

E

D
A

ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size, in. Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -200-1-2RT 1.20 7/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2RT 30.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-1-4RT 1.40 9/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2RT 30.5 12
3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -400-1-2RT 1.29 1/2 1/4 -3M0-1-4RT 35.6 14
1/4 -400-1-4RT 1.49 9/16 1/8 -4M0-1-2RT 31.2 12
1/4 0.60 0.19 4 13.7 2.4
3/8 -400-1-6RT 1.51 11/16 1/4 -4M0-1-4RT 36.3 14
1/2 -400-1-8RT 1.76 7/8
1/8 -6M0-1-2RT 32.8 14
1/8 -500-1-2RT 1.34 0.19 1/4 -6M0-1-4RT 37.9 14
5/16 0.64 9/16 6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -500-1-4RT 1.52 0.25 3/8 -6M0-1-6RT 38.4 18
1/8 -600-1-2RT 1.39 0.19 5/8 1/2 -6M0-1-8RT 44.7 22
1/4 -600-1-4RT 1.57 0.28 5/8
1/8 -8M0-1-2RT 34.2 4.8 15
3/8 3/8 -600-1-6RT 1.57 0.66 0.28 11/16
1/4 -8M0-1-4RT 38.7 6.4 15
1/2 -600-1-8RT 1.82 0.28 7/8 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RT 39.2 6.4 18
3/4 -600-1-12RT 1.88 0.28 1 1/16
1/2 -8M0-1-8RT 45.6 6.4 22
1/4 -810-1-4RT 1.71 0.28 13/16
1/8 -10M0-1-2RT 36.3 4.8 18
3/8 -810-1-6RT 1.71 0.38 13/16
1/2 0.90 1/4 -10M0-1-4RT 40.9 7.1 18
1/2 -810-1-8RT 1.93 0.41 7/8
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RT 40.9 17.2 7.9 18
3/4 -810-1-12RT 1.99 0.41 1 1/16
1/2 -10M0-1-8RT 46.5 7.9 22
5/8 1/2 -1010-1-8RT 1.93 0.96 0.47 15/16 3/4 -10M0-1-12RT 48.0 7.9 27
3/4 -1210-1-12RT 1.99 1 1/16 1/4 -12M0-1-4RT 43.4 7.1 22
3/4 0.96 0.62
1 -1210-1-16RT 2.25 1 3/8 3/8 -12M0-1-6RT 43.4 9.5 22
12 22.8
3/4 -1610-1-12RT 2.26 0.63 1/2 -12M0-1-8RT 49.0 9.5 22
1 1.23 1 3/8 3/4 -12M0-1-12RT 50.5 9.5 27
1 -1610-1-16RT 2.45 0.88
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-1-20RT 3.04 1.62 1.09 1 3/4 1/4 -14M0-1-4RT 44.1 7.1
14 24.4 24
3/8 -14M0-1-6RT 44.1 9.5
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end. 15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RT 49.0 24.4 11.9 24
1/4 -16M0-1-4RT 44.1 7.1 24
3/8 -16M0-1-6RT 44.1 9.5 24
16 24.4
1/2 -16M0-1-8RT 49.0 11.9 24
3/4 -16M0-1-12RT 50.5 12.7 27
1/2 -18M0-1-8RT 11.9
18 50.5 24.4 27
3/4 -18M0-1-12RT 15.1
1/2 -20M0-1-8RT 11.9
20 52.3 26.0 30
3/4 -20M0-1-12RT 15.9
3/4 -22M0-1-12RT 52.3 15.9 30
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RT 57.1 18.3 35
1/2 -25M0-1-8RT 57.5 11.9
25 3/4 -25M0-1-12RT 57.5 31.3 15.9 35
1 -25M0-1-16RT 62.3 21.8
1 -28M0-1-16RT 72.4 41
36.6 21.8
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RT 73.1 46
28
1 B-28M0-1-16RT 75.0 41
31.6 22.2
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RT 77.3 46
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RT 77.2 39.6 26.2 46
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RT 79.6 42.0 28.6 46
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RT 91.6 49.4 33.7 55
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 19

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Male Connectors

TUBE
F flat
E

See page 9 for thread specifications.

ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 60.

D
A

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size, in. Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -200-1-2RS 1.31 9/16 2 1/8 -2M0-1-2RS 33.3 12.9 1.7 14
1/8 1/4 -200-1-4RS 1.50 0.50 0.09 3/4 1/8 -3M0-1-2RS 33.3 14
3/8 -200-1-6RS 1.53 7/8 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -3M0-1-4RS 38.1 19
1/8 -400-1-2RS 1.40 0.16 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-1-2RS 34.0 13.7 2.4 14
1/4 -400-1-4RS 1.59 0.19 3/4
1/4 0.60 1/8 -6M0-1-2RS 35.6 4.0 14
3/8 -400-1-6RS 1.62 0.19 7/8
1/2 -400-1-8RS 1.70 0.19 1 1/16 1/4 -6M0-1-4RS 40.4 4.8 19
6 15.3
3/8 -6M0-1-6RS 41.1 4.8 22
1/8 -600-1-2RS 1.49 0.16 5/8 1/2 -6M0-1-8RS 43.2 4.8 27
1/4 -600-1-4RS 1.65 0.23 3/4
3/8 0.66 1/8 -8M0-1-2RS 36.6 4.0 15
3/8 -600-1-6RS 1.68 0.28 7/8
1/2 -600-1-8RS 1.76 0.28 1 1/16 1/4 -8M0-1-4RS 41.4 5.9 19
8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RS 42.2 6.4 22
1/4 -810-1-4RS 1.76 0.23 13/16 1/2 -8M0-1-8RS 44.2 6.4 27
1/2 3/8 -810-1-6RS 1.79 0.90 0.31 7/8
1/2 -810-1-8RS 1.87 0.41 1 1/16 1/4 -10M0-1-4RS 42.2 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RS 42.9 17.2 7.9 22
1/2 -1210-1-8RS 1.92 0.47 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 1/2 -10M0-1-8RS 45.0 7.9 27
3/4 -1210-1-12RS 2.05 0.62 1 5/16
1/4 -12M0-1-4RS 44.5 5.9 22
1/2 -1610-1-8RS 2.19 0.47 1 3/8
3/8 -12M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 22
1 3/4 -1610-1-12RS 2.27 1.23 0.63 1 3/8 12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8RS 47.5 9.5 27
1 -1610-1-16RS 2.35 0.78 1 5/8
3/4 -12M0-1-12RS 52.1 9.5 35
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have 3/8 -14M0-1-6RS 43.9 7.9 24
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end. 14 24.4
1/2 -14M0-1-8RS 47.5 11.1 27
3/8 -15M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 24
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RS 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/4 -15M0-1-12RS 52.8 11.9 35
3/8 -16M0-1-6RS 45.5 7.9 24
16 1/2 -16M0-1-8RS 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/4 -16M0-1-12RS 52.8 12.7 35
1/2 -18M0-1-8RS 48.8 11.9 27
18 24.4
3/4 -18M0-1-12RS 52.1 15.1 35
1/2 -20M0-1-8RS 50.5 11.9 30
20 26.0
3/4 -20M0-1-12RS 52.6 15.9 35
3/4 -22M0-1-12RS 52.6 15.9 35
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RS 54.9 18.3 41
3/4 -25M0-1-12RS 57.7 15.9 35
25 31.3
1 -25M0-1-16RS 59.7 19.8 41
1 -28M0-1-16RS 69.9 19.8 41
36.6
1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RS 72.9 21.8 50
28
1 B-28M0-1-16RS 72.5 19.8 41
31.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RS 77.1 24.6 54
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RS 76.7 39.6 26.2 50
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RS 79.2 42.0 28.6 50
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RS 90.9 49.4 31.8 55
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 20 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Male Connectors
TUBE

F flat

See page 9 for thread specifications.

E
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 60.

D
A

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)

ISO Basic ISO Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size, in. Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -200-1-2RP 1.31 9/16 1/8 -3M0-1-2RP 33.3 14
1/8 0.50 0.09 3 12.9 2.4
1/4 -200-1-4RP 1.50 3/4 1/4 -3M0-1-4RP 38.1 19
1/8 -400-1-2RP 1.40 0.16 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-1-2RP 34.0 13.7 2.4 14
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-1-4RP 1.59 0.19 3/4 1/8 -6M0-1-2RP 35.6 4.0 14
3/8 -810-1-6RP 1.79 0.31 7/8 1/4 -6M0-1-4RP 40.4 4.8 19
1/2 0.90 6 15.3
1/2 -810-1-8RP 1.87 0.41 1 1/16 3/8 -6M0-1-6RP 41.2 4.8 22
1/2 -1210-1-8RP 1.92 0.47 1 1/16 1/2 -6M0-1-8RP 43.2 4.8 27
3/4 0.96
3/4 -1210-1-12RP 2.05 0.62 1 5/16 1/8 -8M0-1-2RP 36.5 4.0 15
1 1 -1610-1-16RP 2.35 1.23 0.78 1 5/8 1/4 -8M0-1-4RP 41.3 5.9 19
8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-1-6RP 41.9 6.4 22
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have 1/2 -8M0-1-8RP 44.1 6.4 27
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
1/4 -10M0-1-4RP 42.2 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6RP 42.9 17.2 7.9 22
Bored-Through Fittings for Thermocouples, 1/2 -10M0-1-8RP 45.0 7.9 27
Dip Tubes, and Heat Exchanger Tees 1/4 -12M0-1-4RP 45.4 5.9 22
3/8 -12M0-1-6RP 45.4 7.9 22
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8RP 47.5 9.5 27
3/4 -12M0-1-12RP 52.1 9.5 35
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8RP 47.5 24.4 11.9 27
3/8 -16M0-1-6RP 45.4 7.9 24
16 24.4
1/2 -16M0-1-8RP 47.5 11.9 27
1/2 -18M0-1-8RP 49.0 11.9 27
18 24.4
3/4 -18M0-1-12RP 52.3 15.1 35
1/2 -20M0-1-8RP 50.5 11.9 30
20 26.0
3/4 -20M0-1-12RP 52.5 15.9 35
3/4 -22M0-1-12RP 52.8 15.9 35
22 26.0
1 -22M0-1-16RP 54.5 18.3 41
3/4 -25M0-1-12RP 57.8 15.9 35
25 31.3
1 -25M0-1-16RP 59.8 19.8 41
1 -28M0-1-16RP 69.8 19.8 41
36.6
Swagelok bored-through male connectors accommodate 1 1/4 -28M0-1-20RP 72.9 21.8 50
28
thermocouples or dip tubes. Most male connectors are 1 B-28M0-1-16RP 72.5 19.8 41
31.6
1 1/4 B-28M0-1-20RP 77.1 24.6 54
available as a bored-through fitting, but male connectors
whose pipe thread end is small relative to the tube fitting 30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20RP 76.8 39.6 26.2 50
end—such as -600-1-2 or -8M0-1-2RT—cannot be bored 32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20RP 79.2 42.0 28.6 50
through. 38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24RP 92.1 49.4 31.8 55
Swagelok bored-through reducers and standard Swagelok ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
tees can be used to create a heat exchanger tee.
To order bored-through fittings, add BT to the ordering
number. Example: SS-400-1-4BT Reduced Pressure Rating Factors
Bored-through fittings have a reduced pressure rating.
In general, we have multiplied the allowable working Size (in.) Size (mm) Factor
pressure of the tubing, as found on the Tubing Data Sheet, Up to 1/2 in. Up to 12 mm 0.75
MS-01-107, by the factors in the table to the right. Above 1/2 in. to 3/4 in. Above 12 mm to 18 mm 0.50
Above 3/4 in. Above 18 mm 0.25

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 21

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Male Connectors Bulkhead NPT

TUBE
F flat
Dimensions
NPT Basic Panel Max
E Tube Size Ordering Hole Panel
OD in. Number A D E➀ F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D
A 1/8 1/8 -200-11-2 1.83 0.50 0.09 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/8 -400-11-2 1.95
1/4 0.60 0.19 5/8 29/64 0.40
1/4 -400-11-4 2.13
1/4 -600-11-4 2.26 3/4
3/8 3/8 -600-11-6 2.26 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64 0.44
1/2 -600-11-8 2.51 7/8
3/8 -810-11-6 2.49 0.38
1/2 0.90 15/16 49/64 0.50
1/2 -810-11-8 2.71 0.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-11-12 3.00 0.96 0.62 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 1 -1610-11-16 3.67 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 1 21/64 0.75
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-11-2 49.5
6 15.3 4.8 16 11.5 10.2
1/4 -6M0-11-4 53.6
12 1/2 -12M0-11-8 68.8 22.8 9.5 24 19.5 12.7
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.
F flat
O-ring

Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1

straight thread boss.

D E
A

SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

SAE/MS Basic SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
5/16-24 -200-1-2ST 1.18 7/16 6 9/16-18 -6M0-1-6ST 35.6 15.3 4.8 18
1/8 7/16-20 -200-1-4ST 1.24 0.50 0.09 9/16 9/16-18 -10M0-1-6ST 37.3 7.1 18
9/16-18 -200-1-6ST 1.31 11/16 10 17.2
3/4-16 -10M0-1-8ST 39.4 7.9 22
5/16-24 -400-1-2ST 1.27 0.09 1/2 7/16-20 -12M0-1-4ST 40.6 5.2
7/16-20 -400-1-4ST 1.34 0.19 9/16 12 9/16-18 -12M0-1-6ST 39.9 22.8 7.1 22
1/4 9/16-18 -400-1-6ST 1.40 0.60 0.19 11/16 3/4-16 -12M0-1-8ST 41.9 9.5
3/4-16 -400-1-8ST 1.48 0.19 7/8
7/8-14 -400-1-10ST 1.60 0.19 1 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
5/16 1/2-20 -500-1-5ST 1.37 0.64 0.25 5/8
7/16-20 -600-1-4ST 1.40 0.18 5/8
9/16-18 -600-1-6ST 1.46 0.28 11/16 Long SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)
3/8 0.66
3/4-16 -600-1-8ST 1.54 0.28 7/8
7/8-14 -600-1-10ST 1.66 0.28 1 SAE/MSBasic
Dimensions
Tube Thread
Ordering
9/16-18 -810-1-6ST 1.54 0.28 13/16
OD SizeNumber A D E➀ F
3/4-16 -810-1-8ST 1.65 0.41 7/8 Long SAE/MS Straight Thread
1/2 0.90 Dimensions, in.
7/8-14 -810-1-10ST 1.77 0.41 1
1 1/16-12 -810-1-12ST 1.93 0.41 1 1/4 1/4 7/16-20 -400-1L-4ST 2.26 0.60 0.19 9/16
3/4-16 -1010-1-8ST 1.65 0.42 15/16 1/2 3/4-16 -810-1L-8ST 3.01 0.90 0.41 7/8
5/8 0.96
7/8-14 -1010-1-10ST 1.78 0.50 1
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
3/4-16 -1210-1-8ST 1.81 0.42 1 1/16 a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-1-12ST 1.93 0.96 0.62 1 1/4
1 5/16-12 -1210-1-16ST 1.96 0.63 1 1/2 For ST and ST positionable fittings used in ECE-R110
7/8 1 3/16-12 -1410-1-14ST 1.93 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 applications, add the DE O-ring suffix to the ordering number.
1 1/16-12 -1610-1-12ST 2.10 0.66 1 3/8 Example: SS-600-1-6STDE
1 1.23
1 5/16-12 -1610-1-16ST 2.14 0.88 1 1/2
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-1-20ST 2.69 1.62 1.09 1 7/8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-1-24ST 3.06 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 nominal opening. These fittings
may have a larger opening at the
2 2 1/2-12 -3200-1-32ST 4.00 2.66 1.81 2 3/4
pipe/straight thread end.
Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.
 22 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Male Connectors
TUBE

F flat
F flat
O-ring O-ring

E E

D D
A A

O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread) O-Seal (NPT)

SAE/MS Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube NPT Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD Size Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
1/16 5/16-24 -100-1-OR 1.05 0.34 0.05 9/16 1/8 1/8 -200-1-2-OR 1.29 0.50 0.09 3/4
1/8 5/16-24 -200-1-OR 1.29 0.50 0.09 9/16 1/8 -400-1-2-OR 1.38 3/4
1/4 0.60 0.19
3/16 3/8-24 -300-1-OR 1.35 0.54 0.12 5/8 1/4 -400-1-4-OR 1.51 15/16
1/4 7/16-20 -400-1-OR 1.51 0.60 0.19 3/4 1/4 -600-1-4-OR 1.57 15/16
3/8 3/8 -600-1-6-OR 1.63 0.66 0.28 1 1/8
5/16 1/2-20 -500-1-OR 1.60 0.64 0.25 7/8 1/2 -600-1-8-OR 1.85 1 5/16
3/8 9/16-18 -600-1-OR 1.67 0.66 0.28 15/16 1/2 1/2 -810-1-8-OR 1.96 0.90 0.41 1 5/16
1/2 3/4-16 -810-1-OR 1.81 0.90 0.41 1 1/8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-1-OR 2.06 0.96 0.62 1 1/2 a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
1 1 5/16-12 -1610-1-OR 2.29 1.23 0.88 1 3/4
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Mounting Dimensions for O-Seal Fittings

For a raised surface, see Fig. 1. The minimum diameter allows metal-to-metal contact outside of the O-ring sealing
diameter to prevent O-ring extrusion.
For a recessed hole that allows the round shoulder of the O-seal fitting into the recess, see Fig. 2.
For a recessed hole that allows the hex of the O-seal fitting into the recess, see Fig. 3.

Fig. 1 Fig. 2
SAE/MS A B C D E
Thread NPT Min Min Min Max Max
Size Size Dia Dia Dia Depth Depth
D Dimensions, in.
5/16-24 0.16
— 0.50 0.59 0.66 0.09
5/16-24 0.22
— 1/8 0.69 0.78 0.88 0.16 0.28
➀ ➀ 3/8-24 — 0.56 0.66 0.75 0.09 0.22
A B
7/16-20 —
0.69 0.78 0.88 0.28
— 1/8
Fig. 3 ➀ Allow clearance for full thread. — 1/4 0.87 0.97 1.09
1/2-20 — 0.75 0.91 1.03 0.16
1/8 in. 0.31
9/16-18 — 0.81
0.97 1.09
— 1/4 0.87
E — 3/8 1.00 1.16 1.31 0.34
— 1/2 1.22 1.34 1.53 0.22 0.44
3/4-16 — 1.00 1.16 1.31 0.16 0.34
➀ — 1/2 1.22 1.34 1.53 0.44
C
1 1/16-12 — 1.41 1.53 1.75 0.22 0.50
1 5/16-12 — 1.69 1.78 2.03 0.56

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 23

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Male Connectors AN Fitting

TUBE
F flat AN Tube Basic
37° Dimensions
Tube Flare Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F S
E
Dimensions, in.
S 1/16 1/8 -100-6-2AN 1.07 0.34 0.05 7/16 5/16-24UNJF-3
D
A 1/8 -200-6-2AN 1.27 0.06 7/16 5/16-24UNJF-3
1/8 0.50
1/4 -200-6-4AN 1.38 0.09 1/2 7/16-20UNJF-3
1/4 1/4 -400-6-4AN 1.48 0.60 0.17 1/2 7/16-20UNJF-3
5/16 5/16 -500-6-5AN 1.51 0.64 0.23 9/16 1/2-20UNJF-3
1/4 -600-6-4AN 0.17 7/16-20UNJF-3
3/8 1.56 0.66 5/8
3/8 -600-6-6AN 0.28 9/16-18UNJF-3
1/2 1/2 -810-6-8AN 1.81 0.90 0.39 13/16 3/4-16UNJF-3
3/4 3/4 -1210-6-12AN 2.10 0.96 0.61 1 1/8 1 1/16-12UNJ-3
1 1 -1610-6-16AN 2.42 1.23 0.84 1 3/8 1 5/16-12UNJ-3
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.

AN Bulkhead Fitting
F flat F flat
AN Dimensions
37°
Tube Basic Panel Max
Tube Flare Ordering Hole Panel
E
OD Size Number A D E F S Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
S
D 1/4 1/4 -400-61-4AN 2.12 0.60 0.17 5/8 7/16-20UNJF-3 29/64 0.40
A
3/8 3/8 -600-61-6AN 2.25 0.66 0.28 3/4 9/16-18UNJF-3 37/64 0.44
1/2 1/2 -810-61-8AN 2.59 0.90 0.39 15/16 3/4-16UNJF-3 49/64 0.50
3/4 3/4 -1210-61-12AN 3.11 0.96 0.61 1 3/16 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 1 1/64 0.66
1 1 -1610-61-16AN 3.64 1.23 0.84 1 5/8 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 1 21/64 0.75

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 24 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Male Connectors 10-32 Thread

TUBE

F flat
Gasket Basic
Dimensions
E Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -200-1-0157 0.95 0.50 7/16
D 0.09
A 1/4 -400-1-0256 1.08 0.60 9/16
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings
may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

M5 × 0.8 Thread
F flat
Basic
Dimensions
E Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, mm
6 -6M0-1-0046 29.2 15.3 2.0 14
D
A ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings
may have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Metric Thread (RS)

F flat Basic
Dimensions
E
Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E➀ F
E
Dimensions, mm
-6M0-1-M10X1.0RS 36.3 3.2
6 15.3 14
D -6M0-1-M12X1.0RS 40.4 4.8
A
12 -12M0-1-M16X1.5RS 45.5 22.8 9.5 22
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Weld Connectors Tube Socket Weld

Socket Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
J OD Size Number A B D E J
Dimensions, in.
D E B 1/8 1/8 -200-6-2W 1.14 0.10 0.50 0.09 0.29
A
1/4 1/4 -400-6-4W 1.32 0.28 0.60 0.19 0.48
3/8 3/8 -600-6-6W 1.48 0.31 0.66 0.28 0.60
1/2 1/2 -810-6-8W 1.62 0.38 0.90 0.41 0.73
3/4 3/4 -1210-6-12W 1.71 0.44 0.96 0.62 1.04
1 1 -1610-6-16W 2.07 0.62 1.23 0.88 1.36

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 25

Straight Fittings
SWAGELOK MALE PIPE WELD CONNECTOR CUTAWAY-MS-01-140 C-PH-0364-DIM

FITTINGS
Weld Connectors Male Pipe Weld (Fractional)

TUBE
F flat
37.5°
Pipe Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F J
E J
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-1-2W 1.20 0.50 0.09 7/16 0.405
D
A 3/16 1/8 -300-1-2W 1.23 0.54 0.12 7/16 0.405
1/8 -400-1-2W 1.29 1/2 0.405
1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-1-4W 1.49 9/16 0.540
1/8 -500-1-2W 1.34 0.21 0.405
5/16 0.64 9/16
1/4 -500-1-4W 1.52 0.25 0.540
1/4 -600-1-4W 1.57 5/8 0.540
3/8 -600-1-6W 1.57 11/16 0.675
3/8 0.66 0.28
1/2 -600-1-8W 1.82 7/8 0.840
3/4 -600-1-12W 1.88 1 1/6 1.050
3/8 -810-1-6W 1.71 13/16 0.675
1/2 -810-1-8W 1.93 7/8 0.840
1/2 0.90 0.41
3/4 -810-1-12W 1.99 1 1/16 1.050
1 -810-1-16W 2.25 1 3/8 1.315
5/8 1/2 -1010-1-8W 1.93 0.96 0.50 15/16 0.840
1/2 -1210-1-8W 0.55 0.840
3/4 1.99 0.96 1 1/16
3/4 -1210-1-12W 0.62 1.050
1 1 -1610-1-16W 2.45 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.315
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-1-20W 3.04 1.62 1.09 1 3/4 1.660
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-1-24W 3.50 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 1.900
2 2 -3200-1-32W 4.47 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2.375
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.

Male Pipe Weld (Metric to Fractional)

Pipe
Weld Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F F, in.➁ J
Dimensions, mm
3 1/8 -3M0-1-2W 30.5 12.9 2.4 12 1/2 10.3
4 1/8 -4M0-1-2W 31.2 13.7 2.4 12 1/2 10.3
1/8 -6M0-1-2W 32.8 1/2 10.3
6 15.3 4.8 14
1/4 -6M0-1-4W 37.9 9/16 13.7
1/8 -8M0-1-2W 34.2 5.4 15 9/16 10.3
8 1/4 -8M0-1-4W 38.7 16.2 6.4 15 9/16 13.7
1/2 -8M0-1-8W 45.6 6.4 22 7/8 21.3
1/4 -10M0-1-4W 40.9 7.5 18 11/16 13.7
10 3/8 -10M0-1-6W 40.9 17.2 7.9 18 11/16 17.1
1/2 -10M0-1-8W 46.5 7.9 22 7/8 21.3
1/4 -12M0-1-4W 43.4 7.5 22 13/16 13.7
3/8 -12M0-1-6W 43.4 9.5 22 13/16 17.1
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-1-8W 49.0 9.5 22 7/8 21.3
3/4 -12M0-1-12W 50.5 9.5 27 1 1/16 26.7
14 3/8 -14M0-1-6W 44.1 24.4 10.7 24 15/16 17.1
15 1/2 -15M0-1-8W 49.0 24.4 11.9 24 15/16 21.3
16 1/2 -16M0-1-8W 49.0 24.4 12.7 24 15/16 21.3
18 1/2 -18M0-1-8W 50.5 24.4 13.9 27 1 1/16 21.3
30 1 1/4 -30M0-1-20W 77.2 39.6 26.2 46 46 mm 42.2
32 1 1/4 -32M0-1-20W 79.6 42.0 28.6 46 46 mm 42.2
38 1 1/2 -38M0-1-24W 91.6 49.4 33.7 55 55 mm 48.3
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.
➁ This dimension is for steel and aluminum fittings.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 26 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Female Connectors
TUBE

F flat
E

D
A

NPT
Basic NPT Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD Size Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-7-1 0.93 7/16 1/8 -3M0-7-2 28.7 14
1/16 0.34 0.05 3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -100-7-2 0.96 9/16 1/4 -3M0-7-4 33.5 19
1/8 -200-7-2 1.13 9/16 4 1/8 -4M0-7-2 29.7 13.7 2.4 14
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-7-4 1.32 3/4 1/8 -6M0-7-2 31.3 14
3/16 1/8 -300-7-2 1.17 0.54 0.12 9/16 1/4 -6M0-7-4 35.8 19
6 15.3 4.8
1/8 -400-7-2 1.23 9/16 3/8 -6M0-7-6 37.6 22
1/4 -400-7-4 1.41 3/4 1/2 -6M0-7-8 42.5 27
1/4 0.60 0.19
3/8 -400-7-6 1.48 7/8 1/8 -8M0-7-2 32.1 15
1/2 -400-7-8 1.67 1 1/16 1/4 -8M0-7-4 37.0 19
8 16.2 6.4
1/8 -500-7-2 1.26 9/16 3/8 -8M0-7-6 38.5 22
5/16 0.64 0.25 1/2 -8M0-7-8 43.3 27
1/4 -500-7-4 1.45 3/4
1/8 -600-7-2 1.29 5/8 1/4 -10M0-7-4 37.8 19
1/4 -600-7-4 1.48 3/4 10 3/8 -10M0-7-6 39.4 17.2 7.9 22
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6 1.54 0.66 0.28 7/8 1/2 -10M0-7-8 44.2 27
1/2 -600-7-8 1.73 1 1/16 1/4 -12M0-7-4 40.3 22
3/4 -600-7-12 1.88 1 5/16 12 3/8 -12M0-7-6 41.9 22.8 9.5 22
1/4 -810-7-4 1.59 13/16 1/2 -12M0-7-8 46.7 27
3/8 -810-7-6 1.65 7/8 15 1/2 -15M0-7-8 46.7 24.4 11.9 27
1/2 0.90 0.41
1/2 -810-7-8 1.84 1 1/16 16 1/2 -16M0-7-8 46.9 24.4 12.7 27
3/4 -810-7-12 1.90 1 5/16
1/2 -20M0-7-8 47.9 30
3/8 -1010-7-6 1.65 15/16 20 26.0 15.9
3/4 -20M0-7-12 49.7 35
5/8 1/2 -1010-7-8 1.84 0.96 0.50 1 1/16
3/4 -1010-7-12 1.90 1 5/16 3/4 -22M0-7-12 49.7 35
22 26.0 18.3
1 -22M0-7-16 57.9 41
1/2 -1210-7-8 1.84 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 0.62 3/4 -25M0-7-12 53.4 35
3/4 -1210-7-12 1.90 1 5/16 25 31.3 21.8
1 -25M0-7-16 62.3 41
7/8 3/4 -1410-7-12 1.96 1.02 0.72 1 5/16
3/4 -1610-7-12 2.10 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-7-16 2.45 1 5/8
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-7-20 2.94 1.62 1.09 2 1/8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-7-24 3.28 1.97 1.34 2 3/8
2 2 -3200-7-32 4.00 2.66 1.81 2 7/8

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 27

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Female Connectors

TUBE
F flat
F flat E
E
ISO/BSP parallel thread
(RJ) fittings are available in
See page 9 for thread
stainless steel only.
specifications.
See page 9 for thread
specifications.
D D
A A

ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)

ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-7-2RT 1.13 0.50 0.09 9/16 1/8 1/8 SS-200-7-2RJ 1.19 0.50 0.09 9/16
1/8 -400-7-2RT 1.23 9/16 1/4 SS-400-7-4RJ 1.48 0.18 3/4
1/4 -400-7-4RT 1.41 3/4 1/4 3/8 SS-400-7-6RJ 1.48 0.60 0.19 15/16
1/4 0.60 0.19
3/8 -400-7-6RT 1.48 7/8 1/2 SS-400-7-8RJ 1.71 0.19 1 1/16
1/2 -400-7-8RT 1.67 1 1/16
1/4 SS-500-7-4RJ 1.51 0.22 3/4
1/4 -600-7-4RT 1.48 3/4 5/16 0.64
1/2 SS-500-7-8RJ 1.61 0.28 1 1/16
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6RT 1.54 0.66 0.28 7/8
1/4 SS-600-7-4RJ 1.54 0.22 3/4
1/2 -600-7-8RT 1.73 1 1/16
3/8 3/8 SS-600-7-6RJ 1.52 0.66 0.26 15/16
1/4 -810-7-4RT 1.59 13/16 1/2 SS-600-7-8RJ 1.65 0.28 1 1/16
1/2 3/8 -810-7-6RT 1.65 0.90 0.41 7/8
1/4 SS-810-7-4RJ 1.65 0.22 13/16
1/2 -810-7-8RT 1.84 1 1/16
1/2 3/8 SS-810-7-6RJ 1.75 0.90 0.26 15/16
Dimensions, mm 1/2 SS-810-7-8RJ 1.90 0.28 1 1/16
3 1/8 -3M0-7-2RT 28.7 12.9 2.4 14 Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-7-2RT 31.3 14 1/4 SS-6M0-7-4RJ 37.6 19
1/4 -6M0-7-4RT 35.8 19 6 3/8 SS-6M0-7-6RJ 37.6 15.3 4.8 24
6 15.3 4.8
3/8 -6M0-7-6RT 37.6 22 1/2 SS-6M0-7-8RJ 43.5 27
1/2 -6M0-7-8RT 42.5 27
1/4 SS-8M0-7-4RJ 38.5 5.5 19
1/8 -8M0-7-2RT 32.1 15 8 3/8 SS-8M0-7-6RJ 36.2 16.2 6.5 24
1/4 -8M0-7-4RT 37.0 19 1/2 SS-8M0-7-8RJ 41.0 7.0 27
8 16.2 6.4
3/8 -8M0-7-6RT 38.5 22 1/4 SS-10M0-7-4RJ 39.4 5.5 19
1/2 -8M0-7-8RT 43.3 27 10 3/8 SS-10M0-7-6RJ 38.8 17.2 6.5 24
1/8 -10M0-7-2RT 33.0 18 1/2 SS-10M0-7-8RJ 42.1 7.0 27
1/4 -10M0-7-4RT 37.8 19 1/4 SS-12M0-7-4RJ 41.9 5.5 22
10 17.2 7.9
3/8 -10M0-7-6RT 39.4 22 12 3/8 SS-12M0-7-6RJ 44.4 22.8 6.5 24
1/2 -10M0-7-8RT 44.2 27 1/2 SS-12M0-7-8RJ 48.2 7.0 27
1/8 -12M0-7-2RT 35.5 8.3 22
1/4 -12M0-7-4RT 40.3 9.5 22
12 3/8 -12M0-7-6RT 41.9 22.8 9.5 22 F flat
1/2 -12M0-7-8RT 46.7 9.5 27 E
3/4 -12M0-7-12RT 49.0 9.5 35
3/8 -15M0-7-6RT 41.9 24 See page 9 for thread
15 24.4 11.9
1/2 -15M0-7-8RT 46.7 27 specifications.
1/2 -20M0-7-8RT 47.9 30
20 26.0 15.9 D
3/4 -20M0-7-12RT 49.7 35
A
3/4 -22M0-7-12RT 49.7 35
22 26.0 18.3
1 -22M0-7-16RT 57.9 41 ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)
3/4 -25M0-7-12RT 53.4 35
25 31.3 21.8
1 -25M0-7-16RT 62.3 41 ISO
Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-7-2RP 33.5 14
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-7-4RP 39.4 19
22 3/4 -22M0-7-12RP 53.3 26.0 18.3 35
25 1 -25M0-7-16RP 63.9 26.5 21.8 40

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 28 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Female Connectors ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)

TUBE

F flat ISO
E Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 1/4 -200-7-4RG 1.39 0.59 0.09 3/4
A 1/8 -400-7-2RG 1.26 0.18 9/16
1/4 -400-7-4RG 1.48 0.19 3/4
1/4 0.60
See page 9 for thread specifications. 3/8 -400-7-6RG 1.48 0.19 15/16
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. 1/2 -400-7-8RG 1.71 0.19 1 1/16
See page 60. 1/4 -500-7-4RG 1.51 0.22 3/4
5/16 0.64
1/2 -500-7-8RG 1.61 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -600-7-4RG 1.54 0.22 3/4
3/8 3/8 -600-7-6RG 1.52 0.66 0.26 15/16
1/2 -600-7-8RG 1.65 0.28 1 1/16
3/8 -810-7-6RG 1.75 0.26 15/16
1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-7-8RG 1.90 0.28 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
3 1/4 -3M0-7-4RG 35.3 12.9 2.4 19
1/8 -6M0-7-2RG 32.0 4.5 14
1/4 -6M0-7-4RG 37.6 4.8 19
6 15.3
3/8 -6M0-7-6RG 37.6 4.8 24
1/2 -6M0-7-8RG 43.5 4.8 27
1/4 -8M0-7-4RG 38.5 5.5 19
8 3/8 -8M0-7-6RG 36.2 16.2 6.5 24
1/2 -8M0-7-8RG 41.0 7.0 27
1/4 -10M0-7-4RG 39.4 5.5 19
10 3/8 -10M0-7-6RG 38.8 17.2 6.5 24
1/2 -10M0-7-8RG 42.1 7.0 27
1/4 -12M0-7-4RG 41.9 5.5 22
12 3/8 -12M0-7-6RG 44.4 22.8 6.5 24
1/2 -12M0-7-8RG 48.2 7.0 27
20 1/2 -20M0-7-8RG 54.3 26.0 7.0 30
22 1/2 -22M0-7-8RG 54.3 26.0 7.0 30

Bulkhead NPT
F flat
Dimensions
E
NPT Basic Panel Max
Tube Size Ordering Hole Panel
OD in. Number A D E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 1/8 -200-71-2 1.76 0.50 0.09 9/16 21/64 0.50
A
1/8 -400-71-2 1.85 5/8
1/4 0.60 0.19 29/64 0.40
1/4 -400-71-4 2.04 3/4
3/8 1/4 -600-71-4 2.17 0.66 0.28 3/4 37/64 0.44
3/8 -810-71-6 2.43 15/16
1/2 0.90 0.41 49/64 0.50
1/2 -810-71-8 2.62 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
6 1/4 -6M0-71-4 51.8 15.3 4.8 19 11.5 10.2
12 1/2 -12M0-71-8 66.5 22.8 9.5 27 19.5 12.7

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 29

Straight Fittings SWAGELOK OVER 1" REDUCER CUTAWAY-MS-01-140 C-PH-0475-DIM

FITTINGS
Reducers

TUBE
G flat
F flat
F flat F flat

T Tx T Tx T Tx

D E D D E
A E A
A
1 in. and Under Over 1 in. 25 mm and Under

Reducer (Fractional) Reducer (Metric)

Basic Basic
Tube OD Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering Ordering
T Tx Number A D E F G T Tx Number A D E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -100-R-2 1.15 2 3 -2M0-R-3M 33.5 12.9 1.7 12
1/16 0.34 0.05 5/16 —
1/4 -100-R-4 1.24 4 -3M0-R-4M 35.0 12
1/16 -200-R-1 1.14 0.03 7/16 3 6 -3M0-R-6M 36.1 12.9 2.4 12
1/8 -200-R-2 1.32 0.08 7/16 10 -3M0-R-10M 38.4 14
3/16 -200-R-3 1.35 0.09 7/16 4 6 -4M0-R-6M 37.1 13.7 2.4 12
1/8 0.50 —
1/4 -200-R-4 1.42 0.09 7/16
3/8 -200-R-6 1.48 0.09 7/16 3 -6M0-R-3M 36.9 1.9 14
1/2 -200-R-8 1.74 0.09 9/16 8 -6M0-R-8M 39.9 4.8 14
6 10 -6M0-R-10M 40.7 15.3 4.8 14
1/8 -300-R-2 1.37 0.08 12 -6M0-R-12M 46.3 4.8 14
3/16 0.54 7/16 —
1/4 -300-R-4 1.46 0.12 18 -6M0-R-18M 49.6 4.8 22
1/8 -400-R-2 1.45 0.08 1/2 6 -8M0-R-6M 40.3 4.1
3/16 -400-R-3 1.48 0.12 1/2 8 10 -8M0-R-10M 42.0 16.2 6.4 15
1/4 -400-R-4 1.54 0.17 1/2 12 -8M0-R-12M 47.6 6.4
5/16 -400-R-5 1.57 0.19 1/2
1/4 0.60 — 6 -10M0-R-6M 42.4 4.1 18
3/8 -400-R-6 1.60 0.19 1/2
1/2 -400-R-8 1.82 0.19 9/16 8 -10M0-R-8M 43.4 5.6 18
5/8 -400-R-10 1.89 0.19 11/16 10 12 -10M0-R-12M 49.8 17.2 7.9 18
3/4 -400-R-12 1.88 0.19 13/16 15 -10M0-R-15M 51.3 7.9 18
18 -10M0-R-18M 51.3 7.9 22
3/8 -500-R-6 1.65
5/16 0.64 0.25 9/16 — 6 -12M0-R-6M 44.9 4.1 22
1/2 -500-R-8 1.87
8 -12M0-R-8M 45.9 5.6 22
1/4 -600-R-4 1.63 0.17 5/8 10 -12M0-R-10M 46.7 7.1 22
3/8 -600-R-6 1.70 0.27 5/8 16 -12M0-R-16M 53.8 9.5 22
3/8 1/2 -600-R-8 1.91 0.66 0.28 5/8 — 12 22.8
18 -12M0-R-18M 53.8 9.5 22
5/8 -600-R-10 1.98 0.28 11/16 20 -12M0-R-20M 56.1 9.5 22
3/4 -600-R-12 1.98 0.28 13/16 22 -12M0-R-22M 56.1 9.5 24
1/4 -810-R-4 1.77 0.17 13/16 25 -12M0-R-25M 62.4 9.5 27
3/8 -810-R-6 1.84 0.27 13/16 14 12 -14M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
1/2 -810-R-8 2.06 0.37 13/16
1/2 0.90 — 15 12 -15M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
5/8 -810-R-10 2.12 0.41 13/16
3/4 -810-R-12 2.12 0.41 13/16 16 12 -16M0-R-12M 53.0 24.4 8.8 24
1 -810-R-16 2.37 0.41 1 1/16 12 -18M0-R-12M 54.6 8.8
3/4 -1010-R-12 2.15 15/16 16 -18M0-R-16M 56.1 12.0
5/8 7/8 -1010-R-14 2.21 0.96 0.50 15/16 — 18 20 -18M0-R-20M 57.6 24.4 15.1 27
1 -1010-R-16 2.40 1 1/16 22 -18M0-R-22M 57.6 15.1
1/2 -1210-R-8 2.15 0.37 25 -18M0-R-25M 62.4 15.1
3/4 0.96 1 1/16 —
1 -1210-R-16 2.46 0.62 16 -20M0-R-16M 57.9 12.0
1 1/4 -1610-R-20➀ 3.17 1 3/8 1 7/8 18 -20M0-R-18M 57.9 13.9
20 26.0 30
1 1 1/2 -1610-R-24➀ 3.51 1.23 0.88 1 5/8 2 1/4 22 -20M0-R-22M 59.4 15.9
2 -1610-R-32➀ 4.43 2 1/8 3 25 -20M0-R-25M 64.2 15.9
1 1/2 -2000-R-24➀ 4.10 1 3/4 2 1/4 18 -22M0-R-18M 57.9 13.9
1 1/4 1.62 1.09 22 20 -22M0-R-20M 59.4 26.0 15.5 30
2 -2000-R-32➀ 4.93 2 1/8 3
25 -22M0-R-25M 64.2 18.3
1 1/2 2 -2400-R-32➀ 5.17 1.97 1.34 2 1/8 3
18 -25M0-R-18M 63.1 13.9
➀ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules. 25 31.3 35
20 -25M0-R-20M 64.6 15.5

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 30 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Reducers
TUBE

F flat F flat

T Tx T Tx

D E D E
A A

Reducer (Metric to Fractional) Reducer (Fractional to Metric)

Basic Basic
Tube OD Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering Ordering
T Tx, in. Number A D E F T Tx, mm Number A D E F
Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in.
2 1/8 -2M0-R-2 33.5 12.9 1.7 12 1/8 6 -200-R-6M 1.42 0.50 0.09 7/16
1/8 -3M0-R-2 33.5 2.0
3 12.9 12
1/4 -3M0-R-4 36.1 2.4
4 1/4 -4M0-R-4 37.1 13.7 2.4 12
1/8 -6M0-R-2 36.9 2.0
1/4 -6M0-R-4 39.2 4.4
6 5/16 -6M0-R-5 39.9 15.3 4.8 14
3/8 -6M0-R-6 40.7 4.8
1/2 -6M0-R-8 46.3 4.8
1/4 -8M0-R-4 40.3 4.4
8 3/8 -8M0-R-6 42.0 16.2 6.4 15
1/2 -8M0-R-8 47.6 6.4
3/8 -10M0-R-6 44.2 6.8
10 17.2 18
1/2 -10M0-R-8 49.8 7.9
1/2 -12M0-R-8 52.3 9.3
12 22.8 22
3/4 -12M0-R-12 53.8 9.5
3/4 -18M0-R-12 56.1 14.7
18 24.4 27
1 -18M0-R-16 62.4 15.1
25 1 -25M0-R-16 69.5 31.3 20.2 35

Long Reducer
F flat
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T E Tx T Tx Number A D E F
Dimensions, in.
D
3/8 1/2 -600-RF-8 2.57 0.66 0.25 5/8
A Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end connections.

Bulkhead Reducer
F flat F flat
Dimensions
Basic Panel Max
E Tube Ordering Hole Panel
OD Number A D E F Size Thickness
Dimensions, in.
D
A 1/8 -200-R1-2 1.95 0.50 0.08 1/2 21/64 0.50
1/4 -400-R1-4 2.20 0.60 0.17 5/8 29/64 0.40
3/8 -600-R1-6 2.41 0.66 0.27 3/4 37/64 0.44
1/2 -810-R1-8 2.87 0.90 0.37 15/16 49/64 0.50
5/8 -1010-R1-10 2.96 0.96 0.47 1 1/16 57/64 0.50
3/4 -1210-R1-12 3.21 0.96 0.58 1 3/16 1 1/64 0.66
1 -1610-R1-16 3.95 1.23 0.80 1 5/8 1 21/64 0.75

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 31

Straight Fittings

FITTINGS
Port Connectors Port Connector

TUBE
Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
E OD Number E H OD Number E H
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
H
1/16 -101-PC 0.03 0.54 3 -3M1-PC 1.9 22.2
1 in./25 mm 1/8 -201-PC 0.08 0.88 6 -6M1-PC 4.1 25.0
and under
1/4 -401-PC 0.17 0.98 8 -8M1-PC 5.6 26.0
5/16 -501-PC 0.22 1.02 10 -10M1-PC 7.1 27.1
3/8 -601-PC 0.27 1.05 12 -12M1-PC 8.8 36.2
1/2 -811-PC 0.37 1.43 15 -15M1-PC 11.2 37.8
E
5/8 -1011-PC 0.47 1.49 16 -16M1-PC 12.0 37.8
3/4 -1211-PC 0.58 1.49 18 -18M1-PC 13.9 37.8
1 -1611-PC 0.80 1.94 20 -20M1-PC 15.5 39.4
H 1 1/4 -2000-PC➀ 1.02 2.72 25 -25M1-PC 19.9 49.3
Over 1 in./25mm 1 1/2 -2400-PC➀ 1.25 3.31 28 B-28M1-PC 22.6 49.0
2 -3200-PC➀ 1.72 4.56 28 -28M0-PC➀ 22.5 63.5
➀ Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules. 30 -30M0-PC➀ 24.3 67.6
32 -32M0-PC➀ 26.5 69.7
38 -38M0-PC➀ 31.6 81.9
➀ Furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.

Reducing Port Connector

Basic Basic
Tube OD Ordering Dimensions Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number E H T Tx Number E H
T E Tx Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
H 1/8 1/16 -201-PC-1 0.03 0.72 6 3 -6M1-PC-3M 1.9 22.9
1/16 -401-PC-1 0.03 0.75 8 6 -8M1-PC-6M 4.1 25.4
1/4
1/8 -401-PC-2 0.08 0.90 6 -10M1-PC-6M 4.1 25.8
1/8 -601-PC-2 0.08 0.92 10
3/8 8 -10M1-PC-8M 5.6 26.3
1/4 -601-PC-4 0.17 1.00 6 -12M1-PC-6M 4.1 29.6
1/4 -811-PC-4 0.17 1.17 12 8 -12M1-PC-8M 5.6 30.1
1/2
3/8 -811-PC-6 0.27 1.21 10 -12M1-PC-10M 7.1 30.6
3/4 1/2 -1211-PC-8 0.37 1.49 16 12 -16M1-PC-12M 8.8 37.5
1/2 -1611-PC-8 0.37 1.69 28 25 -28M1-PC-25M 19.8 56.5
1
3/4 -1611-PC-12 0.58 1.72 32 25 -32M1-PC-25M 19.8 60.3
38 25 -38M1-PC-25M 19.8 65.8

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 32 Tube Fittings

Straight Fittings
FITTINGS

Caps and Plugs

TUBE

D
A

Cap Plug
Basic Basic Basic Basic
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number A D OD Number A D OD Number OD Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-C 0.59 0.34 2 -2M0-C 20.1 12.9 1/16 -100-P 2 -2M0-P
1/8 -200-C 0.79 0.50 3 -3M0-C 20.1 12.9 1/8 -200-P 3 -3M0-P
3/16 -300-C 0.84 0.54 4 -4M0-C 21.3 13.7 3/16 -300-P 4 -4M0-P
1/4 -400-C 0.92 0.60 6 -6M0-C 23.1 15.3 1/4 -400-P 6 -6M0-P
5/16 -500-C 0.96 0.64 8 -8M0-C 24.5 16.2 5/16 -500-P 8 -8M0-P
3/8 -600-C 1.01 0.66 10 -10M0-C 26.6 17.2 3/8 -600-P 10 -10M0-P
1/2 -810-C 1.21 0.90 12 -12M0-C 30.6 22.8 1/2 -810-P 12 -12M0-P
5/8 -1010-C 1.24 0.96 14 -14M0-C 31.4 24.4 5/8 -1010-P 14 -14M0-P
3/4 -1210-C 1.27 0.96 15 -15M0-C 31.4 24.4 3/4 -1210-P 15 -15M0-P
7/8 -1410-C 1.37 1.02 16 -16M0-C 31.4 24.4 7/8 -1410-P 16 -16M0-P
1 -1610-C 1.61 1.23 18 -18M0-C 32.2 24.4 1 -1610-P 18 -18M0-P
1 1/8 B-1810-C 1.61 1.23 20 -20M0-C 34.8 26.0 1 1/4 -2000-P 20 -20M0-P
1 1/4 -2000-C 2.10 1.62 22 -22M0-C 34.8 26.0 1 1/2 -2400-P 22 -22M0-P
1 1/2 -2400-C 2.54 1.97 25 -25M0-C 41.0 31.3 2 -3200-P 25 -25M0-P
2 -3200-C 3.41 2.66 -28M0-C 48.5 36.6 28 -28M0-P
28
B-28M0-C 41.2 31.6 30 -30M0-P
30 -30M0-C 53.4 39.6 32 -32M0-P
32 -32M0-C 55.8 42.0 38 -38M0-P
38 -38M0-C 65.4 49.4

Vent Protectors Mud Dauber

Swagelok vent protectors, more commonly
F flat
40 mesh known as mud dauber fittings, protect open
wire ends of instruments, tubing, outlet vents, and
screen E bleed-off lines.
The mesh wire screen prevents foreign objects,
A such as mud dauber insects, from entering and
40 mesh 300 series clogging various systems and causing damage.
stainless steel Vent protectors are available in stainless steel
wire screen assembly
and brass. To order brass, replace SS in the
ordering number with B.
Example: B-MD-2

NPT Ordering
Size Number A E F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 SS-MD-2 0.56 0.19 1/2
1/4 SS-MD-4 0.78 0.28 9/16
3/8 SS-MD-6 0.81 0.41 11/16
1/2 SS-MD-8 1.03 0.50 7/8
3/4 SS-MD-12 1.06 0.72 1 1/16

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 33

90° Elbows

FITTINGS
Unions

TUBE
E
F flat

Tube ports are identical.

D
A

Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E F OD Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-9 0.70 0.34 0.05 3/8 3 -3M0-9 22.3 12.9 2.4 3/8
1/8 -200-9 0.88 0.50 0.09 3/8 4 -4M0-9 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
3/16 -300-9 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 6 -6M0-9 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -400-9 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 8 -8M0-9 28.8 16.2 6.4 9/16
5/16 -500-9 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 10 -10M0-9 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
3/8 -600-9 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 12 -12M0-9 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
1/2 -810-9 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 14 -14M0-9 38.0 24.4 11.1 15/16
5/8 -1010-9 1.50 0.96 0.50 15/16 15 -15M0-9 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/4 -1210-9 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 16 -16M0-9 38.0 24.4 12.7 15/16
7/8 -1410-9 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 18 -18M0-9 39.8 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
1 -1610-9 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 20 -20M0-9 44.6 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
1 1/8 B-1810-9 2.17 1.23 0.97 1 11/16 22 -22M0-9 44.6 26.0 18.3 1 3/8
1 1/4 -2000-9 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 25 -25M0-9 49.1 31.3 21.8 1 3/8
1 1/2 -2400-9 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 -28M0-9 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
2 -3200-9 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 B-28M0-9 55.4 31.6 24.6 1 11/16
30 -30M0-9 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
32 -32M0-9 72.3 42.0 28.6 46 mm
38 -38M0-9 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm
50 -50M0-9 106 65.0 45.2 2 3/4

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 34 Tube Fittings

90° Elbows
FITTINGS

Male
TUBE

E
F flat

See page 9 for thread specifications.

NPT
Basic NPT Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in.
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-2-1 1/8 -3M0-2-2 23.6 7/16
1/16 0.75 0.34 0.05 7/16 3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -100-2-2 1/4 -3M0-2-4 24.6 1/2
1/16 -200-2-1 0.93 7/16 1/8 -4M0-2-2
4 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
1/8 1/8 -200-2-2 0.93 0.50 0.09 7/16 1/4 -4M0-2-4
1/4 -200-2-4 0.97 1/2 1/8 -6M0-2-2 27.0 1/2
1/8 -300-2-2 1/4 -6M0-2-4 27.0 1/2
3/16 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -300-2-4 3/8 -6M0-2-6 29.8 11/16
1/16 -400-2-1 1.06 0.12 1/2 1/2 -6M0-2-8 31.8 13/16
1/8 -400-2-2 1.06 0.19 1/2 1/8 -8M0-2-2 28.8 4.8 9/16
1/4 1/4 -400-2-4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 1/4 -8M0-2-4 28.8 6.4 9/16
3/8 -400-2-6 1.17 0.19 11/16 8 16.2
3/8 -8M0-2-6 30.6 6.4 11/16
1/2 -400-2-8 1.25 0.19 13/16 1/2 -8M0-2-8 32.6 6.4 13/16
1/8 -500-2-2 1.13 0.19 9/16 1/8 -10M0-2-2 31.5 4.8 11/16
5/16 1/4 -500-2-4 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 1/4 -10M0-2-4 31.5 7.1 11/16
3/8 -500-2-6 1.20 0.25 11/16 10 17.2
3/8 -10M0-2-6 31.5 7.9 11/16
1/8 -600-2-2 1.20 0.19 5/8 1/2 -10M0-2-8 33.5 7.9 13/16
1/4 -600-2-4 1.20 0.28 5/8 1/4 -12M0-2-4 36.0 7.1 13/16
3/8 3/8 -600-2-6 1.23 0.66 0.28 11/16 3/8 -12M0-2-6 36.0 9.5 13/16
1/2 -600-2-8 1.31 0.28 13/16 12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-2-8 36.0 9.5 13/16
3/4 -600-2-12 1.46 0.28 1 1/16 3/4 -12M0-2-12 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
1/4 -810-2-4 1.42 0.28 13/16 14 1/2 -14M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.1 15/16
3/8 -810-2-6 1.42 0.38 13/16
1/2 0.90 15 1/2 -15M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
1/2 -810-2-8 1.42 0.41 13/16
3/4 -810-2-12 1.57 0.41 1 1/16 3/8 -16M0-2-6 38.0 9.5 15/16
16 1/2 -16M0-2-8 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/8 -1010-2-6 1.50 0.38 15/16 3/4 -16M0-2-12 39.8 12.7 1 1/16
5/8 1/2 -1010-2-8 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16
3/4 -1010-2-12 1.57 0.50 1 1/16 1/2 -18M0-2-8 11.9
18 39.8 24.4 1 1/16
3/4 -18M0-2-12 15.1
1/2 -1210-2-8 0.47
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16 1/2 -20M0-2-8 11.9
3/4 -1210-2-12 0.62 20 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
3/4 -20M0-2-12 15.9
7/8 3/4 -1410-2-12 1.76 1.02 0.62 1 3/8
3/4 -22M0-2-12 15.9
3/4 -1610-2-12 0.62 22 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
1 1.93 1.23 1 3/8 1 -22M0-2-16 18.3
1 -1610-2-16 0.88
3/4 -25M0-2-12 15.9
1 1/4 1 1/4 -2000-2-20 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 25 49.1 31.3 1 3/8
1 -25M0-2-16 21.8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -2400-2-24 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 30 1 1/4 -30M0-2-20 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
2 2 -3200-2-32 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 32 1 1/4 -32M0-2-20 72.3 42.0 27.8 46 mm
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have 38 1 1/2 -38M0-2-24 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 35

90° Elbows

FITTINGS
Male

TUBE
E
F flat

See page 9 for thread specifications.

ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

ISO Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Thread Basic
OD Size Number A D E➀ F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A D E➀ F
1/8 -200-2-2RT 0.83 7/16 Dimensions, mm
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-2-4RT 0.97 1/2 1/8 -3M0-2-2RT 23.6 7/16
3 12.9 2.4
1/8 -400-2-2RT 1.06 1/2 1/4 -3M0-2-4RT 24.6 1/2
1/4 -400-2-4RT 1.06 1/2 1/8 -4M0-2-2RT
1/4 0.60 0.19 4 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
3/8 -400-2-6RT 1.17 11/16 1/4 -4M0-2-4RT
1/2 -400-2-8RT 1.25 13/16 1/8 -6M0-2-2RT 27.0 1/2
5/16 1/4 -500-2-4RT 1.13 0.64 0.25 9/16 1/4 -6M0-2-4RT 27.0 1/2
6 15.3 4.8
1/8 -600-2-2RT 1.20 5/8 3/8 -6M0-2-6RT 29.8 11/16
3/8 1/4 -600-2-4RT 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 1/2 -6M0-2-8RT 31.8 13/16
3/8 -600-2-6RT 1.23 11/16 1/8 -8M0-2-2RT 28.8 4.8 9/16
1/4 -810-2-4RT 0.28 1/4 -8M0-2-4RT 28.8 6.4 9/16
8 16.2
1/2 3/8 -810-2-6RT 1.42 0.90 0.38 13/16 3/8 -8M0-2-6RT 30.6 6.4 11/16
1/2 -810-2-8RT 0.41 1/2 -8M0-2-8RT 32.6 6.4 13/16
3/4 1/2 -1210-2-8RT 1.57 0.96 0.47 1 3/8 1/4 -10M0-2-4RT 31.5 7.1 11/16
10 3/8 -10M0-2-6RT 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
1 1 -1610-2-16RT 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
1/2 -10M0-2-8RT 33.5 7.9 13/16
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
1/8 -12M0-2-2RT 36.0 4.8 13/16
1/4 -12M0-2-4RT 36.0 7.1 13/16
12 3/8 -12M0-2-6RT 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
1/2 -12M0-2-8RT 36.0 9.5 13/16
3/4 -12M0-2-12RT 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
14 1/2 -14M0-2-8RT 38.1 24.4 11.1 15/16
15 1/2 -15M0-2-8RT 38.1 24.4 11.9 15/16
3/8 -16M0-2-6RT 9.5
16 38.0 24.4 15/16
1/2 -16M0-2-8RT 11.9
1/2 -18M0-2-8RT 11.9
18 39.8 24.4 1 1/16
3/4 -18M0-2-12RT 15.1
1/2 -20M0-2-8RT 11.9
20 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
3/4 -20M0-2-12RT 15.9
3/4 -22M0-2-12RT 15.9
22 44.6 26.0 1 3/8
1 -22M0-2-16RT 18.3
3/4 -25M0-2-12RT 15.9
25 49.1 31.3 1 3/8
1 -25M0-2-16RT 21.8
1 -28M0-2-16RT 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
1 B-28M0-2-16RT 55.4 31.6 22.2 1 11/16
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have
a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 36 Tube Fittings

90° Elbows
FITTINGS
TUBE

Reducing Elbows
E
F flat
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T
T Tx Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, in.
D 1/4 -400-2R-4 1.06 0.60 0.17 1/2
1/4
3/8 -600-2R-4 1.20 0.66 0.17 5/8
3/8 -600-2R-6 1.20 0.66 0.27 5/8
3/8
1/2 -810-2R-6 1.42 0.90 0.27 13/16
A
Tx 1/2 1/2 -810-2R-8 1.42 0.90 0.37 13/16
Dimensions, mm
6 6 -6M0-2R-6M 27.0 15.3 4.6 1/2
12 12 -12M0-2R-12M 38.1 22.8 8.8 15/16
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 37

90° Elbows

FITTINGS
Male Positionable, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (PR)

TUBE
A ISO
F flat Thread Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
Dimensions, in.
D E 1/8 -400-2-2PR 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 0.60
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-2-4PR 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 0.80
Fx flat
1/4 -600-2-4PR 1.20 0.23 5/8 3/4 0.80
3/8 0.66
O-ring 3/8 -600-2-6PR 1.31 0.28 13/16 7/8 0.96
1/4 -810-2-4PR 1.42 0.23 13/16 3/4 0.80
U 1/2 3/8 -810-2-6PR 1.42 0.90 0.31 13/16 7/8 0.96
retainer OD
1/2 -810-2-8PR 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
5/8 1/2 -1010-2-8PR 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
1/2 -1210-2-8PR 0.47 1 1/16 1.16
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
3/4 -1210-2-12PR 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
3/4 -1610-2-12PR 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
1 1.93 1.23 1 3/8
1 -1610-2-16PR 0.78 1 5/8 1.82
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-2-2PR 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-2-4PR 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/8 -8M0-2-2PR 28.8 4.0 9/16 9/16 15.2
8 16.2
1/4 -8M0-2-4PR 29.9 5.9 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/4 -10M0-2-4PR 5.9 3/4 20.3
10 33.5 17.2 13/16
3/8 -10M0-2-6PR 7.9 7/8 24.4
1/4 -12M0-2-4PR 36.0 5.9 13/16 3/4 20.3
3/8 -12M0-2-6PR 36.0 7.9 13/16 7/8 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-2-8PR 38.0 9.5 15/16 1 1/16 29.5
3/4 -12M0-2-12PR 39.8 9.5 1 1/16 1 3/8 36.3
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.

Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A
E SAE/MS Basic
F flat Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
Dimensions, in.
7/16-20 -400-2-4ST 1.12 1/2 9/16 0.65
1/4 0.60 0.19
D 9/16-18 -400-2-6ST 1.20 5/8 11/16 0.79
Fx flat 5/16 1/2-20 -500-2-5ST 1.19 0.64 0.23 9/16 5/8 0.72
7/16-20 -600-2-4ST 1.26 0.20 5/8 9/16 0.65
O-ring
3/8 9/16-18 -600-2-6ST 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 0.79
3/4-16 -600-2-8ST 1.37 0.28 13/16 7/8 1.01
U
washer OD 9/16-18 -810-2-6ST 0.28 11/16 0.79
1/2 1.48 0.90 13/16
3/4-16 -810-2-8ST 0.41 7/8 1.01
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in
5/8 7/8-14 -1010-2-10ST 1.56 0.96 0.50 15/16 1 1.16
carbon steel and stainless steel only.
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926‑1 3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-2-12ST 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1 1/4 1.44
straight thread boss. 7/8 1 3/16-12 -1410-2-14ST 1.70 1.02 0.72 1 3/16 1 3/8 1.59
1 1 5/16-12 -1610-2-16ST 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 1.73
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-2-20ST 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.16
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-2-24ST 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45
2 2 1/2-12 -3200-2-32ST 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 3.16
For ST and ST positionable fittings ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
used in ECE-R110 applications, add pipe/straight thread end.

the DE O-ring suffix to the ordering

number. Example: SS-600-2-6STDE

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 38 Tube Fittings

90° Elbows
FITTINGS

Weld Tube Socket Weld

TUBE

A Socket Basic
E Dimensions
F flat Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A B D E F K
Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 -400-9-4W 1.06 0.28 0.60 0.19 1/2 0.50
D 3/8 3/8 -600-9-6W 1.20 0.31 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.63
B
1/2 1/2 -810-9-8W 1.42 0.38 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.81
K 3/4 3/4 -1210-9-12W 1.57 0.44 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.06
1 1 -1610-9-16W 1.93 0.62 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.38

Male Pipe Weld

A Pipe Basic
E Dimensions
F flat Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F J
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -400-2-2W 0.405
1/4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2
D 1/4 -400-2-4W 0.540
3/8 1/4 -600-2-4W 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.540
37.5°
1/2 1/2 -810-2-8W 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.840
J 3/4 3/4 -1210-2-12W 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.050
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the weld end. Wall thickness at the weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.

Female
E
F flat

A
NPT
Basic NPT Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD Size Number A D E F OD in. Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -200-8-2 0.97 1/2 1/8 -6M0-8-2 27.0 1/2
1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-8-4 1.08 11/16 6 1/4 -6M0-8-4 29.8 15.3 4.8 11/16
3/16 1/8 -300-8-2 1.00 0.54 0.12 1/2 1/2 -6M0-8-8 34.6 1
1/8 -400-8-2 1.06 1/2 8 1/4 -8M0-8-4 30.6 16.2 6.4 11/16
1/4 -400-8-4 1.17 11/16 1/8 -10M0-8-2 31.5 11/16
1/4 0.60 0.19 10 17.2 7.9
3/8 -400-8-6 1.25 13/16 1/4 -10M0-8-4 33.5 13/16
1/2 -400-8-8 1.36 1 1/4 -12M0-8-4 36.0 13/16
12 22.8 9.5
1/8 -500-8-2 1.13 9/16 1/2 -12M0-8-8 38.8 1
5/16 0.64 0.25
1/4 -500-8-4 1.20 11/16 16 1/2 -16M0-8-8 39.5 24.4 12.7 1 1/16
1/8 -600-8-2 1.20 5/8
1/4 -600-8-4 1.23 11/16
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-8-6 1.31 13/16
1/2 -600-8-8 1.42 1
1/4 -810-8-4 1.42 13/16
1/2 3/8 -810-8-6 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16
1/2 -810-8-8 1.53 1
3/8 -1010-8-6 1.50 15/16
5/8 0.96 0.50
1/2 -1010-8-8 1.57 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-8-8 1.57 1 1/16
3/4 0.96 0.62
3/4 -1210-8-12 1.76 1 3/8
7/8 3/4 -1410-8-12 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-8-12 1.93 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-8-16 2.11 1 11/16 Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 39

45° Elbows

FITTINGS
Male NPT

TUBE
A Basic
F flat Dimensions
Tube NPT Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -400-5-2
D 1/4 0.97 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-5-4
E 1/8 -600-5-2 1.10 0.19 5/8
3/8 1/4 -600-5-4 1.10 0.66 0.28 5/8
3/8 -600-5-6 1.15 0.28 13/16
3/8 -810-5-6 0.38
1/2 1.26 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-5-8 0.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-5-12 1.33 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
1 1 -1610-5-16 1.59 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Positionable, SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST)

A SAE/MS Basic
F flat Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A D E➀ F U
Dimensions, in.
1/4 7/16-20 -400-5-4ST 1.01 0.60 0.19 1/2 0.65
D 3/8 9/16-18 -600-5-6ST 1.10 0.66 0.28 5/8 0.79
O-ring 1/2 3/4-16 -810-5-8ST 1.26 0.90 0.41 13/16 1.01
E

D
rO
as U

3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-5-12ST 1.33 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.44

he

1 1 5/16-12 -1610-5-16ST 1.59 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1.73

w

➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in

carbon steel and stainless steel only.
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926‑1
straight thread boss.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 40 Tube Fittings

Tees
FITTINGS

Unions
TUBE

D F flat
Ax

Ax
A

Union
Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number A Ax D E F OD Number A Ax D E F, in.
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -100-3 1.40 0.70 0.34 0.05 3/8 2 -2M0-3 44.7 22.3 12.9 1.7 3/8
1/8 -200-3 1.76 0.88 0.50 0.09 3/8 3 -3M0-3 44.7 22.3 12.9 2.4 3/8
3/16 -300-3 1.92 0.96 0.54 0.12 7/16 4 -4M0-3 50.8 25.4 13.7 2.4 1/2
1/4 -400-3 2.12 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2 6 -6M0-3 53.9 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
5/16 -500-3 2.34 1.17 0.64 0.25 5/8 8 -8M0-3 59.7 29.9 16.2 6.4 5/8
3/8 -600-3 2.40 1.20 0.66 0.28 5/8 10 -10M0-3 63.0 31.5 17.2 7.9 11/16
1/2 -810-3 2.84 1.42 0.90 0.41 13/16 12 -12M0-3 72.0 36.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
5/8 -1010-3 3.06 1.53 0.96 0.50 1 14 -14M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 11.1 1
3/4 -1210-3 3.14 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 15 -15M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 11.9 1
7/8 -1410-3 3.52 1.76 1.02 0.72 1 3/8 16 -16M0-3 77.6 38.8 24.4 12.7 1
1 -1610-3 3.86 1.93 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 18 -18M0-3 79.6 39.8 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
1 1/8 B-1810-3 4.34 2.17 1.23 0.97 1 11/16 20 -20M0-3 89.3 44.6 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
1 1/4 -2000-3 5.34 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 22 -22M0-3 89.3 44.6 26.0 18.3 1 3/8
1 1/2 -2400-3 6.20 3.10 1.97 1.34 2 25 -25M0-3 98.3 49.1 31.3 21.8 1 3/8
2 -3200-3 8.44 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 -28M0-3 128 64.0 36.6 21.8 41 mm
28
B-28M0-3 103 51.4 31.6 24.6 1 11/16
30 -30M0-3 140 69.9 39.6 26.2 46 mm
32 -32M0-3 145 72.3 42.0 28.6 46 mm
38 -38M0-3 168 84.0 49.4 33.7 55 mm
50 -50M0-3 211 106 65.0 45.2 2 3/4

Reducing Union (Fractional)

Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T T Tx Number A Ax D Dx E F
Dimensions, in.
Ax D E F flat 3/8 1/4 -600-3-6-4 2.40 1.14 0.66 0.60 0.19 5/8
Dx
1/4 -810-3-8-4 1.25 0.60 0.19
1/2 2.84 0.90 13/16
3/8 -810-3-8-6 1.31 0.66 0.28
Tx
A 5/8 3/8 -1010-3-10-6 3.06 1.42 0.96 0.66 0.28 1
3/8 -1210-3-12-6 1.46 0.66 0.28
3/4 3.14 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-12-8 1.57 0.90 0.41
3/8 -1610-3-16-6 1.65 0.66 0.28
1 1/2 -1610-3-16-8 3.86 1.76 1.23 0.90 0.41 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-3-16-12 1.76 0.96 0.62
1 1/4 1 -2000-3-20-16 5.34 2.17 1.62 1.23 0.88 1 11/16
1 1/2 1 -2400-3-24-16 6.20 2.36 1.97 1.23 0.88 2
2 1 -3200-3-32-16 8.44 2.79 2.66 1.23 0.88 2 3/4

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 41

Tees

FITTINGS
Unions Reducing Union (Metric)

TUBE
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D Dx E F, in.
T
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-3-3M-6M 49.3 26.9 12.9 15.3 2.4 1/2
Ax D E F flat
Dx
8 -8M0-3-8M-6M 59.9 29.0 16.2 15.3 4.8 5/8
6
10 -10M0-3-10M-6M 63.0 29.7 17.2 15.3 4.8 11/16
Tx 12 -12M0-3-12M-6M 72.0 31.8 22.8 15.3 4.8 13/16
A
15 -15M0-3-15M-12M 77.7 38.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1
16 -16M0-3-16M-12M 77.6 38.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1
18 12 -18M0-3-18M-12M 79.8 39.9 24.4 22.8 9.5 1 1/16
22 -22M0-3-22M-12M 89.4 44.7 26.0 22.8 9.5 1 3/8
25 -25M0-3-25M-12M 98.0 44.7 31.3 22.8 9.5 1 3/8

Reducing Union
E F flat
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx
T Tx Number A Ax Ay D Dx E F
Dx Dimensions, in.
D
Ax 3/8 1/4 -600-3-4-6 2.34 1.20 1.14 0.66 0.60 0.19 5/8

T
Ax Ay
A

E F flat Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax Ay D Dx E F
T Tx
Dimensions, in.
Dx 1/2 -810-3-6-6 2.73 1.42 1.31 0.90 0.66 0.28 13/16
Ay D
5/8 3/8 -1010-3-6-6 2.95 1.53 1.42 0.96 0.66 0.28 1
3/4 -1210-3-6-6 3.03 1.57 1.46 0.96 0.66 0.28 1 1/16

Tx
Ax Ay
A

F flat Dx
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx T Tx Tx1 Number A Ax Ay Ay1 D Dx Dx1 E F
Dimensions, in.
5/8 1/2 -1010-3-8-6 3.06 1.53 1.53 1.42 0.96 0.90 1
Ay1 D E
3/4 1/2 3/8 -1210-3-8-6 3.14 1.57 1.57 1.46 0.96 0.90 0.66 0.28 1 1/16
Dx1 1 3/4 -1610-3-12-6 3.69 1.93 1.76 1.65 1.23 0.96 1 3/8
Tx1
Ax Ay
A

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 42 Tube Fittings

Tees
FITTINGS

Male Branch, NPT (TTM)

TUBE

E NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E➀ F, in. H
Dimensions, in.
1/8 -200-3TTM 1.86 7/16 0.70
D 1/8 0.50 0.09
H F flat 1/4 -200-3-4TTM 1.94 1/2 0.92
3/16 1/8 -300-3TTM 1.92 0.54 0.12 7/16 0.70
1/8 -400-3TTM 0.74
A 1/4 2.12 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-3-4TTM 0.92
5/16 1/8 -500-3TTM 2.34 0.64 0.19 5/8 0.82
1/4 -600-3TTM 2.40 5/8 1.00
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-3-6TTM 2.62 13/16 1.11
3/8 -810-3TTM 0.38 1.11
1/2 2.84 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-3-8TTM 0.41 1.30
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTM 3.06 0.96 0.47 1 1.41
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TTM 3.14 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1.45
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTM 18.8
6 53.9 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTM 23.4
1/8 -8M0-3TTM 4.8 20.8
8 59.7 16.2 5/8
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTM 6.4 25.4
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTM 67.0 17.2 7.1 13/16 26.2
3/8 -12M0-3TTM 9.5 28.2
12 1/4 -12M0-3-4TTM 72.0 22.8 7.1 13/16 28.2
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTM 9.5 33.0
16 1/2 -16M0-3TTM 77.6 24.4 11.9 1 35.8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
Adapter Tee

A Adapter Tees
Ax
D Basic
F Tube OD Dimensions
E
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D E F H
T
Dimensions, in.
Tx 1/4 -400-3-4TAA 2.06 1.00 0.60 0.17 1/2 1.00
H 1/4
3/8 -600-3-4TAA 2.28 1.08 0.66 0.17 5/8 1.08
3/8 -600-3-6TAA 2.34 1.14 0.66 0.27 5/8 1.14
3/8
1/2 -810-3-6TAA 2.67 1.25 0.90 0.27 13/16 1.25
1/2 1/2 -810-3-8TAA 3.09 1.59 0.90 0.37 15/16 1.59

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 43

Tees Adapter Branch Tee

FITTINGS
A Adapter Branch Tees

TUBE
Ax
D
F Basic
T Tube OD Dimensions
Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D E F H
Dimensions, in.
H 1/4 1/4 -400-3-4TTA 2.12 1.06 0.60 0.17 1/2 1.00
3/8 3/8 -600-3-6TTA 2.40 1.20 0.66 0.27 5/8 1.14
1/2 1/2 -810-3-8TTA 3.00 1.50 0.90 0.37 15/16 1.59
Tx
E
Adapter Run Tee
A Adapter Run Tees
Ax
D Basic
F
Tube OD Dimensions
T E Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D E F
Dimensions, in.
Tx 1/4 -400-3-4TAT 2.06 1.06 0.60 0.17 1/2
1/4
Ax 3/8 -600-3-4TAT 2.28 1.20 0.66 0.17 5/8
3/8 -600-3-6TAT 2.34 1.20 0.66 0.27 5/8
3/8
1/2 -810-3-6TAT 2.67 1.42 0.90 0.27 13/16
1/2 1/2 -810-3-8TAT 3.09 1.50 0.90 0.37 15/16
Double Run Adapter Tee

A Double Run Adapter Tees

H E
Basic
Tube OD Dimensions
Tx Ordering
T Tx Number A Ax D E F H
F Dimensions, in.
Ax
1/4 1/4 -400-3-4AAT 2.14 1.16 0.60 0.17 1/2 1.07
D 3/8 3/8 -600-3-6AAT 2.66 1.39 0.66 0.27 13/16 1.33
1/2 1/2 -810-3-8AAT 3.66 1.74 0.90 0.37 1 1/4 1.83
T

Run, NPT (TMT)
NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
E OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in.
Dimensions, in.
D F flat 1/8 -200-3TMT 1.63 0.93 7/16
Ax 1/8 0.50 0.09
1/4 -200-3-4TMT 1.89 0.97 1/2
3/16 1/8 -300-3TMT 1.66 0.96 0.54 0.12 7/16
1/8 -400-3TMT 1.80
Ax 1/4 1.06 0.60 0.19 1/2
1/4 -400-3-4TMT 1.98
A
5/16 1/8 -500-3TMT 1.99 1.17 0.64 0.19 5/8
1/4 -600-3TMT 2.20 1.20 5/8
3/8 0.66 0.28
3/8 -600-3-6TMT 2.42 1.31 13/16
3/8 -810-3TMT 2.53 0.38
1/2 1.42 0.90 13/16
1/2 -810-3-8TMT 2.72 0.41
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TMT 2.88 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TMT 3.02 1.57 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TMT 45.8
6 27.0 15.3 4.8 1/2
1/4 -6M0-3-4TMT 50.3
8 1/4 -8M0-3-4TMT 55.3 29.9 16.2 6.4 5/8
1/4 -12M0-3-4TMT 64.2 7.1
12 36.0 22.8 13/16
1/2 -12M0-3-8TMT 69.0 9.5
16 1/2 -16M0-3TMT 73.1 38.0 24.4 11.9 15/16
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
 44 Tube Fittings

Tees
FITTINGS

Male Positionable Branch, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TTS)

TUBE

E F flat
SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A Ax D E➀ F Fx H U
Dimensions, in.
D 1/4 7/16-20 -400-3TTS 2.24 1.12 0.60 0.19 1/2 9/16 1.12 0.65
H
Fx flat
3/8 9/16-18 -600-3TTS 2.52 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 1.27 0.79
1/2 3/4-16 -810-3TTS 2.96 1.48 0.90 0.41 13/16 7/8 1.49 1.01
O-ring
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-3TTS 3.26 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 11/4 1.92 1.44
U
washer OD 1 1 5/16-12 -1610-3TTS 3.98 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 2.11 1.73
Ax
A 1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-3TTS 5.34 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.29 2.16
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-3TTS 6.14 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45 2.45
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in
carbon steel and stainless steel only. 2 2 1/2-12 -3200-3TTS 8.44 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 2.77 3.16
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926‑1 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
straight thread boss. straight thread end.

Positionable Branch, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TTR)

E F flat ISO
Thread Basic Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. H U
Dimensions, in.
D 1/8 -400-3TTR 2.12 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 1.04 0.60
H 1/4 0.60
Fx flat 1/4 -400-3-4TTR 2.28 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 1.27 0.80
3/8 1/4 -600-3TTR 2.40 1.20 0.66 0.23 5/8 3/4 1.27 0.80
O-ring
3/8 -810-3TTR 2.84 1.42 0.31 13/16 7/8 1.46 0.96
1/2 0.90
U 1/2 -810-3-8TTR 3.00 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.71 1.16
retainer OD
Ax
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTR 3.00 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.71 1.16
A 3/4 -1210-3TTR 0.62 1 3/8 1.92 1.43
3/4 3.14 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-8TTR 0.47 1 1/16 1.78 1.16
Tube ports are identical.
1 1 -1610-3TTR 3.86 1.93 1.23 0.78 1 3/8 1 5/8 2.11 1.92
See page 9 for thread specifications.
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTR 53.9 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 26.4 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTR 58.0 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 32.2 20.3
1/8 -8M0-3TTR 57.7 4.0 9/16 9/16 28.4 15.2
8 30.0 16.2
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTR 59.7 5.9 5/8 3/4 32.3 20.3
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTR 67.0 33.5 17.2 5.9 13/16 3/4 35.1 20.3
3/8 -12M0-3TTR 72.0 36.1 7.9 13/16 7/8 37.1 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTR 76.1 38.1 9.5 5/16 1 1/16 43.4 29.5
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the pipe/
straight thread end.

Positionable Run, SAE/MS Straight Thread (TST)

E F flat Fx flat SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering
U OD Size Number A Ax D E➀ F Fx U
washer
OD Dimensions, in.
1/4 7/16-20 -400-3TST 2.24 1.12 0.60 0.19 1/2 9/16 0.65
D
Ax O-ring 3/8 9/16-18 -600-3TST 2.53 1.26 0.66 0.28 5/8 11/16 0.79
1/2 3/4-16 -810-3TST 2.97 1.48 0.90 0.41 13/16 7/8 1.01
3/4 1 1/16-12 -1210-3TST 3.55 1.63 0.96 0.62 1 1/16 1 1/4 1.44
Ax 1 1 5/16-12 -1610-3TST 4.10 1.99 1.23 0.88 1 3/8 1 1/2 1.73
A
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -2000-3TST 4.96 2.67 1.62 1.09 1 11/16 1 7/8 2.16
SAE/MS positionable fittings are available in 1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -2400-3TST 5.45 3.07 1.97 1.34 2 2 1/8 2.45
carbon steel and stainless steel only. 2 2 1/2-12 -3200-3TST 7.04 4.22 2.66 1.81 2 3/4 2 3/4 3.16
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926‑1
straight thread boss. ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 45

Tees

FITTINGS
Male Positionable Run, ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (TRT)

TUBE
E F flat Fx flat
ISO
U Thread Basic
Dimensions
retainer Tube Size Ordering
OD OD in. Number A Ax D E➀ F, in. Fx, in. U
D Dimensions, in.
Ax O-ring 1/8 -400-3TRT 2.10 1.06 0.16 1/2 9/16 0.60
1/4 0.60
1/4 -400-3-4TRT 2.41 1.14 0.19 5/8 3/4 0.80
3/8 1/4 -600-3TRT 2.47 1.20 0.66 0.23 5/8 3/4 0.80
Ax 3/8 -810-3TRT 2.88 1.42 0.31 13/16 7/8 0.96
A 1/2 0.90
1/2 -810-3-8TRT 3.21 1.50 0.41 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
See page 9 for thread specifications. 5/8 1/2 -1010-3TRT 3.21 1.50 0.96 0.47 15/16 1 1/16 1.16
3/4 -1210-3TRT 3.49 0.62 1 3/8 1.43
3/4 1.57 0.96 1 1/16
1/2 -1210-3-8TRT 3.35 0.47 1 1/16 1.16
1 1 -1610-3TRT 4.04 1.93 1.23 0.78 1 3/8 1 5/8 1.82
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TRT 53.4 27.0 4.0 1/2 9/16 15.2
6 15.3
1/4 -6M0-3-4TRT 61.2 29.0 4.8 5/8 3/4 20.3
1/8 -8M0-3TRT 56.3 28.8 4.0 9/16 9/16 15.2
8 16.2
1/4 -8M0-3-4TRT 62.1 29.9 6.4 5/8 3/4 20.3
10 1/4 -10M0-3TRT 68.6 33.5 17.2 5.9 13/16 3/4 20.3
3/8 -12M0-3TRT 73.1 36.0 7.9 13/16 7/8 24.4
12 22.8
1/2 -12M0-3-8TRT 81.5 38.0 9.5 15/16 1 1/16 29.5
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger opening at the
pipe/straight thread end.

Female Run, NPT (TFT)

F flat NPT Basic

Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A Ax D E F, in.
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-3TFT 1.72 0.97 0.50 0.09 1/2
E
D 1/8 -400-3TFT 1.81 1.06 1/2
Ax 1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-3-4TFT 2.05 1.17 11/16
3/8 1/4 -600-3TFT 2.11 1.23 0.66 0.28 11/16
3/8 -810-3TFT 2.30 1.42 13/16
1/2 0.90 0.41
Ax 1/2 -810-3-8TFT 2.69 1.57 1 1/16
A 3/4 3/4 -1210-3TFT 3.01 1.76 0.96 0.62 1 3/8
3/4 -1610-3-12TFT 3.18 1.93 1 3/8
1 1.23 0.88
Tube ports are identical. 1 -1610-3TFT 3.61 2.11 1 11/16
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TFT 46.0 27.0 1/2
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-3-4TFT 52.1 29.8 11/16
1/8 -8M0-3TFT 48.9 29.9 5/8
8 16.2 6.4
1/4 -8M0-3-4TFT 53.0 30.6 11/16
10 1/4 -10M0-3TFT 55.9 33.5 17.2 7.9 13/16
1/4 -12M0-3-4TFT 58.4 36.0 9.5 13/16
12 3/8 -12M0-3TFT 58.4 36.0 22.8 10.3 13/16
1/2 -12M0-3-8TFT 68.3 39.8 9.5 1 1/16
16 1/2 -16M0-3TFT 68.2 39.8 24.4 12.7 1 1/16

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 46 Tube Fittings

Tees
FITTINGS

Female Branch, NPT (TTF)

TUBE

E NPT Basic
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A D E F, in. H
Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -200-3TTF 1.94 0.50 0.09 1/2 0.75
H
D F flat 1/8 -400-3TTF 2.12 1/2 0.75
1/4 0.60 0.19
1/4 -400-3-4TTF 2.34 11/16 0.88
A 1/4 -600-3TTF 2.46 11/16 0.88
3/8 3/8 -600-3-6TTF 2.62 0.66 0.28 13/16 0.88
1/2 -600-3-8TTF 2.84 1 1.12
1/4 -810-3-4TTF 2.84 13/16 0.88
1/2 3/8 -810-3TTF 2.84 0.90 0.41 13/16 0.88
1/2 -810-3-8TTF 3.06 1 1.12
5/8 1/2 -1010-3TTF 3.06 0.96 0.50 1 1.12
3/4 3/4 -1210-3TTF 3.52 0.96 0.62 1 3/8 1.25
3/4 -1610-3-12TTF 3.86 1 3/8 1.25
1 1.23 0.88
1 -1610-3TTF 4.22 1 11/16 1.50
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6M0-3TTF 53.9 1/2 19.0
6 15.3 4.8
1/4 -6M0-3-4TTF 59.5 11/16 22.4
1/8 -8M0-3TTF 59.7 5/8 19.0
8 16.2 6.4
1/4 -8M0-3-4TTF 61.2 11/16 22.4
10 1/4 -10M0-3TTF 67.0 17.2 7.9 13/16 22.4
1/4 -12M0-3-4TTF 72.0 13/16 22.4
12 3/8 -12M0-3TTF 72.0 22.8 9.5 13/16 22.4
1/2 -12M0-3-8TTF 77.7 1 28.4
16 1/2 -16M0-3TTF 77.6 24.4 12.7 1 28.4

Cross
Union Basic
Dimensions
Tube Ordering
OD Number A D E F, in.
Dimensions, in.
E 1/8 -200-4 1.76 0.50 0.09 3/8
1/4 -400-4 2.12 0.60 0.19 1/2
A
5/16 -500-4 2.34 0.64 0.25 5/8
3/8 -600-4 2.40 0.66 0.28 5/8
F flat D
1/2 -810-4 2.84 0.90 0.41 13/16
3/4 -1210-4 3.14 0.96 0.62 1 1/16
1 -1610-4 3.86 1.23 0.88 1 3/8
A
Dimensions, mm
3 -3M0-4 44.7 12.9 2.4 3/8
6 -6M0-4 53.9 15.3 4.8 1/2
8 -8M0-4 59.7 16.2 6.4 5/8
10 -10M0-4 67.0 17.2 7.9 13/16
12 -12M0-4 72.0 22.8 9.5 13/16
16 -16M0-4 74.0 24.4 12.7 15/16
18 -18M0-4 76.6 24.4 15.1 1 1/16
20 -20M0-4 89.3 26.0 15.9 1 3/8
22 -22M0-4 89.4 26.0 18.3 5/8
25 -25M0-4 98.3 31.3 21.8 1 3/8

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 47

Sanitary Flange Fittings

FITTINGS
E minimum opening

TUBE
F flat

B G

C
A

Kwik-Clamp Flange To Swagelok Tube Fitting

Tube Flange
Dimensions, in. (mm)
OD Size Ordering
in. in. Number A B C E F G
1/2 SS-400-SC-8 1.57 (39.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-400-SC-12 1.57 (39.9) 0.62 (15.7) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 0.98 (24.9)
1/4
1 SS-400-SC-16 1.57 (39.9) 0.87 (22.1) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-400-SC-24 1.75 (44.4) 1.37 (34.8) 0.60 (15.2) 0.19 (4.8) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1/2 SS-600-SC-8 1.63 (41.4) 0.37 (9.4) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-600-SC-12 1.63 (41.4) 0.62 (15.7) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/8
1 SS-600-SC-16 1.63 (41.4) 0.87 (22.1) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-600-SC-24 1.72 (43.7) 1.37 (34.8) 0.66 (16.8) 0.28 (7.1) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1/2 SS-810-SC-8 1.74 (44.2) 0.37 (9.4) 0.90 (22.9) 0.37 (9.4) 1 0.98 (24.9)
3/4 SS-810-SC-12 1.74 (44.2) 0.62 (15.7) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1 0.98 (24.9)
1/2
1 SS-810-SC-16 1.74 (44.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 13/16 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 SS-810-SC-24 1.80 (45.7) 1.37 (34.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1 SS-1610-SC-16 1.92 (48.8) 0.87 (22.1) 1.24 (31.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1 1/4 1.98 (50.3)
1
2 SS-1610-SC-32 2.50 (63.5) 1.87 (47.5) 1.24 (31.5) 0.87 (22.1) 2 3/4 2.52 (64.0)

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 48 Tube Fittings

Orifice Plate Fittings

FITTINGS
TUBE

■ Restrict flow in process and analytical systems

■ Constructed from 316 SS as standard. When ordering

E minimum an end connection in another material, the orifice plate is
opening available in the matching material.

The minimum orifice size (E dimension) that an orifice plate

can be machine-drilled to is 0.010 in. (0.3 mm). Orifice sizes
from 0.001 in. (0.03 mm) to 0.009 in. (0.23 mm) can be laser-
plate thickness: drilled.
0.060 in. (1.52 mm)
The maximum orifice size (E) that can be selected is
dependent on the tube fitting size. Please see the maximum E
dimension that can be provided for each fitting size.

Typical Ordering Number Maximum E Dimension

S S - 810-6PD-.256 Fitting Tube OD E
Dimensions, in.
Base 1/8 0.070
Ordering Number
3/16 0.117
E-dimension will be between .010 in. (0.3 mm) and maximum 1/4 0.164
E dimension for size of tube fitting.
5/16 0.211
3/8 0.258
1/2 0.352
Typical Laser-Drilled Ordering Number
5/8 0.446
S S - 810-6 PD LD - .001 3/4 0.539

Base 7/8 0.633

Orifice Size
Ordering Number Value between 0.001 in. 1 0.727
(0.03 mm) and 0.009 in. (0.23 mm). 1 1/4 0.891
1 1/2 1.090
2 1.394
Laser-drilled plate
Include when ordering orifice
sizes between 0.001 in. (0.03 mm)
and 0.009 in. (0.23 mm).
Plate Style
PD = Orifice plate assembled in tube port (if more than one,
then larger end; if tee, then on run); orifice plate is 316 SS
PK = Orifice plate assembled in tube port (if more than one,
then larger end; if tee, then on run); orifice plate same
material as body
PE = Orifice plates assembled in both tube ports on run
PF = Orifice plates assembled in one tube port on run and tube
port on branch
PG = Orifice plate assembled in one tube port on branch
PH = Orifice plates assembled in both tube ports on run and
one in branch tube port
PJ = Orifice plate assembled in one end of a pipe fitting
PL = Orifice plate assembled in smaller tube port

For special orifice fitting requirements - contact your

authorized Swagelok representative.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 49

Tube Adapters
Solve Alignment Problems and Reduce Inventories

FITTINGS
TUBE
Swagelok tube adapters can help eliminate difficult alignment problems and
100
reduce inventories. Swagelok tube adapters can be used with any Swagelok tube
50 5 150
fittings in this catalog. So, stocking union elbows and union tees in various sizes
- BW
10
and materials—along with commonly used Swagelok adapters—eliminates the
0 14
need for stocking special elbows and tees.
0 200
Typical Alignment Problem
When installing pipe elbows or tees, it is often difficult to align the fitting with the
desired run.

1. In this example, the 2. When the pipe connection

installation requires is tightened, the male elbow
connecting tubing to a points in the wrong direction
female end connection. for the desired run. Loosening
the pipe connection could
mean leakage at the pipe
thread.
Swagelok Solution
By using a Swagelok tube adapter in conjunction with a union elbow or tee, these
difficulties can be avoided.

3. Tighten the pipe 4. Connect a Swagelok union

connection of a elbow or tee to the adapter by
Swagelok male adapter tightening the Swagelok tube
into the female end fitting with a wrench, while
connection. holding the elbow or tee in the
desired direction. Insert the
tubing into the other end of the
Swagelok elbow or tee and
install the fitting.

• Swagelok tube adapters are to be used ONLY in Swagelok tube fittings.

Use in fittings made by other manufacturers may result in leakage or
slippage.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 50 Tube Fittings

Tube Adapters
FITTINGS

Male
TUBE

F flat
F flat

E E

A
A
1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm

NPT ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

NPT Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E➀ F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A E➀ F
1/8 -2-TA-1-2 1.16 7/16 Dimensions, in.
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-1-4 1.37 9/16 1/8 -2-TA-1-2RT 1.16 7/16
1/8 0.08
1/8 -3-TA-1-2 1.19 7/16 1/4 -2-TA-1-4RT 1.37 9/16
3/16 0.12
1/4 -3-TA-1-4 1.40 9/16 1/8 -4-TA-1-2RT 1.25 7/16
1/4 0.17
1/8 -4-TA-1-2 1.25 7/16 1/4 -4-TA-1-4RT 1.46 9/16
1/4 -4-TA-1-4 1.46 9/16 1/4 -6-TA-1-4RT 1.53 9/16
1/4 0.17
3/8 -4-TA-1-6 1.49 11/16 3/8 3/8 -6-TA-1-6RT 1.56 0.27 11/16
1/2 -4-TA-1-8 1.71 7/8 1/2 -6-TA-1-8RT 1.78 7/8
1/8 -5-TA-1-2 1.29 0.19 7/16 1/4 -8-TA-1-4RT 1.75 0.28 9/16
5/16
1/4 -5-TA-1-4 1.50 0.22 9/16 1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6RT 1.78 0.37 11/16
1/8 -6-TA-1-2 1.32 0.19 7/16 1/2 -8-TA-1-8RT 2.00 0.37 7/8
1/4 -6-TA-1-4 1.53 0.27 9/16 3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12RT 2.06 0.58 1 1/16
3/8
3/8 -6-TA-1-6 1.56 0.27 11/16 1 1 -16-TA-1-16RT 2.60 0.80 1 3/8
1/2 -6-TA-1-8 1.78 0.27 7/8
Dimensions, mm
1/4 -8-TA-1-4 1.75 0.28 9/16
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2RT 32.8 12
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6 1.78 0.37 11/16 6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4RT 38.1 14
1/2 -8-TA-1-8 2.00 0.37 7/8
8 1/4 -8-MTA-1-4RT 39.1 5.6 14
5/8 1/2 -10-TA-1-8 2.06 0.47 7/8
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4RT 39.9 14
1/2 -12-TA-1-8 0.47 7/8 10 7.1
3/4 2.06 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6RT 40.6 18
3/4 -12-TA-1-12 0.58 1 1/16
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4RT 46.5 7.1 16
3/4 -16-TA-1-12 2.31 0.62 1 1/16
1 12 3/8 -12-MTA-1-6RT 46.2 8.8 18
1 -16-TA-1-16 2.60 0.80 1 3/8
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8RT 51.8 8.8 22
1 1/4 1 1/4 -20-TA-1-20➁ 3.16 1.02 1 3/4
1 -28-MTA-1-16RT➁ 74.7 22.2 35
1 1/2 1 1/2 -24-TA-1-24➁ 3.72 1.25 2 1/8 1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RT➁ 76.2 22.5 46
28
2 2 -32-TA-1-32➁ 4.70 1.72 2 3/4 1 B-28-MTA-1-16RT 68.6 22.2 1 3/8 in.
Dimensions, mm 1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RT 70.1 22.6 45
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2 32.8 12 30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RT➁ 80.0 24.3 46
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4 38.1 14 32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RT➁ 81.0 26.5 46
1/4 -8-MTA-1-4 39.1 14 38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RT➁ 92.2 31.6 55
8 5.6
3/8 -8-MTA-1-6 39.9 19
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4 39.9 14 have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
10 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6 40.6 7.1 18 ➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
1/2 -10-MTA-1-8 46.2 22
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4 46.5 7.1 16
12
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8 52.1 8.8 22
1 -28-MTA-1-16➁ 74.7 22.2 35
1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20➁ 76.2 22.5 46
28
1 B-28-MTA-1-16 68.6 22.2 1 3/8 in.
1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20 70.1 22.6 45
1 -30-MTA-1-16➁ 79.2 22.2 41
30
1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20➁ 80.0 24.3 46
32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20➁ 81.0 26.5 46
38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24➁ 92.2 31.6 55
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 51

Tube Adapters
SWAGELOK MALE TUBE ADAPTER ISO PARALLEL THREADS (RP) CUTAWAY-MS-01-140 C-PH-1061A-DIM

FITTINGS
Male

TUBE
F flat F flat
F flat

E E E

A
A A
1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm

ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 60. ISO/BSP parallel gaskets are available. See page 60.

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RS) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP)

ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A E➀ F OD in. Number A E➀ F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/8 -2-TA-1-2RS 1.25 9/16 1 -28-MTA-1-16RP➁ 72.7 19.8 41
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-1-4RS 1.43 3/4 1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RP➁ 77.3 22.5 50
28
1/8 -4-TA-1-2RS 1.35 0.16 9/16 1 B-28-MTA-1-16RP 65.8 19.8 1 5/8 in.
1/4
1/4 -4-TA-1-4RS 1.53 0.17 3/4 1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RP 71.1 22.6 50
1/4 -6-TA-1-4RS 1.59 0.23 3/4 30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RP➁ 81.1 24.3 50
3/8
3/8 -6-TA-1-6RS 1.62 0.27 7/8 32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RP➁ 82.1 26.5 50
1/4 -8-TA-1-4RS 1.85 0.23 3/4 38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RP➁ 94.5 31.8 55
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-1-6RS 1.88 0.31 7/8
1/2 -8-TA-1-8RS 1.96 0.37 1 1/16 ➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12RS 2.20 0.58 1 5/16
➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.
1 1 -16-TA-1-16RS 2.59 0.80 1 5/8
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6-MTA-1-2RS 34.3 4.0 14
6
1/4 -6-MTA-1-4RS 38.9 4.1 19
8 1/4 -8-MTA-1-4RS 39.6 5.6 19
1/4 -10-MTA-1-4RS 40.4 5.9 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-1-6RS 41.1 7.1 22
1/2 -10-MTA-1-8RS 43.2 7.1 27
1/4 -12-MTA-1-4RS 47.0 5.9 19
12 3/8 -12-MTA-1-6RS 47.8 7.9 22
1/2 -12-MTA-1-8RS 49.8 8.8 27
1/2 -18-MTA-1-8RS 51.3 11.9 27
18
3/4 -18-MTA-1-12RS 55.9 13.9 35
1 -28-MTA-1-16RS➁ 71.9 19.8 41
1 1/4 -28-MTA-1-20RS➁ 75.4 22.5 50
28
1 B-28-MTA-1-16RS 65.8 19.8 1 5/8 in.
1 1/4 B-28-MTA-1-20RS 69.3 22.6 50
30 1 1/4 -30-MTA-1-20RS➁ 79.8 24.3 50
32 1 1/4 -32-MTA-1-20RS➁ 80.8 26.5 50
38 1 1/2 -38-MTA-1-24RS➁ 91.9 31.6 55
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 52 Tube Fittings

Tube Adapters
FITTINGS

Male
TUBE

F flat
O-ring F flat
F flat O-ring
O-ring

E E E

A
A
A

1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm See page 22 for mounting dimensions.
Adapts to SAE J1926/1 and ISO 11926-1 straight thread boss.

SAE/MS Straight Thread (ST) O-Seal (SAE/MS Straight Thread)

SAE/MS Basic SAE/MS Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Thread Ordering Tube Thread Ordering
OD Size Number A E➀ F OD Size Number A E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
1/8 5/16-24 -2-TA-1-2ST 1.20 0.08 7/16 1/8 5/16-24 -2-TA-1-OR 1.28 0.08 9/16
1/4 7/16-20 -4-TA-1-4ST 1.39 0.17 9/16 3/16 3/8-24 -3-TA-1-OR 1.38 0.12 5/8
7/16-20 -6-TA-1-4ST 1.46 0.20 9/16 1/4 7/16-20 -4-TA-1-OR 1.54 0.17 3/4
3/8 9/16-18 -6-TA-1-6ST 1.52 0.27 11/16 5/16 1/2-20 -5-TA-1-OR 1.64 0.22 7/8
3/4-16 -6-TA-1-8ST 1.60 0.27 7/8
3/8 9/16-18 -6-TA-1-OR 1.70 0.27 15/16
9/16-18 -8-TA-1-6ST 1.74 0.28 11/16
1/2 1/2 3/4-16 -8-TA-1-OR 1.95 0.37 1 1/8
3/4-16 -8-TA-1-8ST 1.82 0.37 7/8
5/8 7/8-14 -10-TA-1-10ST 1.94 0.47 1
3/4 1 1/16-12 -12-TA-1-12ST 2.10 0.58 1 1/4
1 1 5/16-12 -16-TA-1-16ST 2.41 0.80 1 1/2
1 1/4 1 5/8-12 -20-TA-1-20ST➁ 2.81 1.02 1 7/8
1 1/2 1 7/8-12 -24-TA-1-24ST➁ 3.28 1.25 2 1/8
2 2 1/2-12 -32-TA-1-32ST➁ 4.23 1.72 2 3/4
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may
have a larger opening at the pipe/straight thread end.
➁ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.

F flat
37°

AN Thread

AN
Tube Basic
Dimensions
Tube Flare Thread Ordering
OD Size Size Number A E➀ F
Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 7/16-20UNJF-3 -4-TA-1-4AN 1.46 0.17 1/2
1/4 7/16-20UNJF-3 -6-TA-1-4AN 1.53 0.17 1/2
3/8
3/8 9/16-18UNJF-3 -6-TA-1-6AN 1.56 0.27 5/8
1/2 1/2 3/4-16UNJF-3 -8-TA-1-8AN 1.91 0.37 13/16
3/4 3/4 1 1/16-12UNJ-3 -12-TA-1-12AN 2.21 0.58 1 1/8
1 1 1 5/16-12UNJ-3 -16-TA-1-16AN 2.58 0.80 1 3/8
➀ The E dimension is the minimum nominal opening. These fittings may have a larger
opening at the pipe/straight thread end.

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 53

Tube Adapters

FITTINGS
Male Pipe Weld

TUBE
37.5° Pipe Basic
Dimensions
Tube Weld Ordering
OD Size Number A E J
E J Dimensions, in.
1/4 1/4 -4-TA-1-4W 1.14 0.17 0.540
3/8 1/2 -6-TA-1-8W 1.46 0.27 0.840
A
1/2 -8-TA-1-8W 1.66 0.840
1/2 0.37
3/4 -8-TA-1-12W 1.68 1.050
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-1-12W 1.87 0.58 1.050
Wall thickness at weld end is based on schedule 80 pipe.

Female
F flat
F flat

E E

A
A

1 in./25 mm and under Over 1 in./25 mm

NPT ISO/BSP Tapered Thread (RT)

NPT Basic ISO
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Thread Basic
OD in. Number A E F Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
Dimensions, in. OD in. Number A E F
1/8 -2-TA-7-2 1.24 9/16 Dimensions, in.
1/8 0.08
1/4 -2-TA-7-4 1.39 3/4 1/8 -4-TA-7-2RT 1.30 9/16
1/4 0.17
3/16 1/4 -3-TA-7-4 1.41 0.12 3/4 1/4 -4-TA-7-4RT 1.45 3/4
1/8 -4-TA-7-2 1.30 9/16 1/4 -6-TA-7-4RT 1.50 3/4
3/8 0.27
1/4 -4-TA-7-4 1.46 3/4 3/8 -6-TA-7-6RT 1.59 7/8
1/4 0.17
3/8 -4-TA-7-6 1.55 7/8 1/4 -8-TA-7-4RT 1.71 3/4
1/2 -4-TA-7-8 1.79 1 1/16 1/2 3/8 -8-TA-7-6RT 1.80 0.37 7/8
5/16 1/4 -5-TA-7-4 1.48 0.22 3/4 1/2 -8-TA-7-8RT 2.05 1 1/16
1/8 -6-TA-7-2 1.35 9/16 Dimensions, mm
1/4 -6-TA-7-4 1.50 3/4 6 1/8 -6-MTA-7-2RT 33.0 4.1 14
3/8 0.27
3/8 -6-TA-7-6 1.59 7/8 8 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4RT 37.6 5.6 19
1/2 -6-TA-7-8 1.84 1 1/16
10 1/4 -10-MTA-7-4RT 38.1 7.1 19
1/4 -8-TA-7-4 1.71 3/4
1/2 3/8 -8-TA-7-6 1.79 0.37 7/8
1/2 -8-TA-7-8 2.05 1 1/16
5/8 1/2 -10-TA-7-8 2.09 0.47 1 1/16
1/2 -12-TA-7-8 2.08 1 1/16
3/4 3/4 -12-TA-7-12 2.16 0.58 1 5/16
1 -12-TA-7-16 2.30 1 5/8
3/4 -16-TA-7-12 2.39 1 5/16
1 0.80
1 -16-TA-7-16 2.53 1 5/8
1 1/4 1 1/4 -20-TA-7-20➀ 3.06 1.02 2 1/8
1 1/2 1 1/2 -24-TA-7-24➀ 3.50 1.25 2 3/8
2 2 -32-TA-7-32➀ 4.23 1.72 2 7/8
Dimensions, mm
1/8 -6-MTA-7-2 32.5 14
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4 37.1 19
8 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4 37.6 5.6 19
1/4 -10-MTA-7-4 38.1 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-7-6 40.1 7.1 22
1/2 -10-MTA-7-8 46.7 27
1/4 -12-MTA-7-4 43.7 19
12 8.8
1/2 -12-MTA-7-8 52.3 27
➀ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules. Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.
 54 Tube Fittings

Tube Adapters
FITTINGS

Female
TUBE

F flat F flat

ISO/BSP parallel gaskets ISO/BSP parallel gaskets

E and O‑rings are available. E and O‑rings are available.
See page 60. See page 60.

A A

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RP) ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RG, Gauge)

ISO ISO
Thread Basic Thread Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A E F OD in. Number A E F
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
1/8 1/8 -2-TA-7-2RP 1.17 0.08 9/16 1/4 1/4 -4-TA-7-4RG 1.39 0.17 3/4
1/8 -4-TA-7-2RP 1.25 9/16 3/8 3/8 -6-TA-7-6RG 1.55 0.26 15/16
1/4 0.17
1/4 -4-TA-7-4RP 1.50 3/4 1/2 1/2 -8-TA-7-8RG 1.80 0.28 1 1/16
1/4 -6-TA-7-4RP 1.55 3/4 Dimensions, mm
3/8 0.27
3/8 -6-TA-7-6RP 1.57 15/16
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4RG 35.3 19
3/8 -8-TA-7-6RP 1.78 15/16 6 3/8 -6-MTA-7-6RG 38.4 4.1 24
1/2 0.38
1/2 -8-TA-7-8RP 2.02 1 1/16 1/2 -6-MTA-7-8RG 42.9 27
Dimensions, mm 1/4 -8-MTA-7-4RG 33.0 5.5 19
1/8 -6-MTA-7-2RP 32.0 14 8 3/8 -8-MTA-7-6RG 38.9 5.6 24
6 4.1
1/4 -6-MTA-7-4RP 37.8 19 1/2 -8-MTA-7-8RG 43.7 5.6 27
12 1/2 -12-MTA-7-8RP 49.8 8.8 27 1/4 -10-MTA-7-4RG 34.5 5.5 19
10 3/8 -10-MTA-7-6RG 36.1 6.5 24
1/2 -10-MTA-7-8RG 41.1 7.1 27
1/4 -12-MTA-7-4RG 40.1 5.5 19
F flat 12 3/8 -12-MTA-7-6RG 44.7 6.5 24
1/2 -12-MTA-7-8RG 48.8 7.0 27
ISO/BSP parallel thread
(RJ) fittings are available in 16 1/2 -16-MTA-7-8RG 49.0 7.0 27
E stainless steel only. 18 1/2 -18-MTA-7-8RG 49.3 7.0 27
ISO/BSP parallel gaskets
and O‑rings are available.
See page 60.
A
74° F flat

ISO/BSP Parallel Thread (RJ)

ISO
Thread
Dimensions
Tube Size Ordering
OD in. Number A E F AN Thread
Dimensions, in.
AN
1/4 1/4 SS-4-TA-7-4RJ 1.39 0.17 3/4 Tube Basic
3/8 3/8 SS-6-TA-7-6RJ 1.55 0.26 15/16 Tube Flare Ordering
1/2 1/2 SS-8-TA-7-8RJ 1.94 0.28 1 1/16 OD Size Number F
Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in.
1/4 SS-6-MTA-7-4RJ 35.3 19 1/8 -200-A-2ANF 3/8
1/8
6 3/8 SS-6-MTA-7-6RJ 38.6 4.1 24 1/4 -200-A-4ANF 9/16
1/2 SS-6-MTA-7-8RJ 42.9 27 1/4 1/4 -400-A-4ANF 9/16
1/4 SS-8-MTA-7-4RJ 33.0 5.5 19 3/8 3/8 -600-A-6ANF 11/16
8 3/8 SS-8-MTA-7-6RJ 39.4 5.6 24 1/2 1/2 -810-A-8ANF 7/8
1/2 SS-8-MTA-7-8RJ 43.7 5.6 27
3/4 3/4 -1210-A-12ANF 1 1/4
1/4 SS-10-MTA-7-4RJ 34.5 5.5 19
10 3/8 SS-10-MTA-7-6RJ 36.1 6.5 24
1/2 SS-10-MTA-7-8RJ 41.1 7.1 27
1/4 SS-12-MTA-7-4RJ 40.1 5.5 19
12 3/8 SS-12-MTA-7-6RJ 44.7 6.5 24
1/2 SS-12-MTA-7-8RJ 48.8 7.0 27

Refer to Installation Instructions, beginning on page 69.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 55

Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube fitting ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.

FITTINGS
TUBE
SS
A - 2 0 D
B C 0 - 1
E - 2
F RT
G
SS - 2 0 0 - 1 - 2 RT
A Material C Series F Second End Connection Size
A = Aluminum 0 =Fractional 1/16 to 3/8 in. and Add a size designator from the list at
B = Brass 1 1/4 to 2 in. left for the second end connection or if
HC = Alloy C-276 1 = Fractional 1/2 to 1 1/8 in. the fitting is a reducing union.
INC = Alloy 600 3 = HC 3/4 in. and 1 in. with
M = Alloy 400 advanced geometry ferrules G Second End Connection Type
S = Carbon steel M = Millimeter tube size Add a second end connection type
SS = 316 stainless steel To order a female Swagelok tube fitting, add F. designator as needed.
6ELT = High-temperature Example: SS-1F0-1-1. AN =37° male AN flare
316 stainless steel ANF =37° female AN flare
D Component
T = PTFE BT =Bored-through fitting
TI = Titanium 0 = Fitting F =Female thread
6MO = 6-Moly 1 = Body KN =Knurled nut, nylon ferrules
625 = Alloy 625 E Fitting Type KT =Knurled nut, PTFE ferrules
825 = Alloy 825 1 = Male connector M =Metric tube end
2507 = Alloy 2507 2 = 90° male elbow OR =O-seal connection
3 = Tee, union PR =ISO/BSP positionable parallel
4 = Cross, union pipe thread
B Size (Tube OD)
5 = 45° male elbow RG =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
Fractional, in. Metric, mm
6 = Union (gauge)
1 = 1/16 2 = 2
7 = Female connector RJ =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
2 = 1/8 3 = 3
8 = Female elbow (Japanese gauge)
3 = 3/16 4 = 4
9 = Elbow, union RP =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
4 = 1/4 6 = 6
11 = Bulkhead male connector RS =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
5 = 5/16 8 = 8
61 = Bulkhead union RT =ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread
6 = 3/8 10 = 10
71 = Bulkhead female connector ST =Straight thread with O-ring
8 = 1/2 12 = 12
A = Adapter (for SAE/MS)
10 = 5/8 14 = 14
C = Cap W =Male pipe weld/tube socket
12 = 3/4 15 = 15
P = Plug weld
14 = 7/8 16 = 16
16 = 1 18 = 18 PC = Port connector
18 = 1 1/8 20 = 20 R = Reducer
20 = 1 1/4 22 = 22 R1 = Bulkhead reducer
24 = 1 1/2 25 = 25 2R = Reducing elbow
32 = 2 28 = 28 TFT = Tee, female run
32 = 32 TMT = Tee, male run
38 = 38 TRT =Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male
50 = 50 positionable run
TST =Tee, straight thread with
O‑ring male positionable run
TTF = Tee, female branch
TTM = Tee, male branch
TTR =Tee, ISO/BSP parallel male
positionable branch
TTS =Tee, straight thread with
O‑ring male positionable
branch

Tees and Crosses Additional Sizes and Materials

Ordering numbers for tees and crosses 4 Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for
indicate first the size of the run (1 to 2) information about additional sizes and special alloys.
and then the size of the branch (3 for
tees and 3 to 4 for crosses). 1 2
Example: S
 S-6M0-3-4TTF for a 316 SS
female tee for 6 mm tube with
1/4 in. female NPT branch
3
 56 Tube Fittings

Additional Ordering Information

Swagelok tube adapter ordering numbers follow the sequence shown below.
FITTINGS
TUBE

SS
A - B
2 - TA
C - D
1 - E
4 RT
F
SS - 2 - TA - 1 - 4 RT
A Material C Component E Second End Connection Size
A = Aluminum TA = Fractional tube adapter Add a size designator from the list at
B = Brass MTA = Metric tube adapter left for the second end connection.
HC = Alloy C-276
INC = Alloy 600 D Adapter Type F Second End Connection Type
M = Alloy 400 1 = Male adapter Add a second end connection type
S = Carbon steel 7 = Female adapter designator as needed.
SS = 316 stainless steel AN =37° male AN flare
6ELT = High-temperature ANF =37° female AN flare
316 stainless steel RG =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
T = PTFE (gauge)
TI = Titanium RJ =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
6MO = 6-Moly (Japanese gauge)
625 = Alloy 625 RP =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
825 = Alloy 825 RS =ISO/BSP parallel pipe thread
2507 = Alloy 2507 RT =ISO/BSP tapered pipe thread
ST =Straight thread with O-ring
(for SAE/MS)
B Size (Tube OD) W =Male pipe weld/tube socket
Fractional, in. Metric, mm weld
1 = 1/16 2 = 2
2 = 1/8 3 = 3
3 = 3/16 4 = 4
4 = 1/4 6 = 6
5 = 5/16 8 = 8
6 = 3/8 10 = 10
8 = 1/2 12 = 12
10 = 5/8 14 = 14
12 = 3/4 15 = 15
14 = 7/8 16 = 16
16 = 1 18 = 18
18 = 1 1/8 20 = 20
20 = 1 1/4 22 = 22
24 = 1 1/2 25 = 25
32 = 2 28 = 28
32 = 32
38 = 38
50 = 50
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 57

Replacement Parts
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 14.

FITTINGS
TUBE
Nuts Female
G flat
Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number G L OD Number G L
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
L
1/16 -102-1 5/16 0.31 2 -2M2-1 12 11.9
1/8 -202-1 7/16 0.47 3 -3M2-1 12 11.9
3/16 -302-1 1/2 0.47 4 -4M2-1 12 11.9
1/4 -402-1 9/16 0.50 6 -6M2-1 14 12.7
5/16 -502-1 5/8 0.53 8 -8M2-1 16 13.5
3/8 -602-1 11/16 0.56 10 -10M2-1 19 15.1
1/2 -812-1 7/8 0.69 12 -12M2-1 22 17.4
5/8 -1012-1 1 0.69 14 -14M2-1 25 17.4
3/4 -1212-1 1 1/8 0.69 15 -15M2-1 25 17.4
7/8 -1412-1 1 1/4 0.69 16 -16M2-1 25 17.4
1 -1612-1 1 1/2 0.81 18 -18M2-1 30 17.4
1 1/4 -2002-1 1 7/8 1.25 20 -20M2-1 32 17.4
1 1/2 -2402-1 2 1/4 1.50 22 -22M2-1 32 17.4
2 -3202-1 3 2.06 25 -25M2-1 38 20.6
-28M2-1 46 30.6
28
B-28M2-1 45 20.6
30 -30M2-1 50 32.7
32 -32M2-1 50 34.4
38 -38M2-1 60 40.6
50 -50M2-1 3 in. 52.3

G flat
Knurled Female
The Swagelok knurled nut tube fitting provides a leak-tight seal without the
use of inserts on most wall thicknesses of polyethylene tubing. Inserts may be
required for larger sizes.
L
To set the ferrules on the tubing, initial connections must be made with a
wrench, tightening the nut one and one-quarter turns from finger-tight (three-
quarter turn for 1/16, 1/8 and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm fittings). Leak-tight
connections may be reassembled with finger-tight assembly.
To order a knurled nut, add K to the female nut basic ordering number.
Example: B-402-1K
To order a knurled nut on an assembled fitting with nylon ferrules, add KN to
the fitting ordering number.
Example: SS-400-1-2KN
To order a knurled nut on an assembled fitting with PTFE ferrules, add KT to
the fitting ordering number.
Example: SS-400-1-2KT

Male
G flat
Basic Basic
Dimensions Dimensions
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number G L OD Number G L
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
L
1/16 -1F2-1GC 1/4 0.38 10 -10MF2-1 22 22.1
1/8 -2F2-1GC 3/8 0.53 12 -12MF2-1 24 22.1
For use in female Swagelok
end connections. 1/4 -4F2-1 1/2 0.62
1/2 -8F2-1 15/16 0.87
 58 Tube Fittings

Replacement Parts
SWAGELOK FRONT FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140 C-PH-0056-BDM
To order, add a material designator from the How to Order table on page 14.
FITTINGS
TUBE

SWAGELOK BACK FERRULE CUTAWAY-MS-01-140 C-PH-0056-ADM

Ferrules

Front Back
Basic Basic Basic Basic
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
OD Number OD Number OD Number OD Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
1/16 -103-1 2 -2M3-1 1/16 -104-1 2 -2M4-1
1/8 -203-1 3 -3M3-1 1/8 -204-1 3 -3M4-1
3/16 -303-1 4 -4M3-1 3/16 -304-1 4 -4M4-1
1/4 -403-1 6 -6M3-1 1/4 -404-1 6 -6M4-1
5/16 -503-1 8 -8M3-1 5/16 -504-1 8 -8M4-1
3/8 -603-1 10 -10M3-1 3/8 -604-1 10 -10M4-1
1/2 -813-1 12 -12M3-1 1/2 -814-1 12 -12M4-1
5/8 -1013-1 14 -14M3-1 5/8 -1014-1 14 -14M4-1
3/4 -1213-1 15 -15M3-1 3/4 -1214-1 15 -15M4-1
7/8 -1413-1 16 -16M3-1 7/8 -1414-1 16 -16M4-1
1 -1613-1 18 -18M3-1 1 -1614-1 18 -18M4-1
1 1/4 -2003-1➀ 20 -20M3-1 1 1/4 -2004-1➀ 20 -20M4-1
1 1/2 -2403-1➀ 22 -22M3-1 1 1/2 -2404-1➀ 22 -22M4-1
2 -3203-1➀ 25 -25M3-1 2 -3204-1➀ 25 -25M4-1
➀ Over 1 in. and over 28 -28M3-1➀ ➀ Over 1 in. and over 28 -28M4-1➀
25 mm stainless steel 30 -30M3-1➀ 25 mm stainless steel 30 -30M4-1➀
front ferrules are PFA back ferrules are PFA
coated. To order silver- 32 -32M3-1➀ coated. To order back 32 -32M4-1➀
plated front ferrules, add 38 -38M3-1➀ ferrules without PFA 38 -38M4-1➀
-BL to the basic ordering coating, add -WC to the
number. 50 -50M3-1➀ basic ordering number. 50 -50M4-1➀
Example: SS-2003-1BL Example: SS-2004-1WC
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 59

Replacement Parts

FITTINGS
Nut-Ferrule Set and Ferrule Set

TUBE
Use of Nuts and Ferrules
Using Swagelok nuts and ferrules on tube fittings or valves with tube end connections
requires critical interaction of precision parts.
Swagelok nuts and ferrules are sold as replacement parts for use with only Swagelok
bodies, fittings, valves, and hose products.
Sets are shown with arbors. One arbor holds five nut-ferrule sets or ten ferrule sets.

Nut-Ferrule Set Ferrule Set

The nut-ferrule set contains one nut, one back ferrule, and The ferrule set contains one front ferrule and one back ferrule.
one front ferrule. To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number.
To order, add a material designator to the basic ordering number. Please order ferrule sets in multiples of ten.
Please order nut-ferrule sets in multiples of five. Example: SS-100-SET
Example: SS-400-NFSET

Material Designator Tube Basic Material Designator Tube Basic

Brass B OD Ordering Number Alloy 400 M OD Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, in.
Carbon steel S Aluminum A
1/4 -400-NFSET 1/16 -100-SET
316 stainless Brass B
SS 3/8 -600-NFSET 1/8 -200-SET
steel Carbon steel S
1/2 -810-NFSET 3/16 -300-SET
Nylon NY
Dimensions, mm 1/4 -400-SET
PTFE T
6 -6M0-NFSET 5/16 -500-SET
316 stainless
8 -8M0-NFSET SS 3/8 -600-SET
steel
10 -10M0-NFSET 1/2 -810-SET
12 -12M0-NFSET Dimensions, mm
6 -6M0-SET
8 -8M0-SET
10 -10M0-SET
Nut-Ferrule Package and Ferrule-Pak Package 12 -12M0-SET
To order the nut-ferrule package (50 nut-ferrule sets) or ferrule-pak package (100 front
and back sets), contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service representative.

Nut-Ferrule Package Ferrule-Pak Package

 60 Tube Fittings

Replacement Parts
FITTINGS

ISO/BSP Parallel Gaskets

TUBE

Steel and Stainless Steel ISO

(RS Fitting) Thread Ordering Number
RS fitting steel Gasket Size, in. RS Gasket➀ RSD Gasket➁ RSNB Gasket
gaskets provide 1/8 S-2-RS-2V SS-2-RSD-2V 304L-2-RSNB-2
a seal with male 1/4 S-4-RS-2V➂ SS-4-RSD-2V 304L-4-RSNB-2
RS/RSD ISO/BSP parallel 3/8 S-6-RS-2V➂ SS-6-RSD-2V 304L-6-RSNB-2
Gasket
threads. 1/2 S-8-RS-2V➂ SS-8-RSD-2V 304L-8-RSNB-2
The RS gasket is 3/4 S-12-RS-2V SS-12-RSD-2V 304L-12-RSNB-2
of a fluorocarbon 1 S-16-RS-2V SS-16-RSD-2V 304L-16-RSNB-2
FKM inner ring bonded to a carbon 1 1/4 S-20-RS-2V SS-20-RSD-2V 304L-20-RSNB-2
steel outer ring. 1 1/2 S-24-RS-2V SS-24-RSD-2V 304L-24-RSNB-2
The RSD (DIN-style) gasket is a ➀ Also available with a Buna inner ring. To order, replace V with B
fluorocarbon FKM inner ring bonded to in the ordering number.
a stainless steel or carbon steel outer Example: S -2-RS-2B
➁ Also available with a carbon steel outer ring. To order, replace
ring as recommended in ISO 1179-1973. SS with S in the ordering number.
It can be used with end connections Example: S-8-RSD-2V
designed in accordance with DIN 3852 ➂ Also available with a stainless steel outer ring. To order, replace
Part 2. S with SS in the ordering number.
Example: SS-8-RS-2V
The RSNB gasket is an all-metal
304L stainless steel gasket similar to
RSNB DIN 7603 form D.
Gasket

Copper (RP and RS Fitting) ISO

The RP and RS Gasket Thread Ordering
fitting copper Size, in. Number
gasket provides 1/8 CU-2-RP-2
a seal with male 1/4 CU-4-RP-2
ISO/BSP parallel 3/8 CU-6-RP-2
threads. 1/2 CU-8-RP-2
3/4 CU-12-RP-2
1 CU-16-RP-2
1 1/4 CU-20-RP-2
1 1/2 CU-24-RP-2

Copper and Nickel Gasket PTFE (RJ Fitting)

(RG, Gauge Fitting) The RJ fitting PTFE gasket provides
The RG fitting gasket provides a seal with ISO/BSP parallel male
a seal on pressure gauges equipped threads.
with ISO/BSP parallel male threads.
ISO
ISO Thread Ordering
Thread Ordering Number Size, in. Number
Size, in. Copper Nickel Regular Gaskets
1/4 CU-4-RG-2 NI-4-RG-2 1/4 T-4-RJ-2
3/8 CU-6-RG-2 NI-6-RG-2 3/8 T-6-RJ-2
1/2 CU-8-RG-2 NI-8-RG-2 1/2 T-8-RJ-2
Thick Gaskets
1/4 T-4-RJ-2-T
3/8 T-6-RJ-2-T
1/2 T-8-RJ-2-T

Contact your authorized Swagelok representative for gasket dimensions.

 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 61

Replacement Parts

FITTINGS
O-Rings

TUBE
Buna N Buna N
(O-Seal Straight Threads) (O-Seal Pipe Threads)
O-ring hardness is 70 durometer. O-ring hardness is 70 durometer.

Thread Uniform NPT/ISO Uniform

Size Size Ordering Pipe Size Size Ordering
in. Number Number in. Number Number
5/16-24 011 BN-70-OR-011 1/8 013 BN-70-OR-013
3/8-24 012 BN-70-OR-012 1/4 113 BN-70-OR-113
7/16-20 013 BN-70-OR-013 3/8 116 BN-70-OR-116
1/2-20 112 BN-70-OR-112 1/2 118 BN-70-OR-118
9/16-18 113 BN-70-OR-113
3/4-16 116 BN-70-OR-116
1 1/16-12 121 BN-70-OR-121
1 5/16-12 125 BN-70-OR-125

Fluorocarbon FKM Fluorocarbon FKM

(Positionable Fittings, (SAE/MS Straight Threads)
ISO/BSP Parallel Threads) O-ring hardness is 90 durometer.
O-ring hardness is 90 durometer.
SAE/MS
ISO Thread Uniform
Thread Uniform Size Size Ordering
Size Size Ordering in. Number Number
in. Number Number 5/16-24 902 FCBR-90-OR-902
1/8 502➀ FSP-90-OR-502 3/8-24 903 FCBR-90-OR-903
1/4 111 FCBR-90-OR-111 7/16-20 904 FCBR-90-OR-904
3/8 113 FCBR-90-OR-113 1/2-20 905 FCBR-90-OR-905
1/2 508➀ FCBR-90-OR-508 9/16-18 906 FCBR-90-OR-906
3/4 119 FCBR-90-OR-119 3/4-16 908 FCBR-90-OR-908
1 217 FCBR-90-OR-217 7/8-14 910 FCBR-90-OR-910
➀ Not a uniform O-ring size. 1 1/16-12 912 FCBR-90-OR-912
1 3/16-12 914 FCBR-90-OR-914
1 5/16-12 916 FCBR-90-OR-916
1 5/8-12 920 FCBR-90-OR-920
1 7/8-12 924 FCBR-90-OR-924
2 1/2-12 932 FCBR-90-OR-932
 62 Tube Fittings

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS

Hydraulic Swaging Units

TUBE

Swagelok hydraulic swaging units preswage Swagelok ferrules onto tubing prior to
assembly and provide Swagelok tube fitting connections that are 100 % gaugeable
upon initial installation. Multihead hydraulic and air-actuated hydraulic swaging units:
■ Place no initial strain on fitting body threads or on body seal surfaces
■ Are available with interchangeable fractional and metric tooling
■ Fit neatly in a rugged plastic carrying case
■ Reduce assembly and installation time and operator error.

Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU)

■ Is available in two unit sizes, with
tooling for:
■ 1/2 to 1 in. and 12 to 25 mm tubing
and tube adapters
■ 1 to 2 in. and 25 to 50 mm tubing
■ Must be used to install 1 1/4, 1 1/2,
and 2 in. and 28, 30, 32, 38, and
50 mm Swagelok tube fittings
■ Is standard with a tube marking
feature to indicate when tube is
properly bottomed in the unit
■ Is available with a support base (as
MHSU Unit Components Tooling Kit Components
shown). See Ordering Information,
page 63. ■ Multihead hydraulic swaging unit ■ Die head sets for Swagelok tube
■ Hydraulic hose—2 ft (0.6 m) with all fitting sizes:
The MHSU cannot be used for units except 1 in./25 mm and over ■ Fractional, up to 1 in.—1/2, 5/8, 3/4,
Alloy 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under unit without support base, which 7/8, and 1 in.
or for medium-pressure tubing. contains 6 ft (1.8 m) hose ■ Fractional, 1 in. and over—1, 1 1/4,
For 5/8 and 3/4 in. alloy 2507 tubing, ■ Retaining ring pliers 1 1/2, and 2 in.
order the 1 in./25 mm and over unit
■ Safety glasses ■ Metric, up to 25 mm—12, 14, 15,
and alloy 2507 tooling kit and gap
inspection gauges. ■ Operating instructions 16, 18, 20, 22, and 25 mm
■ Carrying case ■ Metric, 25 mm and over—25, 28,
30, 32, and 38 mm
Recommended Minimum Wall Thickness of Tubing for use with the MHSU ■ 50 mm tooling available separately
■ Gap inspection gauges
Swagelok Tube Fittings Swagelok Tube Fittings
■ Chamfer block (up to 1 in./25 mm
Steel, Stainless Steel, Steel, Stainless Steel,
Alloy 400 Alloy (C-276, Alloy 400 Alloy (C-276,
sizes only)
Grade 2 600, 6-moly, Grade 2 600, 6-moly,
Titanium 825 and 625) Titanium 825 and 625) Technical Data
Tooling Tooling
Size Tubing Wall Size Tubing Wall ■ Dimensions—MHSU case
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm 22 in. (55.9 cm) high, 24 in. (61.0 cm)
1/2 0.049 12 wide, 8.75 in. (22.2 cm) deep
5/8 14 1.5 ■ Weight
0.065
3/4 15 1.5 Up to 1 in./25 mm MHSU in case with
0.065
7/8 16 tooling kit and support base—40 lb
1.8 (18.1 kg)
1 0.083 18
1 1/4 20 1 in./25 mm and over MHSU in case
0.083 0.095 with tooling kit and support base—
1 1/2 22 2.0 2.0
55 lb (24.9 kg)
2 0.095 0.109 25
■ Construction
Use of tubing below the 28
High-strength stainless steel tooling
recommended minimum wall 30 2.2
for durability and corrosion resistance
thickness may result in the tube 32 2.2
sticking in the die head. 38 See next page for Ordering Information.
2.5
50
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 63

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS
Hydraulic Swaging Units

TUBE
MHSU Ordering Information Accessories Tooling Kits
Select an ordering number. Additional and replacement gap Up to 1 in./25 mm
inspection gauges are available. See
Ordering Numbers
page 67. Tube Ordering
See the table below for replacement OD Number
MHSU Unit
retaining rings, pliers, and chamfer Dimensions, in.
Up to 1 in./
MS-MHSU-U-E blocks. 1/2 MS-MHSUT-U-810-M
25 mm sizes
1 in./25 mm 5/8 MS-MHSUT-U-1010-M
MS-MHSU-O-E
and over sizes 3/4 MS-MHSUT-U-1210-M
MHSU Unit Ordering Number
MHSU Unit with Tooling Kit 7/8 MS-MHSUT-U-1410-M
Fractional Retaining Ring
MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M 1 MS-MHSUT-U-1610-M
up to 1 in. sizes Up to 1 in./
MS-MHSU-N5000-200-H
Fractional 1 in. 25 mm sizes Alloy 2507 Tubing
MS-MHSU-O-E-FKIT-M 1 in./25 mm
and over sizes 5/8 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1010-M
MS-MHSU-N5000-315-H
Metric up to and over sizes
MS-MHSU-U-E-MKIT-M 3/4 MS-MHSUT-O-2507-1210-M
25 mm sizes Retaining Ring Pliers
Dimensions, mm
Metric 25 to Up to 1 in./
MS-MHSU-O-E-MKIT-M MS-MHSU-0504 12 MS-MHSUT-U-12M0-M
38 mm➀ sizes 25 mm sizes
➀ 50 mm tooling available separately. 1 in./25 mm 14 MS-MHSUT-U-14M0-M
MS-MHSU-0700
and over sizes 15 MS-MHSUT-U-15M0-M
Support Base 16 MS-MHSUT-U-16M0-M
Add -B to the ordering number. 18 MS-MHSUT-U-18M0-M
Chamfer Ordering
Examples: MS-MHSU-U-E-B Blocks Number 20 MS-MHSUT-U-20M0-M
MS-MHSU-U-E-FKIT-M-B in. 22 MS-MHSUT-U-22M0-M
1/2 MS-CB-810 25 MS-MHSUT-U-25M0-M
Operating Instructions
5/8 MS-CB-1010
MHSU ordering numbers include 1 in./25 mm and Over
English-language instructions. For 3/4 MS-CB-1210
other languages, visit swagelok.com. 7/8 MS-CB-1410 Tube Ordering
1 MS-CB-1610 OD Number
mm Dimensions, in.
See the Swagelok Multihead Hydraulic 1 MS-MHSUT-O-1610-M
12 MS-CB-12M0
Swaging Unit (MHSU) Setup and 1 1/4 MS-MHSUT-O-2000-M
Operating Instructions, MS‑12‑37, for 14 MS-CB-14M0
15 MS-CB-15M0 1 1/2 MS-MHSUT-O-2400-M
information about using the MHSU.
16 MS-CB-16M0 2 MS-MHSUT-O-3200-M
18 MS-CB-18M0 Dimensions, mm
20 MS-CB-20M0 25 MS-MHSUT-O-25M0-M
22 MS-CB-22M0 28 MS-MHSUT-O-28M0-M
25 MS-CB-25M0 30 MS-MHSUT-O-30M0-M
32 MS-MHSUT-O-32M0-M
38 MS-MHSUT-O-38M0-M
50 MS-MHSUT-O-50M0-M
 64 Tube Fittings

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS

Hydraulic Swaging Units

TUBE

Air-Actuated
Hydraulic Swaging Unit (AHSU)
■ Requires only one unit with
interchangeable tooling to swage
1/4 to 1/2 in. and 6 to 12 mm
Swagelok tube fitting ferrule sizes
■ Requires no threading of nut on or off
the tooling

The AHSU cannot be used for

alloy 2507 tubing or for medium-
pressure tubing.

AHSU Unit Components

■ Air-actuated hydraulic swaging unit
■ Hex key
■ Adapter plates—for tube fittings
smaller than 1/2 in. or 12 mm
AHSU Ordering Information High-Volume Swaging Unit (HVSU)
■ Safety glasses
Select an ordering number. The Swagelok
■ Gap inspection gauges
high-volume
■ Operating instructions swaging unit
Ordering Numbers
■ Carrying case (HVSU) is
AHSU Unit
designed to
AHSU only MS-AHSU-E
Tooling Kit Components easily preswage
AHSU Unit with Tooling Kit a Swagelok nut
■ Die head sets and gap inspection
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 in. and ferrules
gauges for Swagelok tube fitting sizes: MS-AHSU-E-FKIT
sizes onto stainless steel tubing. The
■ Fractional—1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. 6, 8, 10, 12 mm
MS-AHSU-E-MKIT pneumatically driven and electronically
■ Metric—6, 8, 10, and 12 mm sizes
controlled semiautomatic unit uses
sensors to start and stop the process
Technical Data Tooling Kits for consistent preswaging results.
■ Dimensions—AHSU case
Tube Ordering Refer to High-Volume Swaging Unit
19 in. (48.3 cm) high, 15.5 in. (39.4 cm) OD Number catalog, MS‑02‑441, for additional
wide, 7.5 in. (19.0 cm) deep information.
Dimensions, in.
■ Weight 1/4 MS-AHSUT-400-1
AHSU in case with tooling kit—28 lb 3/8 MS-AHSUT-600-1
(12.7 kg) 1/2 MS-AHSUT-810-1
■ Power requirements
Dimensions, mm
20 to 70 psig (1.4 to 4.8 bar) 6 MS-AHSUT-6M0-1
regulated shop air, depending on 8 MS-AHSUT-8M0-1
fitting size and material
10 MS-AHSUT-10M0-1
■ Construction
12 MS-AHSUT-12M0-1
High-strength stainless steel
tooling for durability and corrosion Operating Instructions
resistance
AHSU ordering numbers include
■ Air inlet port English-language instructions. For
1/4 in. Swagelok tube fitting other languages, visit swagelok.com.

Accessories
Additional and replacement gap
inspection gauges are available. See
page 67.

Refer to Air-Actuated Hydraulic

Swaging Unit (AHSU) Setup and
Operating Instructions, MS‑12‑38, for
information about using the AHSU.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 65

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS
Preswaging Tools

TUBE
For Swagelok tube fitting installations in close
quarters, the Swagelok preswaging tool is a
convenient accessory.

Features
■ Preswages ferrules onto the tube
■ Enables the installer to work in a more open, safe area
■ Makes it possible to complete the installation by following
retightening instructions for Swagelok tube fittings

A gaugeable preswaging tool is available in the

following sizes: 1/4, 3/8, 1/2, and 5/8 inch and 6,
10, 12, and 16 mm. The gaugeable feature allows
the installer to quickly measure the gap between
the nut and the fitting body with a standard
Swagelok gap gauge during initial installation.
The gaugeable preswage tool is distinguished
from the standard tool by the addition of a
colored band located between the wrench pad
and the Swagelok tube fitting end.

Tube Ordering Tube

OD Number OD Ordering Number
Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
Female Nut Female Nut
1/16 MS-ST-100 3 MS-ST-3M0
1/8 MS-ST-200 4 MS-ST-4M0
3/16 MS-ST-300 6➀ MS-ST-6M0
1/4➂ MS-ST-400 8 MS-ST-8M0
5/16 MS-ST-500 10➀ MS-ST-10M0
3/8➂ MS-ST-600 12➀ MS-ST-12M0
1/2➂ MS-ST-810 14 MS-ST-14M0
5/8➀➂ MS-ST-1010 15 MS-ST-15M0
5/8 (alloy 2507) MS-ST-2507-1010 16➀ MS-ST-16M0
3/4➀ MS-ST-1210 18 MS-ST-18M0
3/4 (alloy 2507) MS-ST-2507-1210 20 MS-ST-20M0
7/8 MS-ST-1410 22 MS-ST-22M0
1 MS-ST-1610 25 MS-ST-25M0
Male Nut ➀ For gaugeable preswage tool,
use the preswaging tool for the
1/16 MS-ST-1F0 appropriate tube OD and with GA
1/4 (medium- added to the end of the ordering
MS-ST-4FK0 number.
pressure)
3/8 (medium-
MS-ST-6FK0
pressure)
1/2➁ MS-ST-8F0
1/2 (medium-
MS-ST-8FK0
pressure)
➀ For alloy 2507 tubing, use the preswaging tool
for the appropriate tube OD and with 2507 in
the ordering number.
➁ For medium-pressure tubing, use the
preswaging tool for the appropriate tube OD
and with FK0 in the ordering number.
➂ For gaugeable preswage tool, use the
preswaging tool for the appropriate tube OD
and with GA added to the end of the ordering
number.
 66 Tube Fittings

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS

Wrenches
TUBE

Tee Wrench Ratchet Wrench

The tee wrench provides positive backup support when The ratchet wrench is designed for use on Swagelok nuts for
installing Swagelok union tees and crosses. fitting installation.

Features Features
■ Allows user to hold fitting body firmly and precisely ■ 11 fractional and metric sizes are available.
■ Is available in a variety of sizes ■ 1/12 turn ratchet facilitates use in close quarters.
■ Fits and carries easily in tool box, pouch, or belt ■ Heavy-duty construction includes:
■ Head and handle constructed of stainless steel ■ heat-treated, black oxide-plated steel handle
■ Features a cushioned vinyl grip and generous gripping area ■ black-oxide plated steel jaws
for handle ■ stainless steel spring and fasteners.
■ Holds tee in various orientations

Ordering Information Ordering Information

For Swagelok Gaugeable Union Tees and Crosses Tube Ordering Wrench
OD Number Length
Tube OD Ordering Number Tee Cross
1/4 in. and 6 mm MS-TW-4 ✓ ✓ Dimensions, in.
1/8 MS-RW-200
5/16 and 3/8 in. and 8 mm MS-TW-6 ✓ ✓ 5.38
3/16 MS-RW-300
10 mm MS-TW-10M ✓ ➀
1/4 MS-RW-400
1/2 in. and 12 mm MS-TW-8 ✓ ✓
5/16 MS-RW-500 7.25
➀ Use MS-TW-8 on 10 mm Swagelok crosses.
3/8 MS-RW-600
1/2 MS-RW-810 10.1
Dimensions, mm
3 MS-RW-3M0 136
6 MS-RW-6M0
8 MS-RW-8M0 184
10 MS-RW-10M0
12 MS-RW-12M0 257

Ratchet Wrench Pouch

A heavy-duty pouch is available for
holding up to six Swagelok ratchet
wrenches.
Ordering Number: MS-RWP
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 67

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS
Gap Inspection Gauges

TUBE
Swagelok gap inspection gauges assure the installer or
inspector that the fitting has been sufficiently pulled up
on initial installation, whether using a Swagelok multihead
hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU), page 62, or air-actuated
hydraulic swaging unit (AHSU), page 64, or wrench
tightening. All metal Swagelok tube fittings are gaugeable,
with the exception of a few forged bodies in aluminum.

For Installation Using the AHSU For Installation Using a Wrench

Fitting Size Fitting Size Ordering

in. mm Ordering Number in. mm Number
Female Nut Female Nut
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 — MS-AHSU-IG-468 1/16 — MS-IG-100
— 6, 8, 10, 12 MS-AHSU-IG-612M 1/8 2, 3 MS-IG-200
3/16 4 MS-IG-300
For Installation Using the MHSU 1/4 6 MS-IG-400
1/4, 3/8, 1/2 6, 12 MS-IG-468
Fitting Size
1/4, 1/2 6, 8, 10, 12 MS-IG-612M
in. mm Ordering Number
5/16 8 MS-IG-500
Female Nut
1/2➀ 12 MS-MHSU-IG-810 3/8 — MS-IG-600
5/8➁ 14, 15, 16 MS-MHSU-IG-1010 — 10 MS-IG-10M0
5/8 (alloy 2507) — MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1010 1/2 12 MS-IG-810
3/4➁ 18 MS-MHSU-IG-1210 5/8 14, 15, 16 MS-IG-1010
3/4 (alloy 2507) — MS-MHSU-IG-2507-1210 5/8 (alloy 2507) — MS-IG-2507-1010
7/8 20, 22 MS-MHSU-IG-1410 3/4 18 MS-IG-1210
1 25 MS-MHSU-IG-1610-1 3/4 (alloy 2507) — MS-IG-2507-1210
28 MS-MHSU-IG-28M0-1 7/8 20, 22 MS-IG-1410
—
30 MS-MHSU-IG-30M0-1
1 25 MS-IG-1610
1 1/4 — MS-MHSU-IG-2000-2
Male Nut
— 32 MS-MHSU-IG-32M0-1
1/16 — MS-IG-1F0
— 38 MS-MHSU-IG-38M0-1
1/8 2, 3 MS-IG-2F0
1 1/2 — MS-MHSU-IG-2400-1
1/4, 3/8, 1/2
— 50 MS-MHSU-IG-50M0-1
(medium- — MS-IG-FK0
2 — MS-MHSU-IG-3200-1 pressure)
➀ The MHSU cannot be used for alloy 2507 tubing 1/2 in. and under
or for medium-pressure tubing.
➁ For 5/8 and 3/4 in. alloy 2507 tubing, order the 1 in. (25 mm) and
over unit and alloy 2507 tooling and gauge.

Depth Marking Tools

Swagelok depth
Tube Ordering Tube Ordering
marking tools help OD Number OD Number
ensure that tubing Dimensions, in. Dimensions, mm
is bottomed on the
1/4 MS-DMT-400 6 MS-DMT-6M0
shoulder inside
3/8 MS-DMT-600 8 MS-DMT-8M0
the Swagelok tube
1/2 MS-DMT-810 10 MS-DMT-10M0
fitting body.
5/8 MS-DMT-1010 12 MS-DMT-12M0
3/4 MS-DMT-1210 16 MS-DMT-16M0
7/8 MS-DMT-1410 18 MS-DMT-18M0
1 MS-DMT-1610
 68 Tube Fittings

Tools and Accessories

FITTINGS

Bulkhead Retainers "U" drive

TUBE

screw
(included) “U” drive screw
By using the bulkhead retainer,
one person can tighten the jam F E Bulkhead retainer
nut on side A for initial bulkhead
Bulkhead fitting installation
fitting installation. Now tubing utilizing bulkhead retainer
can be connected to side A and B A
by one person with one wrench,
Side A Side B
because the bulkhead retainer Jam Body
D nut hex
acts as a backup wrench.
B 1/8 in.

Dimensions, in. “U”

Fitting Drill Drive
Size Ordering Hole Screw Drill
in. mm Number A B D E F Dia Size Number
1/16 — SS-102-61F 3/8 5/16 5/16 5/32
1/8 — SS-202-61F 1/2 1/2 13/32 7/32
3/16 3, 4 SS-302-61F 9/16 9/16 15/32 1/4
1/4 6 SS-402-61F 5/8 5/8 1/2 9/32 5/32 0.120 6-3/8 31
5/16 — SS-502-61F 11/16 11/16 9/16 5/16
— 8 SS-8M2-61F 11/16 18 mm 9/16 5/16
3/8 — SS-602-61F 3/4 3/4 5/8 11/32
— 10 SS-10M2-61F 15/16 22 mm 3/4 13/32
1/2 12 SS-812-61F 15/16 15/16 3/4 13/32
5/8 15, 16 SS-1012-61F 1 1 1/16 13/16 13/32
7/32 0.144 10-1/2 27
3/4 18 SS-1212-61F 1 1/16 1 3/16 29/32 15/32
7/8 — SS-1412-61F 1 1/8 1 5/16 1 1/32 17/32
1 — SS-1612-61F 1 9/32 1 5/8 1 5/32 9/16

Inserts for Soft Plastic Tubing Basic

Tube Tube Bore Ordering
ID of OD ID ID Number
bore
Dimensions, in.
Tube Tube 3/16 1/8 0.09 -305-2
ID OD
1/8 0.09 -405-2
1/4 0.17 0.11 -405-170
Swagelok inserts help secure soft plastic tubing being used 3/16 0.14 -405-3
with standard Swagelok tube fittings. To determine the 1/8 0.09 -505-2
correct size of the Swagelok insert to be used, check both 5/16 3/16 0.12 -505-3
outside diameter and inside diameter of the plastic tubing. 1/4 0.19 -505-4
For a complete line of hose connectors for soft plastic 3/16 0.12 -605-3
3/8
tubing, refer to Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing catalog, 1/4 0.19 -605-4
MS‑01‑180. 1/4 0.19 -815-4
1/2
3/8 0.31 -815-6
Ordering Information 3/8 0.31 -1015-6
Material Designator 5/8
Add the insert material 1/2 0.44 -1015-8
Alloy 400 M
designator to the basic 1/2 0.44 -1215-8
Aluminum A 3/4
ordering number. 5/8 0.56 -1215-10
Brass B
Example: B-305-2 1 3/4 0.69 -1615-12
Carbon steel S
Dimensions, mm
Stainless steel SS
6 4 2.8 -6M5-4M
8 6 4.4 -8M5-6M
10 8 6.4 -10M5-8M
8 6.4 -12M5-8M
12
10 8.3 -12M5-10M
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 69

Gaugeability
On initial installation, the Swagelok gap inspection gauge

FITTINGS
TUBE
assures the installer or inspector that a fitting has been
sufficiently tightened.

Position the Swagelok gap inspection gauge next to the gap between the nut and body.

If the gauge will not enter the gap, the If the gauge will enter the gap,
fitting is sufficiently tightened. additional tightening is required.

• Always depressurize a system before adjusting the

tightness of a tube fitting connection.

Installation Instructions
Swagelok tube fittings 1 in./25 mm and smaller can be installed quickly, easily, and reliably with simple hand tools.
Over 1 in./25 mm sizes require use of a hydraulic swaging unit to swage the ferrules onto the tubing.

Safety Precautions Tubing Considerations

■ Do not bleed system by loosening fitting nut or fitting plug. ■ Metal tubing material should be softer than fitting material.
■ Do not assemble or tighten fittings when system is For example, stainless steel tubing should not be used with
pressurized. brass fittings.
■ Make sure that the tubing rests firmly on the shoulder of the ■ When tubing and fittings are made of the same material,
tube fitting body before tightening the nut. tubing must be fully annealed.
■ Use the correct Swagelok gap inspection gauge to ensure ■ Always use an insert with extremely soft or pliable plastic
sufficient pull-up upon initial installation. tubing.
■ Always use proper thread sealants on tapered pipe ■ Extremes of wall thickness should always be checked
threads. against the suggested minimum and maximum wall
thickness limitations.
■ Do not mix materials or fitting components from various
manufacturers—tubing, ferrules, nuts, and fitting bodies. ■ Surface finish is very important to proper sealing. Tubing
with any kind of depression, scratch, raised portion, or
■ Never turn fitting body. Instead, hold fitting body and turn
other surface defect will be difficult to seal, particularly in
nut.
gas service.
■ Avoid unnecessary disassembly of unused fittings.
■ Tubing that is oval and will not easily fit through fitting nuts,
■ Use only long reducers in female Swagelok end ferrules, and bodies should never be forced into the fitting.
connections.
Refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107, for additional
See the instructions starting on the next page for installation information about tubing selection.
of Swagelok tube fittings, O-seal male connectors, caps and
plugs, port connectors, tube adapters, positionable elbows and
tees, weld fittings, depth marking tool, and preswaging tool.
 70 Tube Fittings

Installation Instructions
FITTINGS

Swagelok Tube Fittings Up to 1 in./25 mm

TUBE

These instructions apply both to traditional fittings and to fittings with the advanced back-ferrule geometry.
Safe practices and proper installation are imperative to the performance of the Swagelok tube fitting, especially in critical
applications.
For 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 and 1 in.; 16, 18, 20, 22 and 25 mm tube fittings, in all materials except for aluminum and brass, it is a best practice
to preswage the ferrules onto the tube using a Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU) to lower installation time and
increase ease of installation (see Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU), Setup and Operating Instructions, MS-12-37).

Fully insert the tube into the fitting and Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position. While holding the fitting body steady,
against the shoulder; rotate the nut tighten the nut one and one-quarter
finger-tight. turns to the 9 o’clock position.
High-pressure applications and high For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
safety-factor systems: Further tighten 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the nut only
the nut until the tube will not turn by three-quarters turn to the 3 o’clock
hand or move axially in the fitting. position.
Swagelok Tube Fittings Over 1 in./25 mm
1. Preswage the ferrules onto the surface of the front ferrule. 5. While holding the fitting body
tube using a Swagelok multihead 3. Insert the tube with preswaged steady, tighten the nut one-half
hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU). ferrules into the fitting until the turn to the 12 o’clock position.
2. Apply the lubricant packaged front ferrule seats against the fitting Use the Swagelok MHSU gap
with the fitting lightly to the body body; rotate the nut finger-tight. inspection gauge to ensure that the
threads and the rear surface of the 4. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock fitting has been tightened sufficiently.
back ferrule. For gas service also position.
apply lightly to the front angled

Reassembly—All Sizes
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok tube fittings many times.
• Always depressurize the system before disassembling a Swagelok tube fitting.

Prior to disassembly, mark the tube at Insert the tube with preswaged ferrules While holding the fitting body steady,
the back of the nut; mark a line along into the fitting until the front ferrule rotate the nut with a wrench to the
the nut and fitting body flats. seats against the fitting body. previously pulled-up position, as
Use these marks to ensure that you Over 1 in./25 mm sizes: If needed, indicated by the marks on the tube
return the nut to the previously pulled- reapply lubricant lightly to the body and flats. At this point, you will feel
up position. threads and the rear surface of the a significant increase in resistance.
back ferrule. Tighten the nut slightly.

• Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with reassembled fittings.
O-Seal Male Connectors
1. Turn the O-seal connector into the female end until it is finger-tight.
2. Tighten the O-seal connector until it makes metal-to-metal contact with the
face of the female end.
3. Tighten slightly with a wrench.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 71

Installation Instructions

FITTINGS
Caps and Plugs

TUBE
Caps Plugs
See Swagelok tube While holding fitting body steady, tighten the plug one-quarter turn from
fitting installation and the finger-tight position.
reassembly, page 70. For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-eighth turn.
For over 1 in./25 mm tube fittings, tighten the plug one-quarter turn.
• Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge with plug assemblies.
Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok plugs many times. Make subsequent
connections by slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.

Port Connectors
Connect the machined ferrule end before connecting the tube adapter end.
Machined Ferrule End Tube Adapter End
1. Remove the nut and ferrules from the Swagelok end 5. Insert the tube adapter until it rests firmly on the shoulder

KOLEGAWS
connection. Discard the ferrules. of the Swagelok tube fitting body. Finger-tighten the nut.
SWAGELOK

SWAGELOK

KOLEGAWS
Discard

Over 1 in./25 mm sizes: Remove and discard the nut


SWAGELOK
and ferrules from the end connection, then insert the
tube adapter.
2. Slip the nut over 6. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position. While holding
the machined fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and one-quarter
ferrule end of the turns to the 9 o’clock position.
SWAGELOK

port connector.
Over 1 in./25 mm

sizes: The nut is 1 in./25 mm
preassembled on and under Over 1 in./25 mm
12
SWAGELOK

the port connector.

3. Insert the port 9
connector into the
3
SWAGELOK

end connection
and finger-tighten 6
the nut.
4. While holding
fitting body steady,
tighten the nut
one-quarter turn.
For 1/16, 1/8, and

3/16 in.; 2, 3, and
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings,
4 mm tube fittings,
tighten the nut three-quarters turn to the 3 o’clock
tighten the nut
position.
one-eighth turn.
For preswaged over 1 in./25 mm and over tube fittings,
• Do not use the tighten the nut one-half turn to the 12 o’clock position.
Swagelok gap
inspection gauge • Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge
with machined with preswaged tube adapter connections over
ferrule ends. 1 in./25 mm.

Reassembly Reassembly
You may disassemble and reassemble Swagelok port See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 70.
connectors many times. Make subsequent connections by
slightly tightening with a wrench after snugging the nut by hand.
 72 Tube Fittings

Installation Instructions
FITTINGS

Positionable Elbows and Tees

TUBE

1. Turn the positionable end into the female fitting until the metal backup washer
contacts the face of the fitting.
2. Turn the positionable end out of the female fitting (not more than one turn) until
Lock nut Backup the Swagelok tube fitting end is positioned properly.
washer 3. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the lock nut until the metal backup
washer contacts the face of the fitting.

Tube Adapters
Safe practices and proper installation are imperative to the performance of the Swagelok tube fitting, especially in critical
applications.

For 5/8, 3/4, 7/8 and 1 in.; 16, 18, 20, 22 and 25 mm tube fittings, in all materials except for aluminum and brass, it is a best
practice to preswage the ferrules onto the tube adapter using a Swagelok multihead hydraulic swaging unit (MHSU) to lower
installation time and increase ease of installation (see Multihead Hydraulic Swaging Unit (MHSU), Setup and Operating
Instructions, MS-12-37).
Fig. 1 Fig. 2

Female pipe port

on existing equipment

Up to 1 in./25 mm Over 1 in./25 mm

1. Install the end opposite the tube adapter end (Fig. 1). Swagelok tube adapters over 1 in./
2. Insert the tube adapter into the Swagelok tube fitting. Make 25 mm are furnished with nuts and preswaged ferrules.
sure that the tube adapter rests firmly on the shoulder of the To assemble, follow steps 2 through 5 of the Swagelok tube
tube fitting body and that the nut is finger-tight (Fig. 2). fittings over 1 in./25 mm assembly instructions, page 70.
3. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock position.
• Do not use the Swagelok gap inspection gauge
4. While holding fitting body steady, tighten the nut one and with preswaged tube adapter connections over
one-quarter turns to the 9 o’clock position. 1 in./25 mm.
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3, and 4 mm tube fittings,
Reassembly
tighten the nut only three-quarters turn to the 3 o’clock
position. See Swagelok tube fitting reassembly, page 70.

AN Thread Swivel Nut

Reassembly instructions:
12 12 12 12 There are a maximum of 10 re-assemblies per SAE J514.
1. Prior to disassembly, mark a line along the AN swivel nut
9 9 9 9
and male AN body, parallel with the axis of the assembly.
3 3 3 3 2. For reassembly, rotate the nut with a wrench to the
6 6 6 6
previously pulled-up position, as indicated by the marks
on the AN swivel nut and male AN body. At this point, you
will feel a significant increase in resistance. Tighten the
Note: Swagelok nut and ferrules removed from
nut slightly.
the illustration for clarity.
Note: For carbon steel fittings, reassemble the nut to
1. Thread the AN swivel nut of the female AN assembly finger-tight, then tighten to torque per SAE J514.
onto the male AN body until it is finger-tight.
2. Mark a line along the AN swivel nut and male AN body,
parallel with the axis of the assembly, at the 6 o’clock
position.
3. Hold the male AN body steady and tighten the AN swivel
nut with a wrench one-quarter turn past finger tight, to
the 9 o’clock position.
Note: For carbon steel fittings, assemble nut to finger-
tight, then tighten to torque per SAE J514, Hydraulic
Tube Fittings.
 Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings 73

Installation Instructions

FITTINGS
Weld Fittings

TUBE
Welding Precautions for Swagelok Tube Fittings with Weld End Connections
1. Remove the nut and ferrules. 5. Complete the weld.
2. Turn a Swagelok tube fitting plug or another nut onto the 6. Remove the plug or nut and replace the nut and ferrules.
fitting so that it is finger-tight. This protects the threads
and sealing components. • Caution: When welding carbon steel fittings, the heat
often removes the protective oil from the threads.
3. Provide a suitable heat sink to dissipate the heat.
It is important to apply another lubricant, such as
4. Tack weld at four positions 90° apart to hold the fitting in Goop™ thread lubricant.
place and to ensure alignment and concentricity of the
components.

Depth Marking Tool

Fig. 1 Fig. 2 1. Insert cleanly cut, fully deburred of the fitting body (Fig. 2). Rotate
tube into the depth marking tool the nut finger-tight. If any portion of
(DMT) until the tube is against the the mark on the tube can be seen
shoulder of the tool. Using a pen above the fitting nut, the tube is not
or pencil, mark the tube at the top fully inserted into the fitting.
of the DMT (Fig. 1). 3. While holding the fitting body
2. Remove the tube from the DMT steady, follow Swagelok tube
and insert it into the Swagelok fitting installation instructions,
fitting until it is against the shoulder page 70.

Preswaging Tool
Fig. 1 1. Install the Swagelok nut and 7. Remove the tube with preswaged
ferrules onto the preswaging tool. ferrules from the preswaging tool.
2. Insert the tube into the preswaging If the tube sticks in the preswaging
tool. tool, remove the tube by gently
rocking it back and forth. Do not
3. Make sure that the tube rests firmly
turn the tube (Fig. 2).
on the shoulder of the preswaging
tool body and that the nut is finger- 8. Insert the tube with preswaged
tight. ferrules into the fitting until the front
Fig. 2 ferrule seats against the fitting body.
4. Mark the nut at the 6 o’clock
position. 9. While holding the fitting body
steady, rotate the nut with a
5. While holding the preswaging tool
wrench to the previously pulled-up
steady, tighten the nut one and
position; at this point, you will feel
one-quarter turns to the 9 o’clock
a significant increase in resistance.
position.
Fig. 3 10. Tighten the nut slightly (Fig. 3).
For 1/16, 1/8, and 3/16 in.; 2, 3,
and 4 mm tube fittings, tighten the • Do not use the Swagelok gap
nut only three-quarters turn to the inspection gauge with fittings
3 o’clock position (Fig. 1). that were assembled using the
6. Loosen the nut. preswaging tool.
 74 Tube Fittings

Tubing Tools and Tubing Products

Accessories Swagelok offers a wide variety of
FITTINGS
TUBE

For tube benders, tube preparation tubing products.

tools, and tube support systems, Contact your authorized
refer to Tubing Tools and Swagelok representative or
Accessories catalog, MS‑01‑179. see these Swagelok catalogs
for more information:
■ Stainless Steel Seamless Tubing, Fractional, Metric, and
Imperial Sizes catalog, MS‑01‑181
■ Ultrahigh-Purity and High-Purity Stainless Steel Tubing,
Fractional, Metric, and Imperial Sizes catalog, MS-01-182
Leak Detectors, Lubricants,
and Sealants
For liquid leak detectors, lubricants,
and sealants, refer to Leak Detectors,
Lubricants, and Sealants catalog,
MS‑01‑91.

• WARNING
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or
components not governed by industrial design
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end
connections, with those of other manufacturers.
MS-01-140, RevAE, February 2021
 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Warranty Information
Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Life- Swagelok, Cajon, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Colleting,
IGC, Kenmac, Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO,
time Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your VCR, Ultra-Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
authorized Swagelok representative. 15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Safe Product Selection Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
When selecting a product, the total system design must Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
responsibilities of the system designer and user. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
• WARNING Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
components not governed by industrial design Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
connections, with those of other manufacturers. Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
© 2021 Swagelok Company
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 1
www.swagelok.com

O ne -Pie ce Instr ume ntation Ball Valve s

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

40 G Se r ie s a nd 40 Se r ie s
■ On-off, switching, and crossover flow paths

■ Working pressures up to 3000 psig (206 bar)

■ Temperatures from –65 to 300°F (–53 to 148°C)

■ Environmental and heated-process applications

■ 1/16 to 3/4 in. and 3 to 12 mm end connections

 2 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves

Contents Swagelok one-piece instrumentation ball valves have been well
accepted and widely used in a variety of industries for many years.
Swagelok® Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . 2
Both the original Swagelok 40 series and the newer 40G series
Important Information About valves accommodate a wide range of actuator, flow path, and handle
Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves . . . . . . . . . 2 options, as well as offer ease of packing adjustment while inline.
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
40G Series and 40 Series Comparison
Materials of Construction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Valve Series
Pressure-Temperature Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Feature 41G, 42G, 43G 41, 42 43 44, 45
On-Off (2-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Valve
Stainless
Brass, steel,
Body Stainless steel
Switching (3-Way) Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 alloy 400 brass,
Materials
alloy 400
Switching (5-Way and 7-Way) PTFE, PFA➀➂,
Valves (40 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 PTFE,
Packing Modified PTFE Modified
PFA➀, or PTFE or PFA➀
Materials or UHMWPE PTFE➀➁, or
Crossover (4-Way and 6-Way) V UHMWPE➀
UHMWPE➀
alves (40 Series) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Working
Up to 3000 (206), depending on valve size.
Pressure
Flow Data at 70°F (20°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 See page 5.
psig (bar)
Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Modified PTFE
40G / 40
SERIES

PTFE packing:
BALL

packing
Low Fugitive Emissions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 50 to 150
–65 to 300
(10 to 65)
(–53 to 148)
Cleaning and Packaging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 Temperature Live-loaded
Rating Live-loaded
Handle Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 PFA Modified
°F (°C) UHWMPE PFA or Live-loaded
PTFE, or
packing UHWMPE PFA packing:
Vent Port and Stem Extension Options . . . . . . . 15 UHWMPE
–65 to 150 packing: –65 to 150
packing:
(–53 to 65) –65 to 150 (–53 to 65)
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 –65 to 150
(–53 to 65)
(–53 to 65)
Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Flow
Coefficients 0.08 to 2.4 0.05 to 2.4 0.70 to 2.4 1.5 to 12
ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . 19 (Cv)
Options for Pneumatic Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 End
1/16 to 3/8 in.; 3/8 to 3/4 in.;
Connection
3 to 8 mm 8 to 12 mm
Electric Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Sizes
On-off (2-way); On-off
Process Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
switching (2-way);
Service Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23 On-off (2-way); (3-way, 5-way switching
Flow
switching and 7-way); (3-way and
Patterns
Flow Path Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 (3-way) crossover 5‑way);
(4-way and crossover
Ordering Multiple Options and Accessories . . . . 28 6-way) (4-way)
➀ Live-loaded PFA and UHMWPE packing materials. See 40T and 40E Series for
Low-Temperature Service, page 3.
➁ For 2-way, 3-way, 4-way, and 5-way valves.
➂ For 6-way and 7-way valves.
Important Information About Swagelok Instrumentation Ball Valves
■ Service instructions are shipped with each
• Swagelok ball valves are ■ 41G and 42G series valves require an
designed to be used in a 40G series and 40 series valve. 8 mm deep-well socket and 43G series
fully open or fully closed ■ 40G and 40 series valves are factory tested valves require a 9 mm deep-well socket to
position. with nitrogen at 1000 psig (69 bar), or the adjust the packing bolt.
rated pressure if lower than 1000 psig ■ 41 and 42 series valves require a 3/8 in.
• Valves that have not been (69 bar). open-ended wrench; 44 series valves
cycled for a period of time
■ 40 series valve packing must be readjusted require a 1/2 in. open-ended wrench; and
may have a higher initial
for service at higher than test pressure. 45 series valves require a 5/8 in. open-
actuation torque.
■ See page 12 for standard production
ended wrench to adjust the packing bolt.
• A packing adjustment may tests and page 23 for optional production ■ 43 series valves require an adapter
be required periodically to tests. to adjust the packing bolt. Ordering
increase service life and to number: MS-WK-43
■ Instrumentation ball valves exposed to
prevent leakage.
dynamic temperature conditions before
installation may lose their initial packing
load. Packing adjustment may be needed.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 3

Features
40G Series
Swagelok 41G, 42G, and 43G series valves easily replace original stainless steel 41, 42, and 43 series valves.
■ Equivalent dimensions
■ Comparable materials of construction
Couplings must be replaced on actuated valves. See pages 18 and 20.
Swagelok 44 and 45 series valves remain available in stainless steel; the full range of 40 series sizes is available in
brass and alloy 400.

Directional handle
with double-flat stem indicates
position of orifice.

Top-loaded, Single-piece, patent-pending

live-loaded design encapsulated packing
■ reduces need for packing ■ is constructed of modified PTFE
adjustment ■ reduces potential leak points
■ allows adjustment with the ■ does not require system pressure to
valve in-line seal
■ compensates for wear ■ has virtually no dead space

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
■ improves thermal cycle ■ allows bidirectional flow
performance. ■ is easily cleaned and purged
■ Low Emissions certification per API
Balanced-trunnion, 641 available.
patent-pending design One-piece ball stem
■ supports packing, reducing the need for packing adjustment ensures alignment of stem
■ reduces packing volume, minimizing thermal effects and orifice.
■ minimizes packing extrusion
■ improves thermal cycle performance.

40 Series
Directional handle
indicates position of orifice.

Capsule seat packing

Top-loaded design ■ is constructed of PTFE
allows adjustment with ■ does not require system pressure to
the valve in-line. make a seal
■ has virtually no dead space
■ allows bidirectional flow
One-piece ball stem
■ is easily cleaned and purged
ensures alignment of stem
■ Low Emissions certification per API
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK

and orifice.
641 available.

40T and 40E Series Directional handle

for Low-Temperature indicates position of orifice.
Service Capsule seat packing
■ is
constructed
Live-loading PFA (41, 42, 43 6-way/7-way, 44 and
packing springs 45 series sizes),
maintain load, resist Modified PTFE (43 series size) or
thermal effects. UHMWPE (41, 42 and 43 series sizes)
■ does not require system pressure to make
One-piece ball stem a seal
ensures alignment of stem ■ has virtually no dead space
SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK

and orifice. ■ allows bidirectional flow

■ is easily cleaned and purged
■ Low Emissions certification per API 641
available.
 4 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Materials of Construction 1
40G Series 2

Stainless Steel Valve Body Material 3

Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
Nylon with
1 Handle
powdered metal 300 series SS insert
2 Set screw S17400/A564 4
3 Packing bolt Powdered metal 300 series SS
4 Springs➀ S17700/A693
5 Gland Powdered metal 300 series SS 5
6 Ball stem 316 SS/A276
Modified PTFE/D1710 type 1, Grade 1, Class B
7 Packing
or UHMWPE/D4020
6
8 Side rings Powdered metal
9 Side discs 300 series SS/B783➁
10 Panel nut Powdered metal 300 series SS/B783 9
11 Body➂ 316 SS/A276 and A479 8
Wetted lubricant Silicone-based
8 7
40G / 40
SERIES

Nonwetted Molybdenum disulfide

BALL

lubricant with hydrocarbon binder coating 9

10
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ 41G and 42G series: 8 springs; 43G series: 6 springs. 11
➁ B783 specification not available on 41G and 42G series; standard on
43G series.
➂ Bodies with VCO® end connections and modified PTFE packing have
fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; bodies with VCO end connections and
UHMWPE packing have ethylene propylene O‑rings.

40 Series Valve Body Materials

Stainless Steel Brass Alloy 400
1
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
2
Nylon with brass insert (41, 42, 43 and 44 series)
1 Handle
Nylon with powdered metal 300 series SS insert (45 series)
3 3 2 Set screw S17400 SS/A564
41, 42, 43 series
44, 45 Powdered metal
series 3 Packing bolt 300 series SS or Brass CDA 360/B16 Alloy 400/B164
4 316 SS/A276, A479
5 41, 42, 45 series:
brass 260/B36;
4 Upper gland 316 SS/A240 Alloy 400/B127
43, 44 series:
6 316 SS/A240
5 Bushing PTFE/D1710
Powdered metal
6 Lower gland Brass CDA 360/B16 Alloy 400/B164
300 series SS
7 7 Upper packing PTFE/D1710
8 Ball stem 316 SS/A276 Brass CDA 360/B16➀ Alloy 400/B164
8
9 Side rings Fluorocarbon-coated Fluorocarbon-coated Fluorocarbon-coated
10 powdered metal brass alloy 400
10 Side discs 300 series SS/B783 powdered metal➀ powdered metal
9
11 Lower packing PTFE/D1710
9 11 Powdered metal Powdered metal
10 12 Panel nut Brass CDA 360/B16
300 series SS/B783 300 series SS/B783
12
316 SS/ Brass CDA
13 Body➁ Alloy 400/B164
13 A276, A479 356 or 360/B16
41, 42, 43 series: silicone-based;
Wetted lubricant
44, 45 series: silicone- and fluorinated-based
Nonwetted
Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ 4-way, 5-way, 6-way, and 7-way valves contain stainless steel stem, rings, and discs.
➁ Bodies with VCO end connections have fluorocarbon FKM O-rings.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 5

Materials of Construction
40T and 40E Series for Valve Body Materials
Low-Temperature Service
Stainless Steel Brass Alloy 400
Component Material Grade/ASTM Specification
1
1 Handle Nylon with brass insert (41, 42, 43 and 44 series)
2 Nylon with powdered metal 300 series SS insert (45 series)
2 Set screw S17400 SS/A564
3 3 Powdered metal
41, 42, 43 series 3 Packing bolt 300 series SS or Brass CDA 360/B16 Alloy 400/B164
44, 45 316 SS/A276, A479
series 4 Springs➀ Molybdenum disulfide-coated S17700 SS/A693
4 5 Gland Powdered metal 300 series SS
41T, 42T, 43T 6-way/7-way, 44T and 45T: PFA/D3307; 43T: Modified
6 Upper packing
PTFE/D1710 type 1, Grade 1, Class B; 40E: UHMWPE/D4020
7 Ball stem 316 SS/A276 and A479 Alloy 400/B164
5 40T: fluorocarbon-coated powdered metal Fluorocarbon-coated
8 Side rings
6 300 series SS/B783; alloy 400
9 Side discs 40E: 300 series powdered metal SS/B783 powdered metal
7 41T, 42T, 43T 6-way/7-way, 44T and 45T: PFA/D3307; 43T: Modified
10 Lower packing
9 PTFE/D1710 type 1, Grade 1, Class B; 40E: UHMWPE/D4020

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
Powdered metal 300 Powdered metal 300
8 11 Panel nut Brass CDA 360/B16
series SS/B783 series SS/B783
8 10 12 Body➁ 316 SS/A276, A479 Brass CDA 360/B16 Alloy 400/B164
9 40T: hydrocarbon- and silicone-based➂;
11 Wetted lubricant
40E: hydrocarbon-based
12 Nonwetted
Molybdenum disulfide with hydrocarbon binder coating
lubricant
Wetted components listed in italics.
➀ 41 and 42 series—8 springs; 43 series—6 springs; 44 and 45 series—4 springs.
➁ 40T body with VCO fittings has fluorocarbon FKM O-rings; 40E body with VCO fittings has ethylene
propylene O-rings.
➂ 44T and 45T—hydrocarbon-based and silicone- and fluorinated-based.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
The 40G series valve is designed for thermal cycling in both environmental and heated-process applications.
Ratings shown below apply to on-off (2-way) and switching (3-way) valves. Ratings for switching (5-way and 7-way) and
crossover (4-way and 6-way) valves are shown on pages 10 and 11, respectively.
Temperature ratings are limited to 150°F (65°C) max with UHMWPE packing.

Valve Series 40G 40 40T and 40E

Live-Loaded PFA (41T, 42T, 43T 6-way/7-
way, 44T and 45T Series) Live-Loaded
Modified PTFE Modified PTFE (43T Series) Live-Loaded
Packing Material UHMWPE➀ PTFE UHMWPE (40E Series)➀
41, 42 41, 42
(Straight, (Straight,
41G, 42G Angle, 3-Way); Angle, 3-Way);
(Straight, 43 (Angle, 43 (Angle,
Angle, 3-Way); 3‑Way); 3‑Way);
Valve Size 43G (Angle, 43G 44, 45 43 44, 45 44, 45 43 44, 45
(Configuration) 3‑Way) (Straight) (Straight) (Straight) (Angle, 3‑Way) (Straight) (Straight) (Angle, 3‑Way)
Temperature °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) to 50 (10) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) — — — 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 1500 (103)
50 (10) to 150 (65) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 1500 (103) 2500 (172) 3000 (206) 1500 (103)
200 (93) 2500 (172) 2800 (193) — — — — — —
250 (121) 2500 (172) 2650 (182) — — — — — —
300 (148) 2500 (172) 2500 (172) — — — — — —
Pressure ratings for valves with Swagelok tube fitting ends may be lower due to the tubing pressure rating. Refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107, for
additional information.
➀ Temperature ratings are limited to 150°F (65°C) max with UHMWPE packing.
 6 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

On-Off (2-Way) Valves

Flow Patterns Ordering Information
Straight and Angle Patterns for
On-Off Service 40G Series Valves 40 Series Valves
Select a 40G series ordering number Add a body material designator to
Straight Pattern from the 40G Series Complete a 40 series basic ordering number
Ordering Number column, shaded from the 40 Series Basic Ordering
blue. Number column, shaded gray.
Example: SS-41GS1
Material Valve Series Designator
To order a valve with UHMWPE 316 SS 44, 45 SS
packing, insert E into the valve
Alloy 41, 42, 43,
ordering number. M
400 44, 45
Example: SS-41GES1 41, 42, 43,
Brass B
44, 45

Examples: M
 -42S4
SS-44S6
40T and 40E Series Valves
Insert a seat packing material
40G / 40
SERIES

On Off
BALL

designator.

Angle Pattern Material Valve Series Designator

41, 42,
PFA T
44, 45
Modified
43 T
PTFE
UHMWPE 41, 42, 43 E

Examples: M-42ES4
SS-44TS6

Angle-Pattern Valves
Angle-pattern valves have the same options and accessories as straight-pattern
valves; the pressure-temperature ratings (page 5), flow coefficients, and
dimensions are different.
To order an angle-pattern valve, add -A to ordering number of a valve with the C
dimension listed.
On Off Examples: SS-43GS4-A
SS-44S6-A

Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown
with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.

Straight Pattern Angle Pattern

F

G➀
max panel
H thickness
panel J
hole

B C
A

➀ 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness. W

 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 7

On-Off (2-Way) Valves

40G Series 40 Series
End Dimensions
Complete Basic
Connections Cv in. (mm)
Ordering Ordering Orifice
Inlet/Outlet Size Straight Angle Number Number in. (mm) A B C D E F G H J W
0.052 1.68 0.84 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
1/16 in. 0.10 — SS-41GS1 -41S1 —
(1.32) (42.7) (21.3) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.093 2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
1/8 in. 0.20 0.15 SS-41GS2 -41S2
(2.36) (51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.125 2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
0.60 0.35 SS-42GS4 -42S4
(3.18) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
1/4 in.
0.187 2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1.4 0.90 SS-43GS4 -43S4
Fractional (4.75) (60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
Swagelok 0.187 2.58 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1.5 0.90 SS-43GS6 -43S6 1.29 (32.8)
tube (4.75) (65.5) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
fittings 3/8 in.
0.281 3.05 1.52 1.43 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
6.0 2.0 — -44S6 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (77.5) (38.6) (36.3) (50.8) (9.5) (28.6) (52.6) (28.4)
0.187 2.80 1.40 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1.1 — SS-43GS8 — —
(4.75) (71.1) (35.5) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
1/2 in.
0.406 3.92 1.96 1.74 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
12 4.6 — -45S8 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (99.6) (49.8) (44.2) (76.2) (9.5) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.406 3.92 1.96 1.74 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
3/4 in. 6.4 3.8 — -45S12 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (99.6) (49.8) (44.2) (76.2) (9.5) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.093 2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58

40G / 40
SERIES
3 mm 0.20 0.15 SS-41GS3MM -41S3MM

BALL
(2.36) (51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.125 2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
0.60 0.35 SS-42GS6MM -42S6MM
(3.18) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
6 mm
Metric 0.187 2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1.4 0.90 SS-43GS6MM -43S6MM
Swagelok (4.75) (60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
tube 0.187 2.46 1.23 1.20 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
fittings 8 mm 1.5 0.90 SS-43GS8MM -43S8MM
(4.75) (62.5) (31.2) (30.5) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
0.281 3.07 1.53 1.43 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
10 mm 6.0 2.0 — -44S10MM 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (78.0) (38.9) (36.3) (50.8) (9.5) (28.6) (52.6) (28.4)
0.406 3.92 1.96 1.74 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
12 mm 12 4.6 — -45S12MM 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (99.6) (49.8) (44.2) (76.2) (9.5) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.125 1.63 0.34 0.28 1.12 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
0.50 0.30 SS-42GF2 -42F2 0.81 (20.6)
(3.18) (41.4) (8.6) (7.1) (28.4) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
1/8 in.
0.187 2.00 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1.2 0.70 SS-43GF2 -43F2 1.00 (25.4)
(4.75) (50.8) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
0.187 2.06 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
0.90 0.75 SS-43GF4 -43F4 1.03 (26.2)
Female (4.75) (52.3) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
1/4 in.
NPT 0.281 2.50 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
3.0 1.7 — -44F4 1.25 (31.8) 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (63.5) (50.8) (9.5) (28.6) (52.6) (28.4)
0.281 2.50 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
3/8 in. 2.6 1.5 — -44F6 1.25 (31.8) 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (63.5) (50.8) (9.5) (28.6) (52.6) (28.4)
0.406 3.12 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
1/2 in. 6.3 3.5 — -45F8 1.56 (39.6) 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (79.2) (76.2) (9.5) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.187 2.06 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1/4 in. 0.90 SS-43GF4RT -43F4RT
(4.75) (52.3) (26.2) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
Female
0.281 2.50 1.25 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
ISO/BSP 3/8 in. 2.6 — — -44F6RT — 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (63.5) (31.8) (50.8) (9.5) (28.6) (52.6) (28.4)
tapered
0.406 3.12 1.56 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
1/2 in. 6.3 — -45F8RT 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (79.2) (39.6) (76.2) (9.5) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
Male 0.187 2.00 1.00 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1/4 in. 1.2 0.75 SS-43GM4 -43M4
NPT (4.75) (50.8) (25.4) (26.2) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
Male NPT/
0.187 2.20 1.20 1.03 0.44 0.38 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
Swagelok 1/4 in. 1.6 0.75 SS-43GM4-S4 -43M4-S4
(4.75) (55.9) (30.5) (26.2) (11.2) (9.7) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
tube fitting
0.125 1.75 0.88 0.94 1.12 1/8 19/32 1.36
0.60 0.35 SS-42GVCO4 -42VCO4
VCO (3.18) (44.4) (22.4) (23.9) 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78
1/4 in.
fittings 0.187 1.88 0.94 (11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
2.4 0.90 SS-43GVCO4 -43VCO4
(4.75) (47.8) (23.9) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3)
0.125 1.12 1/8 19/32 1.36
0.60 0.35 SS-42GVCR4 -42VCR4
(3.18) 2.13 1.06 1.09 0.44 0.38 (28.4) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78
1/4 in.
0.187 (54.1) (26.9) (27.7) (11.2) (9.7) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
Integral 2.4 0.90 SS-43GVCR4 -43VCR4
(4.75) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3)
male VCR®
fittings 0.281 2.88 1.44 2.00 1 1/8 2.07
6.0 — -44VCR8➀ 0.56 (14.2)
(7.14) (73.2) (36.6) (50.8) 3/8 (28.6) (52.6) 1.50
1/2 in. — —
0.406 3.12 1.56 3.00 (9.5) 1 1/2 2.49 (38.1)
12 — -45VCR8➀ 0.69 (17.5)
(10.3) (79.2) (39.6) (76.2) (38.1) (63.2)
➀ Not recommended for panel mounting.
 8 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Switching (3-Way) Valves

Flow Pattern Ordering Information
On-Off Switching Service
40GX Series Valves 40X Series Valves
Select a 40GX series ordering Add a body material designator
Center-Off Position
number from the 40GX Series to a 40X series basic ordering
Complete Ordering Number number from the 40X Series
column, shaded blue. Basic Ordering Number column,
Example: SS-41GXS1 shaded gray.
To order a valve with UHMWPE Material Valve Series Designator
packing, insert E into the valve 316 SS 44X, 45X SS
ordering number.
Alloy 41X, 42X, 43X,
M
Example: SS-41GXES1 400 44X, 45X
41X, 42X, 43X,
Brass B
44X, 45X

Examples: M
 -42XS4
SS-44XS6
40XT and 40XE Series Valves
40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

Insert a seat packing material

designator.

Material Valve Series Designator

41, 42,
PFA T
44, 45
Modified
43 T
PTFE
UHMWPE 41, 42, 43 E

On Off On
Examples: M-42XES4
SS-44XTS6

Dimensions
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. Dimensions shown
with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight.

G➀
max panel
H thickness
panel J
hole

D
Side Side

C C

B W
A
Bottom

➀ 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness.

 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 9

Switching (3-Way) Valves

40GX Series 40X Series
End Dimensions
Complete Basic
Connections in. (mm)
Ordering Ordering Orifice
Side/Bottom Size Cv Number Number in. (mm) A B C D F G H J W
0.052 1.68 0.84 0.81 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
1/16 in. 0.08 SS-41GXS1 -41XS1
(1.32) (42.7) (21.3) (20.6) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.093 2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
1/8 in. 0.15 SS-41GXS2 -41XS2
(2.36) (51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.125 2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
0.35 SS-42GXS4 -42XS4
Fractional (3.18) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
1/4 in.
Swagelok 0.187 2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
0.90 SS-43GXS4 -43XS4
tube (4.75) (60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
fittings 0.281 2.89 1.45 1.43 0.56 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
3/8 in. 2.0 — -44XS6
(7.14) (73.4) (36.8) (36.3) (14.2) (50.8) (9.7) (28.7) (52.6) (28.4)
0.406 3.48 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
1/2 in. 4.6 — -45XS8 1.74 (44.2)
(10.3) (88.4) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.406 3.48 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
3/4 in. 3.8 — -45XS12 1.74 (44.2)
(10.3) (88.4) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.093 2.01 1.01 0.97 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
3 mm 0.15 SS-41GXS3MM -41XS3MM
(2.36) (51.1) (25.7) (24.6) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.125 2.21 1.10 1.07 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58

40G / 40
SERIES
0.35 SS-42GXS6MM -42XS6MM

BALL
(3.18) (56.1) (27.9) (27.2) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
6 mm
Metric 0.187 2.39 1.20 1.17 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
0.90 SS-43GXS6MM -43XS6MM
Swagelok (4.75) (60.7) (30.5) (29.7) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
tube 0.187 2.46 1.23 1.20 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
fittings 8 mm 0.80 SS-43GXS8MM -43XS8MM
(4.75) (62.5) (31.2) (30.5) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
0.281 2.89 1.45 1.43 0.56 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
10 mm 2.0 — -44XS10MM
(7.14) (73.4) (36.8) (36.3) (14.2) (50.8) (9.7) (28.7) (52.6) (28.4)
0.406 3.48 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
12 mm 4.6 — -45XS12MM 1.74 (44.2)
(10.3) (88.4) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.125 1.63 0.34 1.13 1/4 19/32 1.36 0.58
1/8 in. 0.30 SS-42GXF2 -42XF2 0.81 (20.6)
(3.18) (41.4) (8.6) (28.7) (6.4) (15.1) (34.5) (14.7)
0.187 2.06 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
0.75 SS-43GXF4 -43XF4 1.03 (26.2)
(4.75) (52.3) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
1/4 in.
Female 0.281 2.50 0.56 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
1.7 — -44XF4 1.25 (31.8)
NPT (7.14) (63.5) (14.2) (50.8) (9.7) (28.7) (52.6) (28.4)
0.281 2.50 0.56 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
3/8 in. 1.5 — -44XF6 1.25 (31.8)
(7.14) (63.5) (14.2) (50.8) (9.7) (28.7) (52.6) (28.4)
0.406 3.13 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
1/2 in. 3.5 — -45XF8 1.56 (39.6)
(10.3) (79.5) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
0.187 2.06 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
1/4 in. 0.75 SS-43GXF4RT -43XF4RT 1.03 (26.2)
(4.75) (52.3) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
Female
0.281 2.50 0.56 2.00 3/8 1 1/8 2.07 1.12
ISO/BSP 3/8 in. 1.5 — -44XF6RT 1.25 (31.8)
(7.14) (63.5) (14.2) (50.8) (9.7) (28.7) (52.6) (28.4)
tapered
0.406 3.13 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.49 1.50
1/2 in. 3.5 — -45XF8RT 1.56 (39.6)
(10.3) (79.5) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (63.2) (38.1)
Swagelok
0.187 2.39 1.20 1.03 0.44 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 0.78
tube fittings/ 1/4 in. 0.80 SS-43GXS4-S4-M4 -43XS4-S4-M4
(4.75) (60.7) (30.5) (26.2) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3) (19.8)
Male NPT
0.125 1.13 1/8 19/32 1.36
Integral 0.35 SS-42GXVCR4 -42XVCR4
(3.18) 2.13 1.06 1.09 0.44 (28.7) (3.2) (15.1) (34.5) 0.78
male VCR 1/4 in.
0.187 (54.1) (26.9) (27.7) (11.2) 1.53 3/16 25/32 1.47 (19.8)
fittings 0.90 SS-43GXVCR4 -43XVCR4
(4.75) (38.9) (4.8) (19.8) (37.3)
 10 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Switching (5-Way and 7-Way) Valves (40 Series)

Features 5-Way Valve
■ Capsule seat packing allows reliable switching.
■ Flow can be switched from a single inlet to multiple outlets
or from multiple inlets to a common outlet.
■ 43Z and 43Z6 series valves have a spring-loaded detent for
exact port positioning.
■ Detent handle components:
Handle: nylon with brass insert
Set screw: S17400 stainless steel
Pins, detent plate: nickel-plated steel
7-Way Valve
Springs: steel/ASTM A228

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Valve Temperature Working Pressure
Series °F (°C) psig (bar)
43Z (5-way) PTFE packing: 2500 (172)
50 to 150 (10 to 65)
45Z (5-way) Live-loaded PFA, Modified 1500 (103)
40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

PTFE, or UHWMPE packing:

43Z6 (7-way) –65 to 150 (–53 to 65) 500 (34.4)
Pressure ratings for valves with Swagelok tube fitting ends may be lower due
to the tubing pressure rating. Refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107, for
additional information.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change. 5-Way Valve 7-Way Valve
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. F F
To order, add a body 40T and 40E Series Valves
material designator to a G G
Insert a seat packing material H max panel H max panel
40 series basic ordering designator. panel thickness➀ panel thickness➀
number. hole J hole J
Valve D D
Material Designator Material Series Designator
316 SS SS 43Z6,
PFA T
Alloy 400 M 45 C C

Brass B Modified
43Z T
PTFE B
43Z, B A
Example: SS-43ZFS2 UHMWPE E A
43Z6
➀ 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness.
Example: SS-43ZTFS2

40 Series
End Dimensions
Basic
Connections in. (mm)
Ordering Orifice
Inlets/Outlets Size Number Cv in. (mm) A B C D F G H J
5-Way Valves
Female Swagelok 0.062 1.94 0.44 1.53 5/32 29/32 1.69
1/8 in. -43ZFS2➀ 0.07 0.97 (24.6)
tube fittings (1.57) (49.3) (11.2) (38.9) (4.1) (23.1) (42.9)
0.062 1.55 0.78 0.88 0.44 1.53 5/32 29/32 1.69
1/8 in. -43ZF2➀ 0.07
(1.57) (39.4) (19.8) (22.4) (11.2) (38.9) (4.1) (23.1) (42.9)
Female NPT
0.406 3.13 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.43
1/2 in. -45ZF8-ND➁ 3.5 1.56 (39.6)
(10.3) (79.5) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (61.7)
7-Way Valves
0.052 1.94 0.44 1.53 5/32 29/32 1.69
1/16 in. -43Z6FS1 0.05 0.97 (24.6)
Female Swagelok (1.32) (49.3) (11.2) (38.9) (4.1) (23.1) (42.9)
tube fittings 0.062 1.94 0.44 1.53 5/32 29/32 1.69
1/8 in. -43Z6FS2 0.07 0.97 (24.6)
(1.57) (49.3) (11.2) (38.9) (4.1) (23.1) (42.9)
➀ Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.049 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-43ZF2-049
➁ Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.093 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-45ZF8-ND-093
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 11

Crossover (4-Way and 6-Way) Valves (40 Series)

Features 4-Way Valve
■ Capsule packing allows crossover of two or three streams.
■ Machined stops provide positive port positioning.
■ Stop plate material: aluminum/ASTM B209 or B211.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Valve Temperature Working Pressure
Series °F (°C) psig (bar)
43Y (4-way) PTFE packing: 2500 (172)
50 to 150 (10 to 65) 6-Way Valve
45Y (4-way) Live-loaded PFA, Modified 1500 (103)
PTFE, or UHWMPE
43Y6 (6-way) packing: 500 (34.4)
–65 to 150 (–53 to 65)
Pressure ratings for valves with Swagelok tube fitting ends may be lower due
to the tubing pressure rating. Refer to Tubing Data catalog, MS-01-107, for
additional information.

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
Ordering Information and Dimensions
4-Way Valve 6-Way Valve
Dimensions are for reference only and are subject to change.
Dimensions shown with Swagelok tube fitting nuts finger-tight. F F

To order, add a body 40T and 40E Series Valves

G G
material designator to a Insert a seat packing material max panel max panel
H H
40 series basic ordering panel thickness➀ panel thickness➀
designator. hole J J
number. hole

Valve D D
Material Designator Material Series Designator
316 SS SS 43Y6, D D
PFA T
Alloy 400 M 45 B B
A A
Brass B Modified
43Y T
PTFE
➀ 1/8 in. (3.2 mm) minimum panel thickness.
Example: SS-43YFS1 43Y,
UHMWPE E
43Y6

Example: SS-43YTFS1

40 Series
End Dimensions
Basic
Connections in. (mm)
Ordering Orifice
Inlets/Outlets Size Number Cv in. (mm) A B D F G H J
4-Way Valves
0.052 1.55 0.78 0.44 1.53 3/16 29/32 1.68
1/16 in. -43YFS1➀ 0.06
Female Swagelok (1.32) (39.4) (19.8) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (23.1) (42.7)
tube fittings 0.062 1.94 0.97 0.44 1.53 3/16 29/32 1.68
1/8 in. -43YFS2➀ 0.08
(1.57) (49.3) (24.6) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (23.1) (42.7)
0.062 1.55 0.78 0.44 1.53 3/16 29/32 1.69
1/8 in. -43YF2➀ 0.08
Female (1.57) (39.4) (19.8) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (23.1) (42.9)
NPT 0.281 3.13 1.56 0.69 3.00 3/8 1 1/2 2.43
1/2 in. -45YF8➁ 1.6
(7.14) (79.5) (39.6) (17.5) (76.2) (9.7) (38.1) (61.7)
6-Way Valves
0.052 1.94 0.97 0.44 1.53 3/16 29/32 1.68
1/16 in. -43Y6FS1 0.06
Female Swagelok (1.32) (49.3) (24.6) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (23.1) (42.7)
tube fittings 0.062 1.94 0.97 0.44 1.53 3/16 29/32 1.68
1/8 in. -43Y6FS2 0.08
(1.57) (49.3) (24.6) (11.2) (38.9) (4.8) (23.1) (42.7)
➀ Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.049 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-43YFS2-049
➁ Cross-port flow may occur during switching. If cross-port flow is unacceptable, specify a 0.093 in. ball orifice. Example: SS-45YF8-093
 12 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Flow Data at 70°F (20°C) Testing

Every 40G series and 40 series ball
Pressure Drop to Atmosphere (∆p), psi (bar) valve is factory tested with nitrogen at
Flow 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) 10 (0.68) 50 (3.4) 100 (6.8) 1000 psig (69 bar) or at its maximum
Coefficient Air Flow Water Flow rated pressure if less than 1000 psig
(Cv) std ft3/min (std L/min) U. S. gal/min (std L/min) (69 bar). Seat tests have a maximum
0.05 0.6 (16) 1.5 (42) 2.6 (73) 0.1 (0.3) 0.3 (1.1) 0.5 (1.8) allowable leak rate of 0.1 std cm3/min.
0.06 0.7 (19) 1.8 (50) 3.2 (90) 0.2 (0.7) 0.4 (1.5) 0.6 (2.2)
0.07 0.8 (22) 2.1 (59) 3.7 (100) 0.2 (0.7) 0.5 (1.8) 0.7 (2.6) Low Fugitive Emissions
0.08 0.9 (25) 2.4 (67) 4.3 (120) 0.3 (1.1) 0.6 (2.2) 0.8 (3.0)
The American Petroleum Institute’s
0.10 1.1 (31) 3.0 (84) 5.3 (150) 0.3 (1.1) 0.7 (2.6) 1.0 (3.7)
API 641 tests for fugitive emissions to
0.15 1.7 (48) 4.5 (120) 8.0 (220) 0.4 (1.5) 1.0 (3.7) 1.5 (5.6) atmosphere for quarter-turn ball valves.
0.20 2.3 (65) 6.0 (160) 11 (310) 0.6 (2.2) 1.4 (5.2) 2.0 (7.5) The tests are conducted at a third
0.30 3.4 (96) 9.0 (250) 16 (450) 0.9 (3.4) 2.1 (7.9) 3.0 (11) party lab and certify that at no point
0.35 4.0 (110) 10 (280) 19 (530) 1.1 (4.1) 2.4 (9.0) 3.5 (13) in the test did the valve leak in excess
0.50 5.6 (150) 15 (420) 27 (760) 1.6 (6.0) 3.5 (13) 5.0 (18) of 100 ppm of methane. Certificates
0.60 6.8 (190) 18 (500) 32 (900) 1.9 (7.1) 4.2 (15) 6.0 (22) stating that the valve is certified for Low
0.70 7.9 (220) 21 (590) 37 (1000) 2.2 (8.3) 4.9 (18) 7.0 (26) Emissions service are available for the
0.75 8.5 (240) 22 (620) 40 (1100) 2.3 (8.7) 5.3 (20) 7.5 (28) following 40 series valves: 40, 40G and
40T. For more information, contact your
0.80 9.0 (250) 24 (670) 42 (1100) 2.5 (9.4) 5.6 (21) 8.0 (30)
authorized Swagelok sales and service
40G / 40
SERIES

0.90 10 (280) 27 (760) 48 (1300) 2.8 6.4 (24) 9.0 (34)

BALL

(10)
representative.
1.2 14 (390) 36 (1000) 64 (1800) 3.8 (14) 8.5 (32) 12 (45)
1.4 16 (450) 42 (1100) 74 (2000) 4.4 (16) 9.9 (37) 14 (52)
1.5 17 (480) 45 (1200) 80 (2200) 4.7 (17) 11 (41) 15 (56)
Cleaning and Packaging
1.6 18 (500) 48 (1300) 85 (2400) 5.0 (18) 11 (41) 16 (60) All 40G series and 40 series valves are
1.7 19 (530) 51 (1400) 90 (2500) 5.3 (20) 12 (45) 17 (64) cleaned in accordance with Swagelok
Standard Cleaning and Packaging
2.0 22 (620) 60 (1600) 100 (2800) 6.3 (23) 14 (52) 20 (75)
(SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
2.4 27 (760) 72 (2000) 120 (3300) 7.6 (28) 17 (64) 24 (90)
2.6 29 (820) 78 (2200) 140 (3900) 8.2 (31) 18 (68) 26 (98) Special cleaning and packaging in
accordance with Swagelok Special
3.0 34 (960) 90 (2500) 160 (4500) 9.5 (35) 21 (79) 30 (110)
Cleaning and Packaging (SC‑11)
3.5 39 (1100) 100 (2800) 180 (5000) 11 (41) 25 (94) 35 (130)
catalog, MS‑06‑63, to ensure
3.8 43 (1200) 110 (3100) 200 (5600) 12 (45) 27 (100) 38 (140)
compliance with product cleanliness
4.6 52 (1400) 140 (3900) 240 (6700) 15 (56) 33 (120) 46 (170) requirements stated in ASTM G93
6.0 68 (1900) 180 (5000) 320 (9000) 19 (71) 42 (150) 60 (220) Level C, is available as an option. See
6.3 71 (2000) 190 (5300) 330 (9300) 20 (75) 45 (170) 63 (230) Process Options, page 23.
6.4 72 (2000) 190 (5300) 340 (9600) 20 (75) 45 (170) 64 (240)
12 130 (3600) 360 (10 000) 640 (18 000) 38 (140) 85 (320) 120 (450)
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 13

Handle Options
Factory-Assembled Handles
Nylon Directional Metal ■ Aluminum Bar (40 Series)
Black is Ideal for continuous elevated ambient Add -BKB to the valve ordering
Handle
standard. For Color Designator temperatures number.
other colors, add Blue -BL Examples:
■ Stainless Steel Directional
a handle color SS-44S6-BKB
Green -GR (40G Series)
designator to the B-43S4-BKB
valve ordering Orange -OG Add -SHD to the valve ordering
number. Red -RD number. No Handle
Examples: Yellow -YW Example: Add -NH to the valve ordering number.
SS-43GS4-BL SS-43GS4-SHD Example: SS-43GS4-NH
B-43S4-BL B-43S4-NH
■ 316 Stainless Steel Bar (40 Series)
See page 21 for 40G series valves
Nylon Oval Add -SH to the valve ordering number. with no handle and no handle stop,
Add -K to the valve Examples: typically specified for valves to be field
ordering number. SS-44S6-SH assembled to pneumatic actuators.
Examples: B-43S4-SH
SS-43GS4-K
B-43S4-K

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
Handle Kits for Field Assembly
Kits include handle and set screw.

Valve Nylon Nylon Stainless Steel Stainless Steel Aluminum

Series➀ Directional➁ Oval➂ Directional Bar Bar
41G, 41GX➃,
NY-5K-42G-BK NY-5K-42GK-BK SS-5K-42GPM — —
42G, 42GX➃
43G, 43GX➃ NY-5K-43G-BK NY-5K-43GK-BK SS-5K-43GPM — —
41, 41X➄,
BZ-5K-42-BK — — SS-5K-42B A-5K-42B-BK
42, 42X➄
43, 43X➄, 43Y BZ-5K-43-BK — — SS-5K-43B A-5K-43B-BK
43Z BZ-5K-43Z-BK — — — —
44, 44X➄ BZ-5K-44-BK — — SS-5K-44B A-5K-44B-BK
45, 45X➄, 45Y, 45Z NY-5K-45-BK — — SS-5K-45B A-5K-45B-BK
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4‑way) valve; Z designates switching (5‑way) valve.
➁ Ordering number specifies a black handle. For another color, replace -BK with a handle color designator from the table above.
Example: BZ-5K-42-BL
➂ Nylon oval handles are only available factory assembled on 40 series valves.
➃ Handle kits for 40GX series 3-way valves with L or H flow paths also require a powdered metal 300 series SS stop insert, which
can be ordered separately. Use ordering numbers: SS-5SI-42G for 41GX and 42GX series valves; and SS-5SI-43G for 43GX series
valves.
➄ To order handle kits for 40X series 3-way valves with L or H flow paths, contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service
representative.

Locking Brackets (41G/41, 42G/42, and 43G/43 Series)

■ Allows lockout of 2-way, straight- ■ To order the locking bracket factory-
pattern valves with directional handles assembled on a valve, add -LH to the
in the open or closed position with a valve ordering number.
standard lock. Example: SS-42GS4-LH
■ Additional small-diameter hole can ■ To order the locking bracket for field
be used to tether locking mechanism assembly, use kit ordering numbers:
to bracket or attach ID tag. SS-51K-41G-LH for 41G/41 and
■ Available on 43G/43 series valves 42G/42 series valves;
with Swagelok end connection sizes SS-51K-43G-LH for 43G/43 series
up to 3/8 in. and 10 mm. valves
■ Brackets cannot be used on valves
with integral VCO and VCR fitting end
connections or with panel mounting.
 14 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Handle Options
Latch-Lock Handles Dimensions
(43G Series; 43, 44, 45 Series) Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for
■ Lock on-off valves open and closed reference only and are subject to change.
or closed only B 0.34
(8.6)
■ Lock switching valves at each port,
(including center-off position on
3‑way model)
■ Lock crossover valves in both A
positions
■ Confirm handle position with positive
detent
■ Assist compliance with lockout/
tagout programs 43G/43 series directional handle shown; 44 and
45 series handles are oval.
■ Fit padlocks with 3/16 to 5/16 in. Dimensions
(4.8 to 7.9 mm) shackle diameters. Materials of Construction in. (mm)
Valve
Series Type A B
Component Material 43G On-off (2-way)
Handle Reinforced nylon 43GX Switching (3-way)
2.27 3.02
40G / 40

• Caution:
SERIES
BALL

43 On-off (2-way) (57.7) (76.7)

Locking mechanism 304 SS
These handles are designed 43X Switching (3-way
to prevent unintentional valve Detent base, 43Z Switching (5-way)
Powdered metal
handle base, 43Y Crossover (4-way)
operation. They are not tamper handle pin stop
300 series SS 2.30 3.02
resistant and can be removed, 43Y6 Crossover (6-way)
(58.4) (76.7)
Spring S17700 SS 43Z6 Switching (7-way)
even when locked.
Set screw S17400 SS 44 On-off (2-way) 2.63 3.96
44X Switching (3-way) (66.9) (101)
Lubricant Hydrocarbon-based
45 On-off (2-way)
2.85 3.96
45X Switching (3-way)
(72.4) (101)
45Y Crossover (4-way)

Ordering Information­­
Factory Assembled Kits for Field Assembly
Handle Color Designator
1. Select a 43G, 43, 44, or 45 series 1. Tor order a black handle kit, select a Blue BL
valve ordering number. handle kit basic ordering number.
Green GR
Example: SS-43GS4 Example: NY-5K-43GLL-BK Orange OG
2. To order a valve with a black latch- 2. For another handle color, replace BK Red RD
lock handle, add a handle designator. with a handle color designator from Yellow YW
Example: SS-43GS4-LL the table at right.
3. To order a handle color other than Example: NY-5K-43GLL-BL
black, add a handle color designator
to the valve ordering number, Factory Assembly Field Assembly Handle Kit
keeping the handle and color Handle Designators Basic Ordering Numbers
designators in alphabetical order. Valve Open/ Closed Open/ Closed
Series Type Closed Only Closed Only
Examples: SS-43GS4-BL-LL
43G On-off (2-way) -LLC NY-5K-43GLL-BK NY-5K-43GLLC-BK
SS-43GS4-LL-RD -LL
43GX Switching (3-way) — NY-5K-43GXLL-BK —
43 On-off (2-way) -LLC NY-5K-43LL-BK NY-5K-43LLC-BK
43X Switching (3-way) — NY-5K-43XLL-BK —
43Y Crossover (4-way) — NY-5K-43YLL-BK —
43Y6 Crossover (6-way) — NY-5K-43Y6LL-BK —
43Z Switching (5-way) — NY-5K-43ZLL-BK —
43Z6 Switching (7-way) -LL — NY-5K-43Z6LL-BK —
44 On-off (2-way) -LLC NY-5K-44LL-BK NY-5K-44LLC-BK
44X Switching (3-way) — NY-5K-44XLL-BK —
45 On-off (2-way) -LLC NY-5K-45LL-BK NY-5K-45LLC-BK
45X Switching (3-way) — NY-5K-45XLL-BK —
45Y Crossover (4-way) — NY-5K-45LL-BK —
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 15

Vent Port and Stem Extension Options

Vented Valves Stem Extensions (Manual Valves)
Pressure rating for vented valves is 500 psig (34.4 bar). Standard lengths are 2, 4, and 6 in.
2-Way, Straight-Pattern Valves Factory Assembled
When the valve is closed, the downstream port vents to To order a factory-assembled stem extension, add the stem
atmosphere through a vent hole in the side of the valve body. extension designator to the valve ordering number
2-Way, Angle-Pattern and 3-Way Valves
Stem Extension Stem Extension
When the valve is closed, the bottom port vents to Length, in. (mm) Designator
atmosphere through a vent hole in the side of the valve body. 2 (50.8) -SE2
Ordering Information 4 (102) -SE4
To order a vented valve, insert V into the valve ordering number. 6 (152) -SE6
Example: SS-43GVS4
Examples: SS-43GS4-SE2
B-43VS4
SS-44S6-SE4
• Warning: Cross-vent flow may occur in vented valves.
To eliminate cross-vent flow, specify a smaller ball orifice. Add a Kits for Field Assembly
designator from the table below to the valve ordering number. To order a stem extension kit for field assembly, add a dash
and the stem extension length (2, 4, 6) in inches to the kit

40G / 40
SERIES
basic ordering number.

BALL
Valve Orifice
Series in. (mm) Designator
41G, 41GX, 41, 41X, Valve Stem Extension Kit
0.040 (1.02) -040 Series Basic Ordering Number
42G, 42GX, 42, 42X
43G, 43GX, 43, 43X, 41G, 42G MS-SE-42G
0.049 (1.24) -049
44, 44X, 45, 45X 43G MS-SE-43G
45, 45X 0.093 (2.36) -093 41, 42 MS-SE-42
Examples: SS-41GVS1-040 43 MS-SE-43
B-42VS4-040 44 MS-SE-44
45 MS-SE-45
Welded Vent Port Connections
Stainless steel vented valves are Examples: MS-SE-42G-2"
available with a Swagelok tube fitting MS-SE-44-4"
or a tube stub welded to the vent port.
See the table below.
40G Series Ordering Information Accessories
To order a 40G series vented valve Directional Name Plates
with a welded vent port connection, ■ Indicate the direction of flow.
Swagelok Tube Fitting
add the connection designator to the
Connection Welded to ■ Available for all 40G series and
vented valve ordering number. Vent Port
40 series valves.
Vent Port ■ Matte surface accepts ink or labels.
Connection Size Designator
To order, add -WN1 (blank nameplate)
1/8 in. -WVS2 or -WN2 (marked nameplate) to the
Fractional
Swagelok tube 1/4 in. -WVS4 valve ordering number.
fitting 3/8 in. -WVS6➀ Examples: SS-43GS4-WN1
3 mm -WVS3M B-42VS4-WN2
Metric
Swagelok tube 6 mm -WVS6M Directional name plate kits are also available. Contact your
fitting authorized Swagelok representative.
8 mm -WVS8M➀
Fractional 1/4 × 0.049, -WV4T49-2
tube stub 2 in. long
Metric 6 × 1.0, -WV6MT10-50M
tube stub 50 mm long
➀ Available for 43G series valves only.

Example: SS-43GVS4-WVS4
40 Series Ordering Information
To order a 40 series vented valve with welded vent port
connection, contact your authorized Swagelok representative.
 16 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pneumatic Actuators
Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum Actuator
Actuator Temperature Pressure, psig (bar)
Actuator Service Range At 100°F At Maximum
Service Designator °F (°C) (37°C) Temperature
–20 to 200
Standard — 165 (11.3)
(–28 to 93)
High 0 to 400
HT 100 (6.8)
temperature (–17 to 204)
200 (13.7)
Low –40 to 200
LT 165 (11.3)
temperature (–40 to 93)
–20 to 200
Nonfluorocarbon NF 165 (11.3)
(–28 to 93)

Actuator Pressure at Maximum System Pressure

Based on valve performance using pressurized air or nitrogen.
Swagelok rack and pinion pneumatic
actuators are compact, lightweight, and 40G Series and 40 Series
easily mountable. The actuators are
40G / 40
SERIES

Actuation Modes
BALL

available in spring-return and double-

acting modes. Straight, angle-pattern, Spring Return Double Acting
Actuator
4-way, and 3‑way valves with H and Valve Actuator Model Single Dual Single Dual
L flow paths require 90° actuation; Series➀ Model Designator Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)
all other 3‑way valves require 180° 41G, 42G,
31 (90°) -31 60 (4.2) 70 (4.9) 25 (1.8) 35 (2.5)
actuation. 41, 42
For technical data, including materials 41GX,
of construction, air displacement, and 42GX, 51 (180°) -51 60 (4.2) 70 (4.9) 25 (1.8) 35 (2.5)
41X, 42X
weight, see the Swagelok Ball Valve
43G, 43, 31 (90°) -31 80 (5.6) — 50 (3.5) 80 (5.6)
Actuation Options catalog (MS‑02‑343).
43Y 33 (90°) -33 65 (4.5) 75 (5.2) 20 (1.4) 35 (2.5)
51 (180°) -51 70 (4.9) — 50 (3.5) 80 (5.6)
43GX, 43X
53 (180°) -53 65 (4.5) 70 (4.9) 20 (1.4) 35 (2.5)
44 33 (90°) -33 70 (4.9) 90 (6.3) 25 (1.8) 50 (3.5)
• Caution: Actuated assemblies
44X 53 (180°) -53 70 (4.9) 80 (5.6) 25 (1.8) 50 (3.5)
must be properly aligned and
supported. Improper alignment 45, 45Y 33 (90°) -33 90 (6.3) — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
or inadequate support of the 45X 53 (180°) -53 85 (5.9) — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
actuated assembly may result
in leakage or premature valve
40T and 40E Series for Low-Temperature Service
failure.
Actuation Modes
Spring Return Double Acting
Actuator
Single Dual Single Dual
Valve Actuator Model
Series➀ Model Designator Minimum Actuator Pressure, psig (bar)
41, 42 31 (90°) -31 65 (4.5) 80 (5.6) 25 (1.8) 45 (3.2)
41X, 42X 51 (180°) -51 65 (4.5) — 25 (1.8) 45 (3.2)
31 (90°) -31 — — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
43, 43Y
33 (90°) -33 70 (4.9) 85 (5.9) 25 (1.8) 40 (2.8)
51 (180°) -51 — — 60 (4.2) 100 (6.9)
43X
53 (180°) -53 65 (4.5) 75 (5.2) 25 (1.8) 40 (2.8)
44 33 (90°) -33 80 (5.6) — 40 (2.8) 75 (5.2)
44X 53 (180°) -53 75 (5.2) — 40 (2.8) 75 (5.2)
45, 45Y 33 (90°) -33 — — 65 (4.5) —
45X 53 (180°) -53 — — 65 (4.5) —
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4‑way) valve.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 17

Pneumatic Actuators
Dimensions A (spring return)
B (double acting)
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), C D
2
are for reference only and subject to mounting
change. holes
0.34 (8.6)
dia

E
1/8 in.
1/8 in. NPT
NPT

2 F
mounting
holes
0.34 (8.6)
dia
G H
J

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Valve Actuator
Series➀ Model A B C D E F G H J
41G, 42G, 41, 42, 31 (90°) 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.55 1.02 2.00 1.31 3.04
41GX, 42GX, 41X, 42X 51 (180°) (125) (104) (16.0) (29.2) (90.2) (25.9) (50.8) (33.3) (77.2)
31 (90°) 4.91 4.09 0.63 1.15 3.55 1.11 2.00 1.31 3.04
43G, 43, 51 (180°) (125) (104) (16.0) (29.2) (90.2) (28.2) (50.8) (33.3) (77.2)
43GX, 43X,
43Y 33 (90°) 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.61 1.17 2.00 1.75 4.07
53 (180°) (200) (150) (22.4) (43.9) (117) (29.7) (50.8) (44.4) (103)
33 (90°) 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.88 1.56 2.00 1.75 4.07
44, 44X
53 (180°) (200) (150) (22.4) (43.9) (124) (39.6) (50.8) (44.4) (103)
33 (90°) 7.86 5.89 0.88 1.73 4.88 1.69 2.19 1.75 4.07
45, 45X, 45Y
53 (180°) (200) (150) (22.4) (43.9) (124) (42.9) (55.6) (44.4) (103)
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y designates crossover (4‑way) valve.

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C D
SS - 43GS4 -31 D HT
A Valve Ordering Number C Actuation Mode D Actuator Service
C = Spring return, normally closed HT = High temperature
B Actuator Model D = Double acting LT = Low temperature
Based on valve series, select O = Spring return, normally open NF = Nonfluorocarbon
actuator designator. See Actuator S = S
 pring return, 3-way and None = Standard
Pressure at Maximum System 4‑way valves
Pressure table, page 16.
-31 = 90˚ actuation
-33 = 90˚ actuation For dual-mounted assemblies (two valves mounted to one
-51 = 180˚ actuation actuator), add DM to the ordering number.
-53 = 180˚ actuation Example: SS-43GS4-31DDM
 18 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Pneumatic Actuators
Ordering Information
Kits for Field Assembly
Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number

A B C
MS-1 31 - DA -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, select DA = Double acting -HT = High temperature
actuator model. See Dimensions SR = Spring return -LT = Low temperature
table, page 17. -NF = Nonfluorocarbon
31 = 90° actuation None = Standard
33 = 90° actuation
51 = 180° actuation
53 = 180° actuation
40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

Mounting Bracket Kits Coupling Kits

Mounting
Mounting bracket kits contain: Bracket Kit Coupling kits enable replacement of
■ 316 stainless steel mounting bracket Valve Actuator Ordering 41, 42, or 43 series valves mounted to
Series➀ Model Number Swagelok pneumatic actuators with
■ 420 stainless steel actuator roll pin 41G, 42G 31 (90°) SS-MB-41G➁ equivalent 41G, 42G, or 43G series
■ Coupling 41GX, 42GX 51 (180°) SS-MB-41G➁ valves. Coupling kits contain:
■ 40G series—304 stainless steel 31 (90°) SS-MB-43G ■ 304 stainless steel coupling
■ 40 series—carbon steel 43G
33 (90°) SS-MB-43G-133 ■ S17400 stainless steel coupling pin
■ Coupling pin 51 (180°) SS-MB-43G ■ 18-8 stainless steel lock nut
■ 40G series—S17400 stainless steel 43GX
53 (180°) SS-MB-43G-133 ■ instructions.
■ 40 series—carbon steel
41, 42 31 (90°) MS-MB-41➁
■ Lock nut
41X, 42X 51 (180°) MS-MB-41➁ Coupling Kit
■ 40G series—18-8 stainless steel 31 (90°) MS-MB-43 Valve Actuator Ordering
43 Series➀ Model Number
■ 40 series—carbon steel 33 (90°) MS-MB-43-133
41G, 42G 31 (90°) 304-5K-41G-131
■ Four 18-8 stainless steel socket head 51 (180°) MS-MB-43
43X 41GX, 42GX 51 (180°) 304-5K-41G-131
cap screws (kit SS-MS-41G for 41G, 53 (180°) MS-MB-43-133
42G, 41GX, and 42GX series only) 31 (90°) 304-5K-43G-131
31 (90°) MS-MB-43Y 43G
■ instructions. 43Y 33 (90°) 304-5K-43G-133
33 (90°) MS-MB-43Y-133
51 (180°) 304-5K-43G-131
44 33 (90°) MS-MB-44➂ 43GX
53 (180°) 304-5K-43G-133
44X 53 (180°) MS-MB-44➂
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y
45 33 (90°) MS-MB-45 designates crossover (4‑way) valve.
45X 53 (180°) MS-MB-45
45Y 33 (90°) MS-MB-45Y
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve; Y
designates crossover (4‑way) valve.
➁ 42G series and 42 series valves with VCO or
VCR end connections mounted to a Swagelok
pneumatic actuator are only available factory
assembled.
➂ 44 series valves with VCR end connections
require kit MS-MB-44-VCR.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 19

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Maximum actuator pressure is 116 psig (8.0 bar). See
Minimum Actuator Pressure table below for minimum
actuator pressures.

Actuator
Actuator Service Temperature Range
Service Designator °F (°C)
Standard — –40 to 176 (–40 to 80)
High temperature HT 5 to 302 (–15 to 150)

Minimum Actuator Pressure

40G Series and 40 Series
Actuator Model Designators Actuation Modes
These Swagelok rack and pinion Spring Return Spring Return Double Acting
pneumatic actuators are ISO 5211 Valve Actuator Normally Normally Double Minimum Actuator Pressure
compliant and are suitable for general Series➀ Model Open Closed Acting psig (bar)
applications. They are available in

40G / 40
A10 (90°) -A10O4 -A10C4 -A10D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)

SERIES
41G, 42G,

BALL
spring-return and double-acting 41, 42 A15 (90°) -A15O3 -A15C3 -A15D 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5)
modes. Straight, angle-pattern, and
41GX, 42GX,
3‑way valves with H and L flow paths 41X, 42X
A15 (180°) — — -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
require 90° actuation; all other 3‑way
A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 43 (3.0)
valves require 180° actuation. 43G, 43
A15 (90°) -A15O3 -A15C3 -A15D 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5)
For technical data, including actuator
43GX, 43X A15 (180°) ➁ ➁ -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
materials of construction and weight,
refer to Ball Valve Actuation Options A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 50 (3.5)
44
catalog, MS‑02‑343. A15 (90°) -A15O4 -A15C4 -A15D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
For additional information on selecting 44X A15 (180°) ➁ ➁ -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
and sizing ISO 5211-compliant 45 A30 (90°) -A30O4 -A30C4 -A30D 65 (4.5) 36 (2.5)
actuators, refer to Actuated Ball Valve 45X A30 (180°) ➂ ➂ -A30XD — 36 (2.5)
Selection Guide—ISO 5211-Compliant
Actuator Mounting Bracket Kits
catalog, MS‑02‑136. 40T and 40E Series for Low-Temperature Service
Actuator Model Designators Actuation Modes
Spring Double
Spring Return Return Acting
Certifications Valve Packing Actuator Normally Normally Double Minimum Actuator
Factory-assembled valve assemblies Series➀ Material Model Open Closed Acting Pressure, psig (bar)
with ISO 5211-compliant actuators PFA, A10 (90°) -A10O4 -A10C4 -A10D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
41, 42
are available with ATEX conformity on UHMWPE A15 (90°) -A15O3 -A15C3 -A15D 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5)
request at the time of order quotation. PFA,
ATEX certification is not available for 41X, 42X A15 (180°) ➁ ➁ -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
UHMWPE
field assemblies. A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 43 (3.0)
Modified
PTFE A15 (90°) -A15O3 -A15C3 -A15D 43 (3.0) 36 (2.5)
43
A10 (90°) — — -A10D — 43 (3.0)
• Caution: Actuated assemblies UHMWPE
A15 (90°) -A15O3 -A15C3 -A15D 36 (2.5) 36 (2.5)
must be properly aligned and
supported. Improper alignment Modified
43X PTFE, A15 (180°) ➁ ➁ -A15XD — 36 (2.5)
or inadequate support of the UHMWPE
actuated assembly may result
44 PFA A30 (90°) -A30O3 -A30C3 -A30D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
in leakage or premature valve
failure. 44X PFA A15 (180°) ➁ ➁ -A15XD — 43 (3.0)
45 PFA A60 (90°) -A60O4 -A60C4 -A30D 50 (3.5) 36 (2.5)
45X PFA A30 (180°) ➂ ➂ -A30XD — 36 (2.5)
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve.
➁ 3-way valves with H and L flow paths: -A15S3
➂ 3-way valves with H and L flow paths: -A30S4
 20 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valves with Actuators
Typical Ordering Number

A B C
SS-43GS4 -A15D HT
A Valve Ordering Number B Actuator Model C Actuator Service
Based on valve series, actuation HT = High temperature
mode, and packing material, select None = Standard
actuator designator. See Minimum
Actuator Pressure table, page 19.

Kits for Field Assembly

Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each valve.
Actuator Kit Typical Ordering Number
40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

A B C D
MS - A15 - DA - DIN -HT
A Actuator Model B Actuation Mode C Coupling Drive Type
Based on valve series and packing DA = Double acting (2-way valves) DIN
material, select actuator designator. XDA =Double acting (3-way valves)
See Minimum Actuator Pressure 3 =Spring return (41G, 42G, D Actuator Service
table, page 19. 43G, 41, 42, 43 series 2-way -HT = High temperature
A10 = A10 valves with A15 and A30 None = Standard
A15 = A15 actuators)
A30 = A30 4 =Spring return (41G, 41 series
A60 = A60 2-way valves with A10
actuator; 44, 45 series 2-way
valves)

For field assembly to ISO 5211-compliant actuators, 40G series and 40 series
valves must contain a two-flat, K-style stem. K-style stems are standard for all 40G
series valves and for many 44 and 45 series valves, but are optional for 41, 42, and
43 series valves. For more information, contact your Swagelok sales and service
representative.
To order a valve with a two-flat, K-style stem and without a handle, if they are not
standard, add -K-NH to the valve ordering number.
Example: B-43S4-K-NH

Mounting Bracket Kits Couplings and Set Screws

Valve Mounting Bracket Kit
Swagelok ISO 5211 mounting bracket Series➀ Ordering Number Replacement of 41, 42, or 43 series
kits contain: 41G, 41GX, valves mounted to ISO 5211‑compliant
SS-MB-41G-F04-11DIN-M➁
■ 316 stainless steel mounting bracket 42G, 42GX pneumatic actuators with equivalent
43G, 43GX SS-MB-43G-F04-11DIN-M 41G, 42G, or 43G series valves requires
■ Four A4 stainless steel socket head
41, 41X, new couplings and set screws.
cap screws (A4 is approximately SS-MB-41-F04-11DIN-M➁
42, 42X To order, contact your authorized
equivalent to 316 SS)
43, 43X SS-MB-43-F04-11DIN-M Swagelok representative.
■ Coupling
44, 44X SS-MB-44-F04-11DIN-M
■ 40G series—powdered metal
300 series stainless steel 45, 45X SS-MB-45-F05-14DIN-M
■ 40 series—316 stainless steel ➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve.
➁ 42G series and 42 series valves with VCO or
■ A4 stainless steel set screw VCR end connections mounted to a Swagelok
■ Instructions ISO 5211-compliant pneumatic actuator are
only available factory assembled.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 21

ISO 5211-Compliant Pneumatic Actuators

Dimensions A

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are 1.57

(39.9)
for reference only and are subject to
change.

2 mounting
holes
0.34 (8.6) dia
D

B E

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
F

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Valve Actuator
Series➀ Model A B C D E F
41G, 42G, A10 (90°) 4.65 (118) 2.00 (50.8) 4.06 (103) 1.02 (25.9) 1.44 (36.6) 2.84 (72.1)
41, 42 A15 (90°) 5.33 (135) 2.00 (50.8) 4.18 (106) 1.02 (25.9) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
41GX, 42GX,
A15 (180°) 7.55 (192) 2.00 (50.8) 4.18 (106) 1.02 (25.9) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
41X, 42X
A10 (90°) 4.65 (118) 2.00 (50.8) 4.05 (103) 1.10 (27.9) 1.44 (36.6) 2.84 (72.1)
43G, 43
A15 (90°) 5.33 (135) 2.00 (50.8) 4.16 (106) 1.10 (27.9) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
43GX, 43X A15 (180°) 7.55 (192) 2.00 (50.8) 4.16 (106) 1.10 (27.9) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
A10 (90°) 4.65 (118) 2.00 (50.8) 4.21 (107) 1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6) 2.84 (72.1)
44
A15 (90°) 5.33 (135) 2.00 (50.8) 4.32 (110) 1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
44X A15 (180°) 7.55 (192) 2.00 (50.8) 4.32 (110) 1.38 (35.1) 1.44 (36.6) 3.09 (78.5)
A30 (90°) 6.04 (153) 2.19 (55.6) 5.05 (128) 1.61 (40.9) 1.72 (43.7) 3.63 (92.2)
45
A60 (90°) 8.01 (203) 2.19 (55.6) 5.73 (146) 1.61 (40.9) 1.72 (43.7) 3.71 (94.2)
45X A30 (180°) 8.50 (216) 2.19 (55.6) 5.05 (128) 1.61 (40.9) 1.72 (43.7) 3.63 (92.2)
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve.

Options for ISO 5211-Compliant and Swagelok Pneumatic Actuators

Swagelok offers a range ■ Valve with No Handle Stop and No Handle (40G Series)
of accessories to enhance provides increased accessibility to packing bolt.
instrumentation and process
To order, add -NHS to the valve ordering number.
ball valve performance and
control, including solenoid Example: SS-43GS4-NHS
valves, limit switches, and For more information on actuator options, contact your
position sensors. Factory authorized Swagelok representative.
assemblies and kits for field
assembly are available.
Refer to Ball Valve Actuation
Options catalog, MS‑02‑343,
for additional information.
 22 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Electric Actuators
Dimensions
Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only and are subject to change.

3.56
(90.4)

141
series,
4.12
(105);
142
series,
5.25
(133)

0.20 1 1/8 hex

Swagelok electric actuators can be (5.1)
used to control the position of Swagelok 0.36 (9.1) 0.44
0.96 0.56
0.47 0.17 (11.2) 1.26 (14.2)
instrumentation ball valves; alternating- (11.9)
2.34 (59.4)
(4.3) (32.0) (24.4)
4.78
40G / 40

and direct-current models are available.

SERIES
BALL

(121)
An electrical signal is used to change
valve position from remote locations.
Integral limit switches provide an output Refer to Electric Actuators catalog, Electric actuators are not available on
signal of the valve position, even between MS-01-35, for features, testing, angle-pattern valves and vented valves.
positions. The drive shaft of these materials of construction, technical
actuators rotates in one direction. data, and dimensions.

• DO NOT USE THESE ACTUATORS ON VENTED BALL • Not CE marked.

VALVES. THE DRIVE SHAFT OF THESE ACTUATORS
ROTATES IN ONE DIRECTION.

Ordering Information
Factory-Assembled Valve and Actuator Actuator Kits for Field Assembly
1. Choose the actuator series that corresponds with the Order one actuator kit and one mounting bracket kit for each
selected valve series. valve.
1. Identify the valve series.
Valve Series➀ Actuator Series
41G, 41GX, 2. Follow steps 1 through 3 in the Factory-Assembled Valve
42G, 42GX, and Actuator ordering information.
141
41, 41X, 3. Replace the dash in the actuator designator with MS-1.
42, 42X
43G, 43GX,
Example: MS-141AC
43, 43X, 142 4. Select the mounting bracket kit ordering number from the
44, 44X table below. Kits include mounting brackets, cap screws,
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve. coupling, and instructions.
Example: A 41G series valve requires a 141 series actuator. Valve Mounting Bracket Kit
2. See the Actuator Specifications table in the Swagelok Series➀ Ordering Number
Electric Actuators catalog, MS-01-35. Based on the 41G, 41GX,
SS-MB-41G➁
actuator series, select the preferred voltage/frequency/ 42G, 42GX
conduit connection for the required actuator. 43G, 43GX SS-MB-43G
Example: 120 V (ac)/60 Hz/1/2 in. NPT 41, 41X,
MS-MB-41➁
42, 42X
3. Identify the valve flow path.
43, 43X MS-MB-43
Example: 2-way
44, 44X MS-MB-44-131
4. Add the actuator designator to the valve ordering number.
➀ X designates switching (3-way) valve.
Example: SS-41GS2-41AC ➁ 42G series and 42 series valves with VCO
or VCR end connections mounted to a
Swagelok electric actuator are only available
factory assembled.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 23

Process Options
Production Tests Test Production Test
To specify an optional production test Designator Description
in place of the standard testing, add a Valves are tested with nitrogen at a customer- specified pressure. Test
designator from the table at right to the -PT pressure must not exceed the rated pressure of the valve. Maximum allowable
valve ordering number. leak rate depends on test pressure.

Examples: SS-43GS4-PT 40G series—valves are hydrostatically tested with deionized water at 1.5 times
B-43S4-PT the rated pressure of the valve. No visible leakage is permitted.
-W20 40 series—valves are hydrostatically tested with deionized water at 1.5 times
the rated pressure of the valve. No visible leakage is permitted.
Note: Due to the valve design, rated pressure is decreased to 2/3 of the
standard rated pressure.
Valves are helium leak tested at a pressure of
-W31 1 × 10–4 Torr. The maximum allowable
leak rate is 4 × 10–9 std cm3/s.

Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) Valves Assembled Without Lubrication

40G series and 40 series valves are available with optional 40G series and 40 series ball valves assembled without
cleaning and packaging in accordance with Swagelok Special lubrication are cleaned and packaged in accordance with
Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) catalog, MS‑06-63, to Swagelok Special Cleaning and Packaging (SC-11) catalog,

40G / 40
SERIES
BALL
ensure compliance with product cleanliness requirements MS‑06‑63.
stated in ASTM G93 Level C.
40G Series
40G Series 40G series valves assembled without lubrication have a
Special cleaning of 40G series valves changes the low- pressure rating of 500 psig (34.4 bar).
temperature rating from –65°F (–53°C) to –30ºF (–34ºC).
40 Series
40 Series 40 series valves assembled without lubrication have a
Special cleaning of 40 series valves does not affect the pressure rating of 200 psig (13.7 bar). Brass valves are
temperature rating. assembled with stainless steel rings, discs, and ball stem.
Ordering Information Ordering Information
To order, add -SC11 to the valve ordering number. To order, add -1466 to the valve ordering number.
Examples: SS-43GS4-SC11 Examples: SS-43GS4-1466
B-43S4-SC11 B-43S4-1466

Oxygen Service Hazards • 44 and 45 series valves assembled without

For more information about hazards and risks of oxygen- lubrication have a significantly higher actuation
enriched systems, refer to Oxygen System Safety technical torque than valves assembled with lubrication.
report, MS-06-13.

Service Options
Sour Gas Service
40G series and 40 series valves for sour gas service are
available. Materials are selected in accordance with NACE
MR0175/ISO 15156.
To order, add -SG to the valve ordering number.
Examples: SS-42GF2-SG
SS-44F4-SG
 24 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Flow Path Options

Two-Port Paths Three-Port Paths

1
3

2
2

1
L Flow Path
Angle porting can L Flow Path
transfer a sample
Turn 90° Angle porting allows
from port 1 to port 2.
switching of port 1
to port 2 or port 1 Turn 90°

1 2 1 2 to port 3 when the

handle is rotated 90°.
THERE IS NO OFF
40G / 40

3 2 3 2
SERIES
BALL

Off—trap sample Switch—transfer POSITION. 1 1

from port 1 sample to port 2

Port 1 to port 2 Port 1 to port 3

Approx Pressure
Valve Orifice Ball Volume Rating Flow Path
Series in. (mm) in.3 (cm3) psig (bar) Designator H Flow Path
41G, 41 0.040 (1.02) 0.0004 (0.007)
Tee porting with a leg
42G, 42 0.047 (1.19) 0.0005 (0.008) to the bottom port
2500 (172)
43G 0.062 (1.57) 0.0012 (0.020) (port 1) allows ports Turn 90°
L
43 0.062 (1.57) 0.0013 (0.021) 1, 2, and 3 to be open
44 0.125 (3.18) 0.0073 (0.120) or closed at the same
1500 (103) time.
45 0.281 (7.14) 0.0473 (0.775) 3 2 3 2
1 1

All ports open All ports closed

HL Flow Path
Tee porting is used
HL Flow Path
for inline, on-off
service when fluid Turn 90°
must not be trapped
in the stem cavity.
Turn 90° Turn 90°
System fluid can be 1 2 1 2
evacuated through
port 2 when the valve
is in the off position. On Off
3 2 3 2 3 2
1 1 1
Pressure
Valve Orifice Rating Flow Path Ports 1 and 2 Ports 1, 2, and 3 Ports 1 and 3
Series in. (mm) psig (bar) Designator open open open
41G, 41 0.093 (2.36)
Tee porting with a leg to the bottom port (port 1) enables
42G, 42 0.125 (3.18) 2500 (172) selection of ports 1 and 2; 1 and 3; or 1, 2, and 3. THERE IS
43G, 43 0.187 (4.75) HL NO OFF POSITION.
44 0.281 (7.14)
1500 (103)
45 0.406 (10.3) Pressure
Valve Orifice Rating Flow Path
Series in. (mm) psig (bar) Designator
41GX, 41X 0.093 (2.36)
L = Angle
• Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in two- and 42GX, 42X 0.125 (3.18) 2500 (172)
H=T
 ee (all ports
three-port valves with L and HL flow paths and
43GX, 43X 0.187 (4.75) open or closed)
orifices larger than 0.049 in. (1.24 mm).
44X 0.281 (7.14) HL = Tee (no off
To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice. 1500 (103) position)
45X 0.406 (10.3)
See Ordering Information, page 27.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 25

Flow Path Options (40 Series)

Four-Port Paths

2
1

3
4

L Flow Path HL Flow Path

Angle porting
provided with four
ports and 360° Turn 90°
handle rotation; two 2 2 Turn 90° Turn 90°

adjacent ports are 2 2 2

connected and the 1 3 1 3
other two are closed.
1 3 1 3 1 3

40G / 40
SERIES
4 4

BALL
Ports 1 and 2 Ports 2 and 3
open open 4 4 4
Ports 1, 2, and Ports 2, 3, and 4 Ports 1, 3, and
3 open open 4 open

H Flow Path Tee porting provided with four ports and 360° rotation of the
handle; three adjacent ports can be connected at the same
Straight-pattern
time and the remaining port is off.
porting can switch
two streams on and Turn 90°
off alternately or 2 2
HH Flow Path
transfer a sample
from ports 1 and 3 to Crossover ports
1 3 1 3
ports 2 and 4. allow continuous flow
through ports 1 and Turn 90°
3 and continuous 2 2
4 4
Ports 1 and 3 Ports 2 and 4 flow through ports 2
open open
and 4. 1 3 1 3

4 4
Ports 1 and 3 Ports 2 and 4
open open

Pressure
Valve Orifice Rating Flow Path
Series in. (mm) psig (bar) Designator
L = Angle
43Y 0.062 (1.57) 2500 (172)
H = Straight
L, H, HL: 0.281 (7.14) HL = Tee
45Y 1500 (103)
HH: 0.161 (4.09) HH = Crossover

• Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in four-port

valves.
To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice.
See Ordering Information, page 27.
 26 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Flow Path Options (40 Series)

Five-Port Paths

5
4

2
3 1

L Flow Path HL Flow Path

Angle porting with Tee porting in the
a leg to the bottom ball with a leg to
port (port 1) allows Turn 90° the bottom port Turn 90°

two adjacent side 5 5 (port 1) permits 5 5

ports to be open three side ports to
40G / 40
SERIES
BALL

and the remaining 4 2 4 2 be open while the 4 2 4 2

two side ports to be 1 1 fourth side port is 1 1
closed. Switching closed. Switching
can be done in 90° 3 3 can be done in 90° 3 3
Ports 1, 2, and 3 Ports 1, 3, and 4 Ports 1, 2, 3, and Ports 1, 2, 3, and
increments with 360° open open increments with 360° 5 open 4 open
handle rotation. handle rotation.

Turn 90° Turn 90° Turn 90° Turn 90°

5 5 5 5

4 2 4 2 4 2 4 2
1 1 1 1

3 3 3 3
Ports 1, 4, and 5 Ports 1, 2, and 5 Ports 1, 3, 4, and Ports 1, 2, 4, and
open open 5 open 5 open

H Flow Path
Pressure
Tee porting in the Valve Orifice Rating Flow Path
ball with a leg to the Series in. (mm) psig (bar) Designator
bottom port (port 1) Turn 90°
5 5
43Z 0.062 (1.57) 2500 (172) L = Angle
allows selection of H = Tee ( 2 ports close)
ports 2 and 4 or 45Z 0.281 (7.14) 1500 (103) HL = Tee (1 port closes)
3 and 5 with 360° 4 2 4 2
handle rotation. 1 1

3 3
Ports 1, 2 and 4 Ports 1. 3, and 5
open open

• Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in five-port

valves.
To eliminate cross-port flow, specify a smaller orifice.
See Ordering Information, page 27.
 One-Piece Instrumentation Ball Valves—40G Series and 40 Series 27

Flow Path Options

Ordering Information
40G Series
Two- and three-port flow paths are available. Insert a flow
path designator into a 40G series ordering number as shown.
Examples: SS-41GLS2 for a two-port 41G series valve with L
flow path
SS-43GXHLS4 for a three-port 43G series valve
with HL flow path

40 Series
Two-and three-port paths are available for brass and alloy
Material Valve Series Designator
400 valves. Four-and five-port paths are available for stainless
43Y, 43Z,
steel, brass, and alloy 400 valves. 316 SS 44, 44X, SS
Add a material designator and insert a flow path designator 45, 45X, 45Y, 45Z
into a 40 series basic ordering number as shown. 41, 41X, 42, 42X,
43, 43X, 43Y, 43Z,
Examples: B
 -41LS2 for a brass two-port 41 series valve with Alloy 400
44, 44X,
M
L flow path 45, 45X, 45Y, 45Z
SS-44XHS6 for a stainless steel three-port

40G / 40
SERIES
41, 41X, 42, 42X,

BALL
44 series valve with H flow path 43, 43X, 43Y, 43Z,
Brass B
44, 44X, 45,
45X, 45Y, 45Z

• Warning: Cross-port flow may occur in some sizes

and flow paths.
To eliminate cross-port flow, specify an orifice of:
■ 0.049 in. for 41G, 42G, 43G, 41, 42, and 43 series valves
whose standard orifice is larger than 0.049 in. (1.24 mm).
Examples: SS-43GHLS4-049
B-43XLS4-049
■ 0.093 in. for 44 and 45 series valves whose standard orifice
is larger than 0.093 in. (2.36 mm).
Examples: SS-44LS6-093
SS-45YHS8-093
 28 Ball Valves and Quarter-Turn Plug Valves

Ordering Multiple Options and Accessories

Swagelok 40G series and 40 series instrumentation ball valves are available with a wide variety of options and accessories that
enable valve configurations customized to meet specific system requirements. Just insert or add designators as shown.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 5 6 7
SS - 43G E V L S4 -LL-RD
1 Body Material 5 Optional Flow Path 7 Options and Accessories
B = Brass (40 series only) H, L, HH, HL (page 24) Add multiple designators in
M = Alloy 400 (40 series only) alphanumeric order. Not all options
SS = 3
 16 stainless steel (40G series, 6 End Connections, Size available for all valves. See pages
44 series, 45 series) cited below.
Swagelok Tube Fittings
2 Valve Series Fractional, in. -A = Angle-pattern body (page 6)
S1 = 1/16 -BL, -GR, -OG, -RD, -YW = Nylon

On-Off (2-Way) (page 6) S2 = 1/8
41G, 42G, 43G, directional handle colors (page 13)
S4 = 1/4
41, 42, 43, 44, 45 S6 = 3/8 -K, -SHD, -SH, -BKB, ‑NH, ‑NHS,

40G / 40

‑LH, ‑LL, -LLC = Handle options

SERIES
BALL

Switching (3-Way) (page 8) S8 = 1/2

41GX, 42GX, 43GX, S12 = 3/4 (pages 13 and 21)
41X, 42X, 43X, 44X, 45X Metric, mm -WVS2, -WVS4, . . . -WVS8M =

Switching (5-Way) (page 10) S3MM = 3 Swagelok tube fitting vent port
43Z, 45Z S6MM = 6 connections (page 15)
S8MM = 8 -WV4T49-2, -WV6MT10-50M =

Switching (7-Way) (page 10) S10MM = 10
43Z6 Tube stub vent port connections
S12MM = 12 (page 15)
Crossover (4-Way) (page 11) Female NPT
43Y, 45Y -SE2, -SE4, -SE6 = Stem extensions

F2 = 1/8 in.
(page 15)
Crossover (6-Way) (page 11) F4 = 1/4 in.
43Y6 F6 = 3/8 in. -WN1, -WN2 = Directional name

F8 = 1/2 in. plates (page 15)

3 Packing Material Female ISO/BSP Tapered -PT, -W20, -W31 = Production tests

F4RT = 1/4 in. (page 23)
40G Series
F6RT = 3/8 in. -SC11 = Special cleaning and
E = UHMWPE
F8RT = 1/2 in. packaging (page 23)
None = modified PTFE
Male NPT
40 Series -1466 = No lubrication/special

M4 = 1/4 in.
None = PTFE cleaning and packaging (page 23)
Male NPT to
40T and 40E Series Swagelok Tube Fitting
E =Live-loaded UHMWPE (41, M4-S4 = 1/4 in.
42, 43 series sizes only) VCO Fittings
T=L  ive-loaded PFA VCO4 = 1/4 in.
(41, 42, 43 6-way/7-way, 44,
and 45 series) Integral Male VCR Fittings
VCR4 = 1/4 in.
 Live-loaded Modified PTFE
VCR8 = 1/2 in.
(43 series only)

4 Optional Vent Port

V = Vent port (page 15)

Caution: Do not mix or interchange parts with those of

other manufacturers.
MS-02-331, RevM, January 2021
 Introduction
Since 1947, Swagelok has designed, developed, and manufactured high-quality,
general-purpose and specialty fluid system products to meet the evolving needs of
global industries. Our focus is on understanding our customers’ needs, finding timely
solutions, and adding value with our products and services.
We are pleased to provide this global edition of the book-bound Swagelok Product
Catalog, which compiles more than 100 separate product catalogs, technical bulletins,
and reference documents into one convenient, easy-to-use volume. Each product
catalog is up to date at the time of printing, with its revision number shown on the last
page of the individual catalog. Subsequent revisions will supersede the printed version
and will be posted on the Swagelok website and in the Swagelok electronic Desktop
Technical Reference (eDTR) tool.
For more information, visit your Swagelok website or contact your authorized
Swagelok sales and service representative.

Warranty Information
Not all trademarks listed below apply to this catalog.
Swagelok products are backed by The Swagelok Limited Life- Swagelok, Cajon, Ferrule-Pak, Goop, Hinging-Collecting,
IGC, Kenmac, Micro-Fit, Nupro, Snoop, Sno-Trik, SWAK, VCO,
time Warranty. For a copy, visit swagelok.com or contact your VCR, Ultra-Torr, Whitey—TM Swagelok Company
authorized Swagelok representative. 15-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp.
AccuTrak, Beacon, Westlock—TM Tyco International Services
Aflas—TM Asahi Glass Co., Ltd.
ASCO, El-O-Matic—TM Emerson
AutoCAD—TM Autodesk, Inc.
CSA—TM Canadian Standards Association
Safe Product Selection Crastin, DuPont, Kalrez, Krytox, Teflon, Viton—TM E.I. duPont
When selecting a product, the total system design must Nemours and Company
DeviceNet—TM ODVA
be considered to ensure safe, trouble-free performance. Dyneon, Elgiloy, TFM—TM Dyneon
Function, material compatibility, adequate ratings, Elgiloy—TM Elgiloy Specialty Metals
FM —TM FM Global
proper installation, operation, and maintenance are the Grafoil—TM GrafTech International Holdings, Inc.
Honeywell, MICRO SWITCH—TM Honeywell
responsibilities of the system designer and user. MAC—TM MAC Valves
Microsoft, Windows—TM Microsoft Corp.
NACE—TM NACE International
PH 15-7 Mo, 17-7 PH—TM AK Steel Corp
picofast—Hans Turck KG
• WARNING Pillar—TM Nippon Pillar Packing Company, Ltd.
Raychem—TM Tyco Electronics Corp.
Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or Sandvik, SAF 2507—TM Sandvik AB
components not governed by industrial design Simriz—TM Freudenberg-NOK
SolidWorks—TM SolidWorks Corporation
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end UL—Underwriters Laboratories Inc.
connections, with those of other manufacturers. Xylan—TM Whitford Corporation
© 2020 Swagelok Company
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 1
www.swagelok.com

Hose and Flex ible Tubing

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

Hose As se mblie s, Bulk Hose, Flex ible Tubing, HOSE /

a nd End Conne ctions

■ Core materials include metal, PTFE, PFA, vinyl, nylon, polyethylene, and rubber

■ Nominal hose sizes 1/8 to 2 in.

■ Wide range of fractional and metric end connections

■ Custom lengths available

■ Optional covers, tagging, and testing

 2 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Contents

Swagelok® Hose and Flexible Metal Hose Fluoropolymer Hose

Tubing Nomenclature, 4

FX Series Metal Hose, 11 T Series PTFE Hose, 45

Swagelok Hose and Flexible
Tubing Selection Guide, 7

Considerations for Selecting a

Hose Assembly Solution, 9 FM Series Metal Hose, 16 B Series PTFE Hose, 51

Swagelok Hose and Flexible

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Tubing Installation and Use

Guide, 10
FJ Series Metal Hose, 22 X Series PTFE Hose, 53

FL Series Metal Hose, 27 S Series PTFE Hose, 55

AH Series Metal Hose, 33 C Series PTFE Hose, 57

J Series PTFE Hose, 59

Metal Flexible Tubing

Convoluted Metal
Tubing, 37
N Series PTFE Hose, 61

Hybrid Hose

FP Series Hybrid Hose, 42

SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 3

Contents

W Series PTFE Hose, 63 Nylon Hose Options

NG Series Nylon Hose, 85 Covers, 103

Testing, 103
F Series PTFE Hose, 65

Tags, 104
7R and 8R Series Nylon Hose, 90

Approvals, 105

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
U Series PFA Hose, 67

Considerations for Hose

Insulation, 107
7N and 8N Series Nylon Hose, 91

Y Insulation Option, 108

PFA Tubing
Tools and Accessories
PFA Series PFA Tubing, 79
Polyethylene Hose
Cutting Tools for Hose
and Soft Tubing, 109

7P Series Polyethylene Hose, 96

Assembly Tools for Nylon,
Polyethylene, and Rubber Hose,
Vinyl Tubing 109

LT Series Vinyl Tubing, 81

Rubber Hose

PB Series Rubber Hose, 98

Hose Connectors

HC Series—End Connections for

Soft Tubing and Hose, 82

Dimensions, in inches (millimeters), are for reference only

and are subject to change. Dimensions are shown with
Swagelok nuts finger-tight. For Swagelok nut dimensions,
refer to Gaugeable Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings catalog,
MS‑01‑140. For technical drawings showing dimensions,
contact your authorized Swagelok sales and service
representative.
 4 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature

Hose Minimum Dynamic Bend Radius Permeation

SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
A multiple-layered flexible conduit The smallest bend radius that a hose The movement of a liquid, gas, or
through which fluid is conveyed from is rated to perform in a dynamic vapor through a solid. All materials
one point to another. application. are permeable to a degree and
should be tested for application

SW
Nominal Hose Size Minimum Static Bend Radius

AG
compatibility prior to installation.

ELO
An approximation of the hose inside The smallest bend radius that a hose is

K
diameter. rated to perform in a static application. Dynamic Application
An application in which the hose
Flexible Tubing Flexibility
flexes or changes position.
A single-layered flexible conduit The relative ease or difficulty of
through which fluid is conveyed from bending a nonpressurized hose or Static Application
one point to another. tubing assembly. An application in which the hose is
stationary and does not move in any
Bend Radius Burst Pressure
plane.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

The radius of the bent section of The pressure at which leakage occurs
hose, measured to the center line or when exposed to a laboratory burst test.
inside of the curved section.

Inside Center line

bend radius bend radius

Splices
Splices consist of a connector
fitting and crimp collars that join two
lengths of hose to form assemblies.
Splices may be required to obtain
longer hose lengths of fluoropolymer A
hose (B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F, and U
series), as noted in the Ordering Dimensions, in. (mm)
Information for each series. Nominal Minimum Maximum
Splice dimensions shown in the Hose Size A Inside Outside
in. (mm) Maximum Diameter Dimension
table at right are for reference
1/8 (3.2) 2.60 (66.0) 0.070 (1.7) 0.55 (14.0)
only and are subject to change.
1/4 (6.4) 2.60 (66.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.59 (15.0)
Additional overall hose length may
be needed to compensate for the 3/8 (9.6) 3.30 (83.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
effect of splices on hose minimum 1/2 (12.7) 3.70 (94.0) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4)
bend radius. For more information, 3/4 (19.0) 4.80 (122) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3)
contact your authorized Swagelok 1 (25.4) 4.60 (117) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.4)
sales and service representative. 1 1/2 (38.1) 5.60 (142) 1.24 (31.4) 2.20 (55.9)
2 (50.8) 6.90 (175) 1.68 (42.6) 2.74 (69.6)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 5

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature

Conductive
A material that easily conducts an electrical current, having an electrical resistance less than 1×104 ohms. Swagelok
hoses with metal cores are examples of conductive hoses.

Static Dissipative
A material that has the ability to alleviate a static electrical charge, having an electrical resistance more than 1×104 ohms
but less than 1×1011 ohms. Select Swagelok hoses are constructed with carbon black filled core materials (nylon, PTFE,
or PFA) to provide static dissipation. The intent of a hose being static dissipative is to alleviate any static charge that may
build as fluid flows through the hose. Note that hoses with conductive cores may also be used in applications where fluid
flow generates a static charge. The lower electrical resistance in a conductive core dissipates the charge more readily.

Non-Conductive

FLEXIBLE
A material that does not normally transmit or conduct an electrical charge. Materials considered non-conductive have an

TUBING

HOSE /
electrical resistance in excess of 1×1011 ohms. Swagelok hoses constructed with non-metallic cores that do not contain
carbon black are generally non-conductive. However, the presence of metal braid may make a hose conductive from end
connection to end connection.

Unspecified
The term used for hoses that do not have a design intent concerning electrical properties. These hoses may be either
conductive or non-conductive depending on assembly tolerances from hose to hose, or other factors.

It is important to consider the electrical properties of the hose core, the reinforcing layer(s), and the overall end-to-
end assembly to ensure the desired results. A hose is considered conductive if it easily carries a charge from one
end connection to the other, even if the core does not contain carbon black. The charge is carried through the metal
reinforcing braid. If the core does not contain carbon black, the media in the hose is electrically insulated from the wire
braid, making it possible for a charge to build along the core tube.

The table below summarizes the electrical properties of each hose series core, reinforcement layer(s), and total assembly
end-to-end. Hoses are identified with a letter notation as follows:
• Non-conductive (N)
• Conductive (C)
• Static dissipative (D)
• Unspecified (U)

Hose End Connection to Hose End Connection to

Series Core Reinforcement End Connection Series Core Reinforcement End Connection
FM C C C CC D U D
FJ C C C JT N U U
FL C C C NC D U D
FX C C C WC D U D

AH C C C FT N U U
FC D U D
Convoluted
C C C
Tube UT N U U
TH N C C UC D U D
TC D C C NG D U D
TL N C C 7R N U U
BT N U U
8R N U U
XT N U U
7N N N N
XC D U D
8N N N N
ST N U U
7P N U U
SC D U D
PB N U U
CT N U U
 6 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Nomenclature

End Connection
The fitting that is assembled
Maximum Outside Dimension Live Length (L) onto each end of the hose to
The largest nominal outside The flexible length of a provide a means of installation
dimension of the hose assembly. hose or tubing assembly. into a fluid system.

Live Length (L)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

A
Overall Length (OAL)

Braid (Overbraid) Overall Length (OAL) End Connection Length (A)

A flexible, woven The distance from Overall length of the end
reinforcement. end to end for a hose connection.
or tubing assembly.

Core
The innermost material of the hose
that carries the system media, often
referred to as the wetted surface.

Spring Guard Reinforcement

A helical metal spring used to Material used to
protect the hose from abrasion, reinforce the core
overbending, and kinking. and increase its
pressure-containing
capacity.

Cover Minimum Inside Diameter

The outermost material of a hose, used to The smallest inside diameter of
protect the reinforcement and core from the hose prior to assembly.
environmental conditions and wear.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 7

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Selection Guide

See individual hose series sections for additional technical information.
Materials of Construction

Series Core Reinforcement Cover Page

Metal Hose
321 SS braid standard;
FX Convoluted 316L SS — 11
316L SS braid available

FM Convoluted 316L SS 316L SS braid — 16

304 SS braid standard;

FJ Convoluted 316L SS — 22
316L SS braid available
321 SS braid (1/4 and 1/2 in.)
FL Convoluted 316L SS — 27
316L SS braid (all other sizes)

AH Convoluted C-276 316L SS braid — 33

Metal Flexible Tubing

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Convoluted
Convoluted 321 SS — — 37
Tube
Fluoropolymer Hose
304 SS braid standard; 316L SS
T Smooth-bore PTFE➀ — 302
and alloy 400 braid available

B Smooth-bore PTFE 304 SS braid — 51

X Smooth-bore PTFE➀ Fiber braid with 304 SS braid — 53

S Smooth-bore PTFE➀ Fiber braid with 304 SS braid Silicone 55

C Convoluted PTFE➀ 304 SS braid — 57

J Convoluted PTFE 304 SS braid Silicone 59

Convoluted, Insulating wrap

N — 61
carbon black-filled PTFE and aramid fiber braid
Smooth-bore, Fiber braid with insulating wrap
W Silicone 63
carbon black-filled PTFE and 304 SS braid

F Smooth-bore PTFE➀ Fiber braid — 65

U Smooth-bore PFA➁ 302 SS braid Silicone 67

PFA Tubing

PFA Smooth-bore PFA — — 79

Vinyl Tubing

LT Smooth-bore clear vinyl — — 81

Nylon Hose
Smooth-bore,
NG Fiber braid Perforated black polyurethane 85
static dissipative nylon

7R Smooth-bore nylon Fiber braid Perforated black polyurethane 90

8R Smooth-bore nylon Fiber braid Perforated black polyurethane 90

Smooth-bore,
7N Fiber braid Nonperforated orange polyurethane 91
nonconductive nylon
Smooth-bore,
8N Fiber braid Nonperforated orange polyurethane 91
nonconductive nylon
Polyethylene Hose

7P Smooth-bore polyethylene Fiber braid Nonperforated blue polyurethane 96

Rubber Hose
Blue Buna N
PB Smooth-bore Buna N Synthetic fiber braid 98
(other colors available)
➀ Carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for applications that require static dissipation.
➁ Carbon black-filled PFA core is available for applications that require static dissipation.
 8 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Selection Guide

See individual hose series sections for additional technical information.
Nominal Hose Size, in. Temperature
Working Pressure at 70°F (20°C), psig (bar)④ Range
Series 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2 °F (°C)④ Page
Metal Hose
6000 5000 4500 3600 3000 2600 2200 1675 −325 to 1000
FX — — 11
(413) (344) (310) (248) (206) (179) (151) (115) (−200 to 537)
3100 2000 1800 1500 1200 950 900 500 −325 to 850
FM — — 16
(213) (137) (124) (103) (82.6) (65.4) (62.0) (34.4) (−200 to 454)
1600 1470 1110 860 680 680 520 450 −325 to 800
FJ — — 22
(110) (101) (76.4) (59.2) (46.8) (46.8) (35.8) (31.0) (−200 to 426)
1500 1470 1200 860 680 645 520 380 −325 to 850
FL — — 27
(103) (101) (82.6) (59.2) (46.8) (44.4) (35.8) (26.1) (−200 to 454)
1110 860 680 520 450 −325 to 800
AH — — — — — 33
(76.4) (59.2) (46.8) (35.8) (31.0) (−200 to 426)
Metal Flexible Tubing
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Convoluted 100 25 25 25 25 25 70 to 1000

— — — — 37
Tube (6.8) (1.7) (1.7) (1.7) (1.7) (1.7) (20 to 537)
Fluoropolymer Hose
3000➀ 2500 2000 1500 1000
T — — — — — 302
(206) (172) (137) (103) (68.9)
3000 −65 to 450
B — — — — — — — — — 51
(206) (−53 to 230)
3500 3000 1800 1250 1000
X — — — — — 53
(241) (206) (124) (86.1) (68.9)
3000 3500 3000 1800 1250 1000 −65 to 400
S — — — — 55
(206) (241) (206) (124) (86.1) (68.9) (−53 to 204)
1500 1100 750 700 525 −65 to 450➁
C — — — — — 57
(103) (75.7) (51.6) (48.2) (36.1) (−53 to 230)
1500 1100 750 −65 to 400
J — — — — — — — 59
(103) (75.7) (51.6) (−53 to 204)
1250 750 375 −65 to 400
N — — — — — — — 61
(86.1) (51.6) (25.8) (−53 to 204)
750 750 500 −65 to 400
W — — — — — — — 63
(51.6) (51.6) (34.4) (−53 to 204)
800 650 450 325 −65 to 450
F — — — — — — 65
(55.1) (44.7) (31.0) (22.3) (−53 to 230)
300 300 250 200 150 –65 to 400
U — — — — — 67
(20.6) (20.6) (17.2) (13.7) (10.3) (–53 to 204)
PFA Tubing
275 275 180 125 83 61 70 to 400
PFA — — — — 79
(18.9) (18.9) (12.4) (8.6) (5.7) (4.2) (20 to 204)
Vinyl Tubing
40 30 25 15 10 −40 to 165
LT — — — — — 81
(2.7) (2.0) (1.7) (1.0) (0.68) (−40 to 73)
Nylon Hose
5000 5000 5000 −40 to 150
NG — — — — — — — 85
(344) (344) (344) (−40 to 65)
2750 2250 2000 −40 to 200
7R — — — — — — — 90
(189) (155) (137) (−40 to 93)
5000 4000 3500 2250 2000 −40 to 200
8R — — — — — 90
(344) (275) (241) (155) (137) (−40 to 93)
2750 2250 2000 −40 to 200
7N — — — — — — — 91
(189) (155) (137) (−40 to 93)
2250 −40 to 200
8N — — — — — — — — — 91
(155) (−40 to 93)
Polyethylene Hose
2750 2250 2000 1500 1500 −10 to 150
7P — — — — — 96
(189) (155) (137) (103) (103) (−23 to 65)
Rubber Hose
350 300 300 300 300 −40 to 200➂
PB — — — — — 98
(24.1) (20.6) (20.6) (20.6) (20.6) (−40 to 93)
➀ T series hose with alloy 400 braid is rated to 1500 psig (103 bar).
➁ C series hose is rated from −20 to 340°F (−28 to 171°C) in the 1 1/2 and 2 in. nominal hose sizes.
➂ PB series hose is rated from −20 to 200°F (−28 to 93°C) in the 1 in. nominal hose size.
➃ Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 9

Considerations for Selecting a Hose Assembly Solution

Temperature Orientation
Identify the minimum and maximum temperatures the hose Clarify space constraint concerns. Hose assemblies
assembly will be exposed to with regard to the system media with elbows and union ball joints may help resolve space
and the environment. constraint issues.
Pressure Desired Flow
Identify the minimum and maximum pressures (or vacuum) Consider desired flow. Hose connection size, core tube
within and outside the hose assembly. construction, and routed installation may impact flow.
Material Drainability
Identify the system media and the environment to which the Consider core construction as this will impact drainability.
hose assembly will be exposed. This will help determine
Test Reports
the materials of construction best suited to the application
Identify the need for documentation in the form of test
demands and whether the hose requires a static dissipative
reports.
core.
Special Testing

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Movement
Many applications may require testing to requirements
Confirm whether the hose assembly will be installed
different from the production tests listed. For example, metal
in dynamic applications as this will require different
hose assemblies undergo an inboard helium leak test to a
considerations than a static application.
maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –5 std cm3/s. If your application
Length uses liquid at a positive pressure, you may request an
Determine the most likely route for installation of the hose, additional hydrostatic proof test.
and use this to identify length requirements.
Special Marking
Discuss special marking requirements; there are different
options available to readily identify hose assemblies.
Documentation and Regulatory Requirements
Identify the need for special regulatory approvals or
documentation.
Additional Protection and Covers
Identify whether covers are necessary for additional
protection of the hose assemblies or surrounding systems.

Additional Considerations
■ Use of hose and tubing within applications and handling
practices will affect how it performs over time. Catalog
performance claims such as burst pressure, working
pressure, static dissipation, moisture content, permeation
rates, and cycle life apply to never-used products. For this
reason, system maintenance and replacement schedules
should be considered.

Cautions
• Nylon, PFA, polyethylene, PTFE, and rubber are
permeable materials. Gases, vapors, and liquids may
migrate through cores of these materials. The rate of
permeation is affected by many application-specific
variables.
Cleanliness • Nonperforated covers may blister in gas service.
Identify the need for cleanliness. Ease of cleaning the
internal surfaces of the hose, as well as maintaining outside • Thermal cycling of any nonmetal hose may affect
cleanliness may be of concern. its ability to maintain a positive seal. Testing should
be performed to verify suitability in actual operating
End Connection conditions.
Identify the type of end connections which are most
compatible with the system requirements. End connections • All equipment must be properly grounded to allow
differ with regard to materials of construction and pressure static dissipation and help to prevent static sparking.
ratings. • Nonconductive hoses can be conduits for electricity if
they contain conductive fluids. Verify the conductive
properties of the system media prior to use.
 10 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Swagelok Hose and Flexible Tubing Installation and Use Guide

Inspection Motion Absorption
Establish an inspection schedule based on system Distribute movement and prevent bends smaller than the
application and replacement history. hose’s minimum bend radius by providing sufficient hose
length.
Electrostatic Discharge
Static electricity can be generated by fluid passing through
the hose. Select hose with sufficient conductivity to ground
the static electric charge and allow static dissipation. If
static electricity generation is possible within an application,
choose static dissipative hose and properly ground to earth.
Vibration
Evaluate amount of system vibration when selecting hose.
Metal hose may not be appropriate for systems with constant
or severe vibration. Recommended Not recommended
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Length stainless motion absorption

Take into consideration hose movement, system Machine Tolerance

pressurization, and thermal expansion when determining Allow for changes in length resulting from machine motion
hose length. Installing hose that does not have sufficient and tolerances.
length to accommodate these factors may reduce hose life.
Minimum Bend Radius
Follow minimum bend radius requirements for your hose. Recommended
Installing hose with smaller bends may kink hose and reduce
hose life.
Not recommended
System Pressure Changes
Allow sufficient hose length to accommodate changing
system pressures. Do not connect high-
stainless and low
machine pressure
pressure changes
hoses
Minimum Bend
straight radius Lengthen
length
(2x Hose O.D.)

Recommended Not recommended

Shorten
Hose rupture or leakage may result from bending too close to
the hose/fitting connection.

Bending in One Plane

Avoid twisting the hose by bending it inStainless
one plane only.
system pressure For a
changes

compound bend, use multiple hose pieces or other isolation

methods.

Recommended Not recommended

stainless minimum bend radius

Hose Strain
Elbows and adapters can be used to relieve hose strain.

Recommended Not recommended

Recommended Not recommended

Stainless hose strain

For additional information, see SAE J1273, Recommended

Practices for Hydraulic Hose Assemblies. stainless bending in one plane
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 11

FX Series Metal Hose

Features
■ High-pressure corrosion resistant all-metal hose. ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum and high-
■ 316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. pressure corrosive environments or where permeation is
undesirable.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. and working pressures from
vacuum to 6000 psig (413 bar). ■ Standard and custom assemblies available.

■ Double braid layers of 321 stainless steel promotes hose ■ Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
pressure containment. helium leak testing. See page 103 for details.
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

321 SS Weld
double‑braid layers 316L SS core 316 SS

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
end connections

304 SS weld collar

Technical Data
Working
Pressure at Minimum
Minimum Center Line –325 to 300°F Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–200 to 148°C) Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.68 (17.3) 1.5 (3.81) 5.5 (14.0) 6000 (413) 24 000 (1653) 0.49 (0.73)
3/8 (9.7) 0.38 (9.5) 0.92 (23.4) 2.5 (6.40) 7.0 (17.8) 5000 (344) 20 000 (1378) 0.77 (1.15)
1/2 (12.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.98 (24.9) 3.0 (7.62) 8.0 (20.3) 4500 (310) 18 000 (1240) 0.85 (1.26)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.40 (35.6) 4.0 (10.2) 10.0 (25.4) –325 to 1000 3600 (248) 14 400 (992) 1.58 (2.35)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.70 (43.2) 5.0 (12.7) 11.0 (27.9) (–200 to 537) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 2.32 (3.45)
1 1/4 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 2.00 (50.8) 6.5 (16.5) 12.5 (31.8) 2600 (179) 10 400 (716) 2.88 (4.29)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.36 (59.9) 7.5 (19.1) 13.0 (33.0) 2200 (151) 8 800 (606) 3.57 (5.31)
2 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.82 (71.6) 9.0 (22.9) 14.0 (35.6) 1675 (115) 6 700 (461) 4.45 (6.62)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure
Piping B31.3, Process Piping.

Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Temperature Working Pressure
°F (°C) Vacuum to ... psig (bar)
–325 (–200) to 300 (148) 6000 (413) 5000 (344) 4500 (310) 3600 (248) 3000 (206) 2600 (179) 2200 (151) 1675 (115)
400 (204) 5640 (388) 4700 (323) 4230 (291) 3384 (233) 2820 (194) 2444 (168) 2068 (142) 1574 (108)
500 (260) 5317 (366) 4431 (305) 3988 (274) 3190 (219) 2658 (183) 2304 (158) 1949 (134) 1484 (102)
600 (315) 5029 (346) 4191 (288) 3772 (259) 3017 (207) 2514 (193) 2179 (150) 1844 (127) 1404 (96.7)
700 (371) 4850 (334) 4041 (278) 3637 (250) 2910 (200) 2425 (167) 2101 (144) 1778 (122) 1354 (93.2)
800 (426) 4634 (319) 3862 (266) 3476 (239) 2780 (191) 2317 (159) 2008 (138) 1699 (117) 1293 (89.0)
850 (454) 4562 (314) 3802 (261) 3422 (235) 2737 (188) 2281 (157) 1977 (136) 1673 (115) 1273 (87.7)
900 (482) 4455 (306) 3712 (255) 3341 (230) 2673 (184) 2227 (153) 1930 (132) 1633 (112) 1243 (85.6)
950 (510) 4347 (299) 3622 (249) 3260 (224) 2608 (179) 2173 (149) 1883 (129) 1594 (109) 1213 (83.5)
1000 (537) 4239 (292) 3532 (243) 3179 (219) 2543 (175) 2119 (145) 1837 (126) 1554 (107) 1183 (81.5)
 12 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FX Series Metal Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Do not subject flexible metal
Every Swagelok FX series hose Swagelok FX series hose components hose to pressure surges, shock,
assembly is inboard helium leak tested are cleaned in accordance with or pulsations, where the peak
to a maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –5 Swagelok Standard Cleaning and pressure is greater than 50 % of
std cm3/s. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. the working pressure rating.
For additional testing, see Testing, Each hose is bagged individually
page 103. and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - FX 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F
in. cm
1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options
End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on next page. with a dash between each designator.
CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
2 Hose 5 Overall Length A = Armor guard
FX = F
 X series high-pressure Inches in tenths or centimeters, in F = Fire jacket
metal hose whole numbers. Include CM as shown G = CGA 4.1 cleaning on hose
for centimeter lengths. wetted surfaces
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. F1 = Thermosleeve
H7 =Helium leak test (1 × 10−7 std
4 = 1/4 16 = 1
cm3/s)
6 = 3/8 20 = 1 1/4
N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
8 = 1/2 24 = 1 1/2
Z = 316L SS braid material
12 = 3/4 32 = 2
Mat Tags
MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 13

FX Series Metal Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
1/4 4 TA4 1.64 (41.7) 0.18 (4.6) 0.78 (19.8)
3/8 6 TA6 1.81 (46.0) 0.27 (6.9) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 TA8 2.28 (57.9) 0.37 (9.4) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 TA12 2.62 (66.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 TA16 2.99 (75.9) 0.80 (20.3) 1.79 (45.5)

A 1 1/4 20 TA20 3.91 (99.3) 1.02 (25.9) 2.16 (54.9)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
End Connections 1 1/2 24 TA24 4.47 (114) 1.25 (31.8) 2.59 (65.8)
with Hex Flat 2 32 TA32 5.70 (145) 1.72 (43.7) 3.45 (87.6)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 TM6 42.2 (1.66) 4.1 (0.16) 19.8 (0.78)
8 4 TM8 42.4 (1.67) 5.6 (0.22) 19.8 (0.78)
10 6 TM10 53.3 (2.10) 7.1 (0.28) 25.7 (1.01)
12 8 TM12 67.9 (2.67) 8.9 (0.35) 27.4 (1.08)
18 12 TM18 64.0 (2.52) 14.0 (0.55) 38.1 (1.50)
25 16 TM25 75.9 (2.99) 19.8 (0.78) 45.5 (1.79)
32 20 TM32 87.4 (3.44) 26.4 (1.04) 57.4 (2.26)
38 24 TM38 97.3 (3.83) 31.8 (1.25) 69.1 (2.72)

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Fitting Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
1/4 4 SL4 1.99 (50.5) 0.19 (4.8) 0.78 (19.8)
3/8 6 SL6 2.07 (52.6) 0.28 (7.1) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 SL8 2.56 (65.0) 0.41 (10.4) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 SL12 2.74 (69.6) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 SL16 3.20 (81.3) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/4 20 SL20 3.79 (96.3) 1.09 (27.7) 2.10 (53.3)
1 1/2 24 SL24 4.25 (108) 1.35 (34.3) 2.45 (62.2)
2 32 SL32 5.47 (139) 1.82 (46.2) 3.17 (80.5)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 SM6 50.5 (1.99) 4.8 (0.19) 19.8 (0.78)
8 4 SM8 51.6 (2.03) 6.4 (0.25) 19.8 (0.78)
10 6 SM10 53.6 (2.11) 7.9 (0.31) 25.7 (1.01)
12 8 SM12 65.0 (2.56) 9.7 (0.38) 27.4 (1.08)
18 12 SM18 69.6 (2.74) 15.0 (0.59) 38.1 (1.50)
25 16 SM25 81.3 (3.20) 21.8 (0.86) 45.5 (1.79)
32 20 SM32 98.8 (3.89) 28.7 (1.13) 53.3 (2.10)
38 24 SM38 111 (4.36) 33.8 (1.33) 63.2 (2.49)
 14 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FX Series Metal Hose

Rotatable Male
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR® Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RM4 1.81 (46) 0.18 (4.6) 0.78 (19.8)
1/2 8 RM8 2.13 (54.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.08 (27.4)
A 3/4 12 RM12 2.75 (69.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.51 (38.4)
1 16 RM16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8)

Rotatable Female
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

1/4 4 RF4 1.81 (46) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1)

SWAGELOK

1/2 8 RF8 2.13 (54.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)

3/4 12 RF12 2.75 (69.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)
A 1 16 RF16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 VF4 1.27 (32.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.79 (20.1)
1/2 8 VF8 1.44 (36.6) 0.41 (10.4) 1.08 (27.4)
A
3/4 12 VF12 1.69 (42.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)
1 16 VF16 1.73 (43.9) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)

SAE 37° (JIC) Female

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 AS4 1.67 (42.4) 0.19 (4.8) 0.78 (19.8)
3/8 6 AS6 1.79 (45.5) 0.28 (7.1) 1.01 (25.7)
A
1/2 8 AS8 2.08 (52.8) 0.39 (9.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 AS12 2.39 (60.7) 0.61 (15.5) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 AS16 2.64 (67.1) 0.84 (21.3) 1.79 (45.5)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 15

FX Series Metal Hose

Female Pipe Threads,
Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 PF4 1.72 (43.7) 0.30 (7.6) 0.87 (22.1)
A 3/8 6 PF6 1.84 (46.7) 0.42 (10.7) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 PF8 2.58 (65.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.53 (64.3) 0.73 (18.5) 1.51 (38.4)
1 16 PF16 2.92 (74.2) 0.95 (24.1) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 PF24 3.28 (83.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.74 (69.6)

Male Pipe Threads, NPT and

NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)

FLEXIBLE
(ISO 7)

TUBING
Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum

HOSE /
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/4 4 PM4 1.82 (46.2) 0.28 (7.1) 0.78 (19.8)
A
3/8 6 PM6 1.91 (48.5) 0.38 (9.7) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 PM8 2.45 (62.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 PM12 2.57 (65.3) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 PM16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/4 20 PM20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.10 (53.3)
1 1/2 24 PM24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.2)
2 32 PM32 3.88 (98.6) 1.81 (46.0) 2.92 (74.2)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 4 MT4 1.82 (46.2) 0.28 (7.1) 0.78 (19.8)
3/8 6 MT6 1.91 (48.5) 0.38 (9.7) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 MT8 2.45 (62.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 MT12 2.57 (65.3) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 MT16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/4 20 MT20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.10 (53.3)
1 1/2 24 MT24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.2)

Tube Butt Welds

Tube Dimensions, in. (mm)
Butt Weld Wall Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Thickness Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A
1/4 0.035 4 TB4 1.77 (45.0) 0.18 (4.6) 0.78 (19.8)
0.75 in.
3/8 0.035 6 TB6 1.82 (46.2) 0.31 (7.9) 1.01 (25.7)
(19.0 mm) 1/2 0.049 8 TB8 2.17 (55.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 0.049 12 TB12 2.27 (57.7) 0.65 (16.5) 1.50 (38.1)
1 0.065 16 TB16 2.46 (62.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.79 (45.5)
 16 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FM Series Metal Hose

Features
■ All-metal hose promotes corrosion resistance. ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum applications
■ 316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. and medium-pressure corrosive environments, or where
permeation is undesirable.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. and working pressures from
vacuum to 3100 psig (213 bar). ■ Standard and custom assemblies available.

■ Single braid layer of 316L stainless steel promotes hose ■ Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
pressure containment and exhibits strong performance in helium leak testing. See page 103 for details.
dynamic cycling applications. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

316L SS braid 316L SS core Weld 316 SS end

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

connections

Technical Data
Working
Pressure at Minimum
Minimum Center Line –325 to 100°F Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–200 to 37°C) Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.28 (7.1) 0.53 (13.5) 2.25 (5.72) 10.0 (25.4) 3100 (213) 12 400 (854) 0.29 (0.43)
3/8 (9.7) 0.42 (10.6) 0.69 (17.5) 3.00 (7.62) 12.0 (30.5) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.33 (0.49)
1/2 (12.7) 0.53 (13.5) 0.85 (21.6) 4.50 (11.4) 16.0 (40.6) 1800 (124) 7 200 (496) 0.45 (0.67)
3/4 (19.0) 0.80 (20.3) 1.15 (29.1) 6.00 (15.2) 17.0 (43.2) –325 to 850 1500 (103) 6 000 (413) 0.62 (0.92)
1 (25.4) 1.03 (26.0) 1.45 (36.9) 6.75 (17.1) 20.0 (50.8) (–200 to 454) 1200 (82.6) 4 800 (330) 0.77 (1.15)
1 1/4 (31.8) 1.30 (33.0) 1.75 (44.5) 4.50 (11.4) 23.0 (58.4) 950 (65.4) 3 800 (261) 1.05 (1.56)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.53 (38.9) 2.02 (51.3) 5.25 (13.3) 26.0 (66.0) 900 (62.0) 3 600 (248) 1.18 (1.76)
2 (50.8) 2.05 (52.1) 2.57 (65.3) 6.75 (17.1) 32.0 (81.3) 500 (34.4) 2 000 (137) 1.66 (2.47)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping, B31.1 Power Piping, and ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, vacuum to ... psig (bar)
–325 (–200) to 100 (37) 3100 (213) 2000 (137) 1800 (124) 1500 (103) 1200 (82.6) 950 (65.4) 900 (62.0) 500 (34.4)
200 (93) 2604 (179) 1680 (115) 1512 (104) 1260 (86.8) 1008 (69.4) 798 (54.9) 756 (52.0) 420 (28.9)
300 (148) 2356 (162) 1520 (104) 1368 (94.2) 1140 (78.5) 912 (62.8) 722 (49.7) 684 (47.1) 380 (26.1)
400 (204) 2170 (149) 1400 (96.4) 1260 (86.8) 1050 (72.3) 840 (57.8) 665 (45.8) 630 (43.4) 350 (24.1)
500 (260) 2015 (138) 1300 (89.5) 1170 (80.6) 975 (67.1) 780 (53.7) 618 (42.5) 585 (40.3) 325 (22.3)
600 (315) 1922 (132) 1240 (85.4) 1116 (76.8) 930 (64.0) 744 (51.2) 589 (40.5) 558 (38.4) 310 (21.3)
700 (371) 1829 (126) 1180 (81.3) 1062 (73.1) 885 (60.9) 708 (48.7) 561 (38.6) 531 (36.5) 295 (20.3)
800 (426) 1767 (121) 1140 (78.5) 1026 (70.6) 855 (58.9) 684 (47.1) 542 (37.3) 513 (35.3) 285 (19.6)
850 (454) 1736 (119) 1120 (77.1) 1008 (69.4) 840 (57.8) 672 (46.3) 532 (36.6) 504 (34.7) 280 (19.2)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 17

FM Series Metal Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Do not subject flexible metal
Every Swagelok FM series hose Swagelok FM series hose components hose to pressure surges, shock,
assembly is inboard helium leak tested are cleaned in accordance with or pulsations, where the peak
to a maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –5 Swagelok Standard Cleaning and pressure is greater than 50 % of
std cm3/s. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. the working pressure rating.
For additional testing, see Testing, Each hose is bagged individually
page 103. and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Standard Length Hose Assemblies L

Select an ordering number.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
OAL

Swagelok Tube Fitting to Male NPT End Connection

Dimensions
Nominal Tube Overall Live Minimum Maximum
Hose Fitting NPT Length Length Inside Outside
Size Size Size OAL Ordering L Diameter Dimension
in. in. in. in. (cm) Number in. (cm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
12.0 (30.5) SS-FM4SL4PM4-12 8.26 (21.0) 0.19
1/4 1/4 1/4 0.95 (24.1)
36.0 (91.4) SS-FM4SL4PM4-36 32.3 (82.0) (4.8)
18.0 (45.7) SS-FM6SL6PM6-18 14.2 (36.1) 0.28
3/8 3/8 3/8 1.09 (27.7)
36.0 (91.4) SS-FM6SL6PM6-36 32.2 (81.8) (7.1)
18.0 (45.7) SS-FM8SL8PM8-18 13.6 (34.5) 0.41
1/2 1/2 1/2 1.23 (31.2)
48.0 (122) SS-FM8SL8PM8-48 43.6 (111) (10.4)

0.66
3/4 3/4 3/4 18.0 (45.7) SS-FM12SL12PM12-18 13.4 (34.0) 1.74 (44.2)
(16.0)

Swagelok Tube Fitting End Connections

Dimensions
Nominal Tube Overall Live Minimum Maximum
Hose Fitting Length Length Inside Outside
Size Size OAL Ordering L Diameter Dimension
in. in. in. (cm) Number in. (cm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
12.0 (30.5) SS-FM4SL4SL4-12 8.12 (20.6) 0.19
1/4 1/4 0.95 (24.1)
36.0 (91.4) SS-FM4SL4SL4-36 32.1 (81.5) (4.8)
18.0 (45.7) SS-FM6SL6SL6-18 14.0 (35.6) 0.28
3/8 3/8 1.09 (27.7)
36.0 (91.4) SS-FM6SL6SL6-36 32.0 (81.3) (7.1)
18.0 (45.7) SS-FM8SL8SL8-18 13.5 (34.3) 0.41
1/2 1/2 1.23 (31.2)
48.0 (122) SS-FM8SL8SL8-48 43.5 (110) (10.4)
18.0 (45.7) SS-FM12SL12SL12-18 13.3 (33.8) 0.66
3/4 3/4 1.74 (44.2)
48.0 (122) SS-FM12SL12SL12-48 43.3 (110) (16.0)

0.88
1 1 24.0 (61.0) SS-FM16SL16SL16-24 18.7 (47.5) 2.03 (51.6)
(22.4)
 18 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FM Series Metal Hose

Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connections

Dimensions
Nominal Tube Overall Live Minimum Maximum
Hose Adapter Length Length Inside Outside
Size Size OAL Ordering L Diameter Dimension
in. in. in. (cm) Number in. (cm) in. (mm) in. (mm)
12.0 (30.5) SS-FM4TA4TA4-12 8.48 (21.5)
24.0 (61.0) SS-FM4TA4TA4-24 20.5 (52.1) 0.16 0.75
1/4 1/4
36.0 (91.4) SS-FM4TA4TA4-36 32.5 (82.6) (4.1) (19.0)
48.0 (122) SS-FM4TA4TA4-48 44.5 (113)
A
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - FM 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F
in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on next page. with a dash between each designator.
CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
2 Hose 5 Overall Length F = Fire jacket
FM = FM series metal hose Inches or centimeters, in whole F1 = Thermosleeve
numbers. Include CM as shown for H7 =Helium leak test (1 × 10−7 std
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. centimeter lengths. cm3/s)
4 = 1/4 16 = 1 N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
6 = 3/8 20 = 1 1/4 S =302 SS spring guard, hose-
8 = 1/2 24 = 1 1/2 length (1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in.
12 = 3/4 32 = 2 sizes only)
W = Hydrostatic test
Mat Tags
MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 19

FM Series Metal Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 TA4 1.76 (44.7) 0.16 (4.1) 0.75 (19.0)
3/8 6 TA6 1.82 (46.2) 0.27 (6.9) 0.93 (23.6)
1/2 8 TA8 2.22 (56.4) 0.37 (9.4) 1.05 (26.7)
3/4 12 TA12 2.35 (59.7) 0.58 (14.7) 1.38 (35.1)
1 16 TA16 2.69 (68.3) 0.80 (20.3) 1.69 (42.9)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 TM6 44.4 (1.75) 4.1 (0.16) 19.0 (0.75)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
10 6 TM10 47.0 (1.85) 7.1 (0.28) 23.5 (0.93)
12 8 TM12 57.2 (2.25) 8.9 (0.35) 26.7 (1.05)

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Fitting Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 4 SL4 1.94 (49.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.95 (24.1)
Cap Weld Style— 4 SL6 2.00 (50.8) 0.95 (24.1)
1 in. and Under 3/8 0.28 (7.1)
6 SL6 2.02 (51.3) 1.09 (27.7)
1/2 8 SL8 2.24 (56.9) 0.41 (10.4) 1.23 (31.2)
5/8 8 SL10 2.27 (57.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.95 (24.1)
3/4 12 SL12 2.35 (59.7) 0.63 (16.0) 1.74 (44.2)
1 16 SL16 2.64 (67.1) 0.88 (22.4) 2.03 (51.6)
1 1/4➀ 20 SL20 4.04 (103) 1.09 (27.7) 2.23 (58.9)
1 1/2➀ 24 SL24 4.75 (121) 1.34 (34.0) 2.61 (66.3)
2➀ 32 SL32 5.72 (145) 1.88 (47.8) 3.48 (88.4)
A Dimensions, mm (in.)
Manual Weld Style— 6 4 SM6 30.2 (1.19) 4.8 (0.19) 20.6 (0.81)
Over 1 in. 8 4 SM8 50.3 (1.98) 6.4 (0.25) 20.6 (0.81)
10 6 SM10 51.6 (2.03) 7.9 (0.31) 27.9 (1.10)
12 8 SM12 59.7 (2.35) 9.7 (0.38) 31.3 (1.23)
➀ Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance
above 450˚F (232˚C).

Rotatable Male
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR® Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RM4 2.60 (66.0) 0.18 (4.6) 0.73 (18.4)
1/2 8 RM8 2.83 (71.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1.09 (27.7)
3/4 12 RM12 4.19 (106) 0.65 (16.5) 1.52 (38.7)
A
1 16 RM16 4.80 (122) 0.87 (22.1) 1.89 (47.9)
 20 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FM Series Metal Hose

Rotatable Female
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RF4 2.00 (50.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 8 RF8 2.16 (54.9) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 RF12 4.15 (105) 0.65 (16.5) 1.74 (44.2)
A
1 16 RF16 4.76 (121) 0.87 (22.1) 2.03 (51.6)

Female VCO® O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
FLEXIBLE

in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension

TUBING
HOSE /

1/4 4 VF4 2.00 (50.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.80 (20.3)

1/2 8 VF8 2.14 (54.4) 0.40 (10.2) 1.16 (29.5)
A

SAE 37° (JIC) Female

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 AS4 1.87 (47.5) 0.17 (4.3) 0.94 (23.9)
3/8 6 AS6 1.97 (50.0) 0.28 (7.1) 1.09 (27.7)
A
1/2 8 AS8 2.15 (54.6) 0.42 (10.7) 1.23 (31.2)

Female Pipe Threads,

Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 PF4 1.81 (46.0) 0.28 (7.1) 0.94 (23.9)
3/8 6 PF6 1.87 (47.5) 0.38 (9.7) 1.09 (27.7)
A
1/2 8 PF8 2.18 (55.4) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.21 (56.1) 0.72 (18.3) 1.74 (44.2)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 21

FM Series Metal Hose

Male Pipe Threads, NPT and
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
4 PM4 1.80 (45.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.94 (23.9)
1/4
A 6 PM4 1.81 (46.0) 0.28 (7.1) 1.09 (27.7)
Cap Weld Style— 3/8 6 PM6 1.81 (46.0) 0.38 (9.7) 1.09 (27.7)
1 in. and Under 4 PM8 1.99 (50.6) 0.47 (11.9) 1.02 (25.8)
1/2
8 PM8 2.15 (54.6) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PM12 2.22 (56.4) 0.63 (16.0) 1.74 (44.2)
1 16 PM16 2.54 (64.5) 0.88 (22.4) 2.03 (51.6)
1 1/4 20 PM20 3.06 (77.7) 1.09 (27.7) 2.03 (51.6)

FLEXIBLE
1 1/2 24 PM24 3.72 (94.5) 1.34 (34.0) 2.47 (62.6)

TUBING

HOSE /
2 32 PM32 4.19 (106) 1.81 (46.0) 3.19 (81.0)
A
ISO/BSP Tapered
Manual Weld Style— 1/4 4 MT4 1.80 (45.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.94 (23.9)
Over 1 in.
1/2 8 MT8 2.16 (54.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)

Tube Butt Welds

Tube Dimensions, in. (mm)
Butt Weld Wall Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Thickness Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 0.035 4 TB4 1.90 (48.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.75 (19.0)
A
3/8 0.035 6 TB6 1.89 (48.0) 0.31 (7.9) 0.93 (23.6)
0.75 in.
(19.0 mm) 1/2 0.049 8 TB8 2.04 (51.8) 0.40 (10.2) 1.05 (26.7)
3/4 0.049 12 TB12 2.12 (53.8) 0.65 (16.5) 1.38 (35.1)
1 0.065 16 TB16 2.23 (56.6) 0.87 (22.1) 1.69 (42.9)
 22 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FJ Series Metal Hose

Features
■ General purpose all-metal hose. ■ Optional 316L stainless steel braid available to provide
■ 316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. greater corrosion resistance.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. and working pressures from ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum or general
vacuum to 1600 psig (110 bar). purpose applications where permeation is undesirable.
■ Single braid layer of 304 stainless steel promotes hose ■ Custom assemblies available.
pressure containment. ■ Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler helium leak testing. See page 103 for details.
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

304 SS braid 316L SS core Weld 316 SS

end connections
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Technical Data
Working
Pressure at Minimum
Minimum Center Line –325 to 300°F Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–200 to 148°C) Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.47 (11.9) 1.00 (2.54) 4.33 (11.0) 1600 (110) 6400 (440) 0.11 (0.16)
3/8 (9.7) 0.38 (9.5) 0.68 (17.3) 1.20 (3.05) 5.91 (15.0) 1470 (101) 5880 (405) 0.20 (0.30)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.81 (20.5) 1.50 (3.81) 6.50 (16.5) 1110 (76.4) 4440 (306) 0.22 (0.33)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.20 (30.5) 2.10 (5.33) 8.86 (22.5) –325 to 800 860 (59.2) 3440 (237) 0.37 (0.55)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.0) 2.70 (6.86) 10.2 (25.9) (–200 to 426) 680 (46.8) 2720 (187) 0.50 (0.74)
1 1/4 (31.8) 1.25 (31.8) 1.80 (45.7) 3.10 (7.87) 11.8 (30.0) 680 (46.8) 2720 (187) 0.61 (0.91)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.13 (54.0) 3.90 (9.91) 13.4 (34.0) 520 (35.8) 2080 (143) 0.85 (1.26)
2 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.66 (67.5) 5.10 (13.0) 15.4 (39.1) 450 (31.0) 1800 (124) 1.10 (1.65)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure Piping B31.3, Process Piping.

Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Temperature °F (°C) Working Pressure, vacuum to ... psig (bar)
–325 (–200) to 300 (148) 1600 (110) 1470 (101) 1110 (76.4) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 680 (46.8) 520 (35.8) 450 (31.0)
400 (204) 1488 (102) 1367 (94.1) 1032 (71.1) 800 (55.1) 632 (43.5) 632 (43.5) 484 (33.3) 419 (28.8)
500 (260) 1376 (94.8) 1264 (87.0) 955 (65.7) 740 (50.9) 585 (40.3) 585 (40.3) 447 (30.7) 387 (26.6)
600 (315) 1296 (89.2) 1191 (82.0) 899 (61.9) 697 (48.0) 551 (37.9) 551 (37.9) 421 (29.0) 365 (25.1)
700 (371) 1232 (84.8) 1132 (77.9) 855 (58.9) 662 (45.6) 524 (36.1) 524 (36.1) 400 (27.5) 347 (23.9)
750 (398) 1200 (82.6) 1103 (75.9) 833 (57.3) 645 (44.4) 510 (35.1) 510 (35.1) 390 (26.8) 338 (23.2)
800 (426) 1184 (81.5) 1088 (74.9) 821 (56.5) 636 (43.8) 503 (34.6) 503 (34.6) 385 (26.5) 333 (22.9)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 23

FJ Series Metal Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Do not subject flexible metal
Every Swagelok FJ series hose Swagelok FJ series hose components hose to pressure surges, shock,
assembly is inboard helium leak tested are cleaned in accordance with or pulsations, where the peak
to a maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –5 Swagelok Standard Cleaning and pressure is greater than 50 % of
std cm3/s. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. the working pressure rating.
For additional testing, see Testing, Each hose is bagged individually
page 103. and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - FJ 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F
in. cm
1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options
End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on next page. with a dash between each designator.
A = Armor guard
2 Hose 5 Overall Length CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
FJ = FJ series metal hose Inches or centimeters, in whole F =Fire jacket
numbers. Include CM as shown for G =CGA 4.1 cleaning on hose
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. centimeter lengths. wetted surfaces
4 = 1/4 16 = 1 F1 = Thermosleeve
6 = 3/8 20 = 1 1/4 H7 =Helium leak test (1 × 10−7 std
8 = 1/2 24 = 1 1/2 cm3/s)
12 = 3/4 32 = 2 N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
W = Hydrostatic test
Z = 316L SS braid material
093 = ECE R110 approval, only
on select end connections.
See page 105 for additional
information.
Mat Tags
MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 24 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FJ Series Metal Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 4 TA4 1.82 (46.2) 0.18 (4.6) 0.76 (19.2)
Cap Weld Style— 3/8 6 TA6 1.81 (46.0) 0.27 (6.9) 0.78 (19.8)
1/4 and 1/2 in.
1/2 8 TA8➁ 2.26 (57.4) 0.37 (9.4) 1.05 (26.7)
3/4 12 TA12 2.50 (63.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.32 (33.5)
1 16 TA16 2.99 (75.9) 0.80 (20.3) 1.63 (41.4)
1 1/4➀ 20 TA20 3.91 (99.3) 1.02 (25.9) 2.18 (55.2)
A 1 1/2➀ 24 TA24 4.47 (114) 1.25 (31.8) 2.61 (66.3)
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

End Connections 2➀ 32 TA32 5.45 (138) 1.72 (43.7) 3.48 (88.4)

with Hex Flat Dimensions, mm (in.)
Manual Weld Style—
6 4 TM6 39.0 (1.54) 4.1 (0.16) 13.7 (0.54)
All other sizes
8 4 TM8 39.2 (1.54) 5.6 (0.22) 13.7 (0.54)
10 6 TM10 53.3 (2.10) 7.1 (0.28) 19.8 (0.78)
12 8 TM12➁ 64.8 (2.55) 8.9 (0.35) 25.5 (1.00)
18 12 TM18➁ 61.0 (2.40) 14.0 (0.55) 33.5 (1.32)
A 25 16 TM25 75.9 (2.99) 19.8 (0.78) 41.4 (1.63)

Preswaged 32➀ 20 TM32 87.4 (3.44) 26.4 (1.04) 58.0 (2.28)

Nuts and Ferrules— 38➀ 24 TM38 97.3 (3.83) 31.8 (1.25) 69.6 (2.74)
Over 1 in. / 25 mm
➀ Furnished with nut, preswaged silver-plated front ferrule, and uncoated back ferrule which are required
Manual Weld Style— for performance above 450˚F (232˚C).
All other sizes ➁ ECE R110 approval available.

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Fitting Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 4 SL4 2.08 (52.8) 0.19 (4.8) 0.94 (23.8)
Cap Weld Style— 3/8 6 SL6 2.07 (52.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3)
1/4 and 1/2 in.
1/2 8 SL8 2.28 (57.9) 0.41 (10.4) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 SL12 2.62 (66.6) 0.63 (16.0) 1.32 (33.5)
1 16 SL16 3.20 (81.3) 0.88 (22.4) 1.63 (41.4)
1 1/4➀ 20 SL20 3.79 (96.3) 1.09 (27.7) 2.03 (51.6)
1 1/2➀ 24 SL24 4.25 (108) 1.35 (34.3) 2.47 (65.6)
A 2➀ 32 SL32 5.22 (133) 1.82 (46.2) 3.19 (81.0)
Manual Weld Style— Dimensions, mm (in.)
All other sizes 6 4 SM6 47.5 (1.87) 4.8 (0.19) 16.2 (0.64)
8 4 SM8 48.3 (1.90) 6.4 (0.25) 17.4 (0.69)
10 6 SM10 53.3 (2.10) 7.9 (0.31) 20.9 (0.82)
12 8 SM12 61.7 (2.43) 9.7 (0.38) 25.5 (1.00)
18 12 SM18 66.5 (2.62) 15.0 (0.59) 31.3 (1.23)
25 16 SM25 81.3 (3.20) 21.8 (0.86) 40.5 (1.60)
32➀ 20 SM32 97.8 (3.85) 28.7 (1.13) 53.4 (2.10)
38➀ 24 SM38 111 (4.36) 33.8 (1.33) 63.8 (2.51)
➀ Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for
performance above 450˚F (232˚C).
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 25

FJ Series Metal Hose

Rotatable Male VCR Metal
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Gasket Face Seal Fittings
VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RM4 1.69 (42.9) 0.18 (4.6) 0.73 (18.4)
A
1/2 8 RM8 2.00 (50.8) 0.40 (10.2) 1.09 (27.6)
Cap Weld Style—
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/4 12 RM12 2.63 (66.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.52 (38.7)
1 16 RM16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 1.89 (47.9)

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Rotatable Female VCR Metal
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Gasket Face Seal Fittings
VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RF4 2.09 (53.1) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1)
A
Cap Weld Style— 1/2 8 RF8 2.00 (50.8) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/4 12 RF12 2.63 (66.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.74 (44.2)
1 16 RF16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 2.03 (51.6)
SWAGELOK

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

Female VCO O-Ring Face

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 VF4 1.15 (29.2) 0.19 (4.8) 0.80 (20.3)
A 1/2 8 VF8 1.31 (33.3) 0.41 (10.4) 1.16 (29.5)
Cap Weld Style— 3/4 12 VF12 1.57 (39.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.74 (44.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in.
1 16 VF16 1.73 (43.9) 0.88 (22.4) 2.03 (51.6)

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

SAE 37° (JIC) Female Swivel

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A
1/4 4 AS4 2.01 (51.2) 0.19 (4.8) 0.94 (23.8)
Cap Weld Style—
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/8 6 AS6 1.79 (45.5) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3)
1/2 8 AS8 2.21 (53.6) 0.39 (9.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 AS12 2.27 (57.7) 0.61 (15.5) 1.45 (36.8)
1 16 AS16 2.64 (67.1) 0.84 (21.3) 1.74 (44.2)
A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes
 26 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FJ Series Metal Hose

Female Pipe Threads,
Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 PF4 1.74 (44.2) 0.30 (7.6) 0.94 (23.8)
A
A
3/8 6 PF6 1.84 (46.7) 0.42 (10.7) 1.02 (25.8)
Cap Weld Style—
1/4 and 1/2 in. 1/2 8 PF8 2.11 (53.6) 0.58 (14.7) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.41 (61.2) 0.73 (18.5) 1.52 (38.7)
1 16 PF16 2.92 (74.2) 0.95 (24.1) 1.89 (47.9)
1 1/2 24 PF24 3.28 (83.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.76 (70.0)
A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Male Pipe Threads, NPT and

NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/4 4 PM4 1.94 (49.3) 0.28 (7.1) 0.94 (23.8)
A 3/8 6 PM6 1.91 (48.5) 0.38 (9.7) 0.80 (20.3)
Cap Weld Style— 1/2 8 PM8 2.32 (58.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/4 12 PM12 2.45 (62.2) 0.63 (16.0) 1.32 (33.5)
1 16 PM16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.63 (41.4)
1 1/4 20 PM20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.03 (51.6)
1 1/2 24 PM24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.47 (62.6)
A 2 32 PM32 3.63 (92.2) 1.81 (46.0) 2.76 (70.0)
Manual Weld Style— ISO/BSP Tapered
All other sizes 1/4 4 MT4 1.94 (49.3) 0.28 (7.1) 0.94 (23.8)
3/8 6 MT6 1.91 (48.5) 0.38 (9.7) 0.80 (20.3)
1/2 8 MT8 2.32 (58.9) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 MT12 2.45 (62.2) 0.63 (16.0) 1.32 (33.5)
1 16 MT16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.63 (41.4)
1 1/4 20 MT20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.03 (51.6)
1 1/2 24 MT24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.47 (62.6)

Tube Butt Welds Dimensions, in. (mm)

Tube
Butt Weld Wall Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Thickness Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 0.035 4 TB4 1.96 (49.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.76 (19.2)
A
3/8 0.035 6 TB6 1.82 (46.2) 0.31 (7.9) 0.78 (19.8)
0.75 in.
(19.0 mm) 1/2 0.049 8 TB8 2.11 (53.6) 0.40 (10.2) 1.05 (26.7)
Cap Weld Style— 3/4 0.049 12 TB12 2.14 (54.4) 0.65 (16.5) 1.32 (33.5)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 1 0.065 16 TB16 2.46 (62.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.63 (41.4)

A
0.75 in.
(19.0 mm)
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 27

FL Series Metal Hose

Features
■ Highly flexible all-metal hose. ■ Exhibits strong performance in dynamic cycling
■ 316L stainless steel annular convoluted core. applications.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 2 in. sizes and working pressures ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum and general
from vacuum to 1500 psig (103 bar). purpose dynamic-cycling applications.
■ Single braid layer of 321 stainless steel for sizes 1/4 and ■ Standard and custom assemblies available.
1/2 in. and 316L stainless steel for all other sizes ensures ■ Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
hose pressure containment. helium leak testing. See page 103 for details.
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

321 SS braid/
316L SS braid 316L SS core Weld 316 SS

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
end connections

Technical Data
Working
Pressure at Minimum
Minimum Center Line –325 to 100°F Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–200 to 37°C) Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1.00 (2.54) 5.50 (14.0) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 0.12 (0.18)
3/8 (9.5) 0.26 (6.6) 0.65 (16.5) 1.00 (2.54) 4.00 (10.2) 1470 (101) 5880 (405) 0.21 (0.31)
1/2 (12.7) 0.47 (11.9) 0.82 (20.8) 1.75 (4.45) 7.00 (17.8) 1200 (82.6) 4800 (330) 0.24 (0.36)
3/4 (19.0) 0.77 (19.6) 1.15 (29.2) 1.70 (4.32) 6.40 (16.3) –325 to 850 860 (59.3) 3440 (237) 0.47 (0.70)
1 (25.4) 1.02 (25.9) 1.44 (36.6) 2.10 (5.33) 7.10 (18.0) (–200 to 454) 680 (46.8) 2720 (187) 0.64 (0.96)
1 1/4 (31.8) 1.28 (32.5) 1.74 (44.2) 2.50 (6.35) 7.90 (20.1) 645 (44.4) 2580 (178) 0.99 (1.48)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.56 (39.6) 2.06 (52.3) 3.10 (7.87) 11.0 (27.9) 520 (35.8) 2080 (143) 1.16 (1.74)
2 (50.8) 2.02 (51.3) 2.59 (65.8) 4.00 (10.2) 13.0 (33.0) 380 (26.2) 1520 (105) 1.48 (2.22)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure
Piping, B31.1 Power Piping, and ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code.

Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/4 1 1/2 2
Temperature Working Pressure
°F (°C) Vacuum to ... psig (bar)
–325 (–200) to 100 (37) 1500 (103) 1470 (101) 1200 (82.7) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 645 (44.4) 520 (35.8) 380 (26.1)
200 (93) 1260 (86.8) 1235 (85.0) 1008 (69.4) 722 (49.7) 571 (39.3) 542 (37.3) 437 (30.1) 319 (21.9)
300 (148) 1140 (78.5) 1117 (76.9) 912 (62.8) 654 (45.0) 517 (35.6) 490 (33.7) 395 (27.2) 289 (19.9)
400 (204) 1050 (72.3) 1029 (70.8) 840 (57.9) 602 (41.4) 476 (32.7) 451 (31.0) 364 (25.0) 266 (18.3)
500 (260) 975 (67.2) 955 (65.7) 780 (53.7) 559 (38.5) 442 (30.4) 419 (28.8) 338 (23.2) 247 (17.0)
600 (315) 930 (64.1) 911 (62.7) 744 (51.2) 533 (36.7) 422 (29.0) 400 (27.5) 322 (22.1) 236 (16.2)
700 (371) 885 (61.0) 867 (59.7) 708 (48.8) 507 (34.9) 401 (27.6) 381 (26.2) 307 (21.1) 224 (15.4)
750 (398) 870 (59.9) 853 (58.7) 696 (47.9) 499 (34.3) 394 (27.1) 374 (25.7) 302 (20.8) 220 (15.1)
800 (426) 855 (58.9) 838 (57.7) 684 (47.1) 490 (33.7) 388 (26.7) 368 (25.3) 296 (20.3) 216 (14.8)
850 (454) 840 (57.9) 823 (56.7) 672 (46.3) 482 (33.2) 381 (26.2) 361 (24.8) 291 (20.0) 213 (14.6)
 28 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FL Series Metal Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Do not subject flexible metal
Every Swagelok FL series hose assembly Swagelok FL series hose components hose to pressure surges, shock,
is inboard helium leak tested to a are cleaned in accordance with or pulsations, where the peak
maximum leak rate of Swagelok Standard Cleaning and pressure is greater than 50 % of
1 × 10 –5 std cm3/s. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. the working pressure rating.
For additional testing, see Testing, Each hose is bagged individually
page 103. and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

Ordering Information and Dimensions

Standard Length Hose Assemblies
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Select an ordering number.

OAL

Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connections

Dimensions
Nominal Tube Overall Live Minimum Maximum
Hose Adapter Length Ordering Length Inside Outside
Size Size OAL Number L Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (mm)
12.0 (30.5) SS-FL4TA4TA4-12 8.48 (21.5)
24.0 (61.0) SS-FL4TA4TA4-24 20.5 (52.1) 0.16 0.66
1/4 1/4
36.0 (91.4) SS-FL4TA4TA4-36 32.5 (82.6) (4.1) (16.8)
48.0 (122) SS-FL4TA4TA4-48 44.5 (113)
12.0 (30.5) SS-FL8TA8TA8-12 7.50 (19.0)
0.37 1.01
1/2 1/2 24.0 (61.0) SS-FL8TA8TA8-24 19.5 (49.5)
(9.4) (25.7)
36.0 (91.4) SS-FL8TA8TA8-36 31.5 (80.0)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 29

FL Series Metal Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - FL 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F
in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables below. with a dash between each designator.

FLEXIBLE
CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN (available

TUBING

HOSE /
2 Hose 5 Overall Length for sizes 1/4 and 1/2 in. only)
FL = FL series metal hose F = Fire jacket
Inches or centimeters, in whole
F1 = Thermosleeve
numbers. Include CM as shown for
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. G = CGA 4.1 cleaning on hose
centimeter lengths. wetted surfaces (available for
4 = 1/4 16 = 1
all hose sizes except 1/4 and
6 = 3/8 20 = 1 1/4 1/2 in.)
8 = 1/2 24 = 1 1/2 H7 =Helium leak test (1 × 10−7 std
12 = 3/4 32 = 2 cm3/s)
N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
W = Hydrostatic test
Mat Tags
MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 30 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FL Series Metal Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 TA4 1.76 (44.7) 0.16 (4.1) 0.66 (16.8)
A 4 TA6 1.79 (45.5) 0.66 (16.8)
Cap Weld Style— 3/8 6 TA6 1.81 (46.0) 0.27 (6.9) 0.83 (21.1)
1/4 and 1/2 in.
8 TA6 2.03 (51.6) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 TA8 2.25 (57.2) 0.37 (9.4) 1.01 (25.7)
3/4 12 TA12 2.50 (63.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.39 (35.3)
1 16 TA16 2.99 (75.9) 0.80 (20.3) 1.66 (42.2)
A 1 1/4➀ 20 TA20 3.91 (99.3) 1.02 (25.9) 2.16 (54.9)
FLEXIBLE

End Connections 1 1/2➀

TUBING

24 TA24 4.47 (113) 1.25 (31.8) 2.59

HOSE /

(65.8)
with Hex Flat
2➀ 32 TA32 5.45 (138) 1.72 (43.7) 3.45 (87.6)
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 TM6 44.4 (1.75) 4.1 (0.16) 16.8 (0.66)
8 4 TM8 45.2 (1.78) 5.6 (0.22) 16.8 (0.66)
4 TM10 45.2 (1.78) 16.8 (0.66)
10 6 TM10 53.3 (2.10) 7.1 (0.28) 25.7 (1.01)
A 8 TM10 51.3 (2.02) 25.7 (1.01)
Preswaged 12 8 TM12 57.4 (2.26) 8.9 (0.35) 25.7 (1.01)
Nuts and Ferrules— 18 12 TM18 61.0 (2.40) 14.0 (0.55) 35.3 (1.39)
Over 1 in. / 25 mm 25 16 TM25 75.9 (2.99) 19.8 (0.78) 42.2 (1.66)
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes 32➀ 20 TM32 87.4 (3.44) 26.4 (1.04) 57.4 (2.26)
38➀ 24 TM38 97.3 (3.83) 31.8 (1.25) 69.1 (2.72)
➀ Furnished with nut, preswaged silver-plated front ferrule, and uncoated back ferrule which are required
for performance above 450˚F (232˚C).

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Fitting Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 SL4 1.94 (49.3) 0.19 (4.8) 0.80 (20.3)
A 6 SL6 2.07 (52.6) 0.28 (7.1) 0.83 (21.1)
3/8
Cap Weld Style— 8 SL6 2.22 (56.4) 0.28 (7.1) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 1/2 8 SL8 2.33 (59.2) 0.41 (10.4) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 SL12 2.62 (66.5) 0.63 (16.0) 1.39 (35.3)
1 16 SL16 3.20 (81.3) 0.88 (22.4) 1.66 (42.2)
1 1/4➀ 20 SL20 3.79 (96.3) 1.09 (27.7) 2.02 (51.3)
1 1/2➀ 24 SL24 4.25 (108) 1.35 (34.3) 2.45 (62.2)
A 2➀ 32 SL32 5.22 (133) 1.82 (46.2) 3.17 (80.5)
Manual Weld Style— Dimensions, mm (in.)
All other sizes 6 4 SM6 49.3 (1.94) 4.8 (0.19) 20.3 (0.80)
6 SM10 53.6 (2.11) 7.9 (0.31) 21.1 (0.83)
10
8 SM10 56.4 (2.22) 7.9 (0.31) 31.3 (1.23)
12 8 SM12 59.2 (2.33) 9.7 (0.38) 31.3 (1.23)
18 12 SM18 66.5 (2.62) 15.0 (0.59) 35.3 (1.39)
25 16 SM25 81.3 (3.20) 21.8 (0.86) 42.2 (1.66)
32➀ 20 SM32 98.8 (3.89) 28.7 (1.13) 52.8 (2.08)
38➀ 24 SM38 111 (4.36) 33.8 (1.33) 63.2 (2.49)
➀ Furnished with nut, preswaged silver-plated front ferrule, and uncoated back ferrule which are required
for performance above 450˚F (232˚C).

See next page for more end connections.

 Hose and Flexible Tubing 31

FL Series Metal Hose

Rotatable Male VCR Metal
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Gasket Face Seal Fittings
VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RM4 2.60 (66.0) 0.18 (4.6) 0.73 (18.4)
A
Cap Weld Style— 1/2 8 RM8 2.88 (73.2) 0.40 (10.2) 1.09 (27.7)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/4 12 RM12 2.63 (66.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.51 (38.4)
1 16 RM16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8)

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

Rotatable Female VCR Metal

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
Dimensions, in. (mm)

HOSE /
Gasket Face Seal Fittings
VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RF4 2.00 (50.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1)
A
Cap Weld Style— 1/2 8 RF8 2.21 (56.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/4 12 RF12 2.63 (66.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)
1 16 RF16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)
SWAGELOK

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

Female VCO O-Ring Face

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 VF4 2.50 (63.5) 0.18 (4.6) 0.80 (20.3)
A 1/2 8 VF8 2.73 (69.3) 0.40 (10.2) 1.16 (29.5)
Cap Weld Style— 3/4 12 VF12 1.57 (39.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)
1/4 and 1/2 in.
1 16 VF16 1.73 (43.9) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)

A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

SAE 37° (JIC) Female Swivel

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A
1/4 4 AS4 1.87 (47.5) 0.17 (4.3) 0.79 (20.1)
Cap Weld Style—
1/4 and 1/2 in. 3/8 6 AS6 1.78 (45.2) 0.28 (7.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 8 AS8 2.21 (56.1) 0.42 (10.7) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 AS12 2.26 (57.4) 0.61 (15.5) 1.44 (36.6)
A
1 16 AS16 2.64 (67.1) 0.84 (21.3) 1.73 (43.9)
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes
 32 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FL Series Metal Hose

Female Pipe Threads,
Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 PF4 1.81 (46.0) 0.28 (7.1) 0.87 (22.1)
A
A
3/8 6 PF6 1.84 (46.7) 0.42 (10.7) 1.01 (25.7)
Cap Weld Style—
1/4 and 1/2 in. 1/2 8 PF8 2.22 (56.4) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.41 (61.2) 0.73 (18.5) 1.51 (38.4)
1 16 PF16 2.92 (74.2) 0.95 (24.1) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 PF24 3.28 (83.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.74 (69.6)
A
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes

Male Pipe Threads,

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

NPT and
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/4 4 PM4 1.80 (45.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3)
A 6 PM6 1.91 (48.5) 0.83 (21.1)
3/8 0.38 (9.7)
Cap Weld Style— 8 PM6 2.02 (51.3) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 and 1/2 in. 1/2 8 PM8 2.21 (56.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PM12 2.45 (62.2) 0.63 (16.0) 1.39 (35.3)
1 16 PM16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.66 (42.2)
1 1/4 20 PM20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.02 (51.3)
A 1 1/2 24 PM24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.2)
Manual Weld Style— 2 32 PM32 3.63 (92.2) 1.81 (46.0) 2.81 (71.4)
All other sizes ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 4 MT4 1.80 (45.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8 6 MT6 1.91 (48.5) 0.38 (9.7) 0.83 (21.1)
1/2 8 MT8 2.21 (56.1) 0.47 (11.9) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 MT12 2.45 (62.2) 0.63 (16.0) 1.39 (35.3)
1 16 MT16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.66 (42.2)
1 1/4 20 MT20 3.14 (79.8) 1.09 (27.7) 2.02 (51.3)
1 1/2 24 MT24 3.38 (85.8) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.2)

Tube Butt Welds

Tube Dimensions, in. (mm)
Butt Weld Wall Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Thickness Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A
1/4 0.035 4 TB4 1.90 (48.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.66 (16.8)
0.75 in.
3/8 0.035 6 TB6 1.82 (46.2) 0.31 (7.9) 0.83 (21.1)
(19.0 mm) 1/2 0.049 8 TB8 2.09 (53.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.01 (25.7)
Cap Weld Style— 3/4 0.049 12 TB12 2.14 (54.4) 0.65 (16.5) 1.39 (35.3)
1/4 and 1/2 in.

A
0.75 in.
(19.0 mm)
Manual Weld Style—
All other sizes
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 33

AH Series Metal Hose

Features
■ Corrosion resistant all-metal hose. ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum or corrosion
■ Alloy C-276 annular convoluted core. resistant applications where permeation is undesirable.
■ Size range of 1/2 through 2 in. and working pressures from ■ Custom assemblies available.
vacuum to 1110 psig (76.4 bar). ■ Options include hose covers, hose tags, and additional
■ Single braid layer of 316L stainless steel promotes hose helium leak testing. See page 103 for details.
pressure containment. ■ C-276 braid and end connections available upon request.
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

316L SS braid C-276 core Weld 316 SS

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
end connections

316 SS weld collar

Technical Data
Working
Pressure at Minimum
Minimum Center Line –325 to 300°F Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–200 to 148°C) Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.81 (20.5) 1.50 (3.81) 6.50 (16.5) 1110 (76.4) 4440 (306) 0.22 (0.33)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.20 (30.5) 2.10 (5.33) 8.86 (22.5) 860 (59.2) 3440 (237) 0.37 (0.55)
–325 to 800
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.0) 2.70 (6.86) 10.2 (25.9) 680 (46.8) 2720 (187) 0.50 (0.74)
(–200 to 426)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.13 (54.0) 3.90 (9.91) 13.4 (34.0) 520 (35.8) 2080 (143) 0.85 (1.26)
2 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.66 (67.5) 5.10 (13.0) 15.4 (39.1) 450 (31.0) 1800 (124) 1.10 (1.65)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Ratings are based on ASME Code for Pressure
Piping, B31.1 Power Piping.

Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2

Temperature Working Pressure
°F (°C) Vacuum to ... psig (bar)
–325 (–200) to 300 (148) 1110 (76.4) 860 (59.2) 680 (46.8) 520 (35.8) 450 (31.0)
400 (204) 1032 (71.1) 800 (55.1) 632 (43.5) 484 (33.3) 419 (28.8)
500 (260) 955 (65.7) 740 (50.9) 585 (40.2) 447 (30.8) 387 (26.6)
600 (315) 899 (61.9) 697 (47.9) 551 (37.9) 421 (29.0) 365 (25.1)
700 (371) 855 (58.8) 662 (45.6) 524 (36.0) 400 (27.5) 347 (23.8)
750 (398) 833 (57.3) 645 (44.4) 510 (35.1) 390 (26.8) 338 (23.2)
800 (426) 821 (56.5) 636 (43.8) 503 (34.6) 385 (26.5) 333 (22.9)
 34 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

AH Series Metal Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Do not subject flexible metal
Every Swagelok AH series hose Swagelok AH series hose components hose to pressure surges, shock,
assembly is inboard helium leak tested are cleaned in accordance with or pulsations, where the peak
to a maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –5 Swagelok Standard Cleaning and pressure is greater than 50 % of
std cm3/s. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. the working pressure rating.
For additional testing, see Testing, Each hose is bagged individually
page 103. and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - AH 8 TA8 PM8 - 28 - F or 71CM-F
in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on next page. with a dash between each designator.
A= Armor guard
2 Hose 5 Overall Length F= Fire jacket
AH = AH series metal hose Inches or centimeters, in whole F1 = Thermosleeve
numbers. Include CM as shown for G= CGA 4.1 cleaning on hose
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. centimeter lengths. wetted surfaces
8 = 1/2 16 = 1 H =Helium leak test (1 × 10−9 std
12 = 3/4 24 = 1 1/2 cm3/s)
32 = 2 H7 =Helium leak test (1 × 10−7 std
cm3/s)
N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
W = Hydrostatic test
Mat Tags
MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 35

AH Series Metal Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/2 8 TA8 2.28 (57.9) 0.37 (9.4) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 TA12 2.62 (66.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 TA16 2.99 (75.9) 0.80 (20.3) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/2 ➀ 24 TA24 4.47 (114) 1.25 (31.8) 2.59 (65.8)
2➀ 32 TA32 5.70 (145) 1.72 (43.7) 3.45 (87.6)
A Dimensions, mm (in.)
End Connections 12 8 TM12 67.9 (2.67) 8.9 (0.35) 27.4 (1.08)
with Hex Flat
18 12 TM18 64.0 (2.52) 14.0 (0.55) 38.1 (1.50)

FLEXIBLE
25 16 TM25 75.9 19.8 45.5 (1.79)

TUBING
(2.99) (0.78)

HOSE /
38 ➀ 24 TM38 97.3 (3.83) 31.8 (1.25) 69.1 (2.72)
A ➀ Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance
above 450˚F (232˚C).
Preswaged Nuts
and Ferrules—
Over 1 in. (25 mm)

Swagelok Tube Fittings Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum

Fitting Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/2 8 SL8 2.56 (65.0) 0.41 (10.4) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 SL12 2.74 (69.6) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1)
1 16 SL16 3.20 (81.3) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/2➀ 24 SL24 4.25 (108) 1.35 (34.3) 2.45 (62.2)
2➀ 32 SL32 5.47 (139) 1.82 (46.2) 3.17 (80.5)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
12 8 SM12 65.0 (2.56) 9.7 (0.38) 27.4 (1.08)
18 12 SM18 69.6 (2.74) 15.0 (0.59) 38.1 (1.50)
25 16 SM25 81.3 (3.20) 21.8 (0.86) 45.5 (1.79)
38➀ 24 SM38 111 (4.36) 33.8 (1.33) 63.2 (2.49)
➀ Furnished with silver-plated front ferrule and uncoated back ferrule which are required for performance
above 450˚F (232˚C).

Rotatable Male
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/2 8 RM8 2.13 (54.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 RM12 2.75 (69.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.51 (38.4)
A 1 16 RM16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 1.88 (47.8)

Rotatable Female
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/2 8 RF8 2.13 (54.1) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)
SWAGELOK

3/4 12 RF12 2.75 (69.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)

1 16 RF16 2.97 (75.4) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)
A
 36 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

AH Series Metal Hose

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/2 8 VF8 1.44 (36.6) 0.41 (10.4) 1.08 (27.4)
A 3/4 12 VF12 1.69 (42.9) 0.63 (16.0) 1.73 (43.9)
1 16 VF16 1.73 (43.9) 0.88 (22.4) 2.02 (51.3)

SAE 37º (JIC) Female

Swivel Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
FLEXIBLE

in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension

TUBING
HOSE /

1/2 8 AS8 2.08 (52.8) 0.39 (9.9) 1.08 (27.4)

3/4 12 AS12 2.39 (60.7) 0.61 (15.5) 1.50 (38.1)
A
1 16 AS16 2.64 (67.1) 0.84 (21.3) 1.79 (45.5)

Female Pipe Threads,

NPT Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/2 8 PF8 2.58 (65.5) 0.58 (14.7) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.53 (64.3) 0.73 (18.5) 1.51 (38.4)
A
1 16 PF16 2.92 (74.2) 0.95 (24.1) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 PF24 3.28 (83.3) 1.50 (38.1) 2.74 (69.6)

Male Pipe Threads, NPT NPT and

and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/2 8 PM8 2.45 (62.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 PM12 2.57 (65.3) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (38.1)
A
1 16 PM16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (45.5)
1 1/2 24 PM24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.2)
2 32 PM32 3.88 (98.6) 1.81 (46.0) 2.92 (74.2)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/2 8 MT8 2.45 (62.2) 0.47 (11.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 12 MT12 2.57 (65.3) 0.63 (16.0) 1.50 (33.5)
1 16 MT16 3.05 (77.5) 0.88 (22.4) 1.79 (41.4)
1 1/2 24 MT24 3.38 (85.9) 1.34 (34.0) 2.45 (62.6)

Tub Butt Welds

Tube Butt Dimensions, in. (mm)
Weld Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
in. Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A 1/2 8 TB8 2.17 (55.1) 0.40 (10.2) 0.93 (23.6)
3/4 12 TB12 2.27 (57.7) 0.65 (16.5) 1.32 (33.5)
0.75 in.
(19.0 mm) 1 16 TB16 2.46 (62.5) 0.87 (22.1) 1.63 (41.4)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 37

Convoluted Metal Tubing

Features
■ Form-fit-and-stay, flexible, all-metal tubing. ■ Commonly used in high-temperature vacuum or low-
■ 321 stainless steel annular convoluted core. pressure static applications.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 1 1/2 in. and working pressures ■ Standard and custom tubing lengths, custom tubing
up to 100 psig (6.8 bar). assemblies, and adapters for field assembly are available.
■ Annealed material enables tubing to be compressed by at ■ Options include additional helium leak testing and tubing
least 15 % and extended up to 50 % of manufactured length. tags. See pages 103 and 104 for details.
■ Form-fit-and-stay capability of convoluted tubing can ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
compensate for misalignment and system reroutes
between static connections in vacuum or low-pressure
static applications.

321 SS core 321 SS cuff Weld 316 SS end connections

FLEXIBLE
and 316 SS or 304 SS

TUBING

HOSE /
adapters

Technical Data—Convoluted Metal Tubing

Form-fit-and-stay
Nominal Working Nominal
Tubing Inside Outside Temperature Pressure Tubing Wall Tubing
Size Diameter Diameter Range 10–9 torr to ... Thickness Weight
in. in. (mm) in. (mm) °F (°C) psig (bar) in. (mm) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 0.25 (6.4) 0.38 (9.5) 100 (6.8) 0.04 (0.06)
3/8 0.38 (9.5) 0.58 (14.7) 0.07 (0.10)
1/2 0.50 (12.7) 0.71 (17.9) 70 to 1000 0.09 (0.13)
0.006 (0.15)
3/4 0.75 (19.0) 1.08 (27.4) (20 to 537) 25 (1.7) 0.19 (0.28)
1 1.00 (25.4) 1.36 (34.5) 0.23 (0.34)
1 1/2 1.50 (38.1) 1.92 (48.7) 0.34 (0.51)

Technical Data—End Connections and Adapters Testing

Every Swagelok convoluted tubing
Temperature
End Connection Range assembly with factory-welded end
Type Material °F (°C) Availability connections is inboard helium leak
VCR 70 to 1000 tested to a maximum leak rate of
316 SS 1.8 × 10 –7 std cm3/s.
Male and female (20 to 537)
Factory welded
VCO 70 to 400 For additional testing, see Ordering
316 SS
Male and female (20 to 204) Information, page 39.
304 SS (factory welded 1/2 in.
and larger sizes; Cleaning and Packaging
all sizes for field 70 to 1000 Factory welded or
XBA adapter Swagelok convoluted tubing assemblies
assembly) (20 to 537) field assembly
316L SS (factory welded 1/4 and adapters are cleaned in accordance
and 3/8 in. sizes) with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
70 to 400 Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
XOA adapter 304 SS Field assembly
(20 to 204) Each item is individually packaged for
cleanliness and protection.

• Not suitable for dynamic flexing

applications.
 38 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Convoluted Metal Tubing

Ordering Information and Dimensions
Standard Tubing
Select an ordering number.

B T

A L

Dimensions, in. (mm)

Nominal
Tube Maximum
Size Cuff Outside Live Length, L Maximum
FLEXIBLE

T Ordering Length Diameter Angular

TUBING
HOSE /

in. Number A B Compressed Manufactured Extended Displacement➀

321-4-X-2 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) 3.00 (76.2) 180°
321-4-X-4 3.25 (82.6) 4.00 (102) 6.00 (152)
0.75 0.38
1/4 321-4-X-6 4.75 (121) 6.00 (152) 9.00 (229)
(19.0) (9.7) 360°
321-4-X-12 9.00 (229) 12.0 (305) 18.0 (457)
321-4-X-24 18.0 (457) 24.0 (610) 36.0 (914)
321-6-X-1 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 1.50 (38.1) 90°
321-6-X-3 2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114) 225°
0.75 0.58
3/8 321-6-X-6 4.75 (121) 6.00 (152) 9.00 (229)
(19.0) (14.7)
321-6-X-12 9.00 (229) 12.0 (305) 18.0 (457) 360°
321-6-X-24 18.0 (457) 24.0 (610) 36.0 (914)
321-8-X-3 2.50 (63.5) 3.00 (76.2) 4.50 (114) 180°
321-8-X-6 1.00 0.71 4.75 (121) 6.00 (152) 9.00 (229)
1/2
321-8-X-12 (25.4) (18.0) 9.00 (229) 12.0 (305) 18.0 (457) 360°
321-8-X-24 18.0 (457) 24.0 (610) 36.0 (914)
➀ Angular displacement based on nominal live length, as manufactured. Angular displacement is not recommended for
applications involving pressure surges.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 39

Convoluted Metal Tubing

Ordering Information
Custom Tubing and Tubing Assemblies
Build a custom tubing or tubing assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 5 6
3 2 1 - 4 - X - 36 F M R - H L T

1 Material 4 Manufactured Live Length 6 Options

Tubing Insert length in inches, in whole For tubing assemblies.
321 = 321 stainless steel numbers.

FLEXIBLE
HLT =Inboard helium leak test with

TUBING

HOSE /
1/4 in. tubing size: available in select certification (1 × 10–9 std
2 Tube OD, in. lengths up to 120 in. cm3/s maximum leak rate)
4 = 1/4 All other tubing sizes: available in
6 = 3/8 select lengths up to 96 in.
8 = 1/2 Manufactured lengths over 48 in. but
12 = 3/4 less than 96 in. are spliced from two
16 = 1 pieces; manufactured lengths over
24 = 1 1/2 96 in. but less than 120 in. are spliced
from three pieces.
3 Tubing To calculate the overall length of
X = Convoluted metal tubing the custom tubing assembly, add
the manufactured live length (L) and
two times the cuff length (A) for the
appropriate sized hose.

5 End Connections
For tubing assemblies.

First End Second End

Connection Connection Designator
None -B1
XBA adapter -B2
XBA adapter Female VCR FRB
Male VCR MRB
Female VCO FOB
None FR
Female VCR DFR
Female VCR
Male VCR FMR
Male VCO FRMO
None MR
Male VCR
Male VCR DMR
None FO
Female VCO DFO
Female VCO
Male VCR FOMR
Male VCO FMO
None MO
Male VCO
Male VCO DMO
 40 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Convoluted Metal Tubing

Factory-Welded End Connections
Rotatable Female
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings VCR Minimum Maximum
Size Inside Outside
in. A Diameter Dimension
1/4 1.95 (49.5) 0.18 (4.6) 0.87 (22.1)
3/8 2.06 (52.3) 0.28 (7.1) 1.23 (31.2)
1/2 2.25 (57.2) 0.40 (10.2) 1.23 (31.2)
A

Rotatable Male
Dimensions, in. (mm)
VCR Metal Gasket
VCR Minimum Maximum
Face Seal Fittings
FLEXIBLE
TUBING

Size Inside Outside

HOSE /

in. A Diameter Dimension

1/4 1.95 (49.5) 0.18 (4.6) 0.73 (18.4)
3/8 2.06 (52.3) 0.28 (7.1) 1.09 (27.6)
1/2 2.25 (57.2) 0.40 (10.2) 1.09 (27.6)
A

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Minimum Maximum
Size Inside Outside
in. A Diameter Dimension
1/4 1.68 (42.7) 0.13 (3.3) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8 1.40 (35.6) 0.23 (5.8) 1.16 (29.5)
A
1/2 1.81 (46.0) 0.33 (8.4) 1.16 (29.5)

Male VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Minimum Maximum
Size Inside Outside
in. A Diameter Dimension
1/4 2.13 (54.1) 0.13 (3.3) 0.73 (18.4)
3/8 2.27 (57.7) 0.23 (5.8) 1.09 (27.6)
A
1/2 2.46 (62.5) 0.33 (8.4) 1.09 (27.6)

XBA Adapters
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Adapter Minimum Maximum
Size Inside Outside
in. A Diameter Dimension
A 1/4 1.55 (39.4) 0.18 (4.6) 0.38 (9.7)
3/8 1.58 (40.1) 0.31 (7.9) 0.58 (14.7)
1/2 1.94 (49.3) 0.39 (9.9) 1.08 (27.4)
3/4 2.03 (51.6) 0.61 (15.5) 1.08 (27.4)
1 2.31 (58.7) 0.86 (21.8) 1.36 (34.5)
1 1/2 3.06 (77.7) 1.36 (34.5) 1.92 (48.8)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 41

Convoluted Metal Tubing

End Connections for Field Assembly

XBA Adapters
Ordering Information and Dimensions
Brazing material Select an adapter ordering number.

XBA adapter
Convoluted C T
tubing ID

0.25 in. B
■ XBA adapters are brazed or soldered to convoluted (6.4 mm) A
vacuum tubing.
■ XBA adapters allow for connecting to socket and butt weld Dimensions, in. (mm)
T Ordering
fittings, Swagelok tube fittings, and Ultra-Torr™ vacuum

FLEXIBLE
Number A B C

TUBING
in.

HOSE /
fittings. 1/4 304-4-XBA 0.94 (23.9) 0.69 (17.5) 0.16 (4.1)
■ Material is 304 stainless steel. 3/8 304-6-XBA 1.00 (25.4) 0.75 (19.0) 0.28 (7.1)
1/2 304-8-XBA 1.19 (30.2) 0.94 (23.9) 0.38 (9.7)
3/4 304-12-XBA 1.28 (32.5) 1.03 (26.2) 0.60 (15.2)
1 304-16-XBA➀ 1.56 (39.6) 1.31 (33.3) 0.85 (21.6)
1 1/2 304-24-XBA➀ 2.31 (58.7) 2.06 (52.3) 1.35 (34.3)
➀ Not recommended for gas service with Swagelok tube fitting.

XOA Adapters
Ultra-Torr vacuum fitting
Ordering Information and Dimensions
Select an adapter ordering number.

XOA adapter
Convoluted C T
tubing ID

0.12 in.
(3.1 mm)
■ XOA adapters support the tubing cuff when using A
convoluted vacuum tubing products with Ultra-Torr vacuum
fittings. Dimensions, in. (mm)
T Ordering
■ XOA adapters provide a leak-tight connection and are in. Number A C
reusable. 1/4 304-4-XOA 0.16 (4.1)
0.75 (19.0)
■ Material is 304 stainless steel. 3/8 304-6-XOA 0.28 (7.1)
1/2 304-8-XOA 0.38 (9.7)
3/4 304-12-XOA 0.60 (15.2)
1.00 (25.4)
1 304-16-XOA 0.85 (21.6)
1 1/2 304-24-XOA 1.35 (34.3)

Ultra-Torr Vacuum Fittings

Refer to Ultra-Torr Vacuum Fittings
catalog, MS-01-32, for additional
information.
 42 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FP Series Hybrid Hose

Features
■ PTFE smooth bore core hose. ■ Commonly used as a low pressure transfer hose where a
■ 316L stainless steel convoluted cover. smooth bore for ultra-high purity is critical and permeation
to the atmosphere is undesirable.
■ Sizes of 1/4 and 1/2 in. and working pressures from vacuum
to 165 psig (11.3 bar).
■ End connections welded in accordance with ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code Section IX.

Cover/Core gap Welded 316L end

connections
316L outer cover
PTFE core
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

SWAGELOK
SWAGELOK
Technical Data
Working Minimum
Pressure at Permanent
Minimum Center Line 0 to 120°F Deformation
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature (–17 to 48°C) Pressure at
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Vacuum to ... 70°F (20°C)
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar)
1/4 (6.4) 0.18 (4.6) 0.38 (9.7) 2.13 (5.4) 4.33 (10.9) 0 to 120 165 (11.3) 464 (32.0)
1/2 (12.7) 0.37 (9.4) 0.73 (18.5) 4.33 (10.9) 6.50 (16.5) (–17 to 48) 165 (11.3) 464 (32.0)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.
Exceeding the minimum permanent deformation pressure could result in core tube distortion.

Testing Cleaning and Packaging • Permeation of gases will occur

Every Swagelok FP series hose Each hose is bagged individually and between the PTFE core and
assembly is inboard helium leak tested boxed. the convoluted metal layer.
to a maximum leak rate of 1 × 10 –9 std When system pressure is
cm3/s. reduced, reverse permeation
back into the flow path may
For additional testing, see Testing,
occur. Contact your Swagelok
page 103
representative for additional
information.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 43

FP Series Hybrid Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
6L - FP 4 TA4 RF4 - 28 - APC or 71CM - APC
in. cm
1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options
End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
6L = 316L stainless steel column in tables on next page. with a dash between each designator.
APC = Airborne Particle Count
2 Hose 5 Overall Length RGA = Residual Gas Analysis
FP = FP series hose Inches in tenths or centimeters, in UVA = Ultra Violet Inspection
whole numbers. Include CM as shown TOC = Total Organic Carbon
for centimeter lengths. Standard Measurement
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. available lengths between 6-72 inches.
4 = 1/4 8 = 1/2
 44 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

FP Series Hybrid Hose

End Connections
Butt Weld Connection
Dimensions
Butt Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Weld Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
A Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
1/4 4 TB4 0.84 (21.3) 0.18 (4.6) 0.25 (6.4)
1/2 8 TB8 1.06 (26.9) 0.40 (10.2) 0.50 (12.7)

Swagelok Tube Adapters

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension

AA Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 TA4 2.24 (56.9) 0.18 (4.6) 0.25 (6.4)
1/2 8 TA8 2.79 (70.9) 0.37 (9.4) 0.50 (12.7)

Rotatable Male
Dimensions
VCR® Metal Gasket
Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Face Seal Fittings VCR Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 RM4 2.04 (51.8) 0.18 (4.6) 0.78 (19.8)
A A
1/2 8 RM8 2.35 (59.7) 0.40 (10.2) 1.08 (27.4)

Rotatable Female
Dimensions
VCR Metal Gasket
Face Seal Fittings Nominal End Minimum Maximum
VCR Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 4 RF4 2.04 (51.8) 0.16 (4.1) 0.87 (22.1)
A A
1/2 8 RF8 2.35 (59.7) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions
Face Seal Fittings
Nominal End Minimum Maximum
VCO Hose Size Connection Inside Outside
Size Designator Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 4 VF4 1.44 (36.6) 0.19 (4.8) 0.79 (20.1)
1/2 8 VF8 1.66 (41.9) 0.41 (10.4) 1.08 (27.4)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 45

T Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ PTFE hose with permeation-resistant features. ■ Select static dissipative hose assemblies are approved to
■ Smooth-bore PTFE core. ECE R110; see page 105 for more information.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 1 in. and working pressures up to ■ Commonly used where chemical compatibility and
3000 psig (206 bar). permeation resistance is desired.
■ Single braid layer of 304 stainless steel (316L SS and alloy ■ Standard and custom assemblies available.
400 available) ensures hose pressure containment and ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
protects the core from abrasion. for details.
■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
Part 177.1550.
■ Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
applications that require static dissipation.
316 SS and

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
300 series SS collar or other alloy end
304 SS braid, PTFE core connections
Alloy 400
standard

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
304 SS Braid (TH and TC)
1/4 (6.4) 0.19 (4.8) 0.31 (7.9) 1.50 (3.81) 2.00 (5.08) 450 (230) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 0.08 (0.12)
3/8 (9.5) 0.31 (7.9) 0.44 (11.1) 3.50 (8.89) 5.00 (12.7) 450 (230) 2500 (172) 10 000 (689) 0.12 (0.17)
–65 to 450
1/2 (12.7) 0.41 (10.3) 0.56 (14.3) 4.50 (11.4) 6.00 (15.2) 450 (230) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.15 (0.22)
(–53 to 230)
3/4 (19.0) 0.63 (15.9) 0.81 (20.6) 6.00 (15.2) 7.50 (19.0) 450 (230) 1500 (103) 6 000 (413) 0.28 (0.41)
1 (25.4) 0.88 (22.2) 1.03 (26.2) 9.00 (22.9) 11.3 (28.7) 400 (204) 1000 (68.9) 4 000 (275) 0.39 (0.58)
Alloy 400 Braid (TL4)
–65 to 450
1/4 (6.4) 0.19 (4.8) 0.31 (7.9) 1.50 (3.81) 2.00 (5.08) 450 (230) 1500 (103) 6 000 (413) 0.08 (0.12)
(–53 to 230)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings Testing

Ratings are based on burst testing. Every Swagelok T series hose
assembly is pressure tested with water
304 SS Alloy 400 for 30 to 60 seconds at 1.5 times the
Braid Material (TH and TC) (TL4) working pressure to a requirement
Nominal Hose Size of no visible leakage at ambient
in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 1/4
temperature.
Temperature °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 2250 (155) 2250 (155) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 1500 (103) Cleaning and Packaging
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 3000 (206) 2500 (172) 2000 (137) 1500 (103) 1000 (68.9) 1500 (103) Swagelok T series hose components
200 (93) 2250 (119) 1875 (129) 1500 (103) 1125 (77.6) 750 (51.7) 1500 (103
are cleaned in accordance with
300 (148) to 450 (230) 2250 (119) 1875 (129) 1500 (103) 1125 (77.6) 750 (51.7) 1215 (83.7) Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
Each hose is bagged individually
and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.
 46 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

T Series PTFE Hose

Ordering Information and Dimensions
Standard Length Hose Assemblies
Select an ordering number.

OAL

Swagelok Tube Adapter End Connections

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Dimensions
Nominal Tube Overall Live End Connection Maximum
Hose Adapter Length Ordering Length Inside Outside
Size Size OAL Number L Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. in. (cm) in. (cm) in. (mm)
8.00 (20.3) SS-4BHT-6 3.92 (10.0)
14.0 (35.6) SS-4BHT-12 9.92 (25.2)
20.0 (50.8) SS-4BHT-18 15.9 (40.4)
26.0 (66.0) SS-4BHT-24 21.9 (55.6)
0.13 0.49
1/4 1/4 38.0 (96.5) SS-4BHT-36 33.9 (86.1)
(3.3) (12.4)
50.0 (127) SS-4BHT-48 45.9 (117)
62.0 (157) SS-4BHT-60 57.9 (147)
74.0 (188) SS-4BHT-72 69.9 (178)
122 (310) SS-4BHT-120 118 (300)
14.0 (35.6) SS-6BHT-12 9.64 (24.5)
20.0 (50.8) SS-6BHT-18 15.6 (39.6)
26.0 (66.0) SS-6BHT-24 21.6 (54.9)
0.23 0.59
3/8 3/8 38.0 (96.5) SS-6BHT-36 33.6 (85.3)
(5.8) (15.0)
50.0 (127) SS-6BHT-48 45.6 (116)
62.0 (157) SS-6BHT-60 57.6 (146)
74.0 (188) SS-6BHT-72 69.6 (177)
14.5 (36.8) SS-8BHT-12 9.04 (23.0)
20.5 (52.1) SS-8BHT-18 15.0 (38.1)
26.5 (67.3) SS-8BHT-24 21.0 (53.3)
38.5 (97.8) SS-8BHT-36 33.0 (83.8) 0.34 0.78
1/2 1/2
50.5 (128) SS-8BHT-48 45.0 (114) (8.6) (19.8)
62.5 (159) SS-8BHT-60 57.0 (145)
74.5 (189) SS-8BHT-72 69.0 (175)
122.5 (311) SS-8BHT-120 117 (297)
26.5 (67.3) SS-12BHT-24 20.7 (52.6)
0.54 1.04
3/4 3/4 38.5 (97.8) SS-12BHT-36 32.7 (83.1)
(13.7) (26.4)
50.5 (128) SS-12BHT-48 44.7 (114)
Dimensions, mm cm (in.) cm (in.) mm (in.)
35.6 (14.0) SS-4MBHT-12 25.2 (9.92)
3.3 12.4
1/4 in. 6 66.0 (26.0) SS-4MBHT-24 55.7 (21.9)
(0.13) (0.49)
96.5 (38.0) SS-4MBHT-36 86.2 (33.9)
67.3 (26.5) SS-8MBHT-24 53.4 (21.0) 8.6 19.8
1/2 in. 12
97.8 (38.5) SS-8MBHT-36 83.9 (33.0) (0.34) (0.78)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 47

T Series PTFE Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - TH 4 TA4 SL2 - 28 - Z or 71CM-Z
in. cm

1 Material 3 Nominal Hose Size, in. 6 Options

FLEXIBLE
4 = 1/4

TUBING

HOSE /
End Connections For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel 6 = 3/8 with a dash between each designator.
M = Alloy 400 8 = 1/2
CRN = L anyard tag with CRN
HC = Alloy C-276 12 = 3/4
(available for TH and TC hose
TI = Titanium, grade 4 16 = 1
only)
F = Fire jacket
4 End Connections
F1 = Thermosleeve
Only wetted components will be made See End Connection Designator N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
of the requested material, with the column in tables on next page. S =302 SS spring guard, hose-
exception of Alloy 400 on TL hoses. length
Contact your authorized Swagelok 5 Overall Length W = Hydrostatic test
sales and service representative with Z =316L SS braid material
Inches or centimeters, in whole (1/4 and 3/8 in. TH series hoses
component material questions.
numbers. Include CM as shown for only)
2 Hose
centimeter lengths. 093 = ECE R110 approval, only on
TH =T series PTFE hose with 304 SS select end connections for
braid TC hose. (See page 105 for
TC =T series carbon black-filled additional information.)
PTFE hose with 304 SS braid Other Tags
TL =T series PTFE hose with T = Lanyard tag
alloy 400 braid (1/4 in. hose T2 = Two lanyard tags
size only) T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 48 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

T Series PTFE Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Adapters
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End End Maximum
Adapter Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
Size Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
1/4 4 TA4➀ 2.04 (51.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.49 (12.4)
6 TA6➀ 2.18 (55.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.59 (15.0)
3/8
8 TA6➀ 2.47 (62.7) 0.26 (6.6)
0.78 (19.8)
1/2 8 TA8➀ 2.73 (69.3) 0.34 (8.6)
12 TA12 2.90 (73.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.04 (26.4)
3/4
16 TA12 3.37 (85.6) 0.58 (14.7) 1.35 (34.3)
12 TA16 3.25 (82.6) 0.54 (13.7) 1.24 (31.5)
1
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

16 TA16 3.65 (92.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.35 (34.3)

Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 TM6➀ 51.8 (2.04)
3.3 (0.13) 12.4 (0.49)
8 4 TM8➀ 53.3 (2.10)
10 6 TM10➀ 55.4 (2.18) 5.8 (0.23) 15.0 (0.59)
12 8 TM12➀ 69.3 (2.73) 8.6 (0.34) 19.8 (0.78)
18 12 TM18➀ 73.7 (2.90) 13.7 (0.54) 26.4 (1.04)
25 16 TM25 92.7 (3.65) 19.8 (0.78) 34.3 (1.35)

➀ ECE R110 approval available.

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
Female VCO O-Ring

VCO Nominal End End Maximum

Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 VF4 1.84 (46.7) 0.13 (3.3) 0.80 (20.3)
6 VF8 1.92 (48.8) 0.23 (5.8)
A 1/2 1.16 (29.5)
8 VF8 2.18 (55.4) 0.34 (8.6)
3/4 12 VF12 2.40 (61.0) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (41.2)
1 16 VF16 2.81 (71.4) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End End Maximum
Fitting Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
Size Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/8 4 SL2 2.00 (50.8) 0.09 (2.3) 0.51 (13.0)
1/4 4 SL4➀ 2.10 (53.4) 0.13 (3.3) 0.66 (16.8)
3/8 6 SL6➀ 2.27 (57.7) 0.23 (5.8) 0.80 (20.3)
1/2 8 SL8➀ 2.64 (67.1) 0.34 (8.6) 1.02 (25.9)
3/4 12 SL12 2.74 (69.6) 0.54 (13.7) 1.30 (33.0)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 4 SM6➀ 54.1 (2.13) 3.3 (0.13) 16.8 (0.66)
10 6 SM10➀ 57.9 (2.28) 5.8 (0.23) 22.1 (0.87)
12 8 SM12➀ 67.1 (2.64) 8.6 (0.34) 25.9 (1.02)
18 12 SM18 69.6 (2.74) 13.7 (0.54) 34.8 (1.37)
➀ ECE R110 approval available.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 49

T Series PTFE Hose

Female Pipe Threads,
Female
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered NPT and
(ISO 7) ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)
Tapered Nominal End End Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
NPT
4 PF4 1.91 (48.5) 0.13 (3.3)
1/4 0.87 (22.1)
A 6 PF4 1.94 (49.3)
0.23 (5.8)
3/8 6 PF6 2.01 (51.1) 1.02 (25.8)
1/2 8 PF8 2.48 (63.0) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)
3/4 12 PF12 2.57 (65.3) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.7)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 4 FT4 1.91 (48.5) 0.13 (3.3) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 8 FT8 2.48 (63.0) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Male Pipe Threads,
Male
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered NPT and
(ISO 7) ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
Tapered Nominal End End Maximum
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7)

Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside

in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
NPT
4 PM4➀ 1.96 (49.8) 0.13 (3.3)
A 0.66 (16.8)
1/4 6 PM4➀ 2.04 (51.8) 0.23 (5.8)
8 PM4 2.31 (58.7) 0.28 (7.1)
6 PM6➀ 2.07 (52.6) 0.23 (5.8) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8
8 PM6➀ 2.31 (58.7)
0.34 (8.6)
8 PM8➀ 2.52 (64.0) 1.02 (25.8)
1/2
12 PM8 1.16 (29.5)
2.63 (86.8) 0.54 (13.7)
12 PM12 1.23 (31.2)
3/4
16 PM12 3.11 (79.0) 0.63 (16.0) 1.45 (36.8)
1 16 PM16 3.32 (84.3) 0.78 (19.8) 1.60 (40.5)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 4 MT4➀ 1.96 (49.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.66 (16.8)
1/2 8 MT8➀ 2.52 (64.0) 0.34 (8.6) 1.02 (25.8)
3/4 12 MT12 2.63 (66.8) 0.54 (13.7) 1.23 (31.2)
1 16 MT16 3.32 (84.3) 0.78 (19.8) 1.60 (40.5)
➀ ECE R110 approval available.

Female VCR Metal Gasket

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
Female VCR Metal Gasket Face Seal Fitting
VCR Nominal End End Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
1/4 4 RF4 2.16 (54.9) 0.13 (3.3) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 8 RF8 2.40 (61.0) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)
A 3/4 12 RF12 2.71 (68.8) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (44.2)
1 16 RF16 3.48 (88.4) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)
 50 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

T Series PTFE Hose

SAE 37° (JIC) Male Flare
SAE 37º (JIC) Male Flare
JIC Dimensions, in. (mm)
Flare Nominal End End Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
A 1/4 4 AN4➀ 1.98 (50.3) 0.13 (3.3) 0.59 (15.0)
3/8 6 AN6➀ 2.05 (52.1) 0.23 (5.8) 0.73 (18.5)
1/2 8 AN8➀ 2.43 (61.7) 0.34 (8.6) 0.94 (23.9)
➀ ECE R110 approval available.

SAE 37° (JIC) Female

JIC Dimensions, in. (mm)
SwivelSAE 37º (JIC) Female Swivel Cutout
Swivel Nominal End End Maximum
Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside
37º in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension
FLEXIBLE

1/4 4 AS4 2.05 (52.1) 0.13 (3.3) 0.73 (18.5)

TUBING
HOSE /

3/8 6 AS6 2.21 (56.1) 0.23 (5.8) 0.87 (22.1)

A 1/2 8 AS8 2.53 (64.3) 0.34 (8.6) 1.09 (27.6)

Sanitary Kwik-Clamps
Sanitary Kwik-Clamp Cutout
Kwik- Dimensions, in. (mm)
Clamp Nominal End End Maximum B, Flange
Size Hose Size Connection Connection Outside Face Inside
B
in. Designator Designator A Inside Diameter Dimension Diameter
1/2 8 KC8 2.28 (57.9) 0.34 (8.6) 0.99 (25.2) 0.40 (10.2)
A 3/4 12 KC12 2.20 (55.9) 0.54 (13.7) 1.04 (26.4) 0.59 (15.0)
1 16 KC16 2.64 (67.0) 0.87 (22.1)
0.78 (19.8) 1.98 (50.3)
1 1/2 16 KC24 2.48 (63.0) 1.37 (34.8)
Working pressure and temperature ratings of hoses with sanitary Kwik-Clamp end connections may be
limited by the gasket material and clamp. Maximum pressure rating is 300 psig (20.6 bar).
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 51

B Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ General purpose PTFE hose. ■ Commonly used where chemical compatibility is desired.
■ Smooth-bore PTFE core. ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
■ 1/8 in. size and working pressure of 3000 psig (206 bar). ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ 304 stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure for details.
containment and protects the core from abrasion. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
177.1550 and USP <88> Class VI, and is free of TSE, BSE,
and ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.

304 SS braid PTFE core 300 series SS collar 316 SS end

connections

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Technical Data
Vacuum Working Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Pressure at Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) –65 to 450°F Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... (–53 to 230°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
–65 to 450
1/8 (3.2) 0.125 (3.2) 0.25 (6.4) 1.50 (3.81) 3.75 (9.52) 450 (230) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 0.05 (0.07)
(–53 to 230)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings Testing Cleaning and Packaging

Every Swagelok B series hose Every Swagelok B series hose
Temperature Working Pressure
°F (°C) psig (bar) assembly is pressure tested with water component is cleaned in accordance
at room temperature for 30 seconds to with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
–65 (–53) to 450 (230) 3000 (206)
a requirement of no detectable leakage. Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
Testing is performed at a minimum
of 1000 psig (69 bar), or 225 psig
(15.5 bar) if an end connection is rated
below 1000 psig (69 bar).
 52 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

B Series PTFE Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - BT 2 TA2 PM2 - 28 - MB or 71CM - MB
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on pages 69 to 78 with a dash between each designator.
HC = Alloy C-276 CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
5 Overall Length F = Fire jacket
2 Hose
Inches or centimeters, in whole W = Hydrostatic test
BT = B series PTFE hose numbers. Include CM as shown for Splices
centimeter lengths. SP1 = 1 splice
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. SP2 = 2 splices
Typical maximum one-piece hose
2 = 1/8 Mat Tags
length is 900 in. or 2286 cm. Longer
assemblies may be spliced; specify MA = Gray MO = Orange
splices under Options. See page 4 MB = Blue MP = Purple
for more information about splices. MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 53

X Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Highly flexible PTFE hose. ■ Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
■ Smooth-bore PTFE core. applications that require static dissipation.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 1 in. and working pressures up to ■ Commonly used where flexibility and chemical
3500 psig (241 bar). compatibility are desired.
■ Fiber braid bonded to the core with a patent-pending ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
process supports core to resist kinking. ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ 304 stainless steel braid protects the core from abrasion for details.
and enhances hose pressure rating. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
177.1550 and USP <88> Class VI, and is free of TSE, BSE,
and ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
304 SS braid Fiber braid PTFE core 300 series SS collar 316 SS
end connections

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.46 (11.7) 1.25 (3.18) 4.20 (10.7) 450 (230) 3500 (241) 14 000 (964) 0.13 (0.19)
3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.57 (14.5) 1.75 (4.44) 4.40 (11.2) 450 (230) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 0.17 (0.25)
–65 to 450
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.76 (19.3) 2.50 (6.35) 4.55 (11.6) 450 (230) 1800 (124) 7 200 (496) 0.24 (0.36)
(–53 to 230)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 3.50 (8.89) 6.38 (16.2) 200 (93) 1250 (86.1) 5 000 (344) 0.36 (0.54)
1 (25.4)➀ 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 150 (65) 1000 (68.9) 4 000 (275) 1.1 (1.6)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.
➀ Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiber braid reinforcement.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) to 100 (37) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
200 (93) 3500 (241) 2345 (161) 1800 (124) 1135 (78.2) 1000 (68.9)
300 (148) 3460 (238) 1965 (135) 1790 (123) 1010 (69.5) 895 (61.6)
400 (204) 3265 (224) 1810 (124) 1665 (114) 900 (62.0) 895 (61.6)
450 (230) 3205 (220) 1675 (115) 1665 (114) 900 (62.0) 895 (61.6)
 54 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

X Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok X series hose assembly is pressure Every Swagelok X series hose
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a component is cleaned in accordance
requirement of no detectable leakage. Testing is performed at with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
1000 psig (69 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if an end connection Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
is rated below 1000 psig (69 bar).

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - XT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - MB or 71CM - MB
in. cm

1 Material 5 Overall Length 6 Options

End Connections Inches or centimeters, in whole For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel numbers. Include CM as shown for with a dash between each designator.
B=B  rass (only on 1/4 in. PM, PF, centimeter lengths. CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
and 1/4 in. hose size) Typical maximum one-piece hose A = Armor guard
HC = Alloy C-276 length: F = Fire jacket
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/4 through G6 = Spiral guard, black
2 Hose 1/2 in. hose G7 = Spiral guard, blue
G8 = Spiral guard, yellow
XT = X series PTFE hose ■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 and 1 in.
W = Hydrostatic test
XC =X series carbon black-filled hose.
PTFE hose Splices
Longer assemblies may be spliced; SP1 = 1 splice
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. specify splices under Options. See SP2 = 2 splices
4= 1/4 page 4 for more information about Mat Tags
6= 3/8 splices. MA = Gray MO = Orange
8= 1/2 MB = Blue MP = Purple
12 = 3/4 MC = Brown MR = Red
16 = 1 MG = Green MW = White
4 End Connections
MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
See End Connection Designator Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
T5 = Clamp tag
Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
7 Two Elbow Orientation
Only include a value in the assembly
number when both end connections are
elbows. See page 72 for values and
further information.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 55

S Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Highly flexible, silicone-covered PTFE hose. ■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
■ Smooth-bore PTFE core. 177.1550, USP <88> Class VI (121°C), 3-A (for hose sizes
3/4 and 1 in.), and is free of TSE, BSE, and ADI as defined
■ Size range of 1/8 through 1 in. and working pressures up to
in EMEA/410/01.
3500 psig (241 bar).
■ Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
■ Fiber braid bonded to the core with a patent-pending
applications that require static dissipation.
process supports core to resist kinking.
■ Commonly used where flexibility and chemical
■ 304 stainless steel braid protects the core from abrasion
compatibility are desired.
and enhances hose pressure rating.
■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
■ Silicone cover provides smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
temperature extremes. for details.
■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Silicone 304 SS braid Fiber braid PTFE core 300 series SS collar 316 SS
cover end connections

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/8 (3.2)➀ 0.125 (3.2) 0.42 (10.7) 1.50 (3.81) 3.75 (9.52) 400 (204) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 0.09 (0.13)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.55 (14.0) 1.25 (3.18) 4.20 (10.7) 400 (204) 3500 (241) 14 000 (964) 0.19 (0.28)
3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.71 (18.0) 1.75 (4.44) 4.40 (11.2) –65 to 400 400 (204) 3000 (206) 12 000 (826) 0.25 (0.37)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.86 (21.8) 2.50 (6.35) 4.55 (11.6) (–53 to 204) 400 (204) 1800 (124) 7 200 (496) 0.34 (0.51)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.12 (28.4) 3.50 (8.89) 6.38 (16.2) 200 (93) 1250 (86.1) 5 000 (344) 0.47 (0.70)
1 (25.4)➁ 1.00 (25.4) 1.55 (39.4) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 150 (65) 1000 (68.9) 4 000 (275) 1.8 (2.7)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.
➀ Constructed with no fiber braid reinforcement.
➁ Constructed with two stainless steel braids and no fiber braid reinforcement.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/8 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) to 100 (37) 3000 (206) 3500 (241) 3000 (206) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
200 (93) 3000 (206) 3500 (241) 2650 (182) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
300 (148) 2610 (179) 3435 (236) 2510 (172) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
400 (204) 2550 (175) 3320 (228) 2495 (171) 1800 (124) 1250 (86.1) 1000 (68.9)
 56 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

S Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok S series hose Testing is performed at 1000 psig Every Swagelok S series hose
assembly is pressure tested with water (69 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if an end component is cleaned in accordance
at room temperature for 30 seconds to connection is rated below 1000 psig with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
a requirement of no detectable leakage. (69 bar). Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - ST 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - PB or 71CM - PB
in. cm

1 Material 6 Options

End Connections For multiple options, add designators Perma Tags 

SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. (not available in 1/8 in. hose size)
B=B  rass (only on 1/4 in. PM, PF, CRN = L anyard tag with CRN PA = Gray PO = Orange
and 1/4 in. hose size) (available for ST hose only) PB = Blue PP = Purple
HC = Alloy C-276 A = Armor guard PC = Brown PR = Red
F = Fire jacket PG = Green PW = White
2 Hose
G6 = Spiral guard, black (not PK = Black PY = Yellow
ST =S series PTFE hose with available in 1/8 in. ST hose PN = Pink
silicone-cover size) Add 2 to the end of the Perma Tag
SC =S series carbon black-filled G7 = Spiral guard, blue (not designator for two tags.
PTFE hose with silicone cover available in 1/8 in. ST hose Example: PA2
(not available in 1/8 in. hose size) size) Other Tags
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. G8 = Spiral guard, yellow (not T = Lanyard tag
available in 1/8 in. ST hose T2 = Two lanyard tags
2 = 1/8 (ST series only)
size)
4 = 1/4 Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
W = Hydrostatic test
6 = 3/8 Text table, page 104.
8 = 1/2 Splices
SP1 = 1 splice See page 103 for detailed descriptions
12 = 3/4 of options.
16 = 1 SP2 = 2 splices
Mat Tags
4 End Connections MA = Gray MO = Orange
7 Two Elbow Orientation
See End Connection Designator MB = Blue MP = Purple
Only include a value in the assembly
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. MC = Brown MR = Red
number when both end connections are
MG = Green MW = White
5 Overall Length elbows. See page 72 for values and
MK = Black MY = Yellow
Inches or centimeters, in whole further information.
MN = Pink
numbers. Include CM as shown for Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
centimeter lengths. designator for two tags.
Typical maximum one-piece hose length: Example: MA2
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/4 through
1/2 in. hose
■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 and 1 in.
hose.
Longer assemblies may be spliced;
specify splices under Options. See page
4 for more information about splices.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 57

C Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Low-weight, highly flexible PTFE hose. ■ Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
■ Helical convoluted bore PTFE core. applications that require static dissipation.
■ Size range of 1/2 through 2 in. and working pressures up to ■ Commonly used where high flexibility and chemical
1500 psig (103 bar). compatibility are desired.
■ 300 series stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
containment and protects the core from abrasion. ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part for details.
177.1550 and USP <88> Class VI, and is free of TSE, BSE, ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
and ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.

FLEXIBLE
Helical convoluted PTFE core

TUBING

HOSE /
316 SS
304 SS braid 300 series SS collar end connections

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure Pressure Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... at 70°F (20°C) at 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.76 (19.3) 2.50 (6.35) 3.75 (9.52) 450 (230) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 0.20 (0.30)
–65 to 450
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.00 (25.4) 3.00 (7.62) 3.90 (9.91) 450 (230) 1100 (75.7) 4400 (303) 0.28 (0.42)
(–53 to 230)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.32 (33.5) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 200 (93) 750 (51.6) 3000 (206) 0.47 (0.70)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.03 (51.6) 6.00 (15.2) 7.80 (19.8) –20 to 340 150 (65) 700 (48.2) 2800 (192) 0.83 (1.2)
2 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.46 (62.5) 7.50 (19.0) 9.75 (24.8) (–28 to 171) — 525 (36.1) 2100 (144) 1.02 (1.5)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/2➀ 3/4➀ 1➀ 1 1/2➀ 2➀
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6) — —
–20 (–28) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6) 675 (46.5) 525 (36.1)
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6) 700 (48.2) 525 (36.1)
200 (93) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 700 (48.2) 435 (29.9) 525 (36.1)
300 (148) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 620 (42.7) 405 (27.9) 495 (34.1)
340 (171) 1500 (103) 1030 (70.9) 600 (41.3) 330 (22.7) 485 (33.4)
400 (204) 1500 (103) 960 (66.1) 565 (38.9) — —
450 (230) 1500 (103) 900 (62.0) 490 (33.7) — —
➀ Hose with carbon black-filled PTFE core (CC series) is limited to –20 to 340°F (–28 to 171°C).
 58 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

C Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok C series hose ■ For hose assemblies over 1 in., Every Swagelok C series hose
assembly is pressure tested with water testing is performed at 500 psig component is cleaned in accordance
at room temperature for 30 seconds to (34.4 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
a requirement of no detectable leakage. an end connection is rated below Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
■ For hose assemblies 1 in. and under, 500 psig (34.4 bar).
testing is performed at 1000 psig
(69 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if
an end connection is rated below
1000 psig (69 bar).

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
FLEXIBLE

Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - CT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - MB or 71CM -MB
in. cm
1 Material 5 Overall Length
End Connections Inches or centimeters, in whole Mat Tags
SS = 316 stainless steel numbers. Include CM as shown for MA = Gray MO = Orange
HC = Alloy C-276 centimeter lengths. MB = Blue MP = Purple
MC = Brown MR = Red
Typical maximum one-piece hose MG = Green MW = White
2 Hose length:
CT = C series helical convoluted PTFE MK = Black MY = Yellow
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/2 in. hose MN = Pink
hose
CC = C series convoluted, carbon ■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 and 1 in. Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
black-filled PTFE hose hose designator for two tags.
■ 300 in. or 762 cm for 1 1/2 and 2 in. Example: MA2
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. hose. Other Tags
T = Lanyard tag
8 = 1/2 Longer assemblies may be spliced;
T2 = Two lanyard tags
12 = 3/4 specify splices under Options. See
T5 = Clamp tag
16 = 1 page 4 for more information about
24 = 1 1/2 splices. Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
32 = 2 Text table, page 104.
6 Options See page 103 for detailed descriptions
4 End Connections For multiple options, add designators of options.
See End Connection Designator with a dash between each designator.
7 Two Elbow Orientation
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. CRN = L anyard tag with CRN
(available for CT hose only) Only include a value in the assembly
A = Armor guard number when both end connections are
F = Fire jacket elbows. See page 72 for values and
G6 = Spiral guard, black further information.
G7 = Spiral guard, blue
G8 = Spiral guard, yellow
W = Hydrostatic test
Splices
SP1 = 1 splice
SP2 = 2 splices
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 59

J Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Low-weight, highly flexible PTFE hose. ■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
■ Helical convoluted bore PTFE core. 177.1550, USP <88> Class VI, 3-A (for hose sizes 3/4
and 1 in.), and is free of TSE, BSE, and ADI as defined in
■ Size range of 1/2 through 1 in. and working pressures up to
EMEA/410/01.
1500 psig (103 bar).
■ Commonly used where high flexibility and chemical
■ 300 series stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure
compatibility are desired.
containment and protects the core from abrasion.
■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
■ Silicone cover provides smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
temperature extremes. for details.
■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

FLEXIBLE
Silicone cover Helical convoluted PTFE core

TUBING

HOSE /
316 SS
304 SS braid 300 series SS collar end connections

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure Pressure Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... at 70°F (20°C) at 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.88 (22.4) 2.50 (6.35) 3.75 (9.52) 400 (204) 1500 (103) 6000 (413) 0.28 (0.42)
–65 to 400
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.12 (28.4) 3.00 (7.62) 3.90 (9.91) 400 (204) 1100 (75.7) 4400 (303) 0.40 (0.60)
(–53 to 204)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.47 (37.3) 5.50 (14.0) 7.15 (18.2) 200 (93) 750 (51.6) 3000 (206) 0.72 (1.1)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/2 3/4 1
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6)
–20 (–28) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6)
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6)
200 (93) 1500 (103) 1100 (75.7) 750 (51.6)
300 (148) 1500 (103) 1095 (75.4) 620 (42.7)
340 (171) 1500 (103) 1075 (74.0) 595 (40.9)
400 (204) 1500 (103) 1050 (72.3) 555 (38.2)
450 (230) — — —
 60 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

J Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok J series hose assembly is pressure Every Swagelok J series hose component is cleaned in
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a accordance with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and Packaging
requirement of no detectable leakage. (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
■ Testing is performed at 1000 psig (69 bar), or 225 psig
(15.5 bar) if an end connection is rated below 1000 psig (69
bar).

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - JT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - MB or 71CM -MB
in. cm

1 Material 6 Options 6 Options

End Connections For multiple options, add designators Other Tags
SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. T = Lanyard tag
HC = Alloy C-276 T2 = Two lanyard tags
A = Armor guard
F = Fire jacket Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
2 Hose Text table, page 104.
G6 = Spiral guard, black
JT = J series helical convoluted PTFE G7 = Spiral guard, blue See page 103 for detailed descriptions
hose with silicone cover G8 = Spiral guard, yellow of options.
W = Hydrostatic test
Splices 7 Two Elbow Orientation
3 Nominal Hose Size, in.
SP1 = 1 splice Only include a value in the assembly
8 = 1/2 SP2 = 2 splices number when both end connections are
12 = 3/4 Mat Tags elbows. See page 72 for values and
16 = 1 MA = Gray MO = Orange further information.
MB = Blue MP = Purple
4 End Connections MC = Brown MR = Red
See End Connection Designator MG = Green MW = White
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
5 Overall Length Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
designator for two tags.
Inches or centimeters, in whole numbers. Example: MA2
Include CM as shown for centimeter
Perma Tags
lengths.
PA = Gray PO = Orange
Typical maximum one-piece hose length: PB = Blue PP = Purple
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/2 in. hose PC = Brown PR = Red
■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 and 1 in. PG = Green PW = White
hose PK = Black PY = Yellow
PN = Pink
Longer assemblies may be spliced;
Add 2 to the end of the Perma Tag
specify splices under Options. See page
designator for two tags.
4 for more information about splices.
Example: PA2
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 61

N Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Nonmetallic PTFE hose. ■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
■ Helical convoluted bore, carbon black-filled PTFE core for 177.1550, USP <88> Class VI, and is free of TSE, BSE, and
applications that require static dissipation. ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.
■ 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. sizes and working pressures up to ■ Commonly used where flexibility, chemical compatibility,
1250 psig (86.1 bar). and a nonconductive braid are desired.
■ Internal insulating wrap eliminates need for external ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
insulation in many applications. ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ Aramid fiber braid aids pressure containment and for details.
maintains flexibility while reducing weight. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

Aramid fiber braid Ceramic wrap Helical convoluted bore, 316 SS

FLEXIBLE
carbon black-filled PTFE core end connections

TUBING

HOSE /
300 series SS collar

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
3/8 (9.6) 0.37 (9.4) 0.70 (17.8) 2.50 (6.35) 4.00 (10.2) 450 (230) 1250 (86.1) 5000 (344) 0.12 (0.18)
–65 to 450
1/2 (12.7) 0.51 (13.0) 0.86 (21.8) 3.50 (8.89) 5.25 (13.3) 400 (204) 750 (51.6) 3000 (206) 0.15 (0.22)
(–53 to 230)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.12 (28.4) 4.50 (11.4) 5.85 (14.9) — 375 (25.8) 1500 (103) 0.19 (0.28)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 3/8 1/2 3/4
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 1250 (86.1) 720 (49.6) 375 (25.8)
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 1250 (86.1) 750 (51.6) 375 (25.8)
200 (93) 500 (34.4) 340 (23.4) 275 (18.9)
300 (148) 365 (25.1) 235 (16.1) 165 (11.3)
400 (204) 165 (11.3) 160 (11.0) 85.0 (5.8)
450 (230) 140 (9.6) 130 (8.9) 80.0 (5.5)
 62 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

N Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok N series hose assembly is pressure Every Swagelok N series hose
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a component is cleaned in accordance
requirement of no detectable leakage. Testing is performed at with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
500 psig (34.4 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if an end connection Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
is rated below 500 psig (34.4 bar).

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - NC 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - MB or 71CM - MB
in. cm

1 Material 6 Options 7 Two Elbow Orientation

End Connections For multiple options, add designators Only include a value in the assembly
SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. number when both end connections are
HC = Alloy C-276 elbows. See page 72 for values and
CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
further information.
A = Armor guard
2 Hose
F = Fire jacket
NC =N series helical convoluted G6 = Spiral guard, black
-bore, carbon black-filled PTFE G7 = Spiral guard, blue
hose with ceramic wrap G8 = Spiral guard, yellow
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. W = Hydrostatic test
6 = 3/8 Splices
8 = 1/2 SP1 = 1 splice
12 = 3/4 SP2 = 2 splices
Mat Tags
4 End Connections MA = Gray MO = Orange
See End Connection Designator MB = Blue MP = Purple
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. MC = Brown MR = Red
MG = Green MW = White
5 Overall Length MK = Black MY = Yellow
Inches or centimeters, in whole MN = Pink
numbers. Include CM as shown for Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
centimeter lengths. designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
Typical maximum one-piece hose
length: Other Tags
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 3/8 and 1/2 in.
T = Lanyard tag
T2 = Two lanyard tags
hose
■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 in. hose. Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
Longer assemblies may be spliced;
specify splices under Options. See See page 103 for detailed descriptions
page 4 for more information about of options.
splices.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 63

W Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Silicone covered PTFE hose. ■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
■ Smooth-bore, carbon black-filled PTFE core for applications 177.1550, USP <88> Class VI, 3-A (for hose size 3/4 in.), and
that require static dissipation. is free of TSE, BSE, and ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.
■ 3/8, 1/2, and 3/4 in. sizes and working pressures up to ■ Commonly used where flexibility, chemical compatibility,
750 psig (51.6 bar). and exterior insulating (hot/cold) cover are desired.
■ Fiber braid bonded to the core with a patent-pending ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
process supports core to reduce kinking. ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ 304 stainless steel braid ensures hose pressure for details.
containment and protects the core from abrasion. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
■ Silicone cover provides smooth, noncontaminating, easy-
to-clean surface and insulation from internal system fluid
temperature extremes; cover is available in black, blue, red,

FLEXIBLE
and white.

TUBING

HOSE /
Silicone Ceramic wrap Carbon black-filled PTFE core 316 SS
cover end connections

304 SS braid Fiber braid 300 series SS collar

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst Bulk
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Hose
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
3/8 (9.6) 0.35 (8.9) 0.75 (19.0) 2.75 (6.98) 4.40 (11.2) 400 (204) 750 (51.6) 3000 (206) 0.29 (0.43)
–65 to 400
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.92 (23.4) 4.25 (10.8) 6.38 (16.2) 200 (93) 750 (51.6) 3000 (206) 0.35 (0.52)
(–53 to 204)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.19 (30.2) 6.75 (17.1) 8.00 (20.3) — 500 (34.4) 2000 (137) 0.50 (0.74)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 3/8, 1/2 3/4
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) to 400 (204) 750 (51.6) 500 (34.4)
 64 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

W Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok W series hose Testing is performed at 500 psig Every Swagelok W series hose
assembly is pressure tested with water (34.4 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if an component is cleaned in accordance
at room temperature for 30 seconds to end connection is rated below 500 psig with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
a requirement of no detectable leakage. (34.4 bar). Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 5 6 7 8
SS - WC 8 TA8 KC16 - 28-BL-PG or 71CM-BL PG
in. cm

1 Material 7 Options
End Connections For multiple options, add designators Perma Tags
SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. PA = Gray PO = Orange
HC = Alloy C-276 CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN PB = Blue PP = Purple
A = Armor guard PC = Brown PR = Red
2 Hose PG = Green PW = White
F = Fire jacket
WC =W series carbon black-filled G6 = Spiral guard, black PK = Black PY = Yellow
PTFE hose with silicone-cover G7 = Spiral guard, blue PN = Pink
and ceramic wrap G8 = Spiral guard, yellow Add 2 to the end of the Perma Tag
W = Hydrostatic test designator for two tags.
3 Nominal Hose Size, in.
Example: PA2
6 = 3/8 Splices
SP1 = 1 splice Other Tags
8 = 1/2
SP2 = 2 splices T = Lanyard tag
12 = 3/4
Mat Tags T2 = Two lanyard tags
4 End Connections MA = Gray MO = Orange Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
See End Connection Designator MB = Blue MP = Purple Text table, page 104.
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. MC = Brown MR = Red
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
MG = Green MW = White
5 Overall Length of options.
MK = Black MY = Yellow
Inches or centimeters, in whole MN = Pink
8 Two Elbow Orientation
numbers. Include CM as shown for Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
centimeter lengths. designator for two tags. Only include a value in the assembly
Example: MA2 number when both end connections are
Typical maximum one-piece hose length elbows. See page 72 for values and
is 300 in. or 762 cm. Longer assemblies further information.
may be spliced; specify splices under
Options. See page 4 for more
information about splices.

6 Silicone Cover Color

BK = Black
BL = Blue
RD = Red
WH = White
3/4 in. available with blue and red only.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 65

F Series PTFE Hose

Features
■ Nonmetallic PTFE hose. ■ Optional carbon black-filled PTFE core is available for
■ Smooth-bore PTFE core. applications that require static dissipation.
■ Size range of 1/4 through 3/4 in. and working pressures up ■ Commonly used where flexibility, chemical compatibility,
to 800 psig (55.1 bar). and a nonconductive braid are desired.
■ Fiber braid bonded to the core with a patent-pending ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.
process supports core to resist kinking. ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
■ PTFE material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part for details.
177.1550, USP <88> Class VI, and is free of TSE, BSE, and ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
ADI as defined in EMEA/410/01.

Fiber braid PTFE core 300 series SS collar 316 SS

end connections

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Technical Data
Minimum Inside Minimum
Bend Radius Working Burst Bulk
Nominal Inside Outside in. (cm) Temperature Pressure at Pressure at Hose
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.41 (10.4) 2.75 (6.99) 5.50 (14.0) 800 (55.1) 3200 (220) 0.06 (0.09)
3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.55 (14.0) 3.25 (8.26) 5.20 (13.2) –65 to 450 650 (44.7) 2600 (179) 0.09 (0.13)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.70 (17.8) 5.25 (13.3) 7.88 (20.0) (–53 to 230) 450 (31.0) 1800 (124) 0.13 (0.19)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 0.94 (23.9) 6.50 (16.5) 8.45 (21.5) 325 (22.3) 1300 (89.5) 0.18 (0.27)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 455 (31.3) 480 (33.0) 450 (31.0) 325 (22.3)
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 800 (55.1) 650 (44.7) 450 (31.0) 325 (22.3)
200 (93) 700 (48.2) 490 (33.7) 450 (31.0) 185 (12.7)
300 (148) 330 (22.7) 490 (33.7) 315 (21.7) 175 (12.0)
400 (204) 160 (11.0) 170 (11.7) 310 (21.3) 175 (12.0)
450 (230) 160 (11.0) 170 (11.7) 295 (20.3) 160 (11.0)
 66 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

F Series PTFE Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok F series hose assembly is pressure Every Swagelok F series hose
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a component is cleaned in accordance
requirement of no detectable leakage. Testing is performed with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
at 500 psig (34.4 bar), or 225 psig (15.5 bar) if an end Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
connection is rated below 500 psig (34.4 bar).

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - FT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - MB or 71CM - MB
in. cm

1 Material 6 Options 7 Two Elbow Orientation

End Connections For multiple options, add designators Only include a value in the assembly
SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. number when both end connections
HC = Alloy C-276 are elbows. See page 72 for values
CRN = L anyard tag with CRN
and further information.
(available for FC hose only)
2 Hose
A = Armor guard
FT = F series PTFE hose F = Fire jacket
FC =F series carbon black-filled G6 = Spiral guard, black
PTFE hose G7 = Spiral guard, blue
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. G8 = Spiral guard, yellow
4 = 1/4 W = Hydrostatic test
6 = 3/8 Splices
8 = 1/2 SP1 = 1 splice
12 = 3/4 SP2 = 2 splices
Mat Tags
4 End Connections MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
See End Connection Designator
MC = Brown MR = Red
column in tables on pages 69 to 78.
MG = Green MW = White
5 Overall Length MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
Inches or centimeters, in whole Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
numbers. Include CM as shown for designator for two tags.
centimeter lengths. Example: MA2
Typical maximum one-piece hose Other Tags
length: T = Lanyard tag
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/4 through T2 = Two lanyard tags
1/2 in. hose Specify text for tags. see Hose Tag
■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 in. hose. Text table, page 104.
Longer assemblies may be spliced; See page 103 for detailed descriptions
specify splices under Options. See of options.
page 4 for more information about
splices.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 67

U Series PFA Hose

Features
■ Highly flexible PFA hose. ■ PFA material complies with FDA regulation 21CFR Part
■ Smooth-bore PFA core. 177.1550, USP <87, 88> Class VI (121°C), 3-A (for hose
■ Size range of 1/2 through 2 in. and working pressures up to sizes 3/4 through 2 in.), and is free of TSE, BSE, and ADI as
300 psig (20.6 bar). defined in EMEA/410/01.
■ Optional carbon black-filled PFA core is available for
■ 302 stainless steel reinforcement ensures hose pressure
applications that require static dissipation.
containment and supports core to resist kinking.
■ Commonly used where high flexibility, chemical
■ Silicone cover provides a smooth, noncontaminating,
compatibility, and a smooth exterior cover are desired.
easy-to-clean surface and reduces internal system fluid
temperature transfer. ■ Custom hose lengths and end connections available.

■ Hose layers are encapsulated together without adhesives ■ Options include hose covers and hose tags. See page 103
or cements with a patent-pending process, providing high for details.
flexibility and outstanding kink resistance. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Silicone cover 302 SS braid PFA core 300 series SS collar 316 SS
end connections

Technical Data
Vacuum Minimum
Minimum Inside (28.5 in.Hg Working Burst
Bend Radius
Nominal Inside Outside Temperature [96.5 kPa]) Pressure at Pressure at Bulk
in. (cm)
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Range Rated to ... 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Hose Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) Static Dynamic °F (°C) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.81 (20.6) 1.50 (3.81) 4.50 (11.4) 400 (204) 300 (20.6) 1200 (82.6) 0.20 (0.30)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.13 (28.7) 2.50 (6.35) 5.20 (13.2) 400 (204) 300 (20.6) 1200 (82.6) 0.38 (0.57)
–65 to 400
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.48 (37.6) 4.00 (10.2) 6.50 (16.5) 250 (121) 250 (17.2) 1000 (68.9) 0.63 (0.94)
(–53 to 204)
1 1/2 (38.1) 1.50 (38.1) 2.00 (50.8) 7.00 (17.8) 9.10 (23.1) 250 (121) 200 (13.7) 800 (55.1) 0.88 (1.3)
2 (50.8) 2.00 (50.8) 2.50 (63.5) 7.00 (17.8) 9.10 (23.1) 150 (65) 150 (10.3) 600 (41.3) 1.3 (1.9)
Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Pressure-Temperature Ratings
Nominal Hose Size, in. 1/2 3/4 1 1 1/2 2
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar)
–65 (–53) 200 (13.7) 115 (7.9) 250 (17.2) 200 (13.7) 150 (10.3)
0 (–17) to 100 (37) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6) 250 (17.2) 200 (13.7) 150 (10.3)
200 (93) 280 (19.2) 300 (20.6) 250 (17.2) 200 (13.7) 150 (10.3)
300 (148) 210 (14.4) 270 (18.6) 230 (15.8) 200 (13.7) 150 (10.3)
400 (204) 160 (11.0) 195 (13.4) 175 (12.0) 200 (13.7) 150 (10.3)
 68 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

U Series PFA Hose

Testing Cleaning and Packaging
Every Swagelok U series hose assembly is pressure Every Swagelok U series hose
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a component is cleaned in accordance
requirement of no detectable leakage. Testing is performed at with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
225 psig (15.5 bar). Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - UT 8 TA8 KC16 - 28 - PB or 71CM - PB
in. cm

1 Material 6 Options
End Connections For multiple options, add designators Other Tags
SS = 316 stainless steel with a dash between each designator. T = Lanyard tag
HC = Alloy C-276 T2 = Two lanyard tags
CRN = L anyard tag with CRN
(available for UT hose only) Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
2 Hose A = Armor guard Text table, page 104.
UT =U series PFA hose with silicone F = Fire jacket See page 103 for detailed descriptions
cover G6 = Spiral guard, black of options.
UC =U series carbon black-filled PFA G7 = Spiral guard, blue
hose with silicone cover G8 = Spiral guard, yellow 7 Two Elbow Orientation
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. W = Hydrostatic test Only include a value in the assembly
8 = 1/2 Splices number when both end connections are
12 = 3/4 SP1 = 1 splice elbows. See page 72 for values and
16 = 1 SP2 = 2 splices further information.
24 = 1 1/2 Mat Tags
32 = 2 MA = Gray MO = Orange
MB = Blue MP = Purple
4 End Connections MC = Brown MR = Red
See End Connection Designator MG = Green MW = White
column in tables on pages 69 to 78. MK = Black MY = Yellow
MN = Pink
5 Overall Length Add 2 to the end of the Mat Tag
Inches or centimeters, in whole designator for two tags.
numbers. Include CM as shown for Example: MA2
centimeter lengths. Perma Tags
PA = Gray PO = Orange
Typical maximum one-piece hose
PB = Blue PP = Purple
length:
PC = Brown PR = Red
■ 900 in. or 2286 cm for 1/2 in. hose PG = Green PW = White
■ 600 in. or 1524 cm for 3/4 and 1 in. PK = Black PY = Yellow
hose PN = Pink
■ 300 in. or 762 cm for 1 1/2 and 2 in. Add 2 to the end of the Perma Tag
hose. designator for two tags.
Example: PA2
Longer assemblies may be spliced;
specify splices under Options. See
page 4 for more information about
splices.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 69

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube
Dimensions
Adapters
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Adapter Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
Size Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/8 2 TA2 1.86 (47.2) 0.070 (1.7) 0.55 (14.0)
1/4 4 TA4 1.96 (49.8) 0.16 (4.0) 0.59 (15.0)
1 in. / 25 mm and Under
3/8 6 TA6 2.42 (61.5) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 TA8 2.91 (73.9) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) Determined
3/4 12 TA12 3.53 (89.7) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3) by hose
1 16 TA16 3.78 (96.0) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2➀ 24 TA24 5.22 (133) 1.24 (31.4) 2.60 (66.0)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
2➀ 32 TA32 6.82 (173) 1.68 (42.6) 3.46 (87.9)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
A
3 2 TM3 47.8 (1.88) 1.7 (0.070) 14.0 (0.55)
Over 1 in. / 25 mm 6 4 TM6 50.3 (1.98) 4.0 (0.16) 15.0 (0.59)
10 6 TM10 62.0 (2.44) 6.6 (0.26) 20.8 (0.82)
12 8 TM12 74.4 (2.93) 8.6 (0.34) 23.1 (0.91) Determined
18 12 TM18 90.2 (3.55) 13.7 (0.54) 34.3 (1.35) by hose
25 16 TM25 96.5 (3.80) 19.8 (0.78) 44.5 (1.75)
38➀ 24 TM38 133 (5.24) 31.4 (1.24) 69.3 (2.73)
50➀ 32 TM50 173 (6.81) 42.6 (1.68) 87.9 (3.46)
Alloy C-276 ends available for 1 in. and under tube adapters.
➀ Furnished with nut and preswaged ferrules.

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Fitting Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
Size Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A
1/8 2 SL2 1.88 (47.8) 0.070 (1.7) 0.55 (14.0)
1/4 4 SL4 2.02 (51.3) 0.16 (4.0) 0.59 (15.0)
3/8 6 SL6 2.48 (63.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 SL8 2.81 (71.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) Determined
3/4 12 SL12 3.44 (87.4) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3) by hose
1 16 SL16 3.61 (91.7) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2 24 SL24 5.12 (130) 1.24 (31.4) 2.60 (66.0)
2 32 SL32 6.72 (171) 1.68 (42.6) 3.46 (87.9)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
3 2 SM3 48.5 (1.91) 1.7 (0.070) 14.0 (0.55)
6 4 SM6 51.3 (2.02) 4.0 (0.16) 16.3 (0.64)
10 6 SM10 64.5 (2.54) 6.6 (0.26) 20.8 (0.82)
12 8 SM12 71.9 (2.83) 8.6 (0.34) 26.4 (1.04) Determined
18 12 SM18 78.0 (3.07) 13.7 (0.54) 34.3 (1.35) by hose
25 16 SM25 91.7 (3.61) 19.8 (0.78) 44.5 (1.75)
38 24 SM38 133 (5.24) 31.4 (1.24) 69.3 (2.73)
50 32 SM50 169 (6.65) 42.6 (1.68) 87.9 (3.46)
Alloy C-276 ends available for 1 in. and under tube fittings.
 70 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Female Pipe Threads,
Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/8 2 PF2 1.76 (44.7) 0.070 (1.7) 0.65 (16.5)
1/4 4 PF4 1.85 (47.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
A 3/8 6 PF6 2.31 (58.7) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 PF8 2.66 (67.6) 0.34 (8.6) 1.30 (33.0) Determined
3/4 12 PF12 3.32 (84.3) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.6) by hose➀
1 16 PF16 3.44 (87.4) 0.78 (19.8) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 PF24 4.19 (106) 1.24 (31.4) 2.75 (69.9)
2 32 PF32 4.88 (124) 1.68 (42.6) 3.18 (80.8)
➀ Brass PF4 pressure rating is 3300 psig (228 bar).
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Female Pipe Threads, NPT

NPT, with JIC (AN) 37˚ with JIC Dimensions, in. (mm)
Union Union Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/8 2 FU2 2.38 (60.5) 0.070 (1.7) 0.65 (16.5)
1/4 4 FU4 2.61 (66.3) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
3/8 6 FU6 3.07 (78.0) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
A
1/2 8 FU8 3.59 (91.2) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2) Determined
3/4 12 FU12 4.47 (114) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.6) by hose
1 16 FU16 4.77 (121) 0.78 (19.8) 2.02 (51.3)
1 1/2 24 FU24 6.12 (155) 1.24 (31.4) 2.75 (69.9)
2 32 FU32 7.05 (179) 1.68 (42.6) 3.46 (87.9)

Male Pipe Threads,

Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT
NPT Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/8 2 PM2 1.70 (43.2) 0.077 (1.9) 0.55 (14.0)
A 1/4 4 PM4 1.91 (48.5) 0.16 (4.0) 0.65 (16.5)
3/8 6 PM6 2.31 (58.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 PM8 2.72 (69.1) 0.37 (9.3) 1.04 (26.4) Determined
3/4 12 PM12 3.26 (82.8) 0.63 (16.0) 1.35 (34.3) by hose
1 16 PM16 3.45 (87.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2 24 PM24 4.24 (108) 1.36 (34.5) 2.31 (58.7)
2 32 PM32 5.12 (130) 1.84 (46.7) 2.89 (73.4)

Male Pipe Threads, NPT

NPT, with JIC (AN) 37˚ with JIC Dimensions, in. (mm)
Union Union Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/8 2 MU2 2.37 (60.2) 0.070 (1.7) 0.55 (14.0)
1/4 4 MU4 2.70 (68.6) 0.16 (4.0) 0.65 (16.5)
A
3/8 6 MU6 3.19 (81.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 MU8 3.71 (94.2) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) Determined
3/4 12 MU12 4.52 (115) 0.54 (13.7) 1.45 (36.8) by hose
1 16 MU16 4.75 (121) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2 24 MU24 5.88 (149) 1.24 (31.4) 2.60 (66.0)
2 32 MU32 7.08 (180) 1.68 (42.6) 3.32 (84.3)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 71

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Sanitary Kwik-Clamps➀
Kwik- End Connection Dimensions, in. (mm)
Clamp Nominal Designator Minimum B, Flange C, Flange Pressure
C Size Hose Size Standard Electro- A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
B in. Designator Surface polished Max Diameter Diameter Diameter psig (bar)
4 KC8 KE8 1.60 (40.6) 0.16 (4.0)
A 1/2 6 KC8 KE8 2.23 (56.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.98 (25.0) 0.37 (9.4) 1500 (103)
8 KC8 KE8 2.61 (66.3) 0.34 (8.6)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D.
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max 6 KC12 KE12 2.23 (56.6) 0.26 (6.6)
surface finish applies prior to 3/4 8 KC12 KE12 2.48 (63.0) 0.34 (8.6) 0.98 (25.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1500 (103)
crimp.
12 KC12 KE12 2.85 (72.4) 0.54 (13.7)
8 KC16 KE16 2.44 (62.0) 0.34 (8.6)
1 12 KC16 KE16 2.70 (68.6) 0.54 (13.7) 1.98 (50.3) 0.87 (22.1) 500 (34.4)
16 KC16 KE16 2.76 (70.1) 0.78 (19.8)
8 KC24 KE24 2.45 (62.2) 0.34 (8.6)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
12 KC24 KE24 2.70 (68.6) 0.54 (13.7)
1 1/2 1.98 (50.3) 1.37 (34.8) 500 (34.4)
16 KC24 KE24 2.60 (66.0) 0.78 (19.8)
24 KC24 KE24 3.31 (84.1) 1.24 (31.4)
16 KC32 KE32 2.60 (66.0) 0.78 (19.8)
2 24 KC32 KE32 3.21 (81.5) 1.24 (31.4) 2.52 (64.0) 1.87 (47.5) 450 (31.0)
32 KC32 KE32 3.98 (101) 1.68 (42.6)
24 KC40 KE40 3.32 (84.3) 1.24 (31.4)
2 1/2 3.05 (77.5) 2.37 (60.2) 400 (27.5)
32 KC40 KE40 3.97 (101) 1.68 (42.6)

Sanitary Kwik-Clamp
End Connection Dimensions, in. (mm)
90° Elbows Kwik-
Designator
Clamp Nominal Minimum C, Flange D, Flange Pressure
C
D
Size Hose Size Standard Electro- A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
in. Designator Surface polished Max B Diameter Diameter Diameter psig (bar)
1/2 8 KR8 RE8 2.92 (74.2) 1.27 (32.3) 0.34 (8.6) 0.98 (25.0) 0.37 (9.4) 1500 (103)
B
3/4 12 KR12 RE12 3.45 (87.6) 1.63 (41.4) 0.54 (13.7) 0.98 (25.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1500 (103)
1 16 KR16 RE16 4.10 (104) 2.02 (51.3) 0.78 (19.8) 1.98 (50.3) 0.87 (22.1) 500 (34.4)
A 1 1/2 24 KR24 RE24 5.90 (150) 2.77 (70.4) 1.24 (31.4) 1.98 (50.3) 1.37 (34.8) 500 (34.4)
2 32 KR32 RE32 7.56 (192) 3.51 (89.2) 1.68 (42.6) 2.52 (64.0) 1.87 (47.5) 450 (31.0)
 72 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Sanitary Kwik-Clamp
End Connection Dimensions, in. (mm)
45° Elbows Kwik-
Designator
Clamp Nominal Minimum C, Flange D, Flange Pressure
Size Hose Size Standard Electro- A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
C D in. Designator Surface polished Max B Diameter Diameter Diameter psig (bar)
1/2 8 KA8 AE8 3.05 (77.5) 0.70 (17.8) 0.34 (8.6) 0.98 (25.0) 0.37 (9.4) 1500 (103)
3/4 12 KA12 AE12 3.85 (97.8) 0.69 (17.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.98 (25.0) 0.62 (15.7) 1500 (103)
B 1 16 KA16 AE16 4.02 (102) 0.81 (20.5) 0.78 (19.8) 1.98 (50.3) 0.87 (22.1) 500 (34.4)
A
1 1/2 24 KA24 AE24 5.60 (142) 1.03 (26.2) 1.24 (31.4) 1.98 (50.3) 1.37 (34.8) 500 (34.4)
2 32 KA32 AE32 7.03 (179) 1.27 (32.3) 1.68 (42.6) 2.52 (64.0) 1.87 (47.5) 450 (31.0)

Two Elbow Hose Options

For hoses with two elbow end connections, a suffix is needed to indicate the angle offset between the first end connection and
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

the second end connection. The first end connection is indicated by the first end connection designator in the part number. The
second end connection is indicated by the second end connection designator in the part number. See the table and diagram
below for the part number suffix and its corresponding angle offset.
Second end
connection
designator

Part Number Rotation

Suffix Amount
-0 0°
-1 45°
-2 90°
-3 135° First end
-4 180° connection
designator
-5 225°
-6 270°
-7 315°
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 73

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Tube Butt Welds➀ Tube
Butt Dimensions, in. (mm)
Weld Wall Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Thickness Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A
1/2 0.049 8 TB8 2.70 (68.6) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4)
➀ 316 SS material with an I.D. 3/4 0.049 12 TB12 3.26 (82.8) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max Determined
1 0.065 16 TB16 3.26 (82.8) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
surface finish applies prior to by hose
crimp. 1 1/2 0.095 24 TB24 4.65 (118) 1.24 (31.4) 2.20 (55.9)
2 0.109 32 TB32 5.56 (141) 1.68 (42.6) 2.75 (69.9)

SAE 37° (JIC) Female

SAE 37°
Swivel (JIC)
Dimensions, in. (mm)

FLEXIBLE
Female

TUBING

HOSE /
Swivel Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/8 2 AS2 1.43 (36.3) 0.070 (1.7) 0.55 (14.0)
A
1/4 4 AS4 1.57 (39.8) 0.16 (4.0) 0.66 (16.8)
3/8 6 AS6 1.97 (50.0) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 AS8 2.28 (57.9) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4) Determined
3/4 12 AS12 2.92 (74.2) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3) by hose
1 16 AS16 2.93 (74.4) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2 24 AS24 3.72 (94.5) 1.24 (31.4) 2.61 (66.3)
2 32 AS32 4.61 (117) 1.68 (42.6) 3.33 (84.6)

Female Cam and Groove Female

Cam and Dimensions, in. (mm)
Groove Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
3/4 12 GF12 4.03 (102) 0.54 (13.7) 3.27 (83.1)
1 16 GF16 4.53 (115) 0.78 (19.8) 3.50 (88.9)
250 (17.2)
1 1/2 24 GF24 5.39 (137) 1.24 (31.4) 4.44 (113)
A
2 32 GF32 6.30 (160) 1.68 (42.6) 4.82 (122)
The A dimension may vary if armor guard hose cover is ordered.

Male Cam and Groove Male

Cam and Dimensions, in. (mm)
Groove Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A 3/4 12 GM12 2.92 (74.2) 0.54 (13.7) 1.27 (32.3)
1 16 GM16 3.54 (89.9) 0.78 (19.8) 1.45 (36.8)
250 (17.2)
1 1/2 24 GM24 4.40 (112) 1.24 (31.4) 2.11 (53.6)
2 32 GM32 5.15 (131) 1.68 (42.6) 2.47 (62.7)
 74 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Tube Stubs
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Stub Wall Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
Size Thickness Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/8 0.028 2 TN2 1.96 (49.8) 0.069 (1.8) 0.31 (7.9)
1/4 0.035 4 TN4 2.24 (56.9) 0.16 (4.1) 0.46 (11.7)
3/8 0.049 6 TN6 2.55 (64.8) 0.26 (6.6) 0.63 (16.0)
1/2 0.049 8 TN8 3.08 (78.2) 0.34 (8.6) 0.86 (21.8) Determined
3/4 0.065 12 TN12 3.45 (87.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.99 (25.1) by hose
1 0.083 16 TN16 3.92 (99.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.39 (35.3)
1 1/2 0.134 24 TN24 6.08 (154) 1.24 (31.5) 1.96 (49.8)
2 0.188 32 TN32 6.74 (171) 1.68 (42.7) 2.43 (61.7)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

3 0.80 2 TE3 41.7 (1.64) 1.3 (0.052) 7.9 (0.31)

6 1.0 4 TE6 57.2 (2.25) 4.0 (0.16) 11.7 (0.46)
8 1.0 4 TE8 57.9 (2.28) 4.0 (0.16) 16.0 (0.63)
8 1.0 6 TE8 64.3 (2.53) 6.0 (0.24) 16.0 (0.63)
10 1.0 6 TE10 65.0 (2.56) 6.6 (0.26) 16.0 (0.63)
Determined
12 1.0 6 TE12 71.6 (2.82) 6.6 (0.26) 16.0 (0.63)
by hose
12 1.0 8 TE12 77.5 (3.05) 8.7 (0.34) 21.9 (0.86)
18 1.5 12 TE18 87.4 (3.44) 13.8 (0.54) 25.2 (0.99)
25 1.5 16 TE25 101 (3.98) 19.7 (0.78) 35.4 (1.39)
38 3.5 24 TE38 133 (5.23) 30.9 (1.22) 50.6 (1.99)
50 5.0 32 TE50 179 (7.03) 39.9 (1.57) 64.8 (2.55)

Female VCO O-Ring

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCO Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 VF4 1.67 (42.4) 0.16 (4.0) 0.80 (20.3)
1/2 8 VF8 2.18 (55.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.16 (29.5) Determined
3/4 12 VF12 2.79 (70.9) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (44.2) by hose
A 1 16 VF16 2.67 (67.8) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)

Female VCR Metal Gasket

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Face Seal Fittings
VCR Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 RF4 1.76 (44.7) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 8 RF8 2.37 (60.2) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2) Determined
3/4 12 RF12 3.08 (78.2) 0.54 (13.7) 1.74 (44.2) by hose
A
1 16 RF16 3.20 (81.3) 0.78 (19.8) 2.03 (51.6)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 75

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

TS Series Sanitary Clamps➀
Sanitary Dimensions, in. (mm)
Clamp Nominal End Minimum B, Flange Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Outside Rating
B in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/2 8 TS8 2.20 (55.9) 0.34 (8.6) 0.98 (25.0) 1.04 (26.4) 3100 (213)
A
3/4 12 TS12 2.70 (68.6) 0.54 (13.7) 0.98 (25.0) 1.35 (34.3) 2800 (192)
1 16 TS16 2.88 (73.2) 0.78 (19.8) 1.98 (50.3) 1.98 (50.3) 1200 (82.6)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D.
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max 1 1/2 24 TS24 3.35 (85.1) 1.24 (31.4) 1.98 (50.3) 2.20 (55.9) 1200 (82.6)
surface finish applies prior to 2 32 TS32 4.01 (102) 1.68 (42.6) 2.52 (64.0) 2.74 (69.6) 650 (44.7)
crimp.

Male Pipe Threads,

Male Pipe
ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7) Thread,
ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A
1/4 4 MT4 1.91 (48.5) 0.16 (4.0) 0.66 (16.8)
3/8 6 MT6 2.31 (58.7) 0.26 (6.6) 0.82 (20.8)
1/2 8 MT8 2.72 (69.1) 0.34 (8.6) 1.04 (26.4)
Determined
3/4 12 MT12 3.26 (82.8) 0.54 (13.7) 1.35 (34.3)
by hose
1 16 MT16 3.45 (87.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.75 (44.5)
1 1/2 24 MT24 4.25 (108) 1.24 (31.4) 2.31 (58.7)
2 32 MT32 5.12 (130) 1.68 (42.6) 2.89 (73.4)

Male ISO/BSP Parallel

ISO/BSP
Threads with 60° Male Parallel,
Cone (ISO 228) 60° Male Dimensions, in. (mm)
Cone Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 MS4 1.99 (50.5) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
A 3/8 6 MS6 2.38 (60.5) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 MS8 2.65 (67.3) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)
Determined
3/4 12 MS12 3.37 (85.6) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.6)
by hose
1 16 MS16 3.38 (85.9) 0.78 (19.8) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 MS24 4.21 (107) 1.24 (31.4) 2.53 (64.3)
2 32 MS32 5.16 (131) 1.68 (42.6) 3.18 (80.8)

Female Pipe Threads,

Female
ISO/BSP Tapered (ISO 7) Pipe
Thread,
ISO/BSP Dimensions, in. (mm)
Tapered Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 FT4 1.85 (47.0) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
A
3/8 6 FT6 2.32 (58.9) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
1/2 8 FT8 2.67 (67.8) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)
Determined
3/4 12 FT12 3.37 (85.6) 0.54 (13.7) 1.52 (38.6)
by hose
1 16 FT16 3.45 (87.6) 0.78 (19.8) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 FT24 4.15 (105) 1.24 (31.4) 2.75 (69.9)
2 32 FT32 4.99 (127) 1.68 (42.6) 3.32 (84.3)
 76 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Female ISO/BSP Parallel ISO/BSP
Threads (ISO 228) Parallel Dimensions, in. (mm)
Thread Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 FS4 2.06 (52.3) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
3/8 6 FS6 2.57 (65.3) 0.26 (6.6) 1.09 (27.7)
A 1/2 8 FS8 2.84 (72.1) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)
Determined
3/4 12 FS12 3.39 (86.1) 0.54 (13.7) 1.59 (40.4)
by hose
1 16 FS16 3.46 (87.9) 0.78 (19.8) 1.88 (47.8)
1 1/2 24 FS24 4.29 (109) 1.24 (31.4) 2.60 (66.0)
2 32 FS32 4.95 (126) 1.68 (42.6) 3.18 (80.8)
FLEXIBLE

Female Swivel ISO/BSP

TUBING
HOSE /

Swivel
Parallel Threads with ISO/BSP
30° Cone Parallel
Thread, Dimensions, in. (mm)
30° Cone Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/4 4 BS4 2.19 (55.6) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
A Determined
3/8 6 BS6 2.72 (69.1) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
by hose
1/2 8 BS8 3.10 (78.7) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)

Female Swivel ISO/BSP

Swivel
Parallel Threads with ISO/BSP
60° Cone Parallel
Thread, Dimensions, in. (mm)
60° Cone Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A 1/4 4 BM4 2.08 (52.8) 0.16 (4.0) 0.87 (22.1)
Determined
3/8 6 BM6 2.59 (65.8) 0.26 (6.6) 1.01 (25.7)
by hose
1/2 8 BM8 2.95 (74.9) 0.34 (8.6) 1.23 (31.2)

JIS(A)/ISO 2852-Type JIS(A)/ End Connection

Sanitary➀ ISO 2852- Designator Dimensions, in. (mm)
Type Nominal Minimum B, Flange C, Flange Pressure
C
Sanitary Hose Size Standard Electro- A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
Size Designator Surface polished Max Diameter Diameter Diameter psig (bar)
B
8A 6 JS8 JE8 2.16 (54.9) 0.26 (6.6) 0.41 (10.4)
10A 8 JS10 JE10 2.34 (59.4) 0.34 (8.6) 1.34 (34.0) 0.55 (14.0) 500 (34.4)
A
15A 12 JS15 JE15 2.88 (73.2) 0.54 (13.7) 0.69 (17.5)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D.
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max
surface finish applies prior to
crimp.

ISO-KF Vacuum Flange ISO-KF

Vacuum Dimensions, mm (in.)
Flange Nominal End Minimum B, Flange Maximum C, Flange Pressure
B C Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Outside Face Inside Rating
mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Diameter Dimension Diameter bar (psig)
A 16 12 KF16 71.1 (2.80) 13.7 (0.54) 30.0 (1.18) 34.3 (1.35) 17.3 (0.68)
25 16 KF25 68.6 (2.70) 19.8 (0.78) 40.0 (1.57) 44.5 (1.75) 26.4 (1.04)
10.0 (145)
40 24 KF40 82.6 (3.25) 31.4 (1.24) 55.0 (2.16) 55.9 (2.20) 41.4 (1.63)
50 32 KF50 106 (4.16) 42.6 (1.68) 75.0 (2.95) 75.2 (2.96) 52.6 (2.07)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 77

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Sanitary DIN 11864-3 Sanitary DIN
Series A, Form A, Clamp 11864-3 Series A, Dimensions, mm (in.)
Ferrule with Groove➀ Form A, Clamp Nominal End Minimum B, Flange Pressure
Ferrule with Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
Groove, Size mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Diameter bar (psig)
B 10 6 DB10 51.8 (2.04) 6.6 (0.26) 35.6 (1.40)
8 DB15 56.9 (2.24) 8.6 (0.34) 34.0 (1.34)
15
A 12 DB15 70.4 (2.77) 13.7 (0.54) 34.0 (1.34) 40.0 (580)
20 12 DB20 60.5 (2.38) 13.7 (0.54) 50.3 (1.98)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 25 16 DB25 67.3 (2.65) 19.8 (0.78) 50.3 (1.98)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max 40 24 DB40 83.6 (3.29) 31.4 (1.24) 64.0 (2.52)
surface finish applies prior to 24.8 (360)
crimp. 50 32 DB50 101 (3.97) 42.6 (1.68) 77.5 (3.05)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Female DIN 11851 Female
with Nut➀ DIN 11851 Dimensions, mm (in.)
with Nut Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension bar (psig)
15 8 DF15 57.4 (2.26) 8.6 (0.34) 44.2 (1.74)
20 12 DF20 73.7 (2.90) 13.7 (0.54) 54.4 (2.14)
40.0 (580)
A 25 16 DF25 70.6 (2.78) 19.8 (0.78) 63.2 (2.49)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 40 24 DF40 87.6 (3.45) 31.4 (1.24) 78.2 (3.08)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max 50 32 DF50 106 (4.19) 42.6 (1.68) 92.2 (3.63) 24.8 (360)
surface finish applies prior to
crimp.

ASME Class 150 Lap ASME Class

Joint Flange 150 Lap Dimensions, in. (mm)
Joint Flange Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
1/2 8 GA8 2.75 (69.9) 0.34 (8.6) 3.56 (90.4)
3/4 12 GA12 3.41 (86.6) 0.54 (13.7) 3.91 (99.3)
1 16 GA16 3.38 (85.9) 0.78 (19.8) 4.28 (109) 275 (18.9)
1 1/2 24 GA24 4.09 (104) 1.24 (31.4) 5.03 (128)
A
2 32 GA32 5.06 (129) 1.68 (42.6) 6.03 (153)

JIS 10K Lap Joint Flange JIS 10K

Lap Joint Dimensions, mm (in.)
Flange Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension bar (psig)
15 8 HA15 69.9 (2.75) 8.6 (0.34) 95.3 (3.75)
20 12 HA20 86.6 (3.41) 13.7 (0.54) 100 (3.95)
25 16 HA25 85.9 (3.38) 19.8 (0.78) 125 (4.93) 9.7 (142)
A 40 24 HA40 104 (4.09) 31.4 (1.24) 140 (5.52)
50 32 HA50 123 (4.86) 42.6 (1.68) 155 (6.11)

DIN PN10 Lap Joint DIN PN10

Flange Lap Joint Dimensions, mm (in.)
Flange Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension bar (psig)
15 8 FA15 69.9 (2.75) 8.6 (0.34) 95.3 (3.75)
20 12 FA20 86.6 (3.41) 13.7 (0.54) 105 (4.14)
25 16 FA25 88.9 (3.50) 19.8 (0.78) 115 (4.54) 10.0 (145)
40 24 FA40 121 (4.76) 31.4 (1.24) 150 (5.92)
A 50 32 FA50 123 (4.86) 42.6 (1.68) 165 (6.51)
 78 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

End Connections for B, X, S, C, J, N, W, F and U Series Hose

Sanitary I-Line Male➀ Sanitary
I-Line Dimensions, in. (mm)
Male Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
A 1 16 MD16 2.99 (75.9) 0.78 (19.8) 2.01 (51.1) 1220 (84.0)
1 1/2 24 MD24 3.70 (94.0) 1.24 (31.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1220 (84.0)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 2 32 MD32 4.45 (113) 1.68 (42.6) 2.74 (69.6) 900 (62.0)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max
surface finish applies prior to
crimp.

Sanitary I-Line Female➀ Sanitary

I-Line Dimensions, in. (mm)
Female Nominal End Minimum Maximum Pressure
Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Rating
in. Designator Designator Max Diameter Dimension psig (bar)
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

A 1 16 FD16 2.98 (75.7) 0.78 (19.8) 2.01 (51.1) 1220 (84.0)

1 1/2 24 FD24 3.69 (93.7) 1.24 (31.4) 2.20 (55.9) 1220 (84.0)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 2 32 FD32 4.44 (113) 1.68 (42.6) 2.74 (69.6) 900 (62.0)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max
surface finish applies prior to
crimp.

Sanitary (DIN 32676)➀ Sanitary

(DIN Dimensions, mm (in.)
C 32676) Nominal End Minimum B, Flange C, Flange Pressure
B Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Diameter Diameter bar (psig)
4 DA10 46.0 (1.81) 4.0 (0.16) 34.0 (1.34)
A
10 6 DA10 56.1 (2.21) 6.6 (0.26) 34.0 (1.34) 10.2 (0.40)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 8 DA10 56.6 (2.23) 8.6 (0.34) 34.0 (1.34)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max 8 DA15 58.9 (2.32) 8.6 (0.34) 34.0 (1.34)
surface finish applies prior to 15 16.1 (0.63)
crimp. 12 DA15 72.6 (2.86) 13.7 (0.54) 34.0 (1.34)
15.8 (230)
20 12 DA20 72.6 (2.86) 13.7 (0.54) 34.0 (1.34) 20.1 (0.79)
25 16 DA25 72.6 (2.86) 19.8 (0.78) 50.5 (1.99) 26.1 (1.03)
32 16 DA32 72.6 (2.86) 19.8 (0.78) 50.5 (1.99) 32.1 (1.26)
40 24 DA40 84.6 (3.33) 31.4 (1.24) 50.5 (1.99) 38.1 (1.50)
50 32 DA50 113 (4.44) 42.6 (1.68) 64.0 (2.52) 50.1 (1.97)

Sanitary (ISO 2852)➀

Sanitary Dimensions, mm (in.)
(ISO 2852) Nominal End Minimum B, Flange C, Flange Pressure
C Size Hose Size Connection A Inside Outside Face Inside Rating
B mm Designator Designator Max Diameter Diameter Diameter bar (psig)
12 8 ES12 58.4 (2.30) 8.6 (0.34) 34.0 (1.34) 9.9 (0.39)
A 13 6 ES13 54.1 (2.13) 6.6 (0.26) 34.0 (1.34) 10.3 (0.41)
103 (1500)
20 12 ES20 72.6 (2.86) 13.7 (0.54) 34.0 (1.34) 19.3 (0.76)
➀ 316L SS material with an I.D. 26 12 ES26 73.9 (2.91) 13.7 (0.54) 50.5 (1.99) 23.7 (0.93)
of 15 µin. (0.38 µm) Ra max
surface finish applies prior to 25 16 ES25 72.4 (2.85) 19.8 (0.78) 50.5 (1.99) 22.6 (0.89) 34.4 (500)
crimp. 40 24 ES40 88.9 (3.50) 31.4 (1.24) 64.0 (2.52) 37.6 (1.48) 34.4 (500)
50 32 ES50 106 (4.16) 42.6 (1.68) 64.0 (2.52) 48.5 (1.91) 31.0 (450)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 79

PFA Series PFA Tubing

Features
■ Chemically resistant, translucent PFA flexible tubing. ■ Designed for use with both Swagelok PFA tube fittings and
■ Smooth-bore, perfluoroalkoxy (PFA) material. metal Swagelok tube fittings.
■ Size range of 1/8 through 1 in. and 6 through 12 mm and ■ Groove cutter required for installation of Swagelok PFA
working pressures up to 275 psig (18.9 bar). tube fittings. See page 80.
■ PFA tubing material in accordance with ASTM D3307, ■ Tube cutter tool is available. See page 109 for details.
Type II.
■ Flexible tubing commonly used where chemical
compatibility is desired.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Technical Data
Pressure ratings are for properly grooved Swagelok PFA tubing used with Swagelok PFA
tube fittings and for Swagelok PFA tubing used with metal Swagelok tube fittings.

Fractional Tubing Metric Tubing

Tubing Wall, in. 0.030 0.047 0.062 Tubing Wall, mm 1 1.5

Nominal Nominal
Tube Size Tube Size
in. 1/8 1/4 1/4 3/8 1/2 3/4 1 mm 6 8 10 12 6 8 10 12
Temperature Working Pressure Temperature Working Pressure
°F (°C) psig (bar) °C (°F) bar (psig)
275 200 275 180 125 83 61 12 8.9 7.0 5.7 19 14 11 8.9
70 (20) 20 (70)
(18.9) (13.7) (18.9) (12.4) (8.6) (5.7) (4.2) (174) (129) (101) (82) (275) (203) (159) (129)
245 180 245 155 115 73 54 9.7 7.1 5.5 4.6 15 11 8.7 7.1
100 (37) 50 (122)
(16.8) (12.4) (16.8) (10.6) (7.9) (5.0) (3.7) (140) (103) (79) (66) (217) (159) (126) (103)
145 110 145 93 68 43 32 6.1 4.4 3.4 2.8 9.5 6.9 5.3 4.4
200 (93) 100 (212)
(9.9) (7.5) (9.9) (6.4) (4.6) (2.9) (2.2) (88) (63) (49) (40) (137) (100) (76) (63)
87 64 87 48 32 19 13 3.8 2.5 1.8 1.4 5.9 4.0 2.9 2.2
300 (148) 150 (302)
(5.9) (4.4) (5.9) (3.3) (2.2) (1.3) (0.89) (55) (36) (26) (20) (85) (58) (42) (31)
47 34 47 11 11 5.0 3.0 2.2 1.3 0.8 0.6 3.4 2.0 1.3 0.9
400 (204) 200 (392)
(3.2) (2.3) (3.2) (0.75) (0.75) (0.34) (0.20) (31) (18) (11) (8.7) (49) (29) (18) (13)

Cleaning and Packaging

Swagelok PFA tubing is cleaned in accordance with Swagelok
Standard Cleaning and Packaging (SC‑10) catalog,
MS‑06‑62. Each tube length is bagged individually and boxed.
 80 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

PFA Series PFA Tubing

Ordering Information PFA Tube Fittings
Select an ordering number.
Swagelok PFA tube fittings in sizes
from 1/8 to 1/2 in. are available
for use with PFA tubing. For more
information on Swagelok PFA tube
fittings, refer to PFA Tube Fittings
catalog, MS-01-05.

Nominal Ordering Nominal Wall

Tube Size Length Number Thickness
Dimensions ft (m) in. Ultrahigh-Purity PFA Tubing (PFA4 and PFA9D)
100 (30.5) PFA-T2-030-100 Swagelok PFA tubing is available
1/8 in. 0.030 in ultrahigh-purity (PFA4) and
500 (152) PFA-T2-030-500
advanced (fluorosurfactant
PFA-T4-047-100 0.047
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

1/4 in. 100 (30.5) resistant) ultrahigh-purity (PFA9D)

PFA-T4-062-100 0.062 grades. Refer to Ultrahigh-Purity
50 (15.2) PFA-T6-062-50 PFA Tubing—PFA4 and PFA9D
3/8 in. 0.062
100 (30.5) PFA-T6-062-100 catalog, MS‑02‑196, for additional
50 (15.2) PFA-T8-062-50 information.
1/2 in. 0.062
100 (30.5) PFA-T8-062-100
3/4 in. 50 (15.2) PFA-T12-062-50 0.062
1 in. 50 (15.2) PFA-T16-062-50 0.062 High-Purity PFA Fine Thread Flare Tube Fittings
Dimensions m (ft) mm Swagelok high-purity PFA fine
PFA-T6M-1M-30M 1.0 thead flare fittings in sizes from 1/4
6 mm
PFA-T6M-1.5M-30M 1.5 to 1 in. are available for use with
PFA-T8M-1M-30M 1.0
PFA tubing. For more information
8 mm on Swagelok high-purity PFA fine
PFA-T8M-1.5M-30M 1.5
30 (98.4) thead flare fittings, refer to High-
PFA-T10M-1M-30M 1.0 Purity PFA Fine Thread Flare Tube
10 mm
PFA-T10M-1.5M-30M 1.5 Fittings catalog, MS-02-195.
PFA-T12M-1M-30M 1.0
12 mm
PFA-T12M-1.5M-30M 1.5
Custom sizes, wall thickness, and lengths are available. Contact your
authorized Swagelok representative.

Groove Cutter
• PFA tubing MUST be grooved for use with PFA tube
fittings. Use the Swagelok groove cutter tool. It is
not necessary to groove tubing for use with metal
fittings.

Groove PFA tubing for use with Tube

Swagelok PFA tube fittings. Size Ordering
in. Number
1/8 MS-GC-2
1/4 MS-GC-4
3/8 MS-GC-6
For 1/4, 3/8, For 1/8 in. 1/2 MS-GC-8
and 1/2 in. tubing tubing
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 81

LT Series Vinyl Tubing

Features
■ General purpose, clear vinyl, flexible tubing. ■ Good for a variety of applications where system
■ Smooth-bore, polyvinyl chloride (PVC) material. transparency is desired.
■ Size range of 1/8 through 1/2 in. and working pressures ■ Bulk tubing and end connections available for field
from vacuum up to 40 psig (2.7 bar). assembly.
■ Can be used with Swagelok tube fitting and metal insert. ■ Thick-wall tubing available in 1/4 and 3/8 in. sizes for
vacuum-service applications.

HC series
Clear vinyl material end connection Tubing insert Swagelok tube fitting

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Hose clamp

Technical Data and Ordering Information

■ Pressure ratings are based on tubing used with an HC series end connection
secured by a clamp or with a Swagelok tube fitting and metal insert.
■ Tubing is sold in 50 ft (15.2 m) rolls.
■ Select an ordering number.

Nominal Nominal Bulk

Inside Outside Temperature Working Pressure Tubing
Diameter Diameter Range at 70°F (20°C) Weight Ordering
in. in. °F (°C) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m) Number
Standard Wall
1/8 1/4 40 (2.7) 0.02 (0.03) LT-2-4
3/16 5/16 30 (2.0) 0.03 (0.04) LT-3-5
–40 to 165
1/4 3/8 25 (1.7) 0.04 (0.05) LT-4-6
(–40 to 73)
3/8 1/2 15 (1.0) 0.05 (0.07) LT-6-8
1/2 5/8 10 (0.68) 0.06 (0.08) LT-8-10
Thick-Wall Vacuum
1/4 5/8 –40 to 165 Vacuum service over 0.13 (0.20) LT-4-10V
3/8 7/8 (–40 to 73) entire temperature range 0.27 (0.41) LT-6-14V

Pressure-Temperature Ratings Cleaning and Packaging

Swagelok vinyl tubing is cleaned in
Standard Wall
Nominal Tubing Size accordance with Swagelok Standard
in. 1/8 3/16 1/4 3/8 1/2 Cleaning and Packaging (SC‑10)
Temperature °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) catalog, MS‑06‑62. Each roll of tubing
–40 (–40 ) to 70 (20) 40 (2.7) 30 (2.0) 25 (1.7) 15 (1.0) 10 (0.68) is coiled individually and boxed.
80 (26) 38 (2.6) 29 (1.9) 24 (1.6) 14 (1.0) 10 (0.68)
100 (37) 32 (2.2) 24 (1.6) 20 (1.3) 12 (0.82) 8.0 (0.55)
120 (48) 24 (1.6) 18 (1.2) 15 (1.0) 9.0 (0.62) 6.0 (0.41)
140 (60) 16 (1.1) 12 (0.82) 10 (0.68) 6.0 (0.41) 4.0 (0.27)
160 (71) 8.4 (0.57) 6.3 (0.43) 5.3 (0.36) 3.2 (0.21) 2.1 (0.14)
165 (73) 6.4 (0.44) 4.8 (0.33) 4.0 (0.27) 2.4 (0.16) 1.6 (0.11)
 82 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

HC Series—End Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose

Features
■ HC series end connections allow for easy installation of ■ Reusable for other assemblies.
soft plastic or rubber tubing. ■ May be used without a hose clamp or sleeve in low-
■ 316 stainless steel or brass material. pressure applications.
■ Size range of 1/8 to 1 in. ■ Use of a hose clamp or sleeve may be required in higher-
pressure applications.
Ordering Information
Add SS for 316 stainless steel or B for brass to the basic ordering number.
Example: SS-2-HC-1-2
For end connection barb dimensions, see page 84. To determine the cut length of bulk hose for field
assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired overall length.

Male Pipe Threads,

FLEXIBLE

NPT and
TUBING
HOSE /

NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)

(ISO 7) Tapered Tubing Basic Minimum Maximum
Size ID Ordering Inside Outside
B in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/8 -2-HC-1-2 1.08 (27.4) 0.13 (3.3)
3/16 -3-HC-1-2 1.27 (32.2) 0.13 (3.3)
1/8 0.68 (17.3) 0.51 (12.9)
A 1/4 -4-HC-1-2 1.47 (37.3) 0.19 (4.8)
5/16 -5-HC-1-2 1.55 (39.4) 0.19 (4.8)
1/8 -2-HC-1-4 1.26 (32.0) 0.08 (2.0)
3/16 -3-HC-1-4 1.45 (36.8) 0.13 (3.3)
1/4 -4-HC-1-4 1.65 (41.9) 0.19 (4.8) 0.65 (16.6)
1/4 0.86 (21.8)
5/16 -5-HC-1-4 1.73 (43.9) 0.19 (4.8)
3/8 -6-HC-1-4 1.73 (43.9) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2 -8-HC-1-4 1.80 (45.7) 0.28 (7.1) 0.80 (20.3)
1/4 -4-HC-1-6 1.66 (42.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.19 (4.8)
5/16 -5-HC-1-6 1.74 (44.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.19 (4.8)
0.80 (20.3)
3/8 3/8 -6-HC-1-6 1.74 (44.2) 0.87 (22.1) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2 -8-HC-1-6 1.81 (46.0) 0.87 (22.1) 0.38 (9.7)
5/8 -10-HC-1-6 1.88 (47.8) 0.90 (22.9) 0.38 (9.7) 1.23 (31.2)
1/4 -4-HC-1-8 1.85 (47.0) 1.06 (26.9) 0.19 (4.8)
5/16 -5-HC-1-8 1.96 (49.8) 1.09 (27.7) 0.19 (4.8)
1.02 (25.8)
3/8 -6-HC-1-8 1.96 (49.8) 1.09 (27.7) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2
1/2 -8-HC-1-8 2.03 (51.6) 1.09 (27.7) 0.38 (9.7)
5/8 -10-HC-1-8 2.07 (52.6) 1.09 (27.7) 0.47 (11.9)
1.23 (31.2)
3/4 -12-HC-1-8 2.14 (54.4) 1.09 (27.7) 0.47 (11.9)
5/8 -10-HC-1-12 2.07 (52.6) 1.09 (27.7) 0.50 (12.7)
1.23 (31.2)
3/4 3/4 -12-HC-1-12 2.14 (54.4) 1.09 (27.7) 0.63 (16.0)
1 -16-HC-1-12 2.38 (60.5) 1.19 (30.2) 0.63 (16.0) 1.60 (40.5)
3/4 -12-HC-1-16 2.43 (61.7) 0.63 (16.0)
1 1.38 (35.1) 1.60 (40.5)
1 -16-HC-1-16 2.57 (65.3) 0.88 (22.4)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/8 -2-HC-1-2RT 1.28 (32.5) 0.88 (22.4) 0.08 (2.0)
1/8 0.51 (12.9)
1/4 -4-HC-1-2RT 1.47 (37.3) 0.68 (17.3) 0.19 (4.8)
1/4 -4-HC-1-4RT 1.65 (41.9) 0.19 (4.8)
1/4 0.86 (21.8) 0.65 (16.6)
3/8 -6-HC-1-4RT 1.73 (43.9) 0.30 (7.6)
1/4 -4-HC-1-6RT 1.66 (42.2)
3/8 0.87 (22.1) 0.30 (7.6) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8 -6-HC-1-6RT 1.74 (44.2)
3/8 -6-HC-1-8RT 1.96 (49.8) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2 1.09 (27.7) 1.02 (25.8)
1/2 -8-HC-1-8RT 2.03 (51.6) 0.38 (9.7)
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 83

HC Series—End Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose

Female Pipe Threads, NPT
Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B NPT Tubing Basic Minimum Maximum
Size ID Ordering Inside Outside
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension
1/8 -2-HC-7-2 1.11 (28.2) 0.71 (18.0) 0.08 (2.0)
1/8 3/16 -3-HC-7-2 1.29 (32.8) 0.70 (17.8) 0.13 (3.3) 0.65 (16.6)
1/4 -4-HC-7-2 1.47 (37.3) 0.68 (17.3) 0.19 (4.8)
A 1/8 -2-HC-7-4 1.26 (32.0) 0.86 (21.8) 0.08 (2.0)
3/16 -3-HC-7-4 1.44 (36.6) 0.85 (21.6) 0.13 (3.3)
1/4 1/4 -4-HC-7-4 1.64 (41.7) 0.85 (21.6) 0.19 (4.8) 0.87 (22.1)
5/16 -5-HC-7-4 1.73 (43.9) 0.86 (21.8) 0.19 (4.8)
3/8 -6-HC-7-4 1.69 (42.9) 0.82 (20.8) 0.30 (7.6)
1/4 -4-HC-7-6 1.71 (43.4) 0.92 (23.4) 0.19 (4.8)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
3/8 5/16 -5-HC-7-6 1.82 (46.2) 0.95 (24.1) 0.19 (4.8) 1.02 (25.8)
3/8 -6-HC-7-6 1.78 (45.2) 0.91 (23.1) 0.30 (7.6)
3/8 -6-HC-7-8 2.03 (51.6) 1.16 (29.5) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2 1.23 (31.2)
1/2 -8-HC-7-8 2.13 (54.1) 1.19 (30.2) 0.38 (9.7)

Swagelok Tube Adapters

Dimensions
B Tube Nominal Basic Minimum Maximum
Adapter Tubing Ordering Inside Outside
Size ID Number A B Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/8 1/8 -2-HC-A-201 1.36 (34.5) 0.96 (24.4) 0.08 (2.0) 0.36 (9.2)
A 1/8 -2-HC-A-401 1.45 (36.8) 1.05 (26.7) 0.08 (2.0) 0.44 (11.0)
1/4 -4-HC-A-401 1.85 (47.0) 0.51 (12.9)
1/4
5/16 -5-HC-A-401 1.93 (49.0) 1.06 (26.9) 0.16 (4.1) 0.51 (12.9)
3/8 -6-HC-A-401 1.93 (49.0) 0.65 (16.6)
1/4 -4-HC-A-601 1.91 (48.5) 0.19 (4.8) 0.51 (12.9)
3/8 3/8 -6-HC-A-601 1.99 (50.5) 1.12 (28.4) 0.65 (16.6)
0.27 (6.9)
1/2 -8-HC-A-601 2.06 (52.3) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8 -6-HC-A-811 2.25 (57.2) 0.30 (7.6) 0.73 (18.4)
1/2 1.38 (35.1)
1/2 -8-HC-A-811 2.32 (58.9) 0.33 (8.4) 0.80 (20.3)
3/4 3/4 -12-HC-A-1211 2.49 (63.3) 1.44 (36.6) 0.58 (14.7) 1.23 (31.2)
1 1 -16-HC-A-1611 3.05 (77.5) 1.86 (47.2) 0.80 (20.3) 1.60 (40.5)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 1/4 in. -4-HC-A-6MTA 47.8 (1.88) 27.7 (1.09) 4.1 (0.16) 12.9 (0.51)
Swagelok tube adapters are to be used only with Swagelok tube fittings.

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Tube Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B Fitting Tubing Basic Minimum Maximum
Size ID Ordering Inside Outside
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension
1/8 -2-HC-1-200 1.42 (36.1) 0.08 (2.0)
1/8 1.02 (25.9) 0.51 (12.9)
1/4 -4-HC-1-200 1.81 (46.0) 0.09 (2.3)

A 1/4 -4-HC-1-400 1.92 (48.8) 1.13 (28.7)

1/4 0.19 (4.8) 0.65 (16.6)
3/8 -6-HC-1-400 1.99 (50.6) 1.12 (28.5)
3/8 3/8 -6-HC-1-600 2.06 (52.3) 1.19 (30.2) 0.28 (7.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 1/2 -8-HC-1-810 2.24 (56.9) 1.30 (33.0) 0.38 (9.7) 1.02 (25.8)
 84 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

HC Series—End Connections for Soft Tubing and Hose

Sanitary Kwik-Clamps
Kwik- Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
■ Smooth internal finish (20 µin. Ra)
Clamp Tubing Minimum Maximum
and tapered orifice reduce Size ID Ordering Inside Outside
entrapment and facilitate cleaning. in. in. Number A Diameter Dimension
3/16 SS-3-HC-8SC 1.10 (27.9) 0.13 (3.3)
1/4 SS-4-HC-8SC 1.28 (32.5) 0.19 (4.8)
1/2 0.99 (25.2)
3/8 SS-6-HC-8SC 1.36 (34.5) 0.30 (7.6)
1/2 SS-8-HC-8SC➀ 1.44 (36.6) 0.38 (9.7)
3/16 SS-3-HC-16SC 0.13 (3.3)
1/4 SS-4-HC-16SC 0.19 (4.8)
1 1.50 (38.1) 1.98 (50.3)
3/8 SS-6-HC-16SC 0.30 (7.6)
A
1/2 SS-8-HC-16SC 0.38 (9.7)
➀ Without 30° inside diameter taper.
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

End Connection Barb Dimensions

Nominal
Dimensions, in. (mm)
Tubing
L ID, in. D E L
1/8 0.15 (3.7) 0.08 (2.0) 0.40 (9.8)

E D 3/16 0.23 (5.6) 0.12 (2.9) 0.59 (14.5)

1/4 0.30 (7.4) 0.19 (4.7) 0.79 (19.4)
5/16 0.38 (9.3) 0.19 (4.7) 0.87 (21.3)
3/8 0.45 (11.0) 0.30 (7.4) 0.87 (21.3)
1/2 0.60 (14.7) 0.38 (9.3) 0.94 (23.0)
5/8 0.75 (19.0) 0.50 (12.7) 0.98 (24.0)
3/4 0.90 (22.0) 0.63 (15.4) 1.05 (25.7)
1 1.20 (29.4) 0.88 (21.6) 1.19 (29.2)

Sleeves, Clamps, and Inserts Dimensions, in. (mm)

Hose Connector Sleeves Hose Hose Maximum
OD ID Ordering Outside
in. in. Number A E Dimension
1/4 1/8 A-2-L-4 0.40 (10.2) 0.26 (6.6) 0.44 (11.0)
E
3/8 1/4 A-4-L-6 0.41 (10.4) 0.65 (16.6)
7/16 1/4 A-4-L-7 0.79 (20.1) 0.46 (11.7) 0.73 (18.4)
A 1/2 1/4 A-4-L-8 0.52 (13.2) 0.80 (20.3)
7/16 5/16 A-5-L-7 0.48 (12.2) 0.73 (18.4)
■ Used to secure soft plastic or rubber
tubing to hose connectors. 1/2 3/8 A-6-L-8 0.87 (22.1) 0.55 (14.0) 0.80 (20.3)
9/16 3/8 A-6-L-9 0.61 (15.5) 0.87 (22.1)
■ Constructed of aluminum.
5/8 7/16 A-7-L-10 0.69 (17.5) 0.94 (23.9)
■ Helically grooved ID and outer hex allow 0.94 (23.9)
for easy installation with a wrench. 11/16 1/2 A-8-L-11 0.76 (19.3) 1.02 (25.8)
1 3/4 A-12-L-16 1.07 (27.2) 1.10 (27.9) 1.45 (36.8)
■ Reusable for other assemblies.

Hose Clamps Tubing Inserts

■ Material: ■ Tubing inserts help
Min Max
Band, saddle, Hose Hose secure soft plastic
housing: 304 SS OD OD Ordering Band tubing used with
Screw: 304 SS / in. in. Number Marking standard Swagelok tube fittings.
305 SS 7/16 25/32 MS-HCC-6 6 ■ Some tubing inserts may be non-
■ 4-corner clinched saddle and 1/2 29/32 MS-HCC-8 8 barbed depending on size and
housing with no spot welds to 9/16 1 1/16 MS-HCC-10 10 material.
corrode or break. 11/16 1 1/4 MS-HCC-12 12 ■ For materials, ordering information,
■ Smooth inside diameter surface 13/16 1 1/2 MS-HCC-16 16 and dimensions, refer to Gaugeable
provides high sealing pressure and Tube Fittings and Adapter Fittings
reduces torque on screw. catalog, MS-01-140.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 85

NG Series Nylon Hose

Features
■ Designed for use with natural gas where static dissipation
is required.
■ Static dissipative, smooth-bore nylon core.
Single hose
■ Size range of 1/4, 3/8 and 1/2 in. and working pressures up
to 5000 psig (344 bar).
■ Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating.
Twin hose (high-pressure vent)
■ Perforated polyurethane cover resists abrasion.
■ Single, twin bonded, and vent bonded hoses are available in
custom assemblies.
Vent hose (low-pressure vent)
■ Most popular configurations are available with NGV3.1-2014
Class B and NGV4.2-2014 Class A certification.
■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
302 SS spring guard Fiber reinforcement 316 SS end
connections

Perforated polyurethane cover Static dissipative core

Technical Data
Minimum Minimum
Inside Working Burst Bulk
Hose Nominal Inside Outside Bend Temperature Pressure Pressure Hose
Style Hose Size Diameter Diameter Radius Range at 70°F (20°C) at 70°F (20°C) Weight
(Series) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (cm) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.26 (6.6) 0.63 (16.0) 2.00 (5.08) 0.12 (0.17)
Single
3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.77 (19.6) 4.00 (10.2) 5000 (344) 20 000 (1378) 0.15 (0.22)
(NGS)
1/2 (12.7) 0.52 (13.2) 0.89 (22.6) 5.50 (14.0) 0.21 (0.32)
Twin 1/4 (6.4) 0.26 (6.6) 0.63 (16.0) 2.00 (5.08) –40 to 150 Fill and vent Fill and vent 0.25 (0.37)
(NGT) 3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.6) 0.77 (19.6) 4.00 (10.2) (–40 to 65) 5000 (344) 20 000 (1378) 0.30 (0.44)
Fill 0.26 (6.6) Fill 0.63 (16.0)
1/4 (6.4) 2.00 (5.08) 0.15 (0.22)
Vent➀ Vent 0.26 (6.6) Vent 0.63 (16.0) Fill 5000 (344) Fill 20 000 (1378)
(NGV) Fill 0.38 (9.6) Fill 0.77 (19.6) Vent 1500 (103) Vent 6 000 (413)
3/8 (9.6) 4.00 (10.2) 0.25 (0.37)
Vent 0.26 (6.6) Vent 0.63 (16.0)
➀ L
 ow-pressure vent line does not have static dissipative core.

Testing • Warning:
Every Swagelok NG series hose assembly is pressure All equipment must be properly grounded to allow
tested with water at room temperature for 30 seconds to a static dissipation and help to prevent static sparking.
requirement of no detectable leakage. Testing is performed  eriodic inspection of hose assembly is
P
at 5000 psig (344 bar). Every Swagelok NG series hose recommended. End-to-end electrical resistance of
assembly is factory tested for electrical conductivity. the hose assembly must not exceed 1 MΩ per meter
when tested at 500 VDC.
Cleaning and Packaging
Swagelok conductive core hose components are cleaned in
accordance with Swagelok Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. Each hose is bagged
individually and boxed; longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and
boxed.
 86 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

NG Series Nylon Hose

Ordering Information and Dimensions
Custom Hose Assemblies—Single Hose
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6
SS - NGS 4 - T6 S4 - 40 - F
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators in
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on page 88. alphanumeric order with a dash between
For fitting dimensions, see End each designator.
2 Hose Connection tables, page 88. F = Fire jacket
NGS = NG series single nylon hose F1 = Thermosleeve
5 Overall Length N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. X = No spring guards➀
Insert length in inches.
4 = 1/4 NGV = NGV 3.1 and 4.2 certified
6 = 3/8 W = Hydrostatic test
8 = 1/2 ➀ 5 in. spring guards at each end are
standard. The X option should only be used
in static bend applications.

See page 103 for detailed descriptions

of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 87

NG Series Nylon Hose

Ordering Information and Dimensions
Custom Hose Assemblies—Twin and Vent Hoses
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Fill hose
Nozzle 4 5 Dispenser
end end

6 Vent hose 7

Typical Ordering Number

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
SS - NGV 6 - S6 T6 S4 P6 - 48 - 1 3 - X

1 Material 8 Overall Length (Fill and Vent) 10 Vent Hose Dispenser End Length
End Connections Insert length in inches. Adjustment
SS = 316 stainless steel Positive Negative
9 Vent Hose Nozzle End Length X = None X = None
2 Hose Adjustment 1 = 2 in. A = 2 in.
NGT = NG series twin nylon hose 2 = 4 in. B = 4 in.
Positive Negative
NGV = NG series vent nylon hose 3 = 6 in. C = 6 in.
X = None X = None
4 = 8 in. D = 8 in.
1 = 2 in. A = 2 in.
3 Nominal Fill Hose Size, in. 5 = 10 in. E = 10 in.
2 = 4 in. B = 4 in.
6 = 12 in. F = 12 in.
4 = 1/4 3 = 6 in. C = 6 in.
7 = 15 in. G = 15 in.
6 = 3/8 4 = 8 in. D = 8 in.
8 = 18 in. H = 18 in.
5 = 10 in. E = 10 in.
9 = 21 in. J = 21 in.
4 Fill Hose Nozzle End Connection 6 = 12 in. F = 12 in.
0 = 24 in. K = 24 in.
5 Fill Hose Dispenser End Connection 7 = 15 in. G = 15 in.
6 8 = 18 in. H = 18 in. Illustration shows adjustment 3.
Vent Hose Nozzle End Connection
7 Vent Hose Dispenser End Connection 9 = 21 in. J = 21 in.
0 = 24 in. K = 24 in. 11 Options
See End Connection Designator
Illustration shows adjustment 1. For multiple options, add designators in
column in tables on page 88.
alphanumeric order with a dash between
For fitting dimensions, see End each designator.
Connection tables, page 88.
5 in. spring guards at each end are
standard.
N3 = Nitrogen pressure test
X = No spring guards➀
NGV = N
 GV 3.1 and 4.2 certified
(NGT hose only)
W = Hydrostatic test
➀ This option should only be used in static
bend applications.
 88 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

NG Series Nylon Hose

End Connections
Swagelok Tube Fittings
Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Fitting Hose Connection Inside Outside
Size Size Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 1/4 S4➀ 2.57 (65.3) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8 3/8 S6➀ 2.94 (74.7) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 1/2 S8➀ 3.30 (83.8) 0.36 (9.1) 1.16 (29.5)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 G6➀ 65.5 (2.57) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80)
1/4 in.
8 G8➀ 65.5 (2.58) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80)
10 3/8 in. G1➀ 74.9 (2.95) 6.1 (0.24) 22.1 (0.87)
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

12 1/2 in. G2➀ 83.8 (3.30) 9.1 (0.36) 29.5 (1.16)

➀ N
 GV 3.1 and 4.2 certification available.

Swagelok Tube Adapters

Dimensions
Tube Nominal End Minimum Maximum
Adapter Hose Connection Inside Outside
Size Size Designator A Diameter Dimension
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 1/4 T4➀ 2.48 (63.0) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)
1/4 T6➀ 2.47 (62.7) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)
3/8
T6➀ 2.82 (71.6) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
3/8
T8➀ 3.20 (81.3) 0.28 (7.1) 1.09 (27.7)
1/2
T8➀ 3.40 (86.4) 0.36 (9.1) 1.16 (29.5)
5/8 1/2 T5➀ 3.40 (86.4) 0.39 (9.9) 1.09 (27.7)
3/4 T7 3.70 (94.0) 0.56 (14.2) 1.31 (33.1)
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 E6➀ 65.3 (2.57) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80)
1/4 in.
8 E8➀ 62.7 (2.47) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80)
10 3/8 in. E1➀ 71.6 (2.82) 6.1 (0.24) 22.1 (0.87)
12 1/2 in. E2➀ 86.4 (3.40) 9.1 (0.36) 29.5 (1.16)
➀ N
 GV 3.1 and 4.2 certification available.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 89

NG Series Nylon Hose

End Connections
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and Dimensions, in. (mm)
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Nominal
(ISO 7) Tapered Hose End Minimum Maximum
Size Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator A Diameter Dimension
NPT
1/4 P4➀ 2.28 (57.9) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)
A 1/4
P4➀ 2.65 (67.3) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
3/8
3/8 P6➀ 2.65 (67.3) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 1/2 P8➀ 3.09 (78.5) 0.36 (9.1) 1.16 (29.5)
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 1/4 K4 2.28 (57.9) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
3/8 3/8 K6 2.65 (67.3) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 1/2 K8 3.09 (78.5) 0.36 (9.1) 1.16 (29.5)
➀ N
 GV 3.1 and 4.2 certification available.

SAE 37o (JIC) Female

Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel Nominal
Hose End Minimum Maximum
Swivel Size Size Connection Inside Outside
in. in. Designator A Diameter Dimension
1/4 1/4 A4➀ 2.62 (66.6) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3)
A 3/8 3/8 A6➀ 3.03 (77.0) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1)
1/2 1/2 A8➀ 3.34 (84.8) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6)
➀ N
 GV 3.1 and 4.2 certification available.
 90 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

7R and 8R Series Nylon Hose

Features
■ SAE general-purpose, hydraulic, nylon hose. ■ Select 8R series hose assemblies are approved to
■ Smooth-bore nylon core. ECE R110; see page 105 for more information.
■ Size range of 1/4 to 1 in. and working pressures up to ■ Designed for use in hydraulic applications where outgassing
5000 psig (344 bar). is a concern.
■ Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. ■ Options include hose covers and spring guard. See
page 103 for details.
■ Smooth black polyurethane cover is perforated to prevent
blistering. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

■ Polyurethane cover resists abrasion.

316 SS end
Polyurethane cover Fiber reinforcement connections
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Nylon core
Technical Data
Minimum Minimum
Inside Working Burst Bulk
Nominal Inside Outside Bend Temperature Pressure at Pressure at Hose
Specification Hose Size Diameter Diameter Radius Range 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
(Series) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (cm) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
SAE J517 1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.52 (13.2) 1.25 (3.18) 2750 (189) 11 000 (757) 0.07 (0.10)
–40 to 200
100R7 3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.8) 0.67 (17.0) 2.00 (5.08) 2250 (155) 9 000 (620) 0.10 (0.15)
(–40 to 93)
(7R series) 1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.82 (20.8) 3.00 (7.62) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.14 (0.21)
1/4 (6.4)➀ 0.25 (6.4) 0.53 (13.5) 2.00 (5.08) 5000 (344)➁ 20 000 (1378) 0.08 (0.12)
SAE J517 3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.8) 0.67 (17.0) 2.50 (6.35) 4000 (275) 16 000 (1102) 0.11 (0.16)
–40 to 200
100R8 1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.84 (21.3) 4.00 (10.2) 3500 (241) 14 000 (964) 0.15 (0.22)
(–40 to 93)
(8R series) 3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.15 (29.2) 6.50 (16.5) 2250 (155) 9 000 (620) 0.26 (0.39)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.48 (37.6) 10.0 (25.4) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.39 (0.58)
➀ 1/4 in. (6.4 mm) size does not meet SAE J517 impulse cycle requirements at maximum temperature and minimum bend radius.
➁ Pressure-temperature ratings may be limited by the end connections.

Cleaning and Packaging Ordering Information and Dimensions

Swagelok nylon hose components are ■ For custom hose assemblies, see page for 95 for hose sizes, end connections,
cleaned in accordance with Swagelok lengths, and options.
Standard Cleaning and Packaging
(SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. Each hose
is bagged individually and boxed;
longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and
boxed.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 91

7N and 8N Series Nylon Hose

Features
■ SAE nonconductive, nylon hose. ■ Hose meets electrical conductivity requirements of
■ Smooth-bore nylon core. SAE J343/SAE J517. Hose is not intended for exposure to
continuous electrical current.
■ Size range of 1/4 to 3/4 in. and working pressures up to
■ Designed for use with petroleum-based and synthetic
2750 psig (189 bar).
hydraulic fluids where SAE nonconductive properties are
■ Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating.
desired.
■ Smooth orange polyurethane cover is nonperforated to
■ Options include hose covers and spring guards. See
prevent moisture from entering hose. page 103 for details.
■ Polyurethane cover resists abrasion.
■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.

Polyurethane cover Fiber reinforcement 316 SS end

connections

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
SAE nonconductive nylon core

Technical Data
Minimum Minimum
Inside Working Burst Bulk
Nominal Inside Outside Bend Temperature Pressure at Pressure at Hose
Specification Hose Size Diameter Diameter Radius Range 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
(Series) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (cm) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
SAE J517 1/4 (6.4) 0.26 (6.5) 0.49 (12.4) 1.25 (3.18) 2750 (189) 11 000 (757) 0.07 (0.10)
–40 to 200
100R7 3/8 (9.6) 0.38 (9.8) 0.65 (16.5) 2.00 (5.08) 2250 (155) 9 000 (620) 0.10 (0.15)
(–40 to 93)
(7N series) 1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.80 (20.3) 3.00 (7.62) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.14 (0.21)
SAE J517
–40 to 200
100R8 3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.15 (29.2) 6.50 (16.5) 2250 (155) 9 000 (620) 0.26 (0.39)
(–40 to 93)
(8N series)

Cleaning and Packaging Ordering Information and Dimensions

Swagelok nylon hose components are ■ For custom hose assemblies, see page for 95 for hose sizes, end connections,
cleaned in accordance with Swagelok lengths, and options.
Standard Cleaning and Packaging
(SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62. Each hose
is bagged individually and boxed;
longer hoses are coiled, bagged, and
boxed.

• Caution:
System media can be conduits
for electricity. Consider system
media properties prior to use.
• Nonperforated covers may
blister in gas service.
 92 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

7R, 8R, 7N, and 8N Series Nylon Hose and 7P Series Polyethylene Hose
End Connections
Select an ordering number. B

To determine the cut length of bulk hose for field assembly,

subtract dimension B for each end connection from the
desired overall length.

Swagelok Tube Adapters

Dimensions
B Tube Nominal Minimum Maximum End
Adapter Hose Ordering Inside Outside Connection
Size Size Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Dimensions, in. (mm)

A 1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-TA4 2.48 (63.0) 1.45 (36.8) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) TA4➀
1/4 SS-TP4-TA6 2.47 (62.7) 1.44 (36.6) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) TA6
3/8
3/8 SS-TP6-TA6 2.82 (71.6) 1.51 (38.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) TA6➀
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-TA8 3.40 (86.4) 1.84 (46.7) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6) TA8➀
5/8 1/2 SS-TP8-TA10 3.40 (86.4) 1.84 (46.7) 0.39 (9.9) 1.09 (27.6) TA10➀
3/4 3/4 SS-TP12-TA12 3.70 (94.0) 1.95 (49.5) 0.56 (14.2) 1.31 (33.1) TA12
1 1 SS-TP16-TA16 4.47 (113) 2.26 (57.4) 0.76 (19.3) 1.60 (40.5) TA16
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 1/4 in. SS-TP4-TM6 63.0 (2.48) 36.8 (1.45) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80) TM6➀
8 1/4 in. SS-TP4-TM8 62.7 (2.47) 36.6 (1.44) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80) TM8➀
10 3/8 in. SS-TP6-TM10 71.6 (2.82) 38.4 (1.51) 6.1 (0.24) 22.1 (0.87) TM10➀
12 1/2 in. SS-TP8-TM12 86.4 (3.40) 46.7 (1.84) 9.1 (0.36) 27.6 (1.09) TM12➀
➀ ECE R110 approval available.

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Dimensions
B Tube Nominal Minimum Maximum End
Fitting Hose Ordering Inside Outside Connection
Size Size Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
Dimensions, in. (mm)
A 1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-SL4 2.57 (65.3) 1.54 (39.1) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) SL4➀
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-SL6 2.94 (74.7) 1.63 (41.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) SL6➀
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-SL8 3.30 (83.8) 1.74 (44.2) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6) SL8➀
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 1/4 in. SS-TP4-SM6 65.3 (2.57) 39.1 (1.54) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80) SM6➀
8 1/4 in. SS-TP4-SM8 65.5 (2.58) 39.4 (1.55) 3.8 (0.15) 20.3 (0.80) SM8➀
1/4 in. SS-TP4-SM10 71.9 (2.83) 45.7 (1.80) 3.8 (0.15) 22.1 (0.87) SM10
10
3/8 in. SS-TP6-SM10 74.9 (2.95) 41.7 (1.64) 6.1 (0.24) 22.1 (0.87) SM10➀
12 1/2 in. SS-TP8-SM12 83.8 (3.30) 44.2 (1.74) 9.1 (0.36) 27.6 (1.09) SM12➀
➀ ECE R110 approval available.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 93

7R, 8R, 7N, and 8N Series Nylon Hose and 7P Series Polyethylene Hose
Male Pipe Threads, NPT and
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Hose Minimum Maximum End
B
Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
NPT
1/4 SS-TP4-PM4 2.28 (57.9) 1.25 (31.8) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) PM4➀
1/4
A 3/8 SS-TP6-PM4 2.65 (67.3) 1.34 (34.0) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) PM4➀
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-PM6 2.65 (67.3) 1.34 (34.0) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) PM6➀
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-PM8 3.09 (78.5) 1.53 (38.9) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6) PM8➀
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-MT4 2.28 (57.9) 1.25 (31.8) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) MT4➀
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-MT6 2.65 (67.3) 1.34 (34.0) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) MT6➀
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-MT8 3.09 (78.5) 1.53 (38.9) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6) MT8➀

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
➀ ECE R110 approval available.

HOSE /
Male ISO/BSP Parallel
ISO/BSP
Threads with 60° Male Parallel,
Cone (ISO 228) 60° Male Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B
Cone Hose Minimum Maximum End
Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-MS4 2.53 (64.3) 1.50 (38.1) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) MS4
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-MS6 2.73 (69.3) 1.42 (36.1) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) MS6
A
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-MS8 3.00 (76.2) 1.44 (36.6) 0.36 (9.1) 1.23 (31.2) MS8

SAE 37° (JIC) Female

Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel
Swivel Hose Minimum Maximum End
B Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-AS4 2.62 (66.6) 1.59 (40.4) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) AS4
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-AS6 3.03 (77.0) 1.71 (43.4) 0.24 (6.1) 0.87 (22.1) AS6
A 1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-AS8 3.34 (84.8) 1.77 (45.0) 0.36 (9.1) 1.09 (27.6) AS8
Dimensions shown with swivel nut pushed toward hex.

Female Swivel ISO/BSP Swivel

Parallel Threads with ISO/BSP
60° Cone Parallel
Thread,
60° Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B
Cone Hose Minimum Maximum End
Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-BM4 2.45 (62.2) 1.42 (36.1) 0.15 (3.8) 0.87 (22.1) BM4
A
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-BM6 2.87 (72.9) 1.56 (39.6) 0.24 (6.1) 1.02 (25.8) BM6
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-BM8 3.23 (82.0) 1.67 (42.4) 0.36 (9.1) 1.23 (31.2) BM8
Dimensions shown with swivel nut pushed toward hex.
 94 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

7R, 8R, 7N, and 8N Series Nylon Hose and 7P Series Polyethylene Hose
SAE 37° (JIC) Male Flare
Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
JIC Flare Hose Minimum Maximum End
B Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-AN4 2.27 (57.7) 1.24 (31.5) 0.15 (3.8) 0.80 (20.3) AN4➀
A 3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-AN6 2.60 (66.0) 1.29 (32.8) 0.28 (7.1) 0.87 (22.1) AN6➀
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-AN8 3.09 (78.5) 1.53 (38.9) 0.39 (9.9) 1.09 (27.6) AN8➀
➀ ECE R110 approval available.

Female Swivel ISO/BSP

Swivel
Parallel Threads with ISO/BSP
30° Cone Parallel
Thread, Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B 30° Cone Hose Minimum Maximum End
FLEXIBLE

Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection

TUBING
HOSE /

in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator

1/4 1/4 SS-TP4-BS4 2.56 (65.0) 1.53 (38.9) 0.15 (3.8) 0.87 (22.1) BS4
3/8 3/8 SS-TP6-BS6 3.00 (76.2) 1.69 (42.9) 0.24 (6.1) 1.02 (25.8) BS6
A
1/2 1/2 SS-TP8-BS8 3.38 (85.9) 1.81 (46.0) 0.36 (9.1) 1.23 (31.2) BS8
Dimensions shown with swivel nut pushed toward hex.

Universal Globe Seal,

Universal
Metric Female Swivel Nut Globe Seal,
Metric
B Female Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
Swivel Nut Hose Minimum Maximum End
Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
mm in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
14 1/4 SS-TP4-MC14 2.38 (60.5) 1.35 (34.3) 0.15 (3.8) 0.87 (22.1) MC14
A
18 3/8 SS-TP6-MC18 2.77 (70.4) 1.46 (37.1) 0.24 (6.1) 1.02 (25.8) MC18
22 1/2 SS-TP8-MC22 3.08 (78.2) 1.51 (38.4) 0.36 (9.1) 0.80 (20.3) MC22
Dimensions shown with swivel nut pushed toward hex.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 95

7R, 8R, 7N, 8N Series Nylon Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - 7R 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on pages 92 to 94. with a dash between each designator.
CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
2 Hose 5 Overall Length F = Fire jacket
7R =7R series SAE 100R7 nylon hose Inches or centimeters, in whole F1 = Thermosleeve
(1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. sizes only) numbers. Include CM as shown for N3 = Nitrogen pressure test (7R and
8R =8R series SAE 100R8 nylon hose centimeter lengths. 8R Series only)
7N =7N series SAE 100R7 S =302 SS spring guard, hose-
nonconductive nylon hose length
(1/4, 3/8, and 1/2 in. sizes only) S2 =302 SS spring guard, 5 in.
8N =8N series SAE 100R8 length (1/4 and 3/8 in. sizes only)
nonconductive nylon hose T = Lanyard tag
(3/4 in. size only) T2 = Two lanyard tags
W = Hydrostatic test
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. 093 = ECE R110 approval, only on
4 = 1/4 (7R, 8R, 7N series only) 8R hoses with select end
6 = 3/8 (7R, 8R, 7N series only) connections. See page 105
8 = 1/2 (7R, 8R, 7N series only) for additional information.
12 = 3/4 (8R, 8N series only) Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
16 = 1 (8R series only) Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 96 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

7P Series—Polyethylene Hose
Features
■ Polyethylene hose designed for use in food, dairy, and water ■ Polyurethane cover resists abrasion.
applications. ■ Polyethylene core material is compliant with FDA 21 CFR Part
■ Smooth-bore polyethylene core. 177.1520 and NSF-51, for use with food, dairy, and water.
■ Size range of 1/4 to 1 in. and working pressures up to ■ Options include hose covers and spring guards. See
2750 psig (189 bar). page 103 for details.
■ Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating. ■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
■ Smooth, polyurethane blue cover is nonperforated to
prevent moisture entrapment and system contamination.

Polyurethane cover Fiber reinforcement 316 SS end

connections
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Polyethylene core

Technical Data
Minimum Minimum
Inside Working Burst Bulk
Nominal Inside Outside Bend Temperature Pressure at Pressure at Hose
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Radius Range 70°F (20°C) 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (cm) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.25 (6.4) 0.52 (13.2) 1.25 (3.18) 2750 (189) 11 000 (757) 0.06 (0.09)
3/8 (9.7) 0.38 (9.7) 0.66 (16.8) 2.00 (5.08) 2250 (155) 9 000 (620) 0.09 (0.13)
–10 to 150
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.81 (20.6) 3.00 (7.62) 2000 (137) 8 000 (551) 0.12 (0.18)
(–23 to 65)
3/4 (19.0) 0.75 (19.0) 1.14 (29.0) 5.00 (12.7) 1500 (103) 6 000 (413) 0.25 (0.37)
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.48 (37.6) 8.00 (20.3) 1500 (103) 6 000 (413) 0.37 (0.55)

Cleaning and Packaging Ordering Information and Dimensions

Swagelok polyethylene hose ■ For custom hose assemblies, see page for 97 for hose sizes, end connections,
components are cleaned in accordance lengths, and options.
with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
Each hose is bagged individually
and boxed; longer hoses are coiled,
bagged, and boxed.

• Caution:
Nonperforated covers may
blister in gas service.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 97

7P Series Polyethylene Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6
SS - 7P 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - F or 71CM-F

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Options

End Connections See End Connection Designator For multiple options, add designators
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on pages 92 to 94. with a dash between each designator.
CRN= Lanyard tag with CRN
2 Hose 5 Overall Length F = Fire jacket
7P = 7P series polyethylene hose Inches or centimeters, in whole F1= Thermosleeve
numbers. Include CM as shown for S =302 SS spring guard, hose-
3 Nominal Hose Size, in. centimeter lengths. length
4 = 1/4 S2 =302 SS spring guard, 5 in.
6 = 3/8 length (1/4 and 3/8 in. sizes only)
8 = 1/2 T = Lanyard tag
12 = 3/4 T2 = Two lanyard tags
16 = 1 W = Hydrostatic test
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 98 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

PB Series Rubber Hose

Features
■ Ozone-resistant, general-purpose rubber hose with push- ■ Designed for use in general-purpose, compressed air
on connections. applications and oil transfer.
■ Smooth-bore Buna N core. ■ Bulk hose and end connections available for field
■ Size range of 1/4 to 1 in. and working pressures up to assembly; custom assemblies also available.
350 psig (24.1 bar). ■ Standard hose color is blue; other hose colors include
■ Internal fiber reinforcement enhances hose pressure rating black, green, gray, red, and yellow.
and ensures connection retention. ■ Black hose color provides additional UV and ozone
■ Hose cover resists abrasion. resistance due to Neoprene cover.
■ Cover is flame-resistant in accordance with 30CFR Part 18. ■ Options include tags. See page 103 for details.
■ For electrical properties, see page 5 for details.
Buna N or
Neoprene cover Synthetic reinforcement Buna N c­­­ore 316 SS and brass
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

end connections

Technical Data
Minimum Working Minimum
Inside Pressure Burst Bulk
Nominal Inside Outside Bend Temperature at –40 to 70°F Pressure Hose
Hose Size Diameter Diameter Radius Range (–40 to 20°C) at 70°F (20°C) Weight
in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (mm) in. (cm) °F (°C) psig (bar) psig (bar) lb/ft (kg/m)
1/4 (6.4) 0.26 (6.6) 0.51 (12.8) 3.00 (7.62) 350 (24.1) 1400 (96.4) 0.09 (0.13)
3/8 (9.7) 0.39 (9.9) 0.67 (17.0) 3.00 (7.62) –40 to 200 300 (20.6) 1200 (82.6) 0.14 (0.20)
1/2 (12.7) 0.50 (12.7) 0.75 (19.0) 5.00 (12.7) (–40 to 93) 300 (20.6) 1200 (82.6) 0.14 (0.20)
3/4 (19.0) 0.76 (19.3) 1.07 (27.2) 7.00 (17.8) 300 (20.6) 1200 (82.6) 0.25 (0.37)
–20 to 200
1 (25.4) 1.00 (25.4) 1.34 (34.0) 10.00 (25.4) 300 (20.6)➀ 1200 (82.6) 0.33 (0.49)
(–28 to 93)
➀ Working pressure of 1 in. PB hose is 300 psig (20.6 bar) from –20 to 70°F (-28 to 20°C)

Pressure-Temperature Ratings Cleaning and Packaging

Ratings maintain a minimum factor of 4:1 between Swagelok PB series rubber hose
working pressure and minimum burst pressure. components are cleaned in accordance
with Swagelok Standard Cleaning and
Nominal 3/8, 1/2, Packaging (SC‑10) catalog, MS‑06‑62.
Hose Size, in. 1/4 3/4 1 Each custom hose assembly is bagged
Temperature, °F (°C) Working Pressure, psig (bar) individually and boxed; longer hoses
–40 (–40) 350 (24.1) 300 (20.6) — are coiled, bagged, and boxed. Bulk
–20 (–28) to 70 (20) 350 (24.1) 300 (20.6) 300 (20.6) rubber hose is packaged and shipped
100 (37) 315 (21.7) 270 (18.6) 270 (18.6) in reels.
150 (65) 210 (14.4) 180 (12.4) 180 (12.4)
200 (93) 100 (6.8) 80 (5.5) 80 (5.5)

• Users must evaluate

compatibility in systems
containing heated water-based
fluids—some conditions may
affect the Buna N core.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 99

PB Series Rubber Hose

Ordering Information and Dimensions
■ For bulk hose, see below; for end connections for field assembly, see below.
■ For custom hose assemblies, see page 102 for hose sizes, end connections,
lengths, and options.
■ For hose cutters for field assembly, see page 109.
■ For a push-on tool for field assembly, see page 109.

Bulk Hose
Bulk hose is available in 250 ft (76 m) reels; the standard color
is blue. Select an ordering number from the table below left.
Example: PB-4
For hose of a color other than blue, add a hose color
designator from the table below right.

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Example PB-4-BK

Nominal Rubber
Hose Size Ordering Hose Color Designator Reels contain up to three lengths of hose.
in. Number Black -BK➀
1/4 PB-4 Gray -GY
3/8 PB-6 Green -GR
1/2 PB-8 Red -RD
3/4 PB-12 Yellow -YW
1 PB-16

Field Assembly Instructions

1. Cut a clean, square edge on the end of the hose.

2. Cover the first barb of the end connection with the hose.

Note: L
 ubricating the end connection barbs with a light
oil (i.e. 10W40) may ease assembly.
3. Hold the end connection against a flat surface. Grip the
hose and push with a steady force until the hose seats
flush with the divider tab.

• Do not use a hose clamp. Alternatively, see Push-On Tool User Manual MS-CRD-0190,
• Ensure hose is pushed fully until the hose seats flush for instructions on using the Push-On Tool to assist in
with the divider tab. assembly, see page 109.
 100 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

PB Series Rubber Hose

End Connections
Select a basic ordering number and add SS for 316 SS or B for brass.
Example: SS-PB4-SL4
To determine the cut length of bulk hose for field assembly, subtract dimension B for each end connection from the desired
overall length.

Swagelok Tube Fittings

Tube Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B Fitting Hose Basic Minimum Maximum End
Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
1/4 1/4 -PB4-SL4 1.82 (46.2) 1.08 (27.4) 0.15 (3.8) 0.65 (16.5) SL4
3/8 3/8 -PB6-SL6 2.02 (51.3) 1.17 (29.7) 0.26 (6.6) 0.87 (22.1) SL6
FLEXIBLE

A
TUBING

1/2 1/2 -PB8-SL8 2.34 (59.4) 1.31 (33.3) 0.36 (9.1) 1.01 (25.7) SL8
HOSE /

Swagelok Tube Adapters

Dimensions
B Tube Nominal Basic Minimum Maximum End
Adapter Hose Ordering Inside Outside Connection
Size Size Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
Dimensions, in. (mm)
1/4 1/4 -PB4-TA4 1.77 (45.0) 1.03 (26.2) 0.15 (3.8) 0.54 (13.7) TA4
A
3/8 3/8 -PB6-TA6 1.97 (50.0) 1.12 (28.4) 0.23 (5.8) 0.71 (18.0) TA6
1/2 1/2 -PB8-TA8 2.43 (61.7) 1.40 (35.6) 0.33 (8.4) 0.81 (20.6) TA8
3/4 3/4 -PB12-TA12 3.14 (79.8) 1.50 (38.1) 0.57 (14.5) 1.08 (27.4) TA12
1 1 -PB16-TA16 4.11 (104) 1.88 (47.8) 0.79 (20.1) 1.41 (35.8) TA16
Dimensions, mm (in.)
6 1/4 in. -PB4-TM6 45.0 (1.77) 26.2 (1.03) 3.8 (0.15) 13.7 (0.54) TM6
1/4 in. -PB4-TM8 45.7 (1.80) 26.9 (1.06) 3.8 (0.15) 13.7 (0.54) TM8
8
3/8 in. -PB6-TM8 49.3 (1.94) 27.7 (1.09) 5.3 (0.21) 18.0 (0.71) TM8
10 3/8 in. -PB6-TM10 50.0 (1.97) 28.4 (1.12) 6.6 (0.26) 18.0 (0.71) TM10
12 1/2 in. -PB8-TM12 61.7 (2.43) 35.6 (1.40) 8.1 (0.32) 20.6 (0.81) TM12
18 3/4 in. -PB12-TM18 79.8 (3.14) 38.1 (1.50) 13.7 (0.54) 27.4 (1.08) TM18
25 1 in. -PB16-TM25 104 (4.11) 47.8 (1.88) 19.6 (0.77) 35.8 (1.41) TM25
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 101

PB Series Rubber Hose

Male Pipe Threads, NPT and
NPT and ISO/BSP Tapered ISO/BSP Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
(ISO 7) Tapered Hose Basic Minimum Maximum End
B Size Size Ordering Inside Outside Connection
in. in. Number A B Diameter Dimension Designator
NPT
1/4 -PB4-PM4 1.68 (42.7) 0.94 (23.9) 0.15 (3.8) 0.65 (16.5) PM4
1/4
3/8 -PB6-PM4 1.72 (43.7) 0.98 (24.9) 0.26 (6.6) 0.80 (20.3) PM4
A
3/8 3/8 -PB6-PM6 1.82 (46.2) 0.97 (24.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.87 (22.1) PM6
1/2 1/2 -PB8-PM8 2.22 (56.4) 1.19 (30.2) 0.36 (9.1) 1.01 (25.7) PM8
3/4 3/4 -PB12-PM12 2.86 (72.6) 1.22 (31.0) 0.60 (15.2) 1.30 (33.0) PM12
1 1 -PB16-PM16 3.75 (95.3) 1.52 (38.6) 0.79 (20.1) 1.74 (44.2) PM16
ISO/BSP Tapered
1/4 1/4 -PB4-MT4 1.68 (42.7) 0.94 (23.9) 0.15 (3.8) 0.65 (16.5) MT4

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
3/8 3/8 -PB6-MT6 1.82 (46.2) 0.97 (24.6) 0.26 (6.6) 0.87 (22.1) MT6
1/2 1/2 -PB8-MT8 2.22 (56.4) 1.19 (30.2) 0.36 (9.1) 1.01 (25.7) MT8
3/4 3/4 -PB12-MT12 2.87 (72.9) 1.23 (31.2) 0.60 (15.2) 1.30 (33.0) MT12
1 1 -PB16-MT16 3.75 (95.2) 1.52 (38.6) 0.79 (20.1) 1.74 (44.2) MT16

Unions
Nominal Dimensions, in. (mm)
B Hose Basic Minimum Maximum
Size Ordering Inside Outside
in. Number A B Diameter Dimension
1/4 -PB4-6 1.87 (47.5) 1.13 (28.7) 0.15 (3.8) 0.54 (13.7)
3/8 -PB6-6 2.12 (53.8) 1.27 (32.3) 0.26 (6.6) 0.71 (18.0)
A 1/2 -PB8-6 2.50 (63.5) 1.47 (37.3) 0.36 (9.1) 0.81 (20.6)
3/4 -PB12-6 3.76 (95.5) 2.12 (53.8) 0.60 (15.2) 1.08 (27.4)
 102 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

PB Series Rubber Hose

Ordering Information
Custom Hose Assemblies
Build a hose assembly ordering number by combining the designators in the sequence shown below.

Typical Ordering Number

1 2 3 4 4 5 6 5 6 7
SS - PB 4 TA4 PM4 - 28 - BK or 71CM - BK - CRN
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

in. cm

1 Material 4 End Connections 6 Hose Color

End Connections See End Connection Designator one = Blue, standard hose color
N
SS = 316 stainless steel column in tables on pages 78 and BK = Black
B = Brass 101. GR = Green
GY = Gray
2 Hose RD = Red
5 Overall Length
YW = Yellow
PB = PB series rubber hose
Inches or centimeters, in whole
numbers. Include CM as shown for 7 Options
3 Nominal Hose Size, in.
centimeter lengths.
4 = 1/4 For multiple options, add designators
6 = 3/8 with a dash between each designator.
8 = 1/2 CRN = Lanyard tag with CRN
12 = 3/4 T = Lanyard tag
16 = 1 T2 = Two lanyard tags
W = Hydrostatic test
Specify text for tags. See Hose Tag
Text table, page 104.
See page 103 for detailed descriptions
of options.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 103

Options
Covers
Covers do not change hose technical data.

Fire Jacket (Option F) Spiral Guard (Options G6, G7, and G8)
■ Woven fiberglass coated with specially ■ Helical HDPE plastic.
compounded aerospace-grade orange ■ Highly flexible, protects against
silicone rubber. abrasion.
■ Resists many hydraulic fluids and ■ Covers entire length of hose.
lubricating oils.
■ Operating temperature: –180 to 250°F
■ Provides insulation from internal (–117 to 121°C).
system fluid temperature extremes.
■ Standard colors are blue, black, and yellow.
■ Operating temperature: −65 to 500°F (−53 to 260°C) with
short-term flame exposure to 2000°F (1093°C). 316 Stainless Steel Material (Option Z)

FLEXIBLE
■ Replaces standard 304 stainless steel

TUBING

HOSE /
Thermosleeve (Option F1)
overbraid with 316L stainless steel and
■ Braided fiberglass with saturated
300 series stainless steel collar with
synthetic material coating.
316 stainless steel
■ Creates a barrier that prevents direct
■ Provides greater corrosion resistance.
contact with the hose and resists
abrasion. Spring Guard (Options S, S2, and S7)
■ Protects hose from weld splatter and ■ Helical 302 stainless
resists effects of UV light. steel.
■ Operating temperature: up to 1000°F (537°C). ■ Highly flexible, protects Hose-Length Spring Guard
against kinking and
Armor Guard (Option A) abrasion.
■ Interlocking, flexible 302 stainless steel.
■ Hose-length version
■ Highly flexible, protects against kinking covers entire length of 5 in. Long Spring Guard
and abrasion. hose (option S).
■ Covers entire length of hose. ■ Five-inch-long version protects each end of hose
■ Operating temperature: –325 to 750°F (option S2).
(–200 to 398°C). ■ Operating temperature: –325 to 850°F (–200 to 454°C).

Testing
These tests are in addition to the standard testing performed
on each hose series. Total Organic Carbon Measurement (Option TOC)
Helium Leak Testing (Option H7) Total organic carbon is measured in a gas stream through
the product. Results are reported in Toluene equivalent,
■ Inboard helium leak tested to a maximum leak rate of concentration expressed in ng/dm3. Hydrocarbons can be
1 × 10 –7 std cm3/s. divided in 2 groups, components with a boiling point below
■ Test certification included with order. 150°C and components with a boiling point above 150°C. See
below specification example:
Hydrostatic Testing (Option W) TOC volatile ≤ 100 ng/dm3 (>150°C)
■ Hydrostatic pressure test to 1.5 times the rated working
TOC non-volatile ≤ 10 ng/dm3 (<150°C)
pressure of the hose at 70°F (20°C) with no visible leakage.
Detection limits of 1 ng/dm3 for each separate category can
■ Test certification included with order.
be reached.
■ Customer-specified testing is available; contact your
authorized Swagelok representative. Airborne Particle Count (Option APC)
Airborne particles are measured in a gas stream through the
Nitrogen Pressure Testing (Option N3) product. Particles are measured with a light scattering laser.
■ Nitrogen gas bubble leak test at 200 psig (13.7 bar) with no Particle sizes possible to be measured range from 0,1μm to
visible leakage. 5μm. Sampling volume and limits of particles allowed are
derived from ISO 14644-1 cleanroom standard. This standard
■ Test certification included with order.
is written to measure particles in cleanroom air. In this
■ Customer-specified testing is available; contact your situation the standard is applied on product measurements.
authorized Swagelok representative
APC conform ISO 14644-1 Class 3 @ 28,3 Nl/min
 104 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Options
Tags
Lanyard Tag (Option T) Perma Tag (Option P_ )
■ Stainless steel tag with customer- ■ Polyester tag encapsulated in
specified text. See Hose Tag Text platinum-cured silicone with customer-
table for details. specified text. See Hose Tag Text
■ Attached to the hose with a table for details.
stainless steel lanyard and ■ Attached to the hose with an adhesive.
aluminum clamp. ■ Designed for sterilization-in-place
■ Specify a quantity of 1 or 2. (SIP), clean-in-place (CIP), and
autoclave applications.
Lanyard Tag with CRN (Option CRN) ■ Standard colors are black, blue, brown, gray, green,
■ Stainless steel tag with customer-provided, national or orange, pink, purple, red, white, and yellow.
provincial Canadian Registration Number (CRN number).
FLEXIBLE

See Availability, on page 106 for hose series with CRN Key Color Designator
TUBING
HOSE /

option. Gray PA
■ Attached to the hose with a stainless steel lanyard and Blue PB
aluminum clamp. Brown PC
Green PG
Clamp Tag (Option T5)
Black PK
■ Stainless steel tag with customer-
Pink PN
specified text.
Orange PO
■ See Hose Tag Text table for details.
Limited to 2 lines of text. Purple PP
Red PR
■ Attached to the hose with two metal
bands. White PW
Yellow PY
Mat Tag (Option M_ ) Add 2 to the end of the
■ Polyester tag with customer-specified Perma Tag designator for
two tags.
text. See Hose Tag Text table for Example: PA2
details.
■ Operating temperature range: Hose Tag Text
–40 to 302°F (–40 to 150°C) Specify up to 5 lines of text with 25 characters per line
■ Attached to the hose with an adhesive. including spaces and commas.
■ Standard colors are black, blue, Exception: Clamp tag is limited to 2 lines of text.
brown, gray, green, orange, pink,
Line
purple, red, white, and yellow.
Number For Example
1. Ordering number
Key Color Designator 2. Process line
Gray MA 3. Location
Blue MB 4. Supplier phone number
Brown MC 5. Date of manufacture
Green MG
Black MK
Pink MN
Orange MO
Purple MP
Red MR
White MW
Yellow MY
Add 2 to the end of the Mat
Tag designator for two tags.
Example: MA2
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 105

Options
Approvals
Alternative Fuels-Type Approval (Option 093)
Select FJ series hose assemblies, T series hose assemblies, 8R Series Hose Assemblies:
and 8R series hose assemblies are available tested, tagged, ■ Operating temperature –40 to 185°F (–40 to 85°C)
and approved to ECE R110. See the table for the nominal
■ Maximum working pressure 3770 psig (260 bar); pressure
sizes and end connections available.
classification 0.
FJ Series Hose Assemblies:
■ Operating temperature –260 to 221°F (–162 to 105°C)
■ Maximum working pressure 750 psig (51.7 bar); pressure
classification 5.
T Series Carbon Black-Filled PTFE Hose Assemblies:
■ Operating temperature –40 to 248°F (–40 to 120°C)

FLEXIBLE
■ Maximum working pressure 435 psig (30 bar); pressure

TUBING

HOSE /
classification 1.

Processing

Cleaning to CGA 4.1 (Option G):

■ Hose wetted surfaces are cleaned to CGA 4.1 for use in
non-oxygen enriched applications.
 106 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Options
Availability
Availability of options by hose series is shown below, but may be limited by hose size.
Applications, hose operating parameters, and hose length must be considered when selecting options.
Hose Series
Options FX FM FJ FL AH T B X S C J N W F U NG 7R 8R 7N 8N 7P PB
Y Insulation ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Fire jacket ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Thermosleeve ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Armor guard ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Covers

Spiral guard ✓ ❍ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Spring guard—
❍ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Hose length
Spring guard—
FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Std ❍ ❍ ❍ ❍
5 in. long
316L SS braid ✓ Std ✓ Std ❍
Helium leak
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
testing
Testing

Hydrostatic
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
testing
Nitrogen
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
pressure testing
Lanyard tag ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Two lanyard
✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
tags
Lanyard tag,
Tags

✓ ✓ ✓ ❍ ❍ ❍ ✓ ❍ ❍ ✓ ✓ ❍ ❍ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
CRN
Clamp tag ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Mat tag ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
Perma tag ❍ ✓ ✓ ✓
Processing Approval

Alternative
fuels-type ECE ❍ ❍ ❍
R110

Cleaning to
✓ ✓ ❍ ✓
CGA 4.1
Hose Core

Metal

Fluoropolymer

Nylon

Polyethylene

✓ Available in all sizes. ❍ Select availability Rubber

 Hose and Flexible Tubing 107

Options
Considerations for Hose Insulation
Free Air Convection Humidity and Dew Point
Hoses that transfer cold or hot fluids can impact the Dew point can be approximated using the formula:
temperature of other nearby fluid systems. When cold hoses Td = T – [(100 - RH)/5]
are routed too close to each other, the surface temperature of
where Td is the dew point temperature (in degrees Celsius), T
the hoses can fall below the dew point, causing condensation
is the ambient air temperature (in degrees Celsius), and RH is
to form. When hot hoses are routed too close to each other,
the relative humidity (in percent).
hot spots can develop that are above allowable temperature
parameters. When selecting the number of layers of insulation to prevent
Tm
condensation in an application, use the highest expected
humidity that the hose will experience.

Tambient Energy Savings

FLEXIBLE
TUBING

HOSE /
Ta Uninsulated hoses are a constant source of wasted energy.
Tambient Insulation can typically reduce energy losses by up to 90%
and help ensure proper and consistent temperature of plant
equipment. Other reasons to insulate these hoses include:
Insulation d Insulation ■ To facilitate proper temperature control to a process, such
as steam or coolant lines.
The smaller the distance (d) between the hoses, the closer ■ To protect the environment and reduce the amount of
the air temperature (Tambient) between the hoses will
energy used for heating purposes, resulting in lower
be to the media temperature (Tm) in the hose. A general
emissions.
recommendation is to keep hoses at least 12 in. (31 cm)
apart. If hoses are spaced closer than this, consider using ■ To control surface temperatures for personnel protection
additional layers of insulation. and safety.

Air Flow Safe-to-Touch Recommendations

ASTM C1055 (Standard Guide for Heated System Surface
Stagnant air creates an undesireable scenario for the surface
Conditions that Produce Contact Burn Injuries) recommends
temperature of the hose due to the decrease in heat transfer
that surface temperatures remain at or below 60°C (140°F), as
coefficient. As air flow increases, surface temperatures will
the average person can touch a 60°C (140°F) surface for up
trend more towards the ambient environment temperature.
to five seconds without sustaining irreversible burn damage.
Choosing the proper thickness of insulation can lower the
Approximated
Approximated Air-Heat
Air-Heat TransferCoefficient
Transfer Coefficient external temperature to reduce the chance of a burn injury.
40
2 (W/m K)
Heat transfer coefficient 2

35 Bending an Insulated Hose

30
(W/m K)

Hose technical data, including minimum bend radius, does

Heat transfer coefficient

25
20 not change when insulating a hose. However, bending the
15 hose may affect the insulation properties. To minimize these
10 effects, employ bends with a larger bend radius. If this is not
5 possible, consider using additional layers of insulation.
0
0 5 10 15 20 25

Velocity(m/s)
Velocity (m/s)
Insulation
One worst-case example is when a hose is routed through a stretches
and thins on
confined area, such as a subfloor. In the case of cold media
outside of
flowing through the hose, this could cause condensation to
bend
form on the outside of the hose which may drip onto sensitive
electronics.

Insulation
compresses
on inside of
bend
 108 Hose, Quick-Connects, and Sample Cylinders

Options
Y Insulation Option
Features
■ Rated for continuous hose surface temperature use from ■ Flexible polyolefin heat shrink cover enables the product
-53°C (-65°F) up to 125°C (257°F). to be flexible, vapor permeation resistant, and abrasion
■ Low thermal conductivity aerogel insulation material resistant
minimizes the bulk needed to achieve desired surface ■ Silicone boots at hose ends protect the insulation
temperatures.

Cover Layers of Insulation

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
HOSE /

Silicone Boot

Suffix Code Structure Hose Surface versus Media Temperature on

1/2 in. X Series hose
1 2 3 Media
Media Temperature (ºF)
Temperature (°F)
-Y B 4 100
-40 -4 32 68 104 140 176 212 248
212
Example hose assembly part number: 2 Layers of Y Insulation

Hose Surface Temperature (°F)

90
(°C)

194
5 Layers of Y Insulation
SS-FJ8TA8TA8-55-YB4
Temperature (ºC)

Hose Surface Temperature (ºF)

80 Dew Point at 55% relative humidity and 23ºC (73ºF) air 176
Temperature

1/2" X Series without Insulation

1 Insulation Designator 70 158
Y = Insulation Option 60 140
2 Cover Color 50 122
Surface
Surface

Standard 40 104
B = Blue 30 86
HoseHose

R = Red 20 68
Optional 10 50
K = Black
0 32
W = White
-40 -20 0 20 40 60 80 100 120
3 Layers of Insulation Media Temperature
Media (°C)
Temperature (ºC)

ominal Radial Thickness

N
2 = 0.21 in. (5.4 mm) Test conditions for example plots:
3 = 0.30 in. (7.7 mm) ■ Environment temperature: 23°C (73°F)
4 = 0.39 in (10.0 mm)
■ Air flow: Isolated in a chamber with no air flow
5 = 0.48 in. (12.3 mm)
■ Media Pressure: 6 to 10 psi (0.41 to 0.68 bar)
Nominal Radial Thickness of Insulation ■ Media Flow Rate: 22 to 26 l/min
■ Media type: Liquid
■ Free air around hose: 6 in (15.2 cm)

Hose O.D.
Hose I.D. R8

For more information, contact your authorized

Swagelok sales and service representative.
 Hose and Flexible Tubing 109

Tools and Accessories

Assembly Tools for Nylon, Polyethylene, and Rubber Hose
Push-On Tool Cutting Tool for Hose and Soft
Portable, manually operated tool for Tubing
inserting end connections into nylon, Use to
polyethylene, and rubber hose. cut nylon,
polyethylene, or
rubber hose, as
well as vinyl or
PFA tubing to
the desired length for field assembly.
■ Cuts hose and tubing up to 1 in.
nominal size.
Ordering number: MS-HC-SC-1A

FLEXIBLE
TUBING
■ Inserts end connections into 1/4 to

HOSE /
1 in. hose.
■ Bench mounting required.
■ 10 in. (25 cm) H, 14 in. (36 cm) W,
28 in. (71 cm) D; 35 lb (15.9 kg).
Ordering number: MS-SPOT
For more information, see the
Swagelok Push-On Tool User’s Manual,
MS‑CRD‑0190.

See SAE J1273, Recommended Practices for Hydraulic Hose

Assemblies, for information on installation and use of hose. • WARNING
www.sae.org Do not mix/interchange Swagelok products or
components not governed by industrial design
standards, including Swagelok tube fitting end
connections, with those of other manufacturers.

MS-01-180, RevX, March 2021